Frequently Asked Questions

Find answers to Frequently Asked Questions for First Generation Firebirds that have been asked and answered on FGF. Special thanks needs to be given to all the FGF members who took the time to respond to other member's questions.

NOTE – This page lazy loads as you scroll to the bottom

Content last modified: September 24, 2024 at 10:59 am

c Expand All C Collapse All

Body - Chassis (15)

Q: Alignment Specs

I have had a lot of questions about the alignment specs for the 1967 – 69. Does anyone have this information in their resources and would like to share?

A: It’s right there in the 69 Factory Service Manual, page 3-18.

Caster…………+1/2 degree
Camber…………+1/4 degree
Toe-in…………1/8″ to 1/4″
SAI……………8-3/4 degrees with 1/2 degree camber (steering axis inclination)
Toe-out on turns..2 degrees, measured in left to right direction of toe-out at 20 degrees turn of inside wheel.

Caster and Camber specs were listed by the aftermarket (like alignment equipment manufacturers; Hunter etc.) to have a range, like caster was +1/2 degree, plus or minus 1/2 degree; and camber was 1/4 degree plus or minus 1/2 degree. These were prone to lesser technicians stating “good enough” when the car was wearing tires and pulling to one side. Evenly matched settings from one side to the other are best, with a slight offset to compensate for road crown in some parts of the country, where the road shape pushes the car towards the ditches.

When I used to do alignments (and I’ve done probably thousands) during the 70’s when people were putting radial tires on cars that came with bias or bias/belted tires, the industry standard was to add 2 degrees of caster to whatever the specification was. It is not usually possible to get 2-1/2 degrees of positive caster on most 67-69 F-cars unless you add offset control arm shafts, but anything over the 1/2 degree is very helpful on radial tire, especially with wider tires. In addition, keep the camber and toe-in minimal with wider tires for prolonged tire wear life.

Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

[php function=1]

Category: Body - Chassis
Did you find this FAQ helpful
Thumbs Up Icon 1
Thumbs Down Icon 0

Leave a Reply

Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

Q: Body Bushing Replacement Procedure

Does anyone have a procedure for changing the body bushings? I’ve never attempted this and I want to try. There has got to be a painless way, and I’m sure you guys have tried everything. May main questions are, how do I lift the body away from the frame without screwing something up. What needs to be disconnected (Andy mentioned disconnecting the steering coupler). Do I need any special tools.

A: A way to change the radiator support bushings without disassembling the car. You can do the other 4 bushings while you’re at it.

The first step is to disconnect the steering coupler. This will make it much easier to replace the bushing closest to the steering box. The passenger side radiator support bushing will be much easier to replace if you pull the battery tray, which I didn’t do, but will next time.

Next, remove the radiator support bushing bolts, and the bumper support bracket bolts that connect the brackets to the subframe (2 bolts each side).

Next, chock the back wheels and jack up the front of the car, using a floor jack on the cross-member. Raise the car far enough to place jackstands at the very front end of the rocker panels. I used stands on which the piece that contacts the car is cast. Its footprint roughly matches the rectangular flat area on the rocker panel.

Loosen the four remaining subframe bushing bolts, but do not remove. Slowly lower the jack just far enough for the radiator support bushings to clear the radiator support. You may have to reposition the jackstands once or twice if the jack begins to move as a result of lowering the subframe. Be sure to get all the hardware out (there are various washers and such in there).

Install the new bushings and slowly jack up the subframe. You may have to coax the lip of the new bushings through the subframe holes. I used a small flathead screwdriver. Install the bolts, but do not tighten.

With the jack still supporting the weight of the subframe, replace the remaining bushings one at a time. This is fairly easy, especially with the steering coupler disconnected. Snug all 6 bolts, lower the car, and torque all of the bolts. This is the step where Hugo’s lift would come in handy, as you want to torque everything with the car on the ground.

That’s all there was to it. If your bushings are the originals, you should be extremely happy with the handling improvement. I sure was. Let us know how it goes. If anyone sees a step I forgot, please speak up.

A: I knew as soon as I clicked send I’d think of something. Rather than chocking the back wheels, you should raise the back end. This will result in the car being level once you get the front ends of the rocker panels up on jackstands. I used ramps on the back, but you could use a second pair of jackstands.

A: Well, I now know that it is possible to replace the radiator support bushings in an assembled Firebird. I ended up using Roy Lumsden’s idea of supporting the body at the front ends of the rocker panels and lowering the subframe on a floor jack. It worked like a champ! Thanks, Roy, for the idea.

While I was at it I replaced the body/subframe bushings as well. I had trouble getting enough clearance to remove the upper half of the bushing that mounts below the driver’s floor pan. I finally realized that I was fighting the steering column/steering box connection. When I was done I had to loosen and then tighten the bolts holding the steering column plate to the firewall in order to fix binding in the column (the new, thicker, bushing lowered the box relative to the body).

With all new bushings it is like a completely different car. I’d already rebuilt the whole front and rear suspensions, and replaced the shocks, which made for a much better ride, but the most dramatic improvements in handling were made by replacing these bushings and recently replacing the broken motor mounts. All the squeaks and rattles are gone and handling is great. Now I may not bother going to 15 inch rims. I just wish I could have done all the refurbishing together to get the full effect all at once!

Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

[php function=1]

Category: Body - Chassis
Did you find this FAQ helpful
Thumbs Up Icon 0
Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • I´m going to replace the body bushings the first time. My question: If the bolts under the driver cabin are rusted and couldn´t be dismounted, is it possible to reach them from inside the driver cabin under the seats ?
    Thank you.

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Mount Alignment

    Can you elaborate on what your steps were to replace the the body mounts? Did it affect the alignment?

    A: the front bushing mounting platform (the thing the bushing sits on) there is a hole approximately 5/8 in is diameter. This hole lines up with an identical hole on the body. What they are there for is for body alignment when re-installing the subframe. All you do is take a piece of pipe ( I use a tire iron) and slide it through both holes (the frame and body holes) and make sure that they are vertically aligned.

    If your replacing the bushings with out removing the subframe, the above procedure won’t be necessary. By only replacing one side at a time AND with front fenders bolted in place, the frame should remain in the correct position.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Mount Replacement

    How do I replace my body mounts

    A: It’s not that difficult to replace of you have a hydraulic jack and a little patience and do one side at a time.

    First break loose all four body bushing bolts. You’ll probably need a breaker bar and a pipe extension. The sub-frame bolts are located at the base of the firewall and under the front seat pedestal. If they look rusty, you can soak them in a good rust penetrate for a couple of days before you try to break them loose. You’ll need to remove the seats and fold back the carpet to soak the two at the back of the subframe. The firewall bolts/nuts are accessible from the engine compartment or from under the car.

    After you’ve broken all four loose, put a piece of 2×6 on top of the jack to spread the load and lift the body at the front of the rocker panel. As you lift, you’ll see the frame separate from the body. You’ll need to lift the body to gain about 3/4 inch separation to R&R the bushings. You may have to use a pry bar to assist in the separation. That’s about it.

    A: I changed mine, but had the front sheet metal apart at the time. I sprayed each bushing, bolts, and nuts with penatrating oil the day before. I also had the carpet (and interior) out of the car so I could get at the captive nuts under the seats for the rearmost bushings. The front 2 are actually in the engine compartment near the inner wheelwell. The bolts broke loose pretty easily with a breaker bar. I then cleaned and painted the entire subframe.

    One difficulty, and it wasn’t that bad, was aligning the subframe up with the holes in the floor when putting it back together. It took nearly an hour to do this, since the subframe arms needed to be squeezed together slightly to match the holes.

    If you don’t want to remove the sheetmetal, I’d loosen, but not remove the 4 bolts. Then working on one side, remove one bolt completely, leaving the other loose, but with the nut in place.

    Using jackstands to support the body (place a wide piece of wood at least 2″ thick to spread the contact area between the jackstand head and the foor of the car),pull the bushing out. At this point, I’d try to apply POR15 or some other rust inhibitor to the subframe area and body where the bushing sits. These areas are prone to rust, and this is the time to stop or prevent it. Some cars may in fact need repair if the rust is bad enough. The new bushings, like the old ones, are 2 pieces, with one sandwiched between the body and subframe. The other half fits under the bolt head, on the underside of the subframe.

    With the new bushing and bolts in place, but not tightened down, do the other bushing on the same side. Now do the same with the other side. Once that’s done, you can tighten all four bolts down. The key here is not to completely remove both bolts on the same side, or to tighten any of them until all 4 are done.

    With the weight of the engine, and front clip sitting on the subframe, this may add some degree of difficulty to the job. But I’d try it myself. I had my car apart because it was being prepped for body work and paint. And it needed a fair amount of the front clip replaced anyway. Well, ok, the whole front clip got replaced. Plus I have the knowledge that I took care of all the details in that area.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Should I attempt body mount replacement

    My 1968 f-bird convertible has deteriorated rubber body mounts. How hard of a job will it be to replace these? Are the bolts usually rusted to a point where they break off when you try to unscrew them? If any one has experience doing this please offer some advice if I am getting into a MAJOR headache.

    A: I would definitely take a look to see if the perches that the mounts sit on are ruted away, or have sustained any cracks away from the frame itself. I did a frame off restoration on my 1968 bird and found every perch both rusted to the thickness of paper, and also multiple cracks rendering it unsafe unless rewelded and reinforced.

    A: I did this on a 65 GTO convertible and had no problems, but this was on a rust free California car. If your car has extensive rust it may be harder. If you can get to it, soak the threads with WD-40 for a couple of days. When trying to break the bolts loose try rocking the wrench back and forth instead of applying brute force only to the “off” direction. Also try wacking the head of the bolt a few times with a hammer — this sometimes helps loosen things up. Just do it. You sure as hell won’t get it done if you don’t try. Good Luck!

    A: mentioned by others, be sure to check the frame to look for rust problems before you stick in a bunch of new bushings. The jagged edges of a rusty mount will eat up a new bushing. If you want to repair the area instead of replacing the sub-frame, look for some large washers to “sandwich” the frame and tack weld them into place. To keep the body alignment close do only one side at a time. as far a rusty body bolts, I’ve seen them come out with only half the bolt remaining. Instead of WD-40 (which is a lubricating/penetrant) I would use something like “Liquid Wrench” (a penetrent) because its designed to cut through rust. Another trick if you have access to a torch is to remove the front seats and carpet and heat the captured nuts (located in the seat pedestal area) before you try to remove the bolt. Good luck.

    A: I just wanted to thank any & all that posted tips on body bushing replacement. I just finished doing mine in polyurethane. It was the best small dollar investment I’ve put into the car so far. No more steel against steel squeaks when ya touch a fender. The doors appeared to have bad hinges on it before the job. Now they line up and close like new. My front clip even looks more in line. I even got the bumper aligned better. Anyway…………THANKS again!!!

    P.S. On the frame connectors….. (1) the bolt on ones can be welded in (but you’ll never be able to change 4 of the 6 cage nuts that retain the leaf springs) (2) Manufacturer recommends that you crossdrill where the subframe meets the connector and bolt each with 4 1/2″ bolts (3) they won’t fit a convertible without a notch in either the connectors or in the offending brace under the car. I choose to notch the connectors and weld plate back in the hole.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Bushing Materials — Pros. and Cons.

    I have heard a lot of debate for what type of body bushings to use. Can anyone give me a definative answer?

    A: Bushing Materials– Pros and Cons.

    NVH – Stands for Noise, Vibration, and Harmonics. Typicall things an engineer wishes to limit in a car design. Something a racer isn’t too worried about.

    Rubber: Measured in durometer units, they can vary in hardness. Most stock bushings are fairly soft and are a compromise to offer reasonable handling but keep the ride relatively smooth. Remember that the factory had to sell these cars to both speed enthusiats as well as buyers who would be troubled by a harsh ride or NVH.The Ford Mustang especially was criticized for it’s harsh ride, and Pontiac sought to improve on that. The WS6 cars of later years (including the present) use a harder durometer rubber bushing to limit deflection.

    The downside of rubber is that it decays and wears out. This is accelerated when the car is pushed very hard as in road racing or heavy drag racing.

    Polyurethane: A relatively inexpensive upgrade that limits deflection. Users typically see an increase in NVH, but is acceptable to those more interested in performance driving. This is a synthetic material recently introduced into automobiles. Some of the big names in aftermarket suspension designers use this such as Saleen (Mustangs), SLP, Kenny Brown, Hochkiss, etc. Since deflection is the enemy of precise handling, limiting it is a good thing.

    The downside of polyurethane is that it is very prone to squeaking, and sometimes bind. The squeaking can be eliminated or at least limited by modifying the bushing shells to accept a grease fitting and lubing them regularly. Another bad aspect of polyurethane is cold flow. It seems that after a period of time, especially under hard use, the bushing material may deform, slowly flowing like a liquid, ultimately needing replacement. Increased harsness can be expected. I put them in a 1970 El Camino, and it is noticable. Because it is much heavier than my Firebird, the weight of the car offsets the stiffer ride. I’ve also got them in the front of my 1986 Mustang GT ragtop. I find the ride quite acceptable. But that car also has a 6 point roll cage, subframe connectors, and Koni shocks/struts. On rough roads with potholes, it isn’t very fun. But that isn’t very often either. Maybe if I lived in New Jersey…

    Steel/nylon or aluminum/nylon (Duralum): Absolutely a sure fire way to get rid of deflection. Companies such as Global West, VSE, and others tout this as the best choice for slot car like handling. Some of my road racing pals use these as well as heim joints in the suspension. These are usually dedicated race cars, but not always.

    The downside is increased NVH. I know that Glen says it was either not increased, or at least tolerable. But I suggest to anyone considering these to try and get a ride in a car already equipped. You may like what it does for your car, but it will come at a price measured in increased NVH. Some can live with it and be very happy with the results. Others cannot.

    What did I choose formy Firebird? Stock replacement rubber (TRW). My car is a convertible that had a lot of squeaks and rattles that I hoped to eliminate when I rebuilt it. I decided that I could live with the deflection in trade for a nicer ride. I’ve got other cars I can turn to when it comes to burning up the twisties.

    You have to decide what you want to get out of your car, and what you are willing to trade off. Once you know that, the choices may become more clear.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Chassis Paint

    Is the firewall the same color as the body? If not … does anyone have the paint codes for the (various?) colors (black?) needed for the subframe, firewall, inner guards, radiator support and so on? I have decoded the cowl tag and the color is D/D ie Alpine Blue upper / lower

    A: Fire wall is semi gloss black. Paint from AMES or Year Ones is excellent.

    A: I pulled this out of a 30th anniversary Camaro magazine but pretty sure it also applies to Firebird:

    Egg shell black lacquer for: Firewall, Inner radiator support, and other engine compartment sheet metal:

    PPG (Pittsburg Paints)
    2 quarts “mixing black” #386
    1 guart “universal flattening agent”
    One quart “mixing clear” #310
    Use PPG #DDL-16 or DuPont #3608S

    or

    DuPont
    2 quarts “mixing black” #406
    1 guart “universal flattening agent” 850
    One quart “mixing clear” #465
    DuPont #3608S

    For the under carrage, Frame and suspention use enamel (easier to clean up for show):

    PPG Delstar or Dupont Centari
    3 quarts mixing black (sometimes called “strong black”)
    1 quart flattening agent
    Use PPG DTR601 quick dry reducer

    The above is for the “purists” who like the correct shade of black. I’ve had good luck with three parts cheap chassis black and one part universal flattening agent. Comes out semi flat and looks great on the firewall, and chassis.

    A: You can contact the paint manufacturers on line, give them the color and year, and they will give you the codes or equivalent in base/clear. Or you can contact via 800 numbers. They are very helpful.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Radiator Bushings

    How do the radiator bushings fit? It’s a standard two piece rubber bushing, one half of the bushing has a metal sleeve, the other half is just rubber. Does the metal sleeve half fit in between the frame and support? Does this bushing use a large metal ‘washer’ like the body mount bushings do?

    A: You’ve got the right idea. The bushing w/the metal sleeve fits between the frame and radiator support, with the sleeve protruding upward. The other rubber piece sits on top of the support, over the sleeve. This half of the bushing has a large hole on one side, and a smaller hole on the other. Place it with the large hole fac- ing downward. Two large washers are used, one on top, and another on the underside of the frame. In addition, you should have a med- ium sized washer, a lock washer, and nut. Push the bolt in from above with one of the large washers. Use the remaining washers on the bottom.

    Some repro bushings are a little large for the radiator support hole (at least it was on mine), so some triming and filing may be required. In addition, the bolt was short. The GM bushings are correctly sized, and with the correct length bolts.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Subframe Alignment

    I removed my front subframe assembly to repair the bodymounts as the holes had rusted out to more than double their original size. I patched them with body mount repair plates from Performance Years. All looked good before welding, however I must have screwed up after I took my measurements because the front mount holes are now about 2/10″ length wise off each other. Didn’t notice that it had move before I welded and now I figure it out after the frame has been primed and painted……Can I get away with this small inconsistency?

    A: Use two 3/4 in diameter rods to line the body with subframe before modifying any mounts. There is an alignment hole on the lower cowl section that this rod will fit into and should be perpendicular to frame if aligned right.This can be slid up and into the cowl from underneath the car.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Subframe Difference from 1967 to 1968

    I know that the 1967 and 1968 subframes are different. Can someone tell me something I can measure to tell which year I have. My wife’s bird had a 1968 nose on it when we got it and I wonder if the subframe was changed as well.

    A: You don’t need to measure anything. The easiest way to tell is the steering linkage. The 1967 Firebird was the first and last year to position the linkage behind the front wheels instead of in front.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Subframe Differences Between Years

    Guys do any of you know if the subframe up front is the same on a 1968 as a 69???

    A: There are some subtle differences in 67-9 sub frames. Functionally they will interchange. All three have differences in the steering linkages not just 69.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Undercarriage Painting

    What is the absolute most rugged and above all, correct paint for the underside of my 1968 bird??? I’m talking frame, floor boards, front wheel wells and firewall. In the recent issues of HPP, Jim’s 1967 was featured with talk about using PPG products and the various gloss levels. That’s great.. But which PPG products??? Anyone know? I want mine to be correct and I will use a spray gun rather than a spray bomb. Your helpful hints appreciated as always.

    A: Here is what I got from a (gulp) Camaro restoration article. I can’t imagine the Firebirds being different:

    Firewall, inner radiator support, and othr engine compartment sheet metal:

    PPG paints
    – two qts “mixing black” #386
    – one qrt “universal flattening agent”
    – one qrt “mixing clear” #310
    – use PPG #DDL-16 quick dry thinner or DuPont #3608S.

    Undercarrage, frame and suspension:
    Egg shell black enamel;
    – three qrts mixing black
    – One qrt flattening agent
    – use PPG DTR601 quick dry reducer

    Enamel is used for these pieces because it’s more durable than lacquer and will quickly wipe clean for “showing of” purposes.

    A: In this day and age Im surprised that anyone would use laquer or enamel for a place like the underside of the body. There are many good urethanes that are far superior to enamels or laquers, for chip resistance,and general wear and tear. Most of these urethanes have flattening agents to get the proper dullness or gloss. You do need to play with mixing to get the proper amount of flattner vs. gloss. Anyone tried the POR-15 semi-gloss? Curious as to the correctness of the gloss. Also dont forget to do this before you paint body so you can get overspray on the rockers and into the cowl area as the factory did. Carefully mask the frame and leaf springs, and all cables lines etc. Just remember how this was all done at the factory.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Undercoating Removal

    I’ve got the Black tar like stuff on the bottom of my 68, I’m trying to get it off so I can prime the under side. It’s sticky and a pain to removal. Anyone have any tips?

    A: Sounds like the undercoating I had on my convertible. The way I removed the junk was to heat it with a propane torch just until it becomes soft. I would then scrape it off using a cheap scraper. I rounded the corners of the scraper so I wouldn’t gouge the metal. When I heated the undercoating, it would peel off in strips. Once I had removed the most of it, I used a Scotchbright scrubbing pad, mineral sprits, and a rag. I feel for you. It’s a nasty job. Be sure to wear gloves and goggles.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Underside Painted or Coated

    Here’s one for you old guys. When you bought a car back in 67-70 was the under side painted/coated? Were all these cars rolling off the line with shiny silver bottoms? I seem to remember my Dad talk about the dealer undercoating the car as an extra. And it was that black tar like stuff; cause that seems to be whats on the under side of my convertible.

    A: As far as the underbelly of these “vintage” cars, they were painted. Undercoating was a dealer installed option. The owner of the car I just finished restoring opted to do without it.

    Because of the superior coatings and galvanizing, the new cars actually do better without it.

    A: My 1968 Sprint Bird came from dealer with an undercoating and a paint treatment called “Ming Paint Treatment”. ( and we think of dealer add ons as a new thing) The undercoating was /is a yellowish waxy paraffin substance that looks like beeswax. It was easily removed with lots of rags and mineral spirits.(better than scraping). All areas other than overspray of body color would be semi-gloss black. As far as I know the factory didnt offer rust prevention/undercoating until the 80s. A friend bought a T/A new in 78 and tried his darnedst to order car with it. He ended up going to Rusty Jones and having it done.

    A: I will clarify this myself before someone reads it wrong.. The undercoating at each wheel well that is neatly masked off when sprayed on is factory. This was used more as a sound deadner that a rust proofing/ undercoating. Ive heard some people say they scraped it off, but if its not rusted around it ,so as to get underneath then I would leave it alone. It is hard to duplicate the texture of this sound deadner and this stuff really works good. As far as the rest of the underside of car factory didnt offer it. An option on the GTOs was to delete sound deadner and body dum dum. It saved alittle under 100#s and was mainly for drag racers..

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Wheel Well Plugs

    I need the part # for the wheel well plugs. I noticed one of mine was missing during my undercoater removal. The under coating was so thick, I didn’t know there were plugs there till I hit them w/ the screw driver. Maybe that missing plug allowed all the garbage out, because my rockers are in great shape.

    A: The part number for the wheel well plugs is GM#0480-5844. The only difference between the original plug and the new plug is the original had the part number molded into the back side (that’s how I found these), otherwise, they are identical.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Chassis
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Doors and Hardware (15)

    Q: Do other Remote Mirrors Fit for 1968

    One question. I have the opportunity to but a new 1968 remote GTO mirror for about $100 US. Does anyone know if it fits the firebirds of that year and if so is it a reasonable price?

    A: ….The 1968 Firebird and GTO used slightly different SideView Remote Mirrors. The difference is in the Mounting Base. However, It should bolt on physically. I should have some pictures ready tonight or tomorrow that will show the difference between the two mirrors. $100 is a very good price for an NOS SideView Remote Mirror. Here are some Casting Numbers that should help you. They are located on the bottom of the mounting base….

    1968 Firebird 9792566
    1968 GTO 9787847
    1968 FullSize 9787846

    A:…The 1968 Firebird O/S Remote Control Mirror WAS different from the “A” and “B” bodies of that year. The difference is in the Base (or mounting pedestal).

    Mirror Mounting Base Casting Numbers:
    – 1968 Firebird: 9792566
    – 1968 Tempest: 9787847
    *These are visible on the bottom of the Base

    In a side-view of the assembly, the dimension between the bottom of the Mirror Housing and the top edge of the Mounting Base is different between all models. Also, the distance from the back of the Mirror Housing to the inside curve of the Base is different. Besides this, the cable length varies from model to model.

    Remote O/S Mirror Assembly Part Numbers:

    • 1968 Firebird (round) 9792565
    • 1968 Firebird (rect.) 3934583
    • 1967 Firebird 3899857
    • 1968 Tempest 9792564
    • 1968 Full-Size 9792562 (also same ’65-’67 All exc. Firebird)
    • 1968 Grand Prix 9793985

    *These are ‘accessory numbers’; only good if NOS or still in original box.

    So, be careful when you’re considering purchasing a mirror for your 1968 Firebird’ many parts dealers will try and tell you that ‘they’re all the same’ but it’s not so. Will other mirrors work and fit ? Sure; all depends on how picky you are. Things to consider are the Vent Window, and the Cable lengths as well as the Control Knob/Trim.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Edge Guards

    I ordered a set of 1967-1968 Door Edge Guards (Repro). They advertise that these are exact replicas offered at a less expensive price than original replacements. They do not look correct so how do I know if they are correct.

    A: …I’ve noticed many places selling ‘correct’ or ‘original’ Door Edge Guards for the 1967, 1968, and 1969 Firebird however, most all are the press-on style (replacement, also used on Camaro). The original GM style for the Firebird was a screw-on type. I have a set of NOS ones and they fit perfectly.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Hinge Interchangeability

    Just looking for some information on door hinges. I have a 1969 coupe which has hinges that are in pretty bad shape on the drivers door. Such as not giving the door enough support to open or close properly. I have heard of some hinges being rebuilt some way or another. Also curious about interchangeable hinges such as from a camaro. Any information would be appreciated.

    A: All hinges from 1967, 1968, and 1969 are NOT interchangeable. The only hinges that will work are 1969 Camaro and Firebird. National Parts Depot has rebuild kits for upper and lower hinges and a replacement detent roller. Their number is 1-800-874-7595.

    Before purchasing, be aware that if the hinges are worn to the point where you’ve “oval-ed” the holes, it’s best to buy new or original used.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Hinges

    Are the door hinges interchangeable between the years?

    A: 1967 hinges are a 3 bolt design, the 1968 and later being a 4 bolt design. No chance of interchange.

    Some hinges use a larger bushing than others, though I’ve not seen any documentation that indicates that it is related to a specific year or model. There are some kits that provide both sized bushings so that the retailer need only stock one part number that covers just about all GM cars.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Interchangability between Years

    Does anyone know if you can put 1968 firebird doors on a 1967 firebird and make them work?also what about partial rear 1/4s vs full gm 1/4s(camaro)? I haven’t heard very good things about partial 1/4s-alignment, bird louvers behind doors.

    A: 1967, 1968, and 1969 doors do not interchange. 1967 hinges are a 3 bolt type, and the 1968/1969 are a 4 bolt type. 1968 and 1969 don’t interchange because of the obvious difference in shape/character lines.

    The aftermarket rear quarters will work with a fair amount of body work. I understand that convertibles represent more of a challange to get them to work. In somecases, rust free used quarters from the Southwest are a good alternative.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Interchangeability

    Are the doors/door skins from camaro are interchangeable with firebird???

    A: Door skins and doors are interchangeable between like years of Firebirds and Camaros. The only difference you may run into is “bird” etched glass. Also note that hinges are different.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Interchangeability

    Need help on 1967 door question, Is the door the same for convert. and coupes? I looked at classic’s catalog and the have complete inner and outers for sale at some later date and no convert. listed for door. Does the vent window unbolt for shipment?/p>

    A: The doors were different each year, but the same as the same year of Camaro. Your 1968 will need doors from another 1968, Camaro or Firebird.

    A: That depends…….. if you have an early or late 1968 Firebird, they changed the design of mirror so door was also changed. Camaro stayed the same thru the year.

    A: …Doors were common for 1967-1969 Coupes and Convertibles however, each year was different (different part numbers) due to Vent Window only in 1967, different Mirrors in 1968, new panels in 1969. Yes, the Vent Window Assy unbolts from the door and the glass assy is separate from the Weather Seal Assy.

    A: I’d only add that 1967 doors used a 3 bolt hinge and the 1968 and 1969 cars used 4 bolt hinges. This makes the 1967 and 1968 further incompatible.

    The door shells offered by Classic industries are just that, shells. They won’t come with the vent window frame work. You would be expected to transfer that, as well as all of the other internal parts in your door to the new shell. This isn’t very complicated.

    See the Jan. 2000 issue of Chevy High Performance, “Just Wing It”, for a description of removing this part (as well as weather stripping install), as well as your “1967 Fisher Body Guide”.

    A: 1967, 1968, and 1969 doors do not interchange. 1967 hinges are a 3 bolt type, and the 1968/1969 are a 4 bolt type. 1968 and 1969 don’t interchange because of the obvious difference in shape/character lines.

    The aftermarket rear quarters will work with a fair amount of body work. I understand that convertibles represent more of a challange to get them to work. In somecases, rust free used quarters from the Southwest are a good alternative.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 1
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Lock Assy

    Is there a difference for the door latch assy betweent the years and no difference between standard and custom interior?

    A: The Door Latch Assy was different for all (3) years on the 1st Generation Firebird. This was actually referred to as the “Door Lock Assy”. You are correct; there was no difference between the Lock Assy for Custom or Std. Trim. There was however, a difference between the inside Handle Remote Control (Latch Release Mechanism) as well as the Link Rod for this for the Cust. & Std. Trim Option.

    From what you describe, it sounds as if you may have a defective Lock (Latch) Assy or, they are from another type of vehicle. Be sure you have the correct Lock Assy and O/S Handle & Button Assy for your specific car.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Mirrors for 1968

    Was there an optional passenger side side view mirror available and how do I find the correct one for my car. Were there two different kinds used in 68: 1967 mirrors on some of the firebirds in 1968 and some 1968 mirrors on others. How do I find out which ones I need? To make matters worse I need the remote type for the drivers side.

    A: …In 1968, all cars came standard with a LH (drivers) Side-View Mirror. Remote Control Side View Mirror was optional.

    3909197 1967 F O/S Mirror (LH) exc. rem.
    9787901 1968 F, 1967-1968 T, P O/S Mirror (LH) exc. rem. (round) 1st type
    3914753 1968 F O/S Mirror (LH) exc. rem. (square) 2nd type
    3899857 1967 F O/S Mirror (LH) remote ctrl.
    9792565 1968 F O/S Mirror (LH) remote ctrl. (round)
    3934583 1968 F O/S Mirror (LH) remote ctrl. (square)

    *The rectangular (square) 2nd Type Std. Mirror came into Production after Jan.1968 (This may have been Gov’t Reg. related)
    *There were (2) Different LH Door Outer Panels as a result of this styling change due to stamping differences. Mounting Bracket is also different.
    *There was an Accessory Pkg. for LH Remote Ctrl. Mirror in ’67/’68… 984758 (ALL) 984752 (Pont.) 984974 (Temp.)
    *I’m sure many Dealers sold a matching RH (pass.) Mirror however, there was no separate part number for this; they simply used a LH Mirror (exc. remote)

    …Repro’s are available. Std. Mirror is same for all F,T,P. Remote Mirror is NOT the same as Tempest or Full-Size as many used parts dealers try to say.

    …Actually, they used a ROUND and RECTANGULAR Style (*see above*) The 1967 Std. (or Rem.) mirror was not used for 1968 Firebird production. I’ve seen some very early ’68’s and they have 1968 style mirrors.

    …Based on your Build Date. I’d say if it’s after Jan. 1968, go with the rectangular style This is where a Survey of owner’s would help confirm this ‘running’ change’

    …I’m hearing that a repro is underway for other year/application remote mirrors besides the ‘Chevy’ style that is out there. There are NOS one’s floating around; expect to pay Hemmings Prices ($200-$350). Remember, the Mirror Housing itself is the same for 1968 Firebird, Tempest, Full-Size; however, the pedestal (base) is not.

    A: …From preliminary research within the Registry Files, I’ve found that the 2nd Type (Rectangular) S.V. Mirror was being installed as early as the 2nd Week in Dec. ’67. Infact, two particular Firebirds in the Registry are very close in Build Sequence; both built the 2nd week in Dec. and one having the Round Mirror, the other with the Rectangular Mirror. Both are documented, original unrestored cars.

    A: The 1967 and 1968 Firebird Remote Mirrors are different. The ‘left-over’ rule did not apply. I’ve never seen a documented 1968 Firebird with a 1967 Mirror. 1967 had a larger, longer Base while 1968 was rather stubby. The 1968 Firebird Mirror is not the same as the 1968 Camaro. Also, keep in mind that all other Pontiac Remote Mirrors in 1968 appear to be the same but upon closer inspection, the base is definitely different (different casting numbers too). The Round Mirror Housing itself is the same. Cable Length varied depending on Model.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Mirror from other Series for 1968

    I have a remote mirror from a 1968 Bonnie. Will it fit and look original on my 1968 Firebird?

    A: The Base for a Firebird Mirror is unique. Slightly different than full size and the Tempest style. Physically, I believe it would work though, I’ve never tried it.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Mirror Placement for 1968

    I need to install a driver’s side mirror. Does anyone have a template for this procedure?

    A: Try the following templates. They are going to be very large files but will work as a good template. Make sure to use the correct template:

    1968 Early Production Mirror: Round Mirror – Remote and Standard:

    1968 Early Mirror

    1968 Late Production Mirror: Rectangular Mirror – Remote and Standard:

    1968 Late Mirror

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Mirror Types for 1968

    I realized today that the doors off the coupe, now on the convertible, use “bullet” mirrors (bullet shaped casing with rectangular mirror inside). Was this offered in 1968?

    A: There were no ‘Bullet Mirrors’ used on any 1968 Pontiac. You had a choice of Manual or Remote Adjustable Chrome Plated Mirrors. Early ’68’s used Round Style Mirrors. Sometime in December, the factory started using a Rectangular Shaped Chrome Mirror (for Manual and Remote). As for their being no Control Knob for the Mirror in Todd’s car, that’s the first clue that these are not factory mirrors. It was not uncommon for people to swap mirrors; add something with a little more style; more modern. The only 1st Gen. Firebird that used ‘Bullet Style’ Mirrors was the 1969 Firebird and those were only very late in production models (since the 1969 body style ran longer than normal, some of the ’70 style features began to show up in production.)

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Outside Mirrors for 1968

    Anybody know what was used for a side view mirror on the passenger side of a 1968 Firebird with a remote control mirror on the driver side? My mirror is rectangular with rounded corners and I have seen non-remote versions in parts catalogs.

    A: According to the Firebird Red Book by Peter Sessler, the remote mirror was only offered as an option (LH remote control OSRV mirror – 424) on the left hand side. I would assume the passenger side had a matching rectangular shape if it was equiped with the optional passenger mirror. The 1968 had both the circular and rectangular offered. My 1968 has the LH circular mirror with no passenger mirror.

    A: Unfortunately, Pontiac did not offer a RH S.V. Mirror ‘dummy’ to match the LH Remote version (round or rectangular) as they did in previous years. I have a ’64 GTO that has the Factory LH S.V. Remote Mirror (round) and I found a ‘matching’ RH mirror several years ago in a junk-yard. Basically, the same mirror, but w/o the cable, etc…. looks balanced.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Remote Mirrors Removing Cable

    Does anyone know the best way to remove the cable from the remote controlled mirror? I’m having mine replated and can’t figure out how to disconect the darn thing without destroying it.

    A: Based on my past experience with second gen mirrors, the easiest way is to take the mirror apart and pull the remote end through the mirror base and housing. Hope this helps.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Round or Rectangular O/S Remote Mirror for 1968

    My cars Billing History date is 12-14-67. Should my car have the round outside mirror, or rect? Right now it has the rect, but I’m sure it is a repro,installed when the car got painted in 1980.

    A: Idon’t believe the rectangular O/S Remote Mirror came into production until sometime in March of 1968. The Outer Door Skin is actually different for the (2) types of mirrors (due to mounting hole configuration). This would be a clue as to which mirror was originally installed.

    A: From preliminary research within the Registry Files, I’ve found that the 2nd Type (Rectangular) S.V. Mirror was being installed as early as the 2nd Week in Dec. ’67. Infact, two particular Firebirds in the Registry are very close in Build Sequence; both built the 2nd week in Dec. and one having the Round Mirror, the other with the Rectangular Mirror. Both are documented, original unrestored cars.

    A: The 1967 and 1968 Firebird Remote Mirrors are different. The ‘left-over’ rule did not apply. I’ve never seen a documented 1968 Firebird with a 1967 Mirror. 1967 had a larger, longer Base while 1968 was rather stubby. The 1968 Firebird Mirror is not the same as the 1968 Camaro. Also, keep in mind that all other Pontiac Remote Mirrors in 1968 appear to be the same but upon closer inspection, the base is definitely different (different casting numbers too). The Round Mirror Housing itself is the same. Cable Length varied depending on Model.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Emblems and Stripes (18)

    Q: 400 Bumper Emblem on a 1968

    Does anyone have a template for mounting a 400 bumper emblem on a 1968 Firebird?

    A: I found a dimension template for the 1967 – 1968 400 bumper emblem that you might be able to use on the Generation-1 Registry web site.

    Emblem Bumper

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Exterior Badging

    Did all 1st generation Firebirds that came with 400 engines have all the exterior “400” badging and 400 scoop hoods (except 1967 hoods)?

    A: The “400” option on the 1967-1969 Firebirds included exterior badging (Decklid, Hood “400” emblems), Scooped (closed) Hood and of course, the 400 engine. This option also included chrome moldings in the middle of the Grills for the 1967-1968 and a Pontiac Crest emblem on the Front Bumper for all 3 years.

    A: You forgot the 1969’s also had chrome molding in the grilles. It rimmed the “grille” (the actual opening). This did not include the 1969 Trans Ams with the blacked out grilles. Also, the 400’s for all 3 years had chrome air cleaner lids and valve covers, and dual exhausts. Floor shift was part of the standard 3 speed trans deal, unless automatic was specified but not the console.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 1

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Exterior Badging

    Did all 1st generation Firebirds that came with 400 engines have all the exterior “400” badging and 400 scoop hoods (except 1967 hoods)?

    A: The “400” option on the 1967-1969 Firebirds included exterior badging (Decklid, Hood “400” emblems), Scooped (closed) Hood and of course, the 400 engine. This option also included chrome moldings in the middle of the Grills for the 1967-1968 and a Pontiac Crest emblem on the Front Bumper for all 3 years.

    A: You forgot the 1969’s also had chrome molding in the grilles. It rimmed the “grille” (the actual opening). This did not include the 1969 Trans Ams with the blacked out grilles. Also, the 400’s for all 3 years had chrome air cleaner lids and valve covers, and dual exhausts. Floor shift was part of the standard 3 speed trans deal, unless automatic was specified but not the console.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Front Bumper Emblem for 1967-1968

    The nose emblem that was on my ‘original’ bumper was a cast piece of metal that was lightly polished and had a rubber surround gasket that was removable. I ordered emblems from both Year One and The Paddock, and one was made of rubber, the other was cast plastic. I sent them both back because I can’t believe that GM would put junk like that on their premium 400 cars.

    A: The correct, original Emblem for the 1967-1968 Firebird 400 Frt. Bumper is infact a molded hard-rubber part. There is a steel reinforcement insert inside of it which the mounting studs attach to but there is no metal visible. The metal ‘Crest’ Emblem you refer to was only used on certain Full-Size Pontiacs & Grand Prixs. The correct Emblem you need is only available as repro. Quality is supposedly ok. Early repro parts exhibited very poor shape & fit.

    A: I just installed the repro I bought from Ames and it’s not bad. The outward apearance is very good. The only part I didn’t like is that the original has some extruded rubber surrounding the studs that make it fit just right in the holes on the bumper where as the repro does not so you have to center it by eye and then tighten it down. No biggie but I don’t think it would have cost them that much more to add to the mold.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Trunk Emblem on a 1968

    Does anyone have a template for mounting a 400 trunk emblem to a 1968 firebird? I think it is right above the reverse light on the passenger side, but I would like to have factory dimensions. Any help would be appreciated.

    A: I found a dimension template that you might be able to use on the Generation-1 Registry web site.

    400 Lid Emblem

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Custom Emblem

    Today I found the grille emblem for my bird in the trunk, instead of “Firebird” it says “Custom”. I suppose this was part of the pink mist package, has anybody seen this before?

    A: This emblem could have come off several locations which might be determined by the type of fastener used for the “Custom” emblem. Possible locations include the hood emblems (used 8-9420185 Nuts for “Overhead Cam”), the front fender emblems (used 6-9420621 Nuts for “Firebird”), front grill emblems (used 2-9789188 Brackets and 2-9785896 Retainers for “Pontiac”) (least likely), the trunk emblems (used 2-9421827 Nuts for “400”), or rocker panel emblems (used 4-9420621 Nuts for “Sprint”)(most likely). I have not seen this before but it could have been a part of the special paint package (Pink Mist) your car came with that year. This would be identified on your body tag with the paint code ‘special.’

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Emblem restoration

    I was wondering if anyone had any tips on how to do emblem restoration? Is this something I can do myself? I have all of the emblems except for the passenger side “Firebird” front emblem, and the “400” trunk emblem. All of the emblems are in decent shape — except all of the black/red paint isn’t there anymore. There is a bit of silver flaking on a couple of them, but nothing I really want to worry about right now.

    Is this something I can do myself with a paintbrush? Are there specific colors I should get?

    A: Unless your doing a Concourse restoration, close is good enough. Because of the size and distance, most people couldn’t tell if its not the perfect shade. I’ve panted emblems a couple of ways:

    1- Clean well with lacquer thinner and an old tooth brush.

    2- Choose your paint. I’ve used engine enamel and applied it with a fine paint brush. I’ve also applied it with an old WD-40 straw (I couldn’t find my brush). Make sure you put enough on the emblems to “flow” up to the edges.

    2b- I’ve also used fingernail polish. It sounds strange but it comes with a brush, it’s enamel paint, and the colors are great. It’s a little thin so it may take two coats.

    Good Luck.

    A: I have done on a number of cars over the years. It works and last a long time.

    1. Remove all the old paint.

    2. Wash with paint thinner, then mild detergent

    3. Dry

    4. Take a pan tin, turn it upside down and punch holes to fit the emblems prongs

    5. Place emblems, letters etc in tim and paint. if it requires more than one color do only one at a time.

    6. Prewarm an oven to 250 degrees

    7. Place tin with emblems in the oven for about 15 minutes.

    8. Remove and let cool.

    9. After all color painting is complete brush on a clear coat and bake it for 10 minutes.

    The heat bakes and smooths the paint. I just saw a vette I restored in ’91 and the emblems looked like new. (no he had not replaced them)

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Firebird side moldings on 1968

    We recently purchased a 1968 Firebird 400 car. The car isn’t the original color otherwise it is all original right down to the wire wheel hubcaps. It has air conditioning and deluxe interior. It also has a body side molding that looks like it belongs on the car but we haven’t seen it on any other Firebirds. The trim runs from the back of the front wheel opening to the front of the back wheel opening. It’s chrome with pointed tips and a rounded black vinyl in the center. Do you know if this is an original option or has someone added it?

    A: Regarding the Vinyl bodyside moldings, there is no listing I can find that shows this as a factory/dealer option though, I wouldn’t doubt it if a dealer did install these (or an aftermarket brand). Similar to various shapes and sizes of Sideview mirrors and seatbelts.. back in the 60’s, just about anything was possible.

    A: According to the original Pontiac Sales Manual, this (Body Side Molding Vinyl Inserts) was a standard body feature on the Catalina, Executive, and Bonneville. Nothing mentioned for the Firebird in that section, optional equipment, or prices. All I could find available are an optional vinyl rally stripes which these do not sound like. My 1968 had the body side molding vinyl inserts on also before I restored it. Note that some ‘special’ equipment was installed at the dealership and I have found many old Firebird articles and ads had the side moldings on them in the pictures.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Front Bumper Emblem for 1967-1968

    The nose emblem that was on my ‘original’ bumper was a cast piece of metal that was lightly polished and had a rubber surround gasket that was removable. I ordered emblems from both Year One and The Paddock, and one was made of rubber, the other was cast plastic. I sent them both back because I can’t believe that GM would put junk like that on their premium 400 cars.

    A: The correct, original Emblem for the 1967-1968 Firebird 400 Frt. Bumper is infact a molded hard-rubber part. There is a steel reinforcement insert inside of it which the mounting studs attach to but there is no metal visible. The metal ‘Crest’ Emblem you refer to was only used on certain Full-Size Pontiacs & Grand Prixs. The correct Emblem you need is only available as repro. Quality is supposedly ok. Early repro parts exhibited very poor shape & fit.

    A: Ijust installed the repro I bought from Ames and it’s not bad. The outward apearance is very good. The only part I didn’t like is that the original has some extruded rubber surrounding the studs that make it fit just right in the holes on the bumper where as the repro does not so you have to center it by eye and then tighten it down. No biggie but I don’t think it would have cost them that much more to add to the mold.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Does anyone have the location measurements to properly locate the bumper crest on replacement bumpers that don’t have holes?

    Attachment

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Gas Tank Door Emblem

    What is the correct style for my 1968? I heard there were to versions: Finger pull or flat

    A: All 1968 Firebirds had the ‘finger-lift’ feature built into the Emblem meaning, the Emblem is not flat but has an opening under the tail for your finger. This emblem is available as a reproduction. The flat-design Fuel Door ‘Bird’ Emblem was used in 1967 though, some late 1967’s began using the finger-lift version. This emblem is also available.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: H.O. Stripe (Rally Stripe) Fading

    I’m considering painting the H.O. stripes on my 1968 coupe, instead of using the decals.

    A: if you are afraid of the stripes faiding,try this tick I learned when I worked in a body shop.apply the decals before you clearcoat and then proceed with the paint job as normal,they will not fade.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: H.O. Stripes Availability

    I have a 1968 FB 400 Convertiable Verdero Green with Ivy Gold Interior; and supposed to have gold top (now black; couldn’t locate gold); the car is a 400 HO with automatic trans and air conditioning. The question that I have is whether or not my car is supposed to have HO stripes or whether they were an option. The packet from PHS does not list optional stripes so unless all HO cars had them I dont believe that mine should–any help would be appreciated.

    A: The only H.O.s that got the H.O. stripes were the 1967 326 H.O. and the 1968 350 H.O. The 400 H.O.s could have been ordered with the Rally stripes but it wouldnt have had the letters “H.O.” on the front fenders as the smaller V-8 H.O.s had. If you got the Billing History from PHS and its blank in the 494 column then your car wasnt ordered with Rally Stripes.

    Another note is that the 326/350 H.O.s and Tempest/LeMans Sprints could have the stripes that were standard equipment deleted (not used). This would show up as column 491 of the Billing History. It was a no credit option delete.

    These stripes were color coordinated to complement interior/exterior combinations. A good example is a black car with black interior. It wouldnt get a black stripe but instead got an ivory stripe. If a black car had red interior it would get a red stripe. Etc. The three colors avaliable thru out the years were red,ivory and black.

    You can be creative and put H.O. on a 400 car, I have a friend who thought the same as you and did this on a 400 convertible. He later upgraded the powertrain to a R/A and had the words RamAir made into the same strpes. Keep in mind that none of this is correct but 99.9% of the admirers thought that it was. I have another idea thats a variation of that… My sons 1968 Firebird coupe is red/ black vinyl top and interior. I am making a set of rally stripes in black that will use the word “Sprint” from the 68-9 Tempest /LeMans Sprint. So other than the attentive list members I doubt that anyone will pick up on this. Have your fun and make the car the way you want. A set of stripes is easily removed and if the proper material is used wont harm a decent paint job.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: HO stripes for 1968

    What Firebirds could get the HO stripes.

    A: Here’s what I know about the Rally Stripe….

    1) The 1968 Firebird Sales Brochure shows a white 1968 Firebird 350 with Red “H.O.” Rally Stripes.

    2) The 1968 Firebird Dealer Order Form lists option 494 (Rally Stripe) as available on all except with option 344 (350 H.O.) since 344 came std. with the stripes.

    3) The 400 H.O. did not come standard with the Rally Stripes but one could order them according to Sales literature.

    4) The 1968 Parts Catalog lists part numbers for Black, Red & White “H.O.” Stripes as well as the plain stripes (front fender).

    5) The “Generation-1” Firebird Registry has several members with original, documented “Rally Stripes” including 350, 400, H.O. and even a Ram Air I car.

    6) The Body Broadcast Sheet lists the (3) different color codes for the Rally Stripe.

    A: the stripe for the 350 HO was an HO stripe. You are correct in the colors, red ,white and black. All colors were closely coordinated with paint and interior color combos. i.e. white car and parchment(white) interior wouldnt get an ivory stripe. As I stated before only the 350 HO was avaliable (and standard equiptment) with HO stripes. Any other engine combo got the Ralley stripe for a mere $14.74 extra. You could do a delete on the HO stripes (350 HO CARS) but it was a no cost no refund item. The orginals were vinyl and held up very well, still have the orginals on my 1967 Sprint.One of the best ways to see if your car was equipted with the HO 326 and had the stripes is spend $35 for PHS to verify….. Unless you can find the build sheet.

    A: the ralley stripe option. This was avaliable in 67-8 on any engine combo except the HOs. The ralley stripe is sometimes called “SPRINT” stripes by mistake…does anyone on list have an orginal 400 ( or anything except an HO) with the ralley stripes? Many people dont realize that it could be got that way.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: How to remove Chevrons (3 vertical chrome trim pieces) on a 1968

    Regarding the 3 vertical chrome trim pieces below the rear windows, I’m assuming I have to remove the inside panels to get to their fasteners. Is their anything I should know in advance regarding them? Do I need to remove the seats? I’m gonna reuse them as they are in real good condition. Are they clipped, bolted, or what? Can I reuse the fasteners?

    A: For a coupe, you dont need to remove anything except the flow thru vents at the 1/4 panel to get to the chevrons. Use a 1/4 drive socket/ratchet and carefully back off the nuts as so you dont break the studs off. Check and see what style your chevrons are. They had 2 types early and late 1968 one style has smaller studs than the other. Just curious as to when they changed.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Ralley Stripes vs. H.O. Stripes

    What is the difference between the Ralley Stripes and the H.O. stripes?

    A: The H.O. stripes are very similar but not the same as the ralley stripes. The ralley stripes were avaliable on all 67-8s EXCEPT 326 and 350 H.O.s. These stripes used the same door and rear 1/4 stripes, but the fender stripe was continuous in the center portion instead of having the letters H.O.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rally Stripes and “Sprint Stripes”

    Was there a specific stripe for Sprint Firebirds or did they receive the optional Rally Stripe?

    A: Actually the 1967-19688 Firebird stripes were called “Rally Stripes” and were avaliable on any model except the 326/350 H.O. cars(which got the H.O. stripes as standard equiptment).The misnomer of Sprint birds having “Sprint stripes” was spawned in part to the picture in “The Fabulous Firebird” book by Michael Lamm. The other was the Tempest/LeMans Sprints had them as standard equiptment. This then carried on to the suppliers /retailers calling them Sprint Firebird stripes.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rocker Panels for 1968

    I’m trying to figure out how my new rocker panel moulding strip goes on my 1969 firebird. The last time I had molding on it was 12 years ago and I can’t remember . What I have is two Nos mouldings right out of the GM packaging each moulding came with a small bag of screws and one of the packages had two 1 inch by about 24inch metal strips each with three holes in it and both stamped with the letter R. I see that these strips hold the moulding on ,on the top . My Question is,where am I suppose to connect the metal strips one on each side, ? Or both on the right side because they are marked with an R and if this is correct it means I’m missing the two strips for the left side.

    A: You should have two “one inch strips” per side. One spans the front of the rocker panel and onto the back of the fender. The other mounts directly behind the first on the rocker panel (lip side up). The molding has places for one screw in each end. The one in the back simply screws through the molding and into the rocker panel. The front screws into a plastic insert in the back of the fender. Then all that is remaining is the screw along the bottom of the molding, into the rocker panel.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Stripe Material

    Inyour expert opinion what is the best way to replace the H.O. stripes?? Obviously they are available in all catalogs as decals as original. Do the decals hold up? I have also heard people say to apply the decal prior to the clearcoat on a new paint job to also preserve the stripe, I have also heard of painting them on.

    A: I dont know what the others are using for material… Ive seen some piss poor copies of HO stripes but wont get into that here. I do know that the factory used 3M Scotchcal vinyl. 3M is in my opinion still the best thing going 35 years later. I still have the orginal Sprint stripes on my 1967 Tempest Sprint, and it hasn’t had the best of care (My wife once scrubbed the car with soft scrubb) They are weathered and scratched but it is testament to the abuse that good vinyl will take.

    3M now has a high performance vinyl with a UV coating built into it. I wouldnt advise clear coating over the stripe as the vinyl will expand and contract at a different rate than the metal and paint. This would then promote cracking under the clear and would make a real big mess when trying to repair/replace any portion of the stripes.

    As for the idea to extend the life of well kept vinyl, how much longer would you expect? BTW these arent decals they are vinyl appliques (just a fancy word for stripes). As for the painting of the stripes in lieu of vinyl, thats your choice. I will tell you that the 3M vinyl is only 2 mils thick and paint at that thickness is almost transparent. You also wont get the crisp detail and edges with a paint on job vs a die cut vinyl stripe.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Front Bumper, Grills, and Lights (16)

    Q: 1968 2 bulb vs. 1 Bulb Parking Lamps

    Figure 12-7 in the Pontiac Service Manual shows the bulb as LH (or RH) PARK & DIR. SIGNAL LAMP. It also shows marker lamps, but this seems to be an error since the assembly wraps around the corner of the car to serve as both the parking and marker lamps.

    I am trying to figure out what type of parking lamp is correct for my 1968. I have also heard there is a one bulb version and a 2 bulb version. What is correct and what is the difference?

    A: …Actually, there were 2 types of 1968 Firebrd Parking Lamps. One type had a single bulb, another had two bulbs. 2 bulb is very early 68. Only for a couple of months of production

    A: The two-bulb parking lights had one bulb that was a parking lamp and the second side-facing bulb was a cornering light. I saw a factory option list that had this as an option. The parking lights on my 1968 have the wrap-around lens and only one front-facing bulb. This seems like a reasonable thing seeing how there was a distinctly different harness for the two-bulb versus the one-bulb lights

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 2-Bulb Corner Lamps

    Was there a certain number of turn signal assemblies that had two bulbs in it versus single bulb?

    A: Early model 68s had the 2-bulb markers,which were phased out in the first couple months of production. Any models had this not just one or another. As near as I can tell its sometime in Sept. that it changed to a single bulb.

    I think that alot had to do with the new government requirement to have side impact markers in 68. The Firebird didnt have a separate marker like the Camaro did ( much cleaner look than the ugly step sister) so they put a separator and bulb in the turn signal housing. Later it was modified to illuminate from the side and front with one bulb thereby saving money. Doesnt sound like much of a savings but one dollar each car and it justifies that cost engineers position.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Bumper Emblem on a 1968

    Does anyone have a template for mounting a 400 bumper emblem on a 1968 Firebird?

    A: I found a dimension template for the 1967 – 1968 400 bumper emblem that you might be able to use on the Generation-1 Registry web site.

    Bumper Emblem

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Grill Molding for 1967-1968

    Can someone explain the two different types of grilles on the 1967 bird? One type has a chrome strip running down the center that extends out toward the nose and on the other, the chrome piece ends at the louvre part of the grill.

    The ones on my bird are the latter, but the previous owner gave me an extra set that is like the former.

    It looks as if I can remove the chrome strip and attach it to grilles on the bird since thay are just bolted on.

    A: In regards to the 1967-1968 Firebird Grill Chrome….

    The “400” Firebirds had seperate chrome moldings in the grills (covering the center bar, extending towards the nose) and the non-“400” cars did not; you would just see the molded in plastic center bar. It sounds like some are implying that non-“400” cars had the ‘flat’ chromemolding when infact, this ‘molding’ is actually a part of the plastic grill and not chrome at all. The grills themselves were identical; you can take std. grills and drill them for the moldings (which are unique for RH and LH).

    A: The extended mouldings, along with the arrowhead emblem on the front chrome “beak,” 400 emblem on the right rear trunk lid, and scooped hood were 400 items exclusively. They are not correct on non-400 cars.

    A: The 400s came with the twin scoop hood, Pontiac arrow head on the nose of the bumper, and chrome ring around the inside of each grill (look at grill and notice the mounting holes). All models (350, 350 HO, 400, etc.) used the same grill but the chrome ring was added to the 400.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Bumper and Hood/Fender Gap for 1967

    In regards to the front chrome bumper on my 67 bird convertible, there is a gap of almost an inch between the bumper itself and the hood/fenders. Now I attended the recent Pontiac Southern Nationals and saw no 1967 Birds, but saw a couple of 68’s – they appear to have some sort of rubber “gasket” between the bumper and hood/fenders, but in some of the pics I have seen for these cars the bumper looks to be closer to the hood than my car is. I don’t see this gasket listed in the Ames catalog and I am wondering if the bumper can be adjusted closer or where I need to get the gasket from.

    A: 1967 didn’t use the rubber fillers but I have seen a lot of them with a steel trim plate instead. the gap can be adjusted. Just make sure the hood and fenders line up first. Shop manuals gives dimensions of the gaps to set up by.

    This would prevent any light from the headlight from leaking out of the gap in the side. In 1968 they went to the rubber to prevent any light from headlight from leaking out. OF course 68s had side markers so it seems funny.

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Bumper Filler Gasket for 1968

    Two questions: Is the rubber gasket around the front of the 1969 that seperates the headlights housing and grill from the fenders and hood suposed to be black or is it O.K. to have it body colored. Will paint stick to it or flake off soon.

    A: The rubber should be black and yes paint will flake off.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Chrome Inserts (Hockey Sticks) for a 400

    Does anyone know who sells these chrome overlay pieces that go in the middle of the gille and continue all the out to the nose of the bumper?? Do any of YOU have some for sale?? HELP!

    A: Chicago Muscle Parts in Island Lake, Il. show these in their catalog. part #893774, $79.00/pr. These are a reproduction item. I called and the price is still good, but the parts are now out of stock, having sold the last pair to me. The sales guy didn’t know when they would get more in stock, but said that if we could get together an order of 10 or more, they could get them in in less than 3 weeks.

    Chicago Muscle Car Parts
    (847)526-2200
    912 E. Burnett Road
    Island Lake, IL 60042

    The partnumber for the 400 grill trim is #893774. I called then today and found that they once again, have only one pair in stock

    These are the hockey stick trim pieces that fit horizontally in the400 grill.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Cornering Lights (parking lamps)

    I was reading through my Classic Industries catalog and noticed a “front light harness” which mentions …”with cornering lights”. Pardon my ignorance but does this mean that the lights mounted under the headlights are parking lights only? Do they “flash” when the indicator is set or is a different assembly required ?…Why “cornering lights” ?

    A: The “cornerning lights” werent really that…. It was a 2 lamp turnsignal/parking /sidemarker lamp that had an extra single filament bulb on the rear portion of regular housing. If you look at all the 1968 front lenses youll see a partition in the lense for 2 seperate bulbs.

    This was not the same as other models cornerning lamps such as the Bonnies and GTOs. It was merely an extra parking lamp which helped for a side marker. It operated only when headlamps or parking lamps were on.

    It was not an option as some people think. It was standard equiptment for all models of 68s. It was phased out sometime around early Sept.67. Probably a matter of suppliers keeping up with demand. It was a running change so its not clear cut as to when it was phased out. I ve seen some orginal cars built with the provisions (extra wire and socket was clipped off and taped back into harness.) Parts book makes note of this telling service replacement to do the same. Ive had several cars built late into Sept without 2 lamp front lights and some in the 1st week of Sept that have the 2 lamp. From this I would say perhaps the early Sept cars were the last of them.

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Correct Grill Color for 1969’s

    Does anyone know the correct grill colour for 69’s. I read the FAQ on Geoff’s site and it covered 1967-1968 but not 1969. Are they all silver or do they have a black center?

    Do you paint the grill black (in addition to the silver) or does the whole insert stay silver. I have seen some 69’s with the centre all silver and others with the centre painted back?

    If it is does have a black center is it matt or semi gloss?

    A: It’s all silver (Argent Silver).It should be the same shade as the 1967-1968.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Front Bumper Gap

    I just bought a 1968 coupe here in Oklahoma and the front bumper has a gap of 1/2 to 3/4″ between the rear of the bumper and the front bodywork (fenders and hood). Is there supposed to be a filler strip between the bumper and bodywork, or is the bumper too far forward?

    A: There should be a rubber filler behide the bumper.

    A: My 1968 has a black rubber filler and is the same distance. I also found this in the Dealer Technical Bulletins that sounds like it applies in this case:

    PONTIAC MOTOR DIVISION Number 67-1-5 Section 14 Data 9/22/67

    Dealer Service Information Bulletin

    Attention: Service Manager

    Subject: 1968 TEMPEST HOOD TO BUMPER CLEARANCE (EXCEPT GTO)

    Some concern has been expressed over the appearance of the gap between the front bumper and hood on the 1968 Tempest. Reports have been received of attempts to eliminate this gap by setting the bumper rearward. This practice should be discontinued immediately.

    Proper clearance is 3/4″. This can be checked by simply inserting a dime into the gap. It is important that there is 3/4″ clearance to prevent the hood and front fenders from damage due to minor impacts.

    SERVICE DEPARTMENT
    P0NTIAC MOTOR DIVISION
    GENERAL M0TORS CORPORATION

    Read, Initial & Pass On – Service Supervision Parts Accounting

    I did not find any reference to the rubber filler in the 1968 Service Manual and Fisher Body Service Manual.

    A: First, there is a black filler strip that goes around each edge of the chrome bumper. It attaches to the plastic grill assembly. Look at section 14 of the 1967 Firebird Service manual, it tells exactly how the bumper is to be attached.

    Second, be aware of the possibilty that your front bumper is twisted. This is VERY common for the 1967-1968 bumpers. They are long and easily twisted without noticeable dents or other clues. Fortunately they can be muscled into place if the twist isn’t too bad, but from personal experience I know that even putting a true, straight one on correctly is a process requiring patience.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Front bumper/wiper valence sheet metal removal

    I need the list expertise. I need to remove the valence or sheet metal between the windshield and the hood, any ideas?. Also the whole bumper and grill arrangement.

    A: To remove the cowl panel (the sheet metal between the hood and the windshield), first remove the wiper arms then the four screws in the front of the panel under the hood.

    As far as the bumper, you should be able to remove it in one piece. Look behind the bumper and in front of the radiator. To the left and right, you should see the bumper horns that are attached to the front of the frame. If you remove the bolts behind the bumper the whole assembly should come off in one piece.

    A: I haven’t done the control arms yet, but the valance isn’t that bad. The hardest part is to remove the wiper arms. It’s best to use a special tool for this (I know JC Whitney sells it for about $10). Otherwise, you can use a screw driver to move the locking clip underneath. As the name implies though, the screw driver will probably screw up your paint job (that’s up to you whether it’s worth it or not). The locking clip is on the bottom of the wiper and presses against a knotch on the shaft. Once you have the wipers off, there are several screws along the front edge where the hood overlaps. On mine, once those screws were out, I could lift up on the front edge and slide the whole thing forward and out from under the chome window trim. This way, I didn’t have to remove the trim.

    A: Whenever I find myself in a situation where the paint job might get scratched, I put some masking tape followed by a layer of duct tape down on the area that could be damaged. The masking tape protects the finish from the duct tape glue while the duct tape absorbs the scratch. After removal, some denatured alcohol should eliminate any residue.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Front Clip Removeal

    Can anyone give me a qick summary or secrets (hidden bolts) to removing entire front clip from my ’67. I have removed the bumper and radiator thus far. I would like to keep front end in as few pieces as possible for ease of re- assembly.

    A: I would advise against one piece front clip removal mainly for alignment reasons… and the potential for bending, scratching, or otherwise strangely stressing your fenders and core support (not to mention it is really akward). However, I believe it would be possible to do (you know how you always see’em in swapmeets and junkyards and all… but those parts are not always in the best of shape either.

    All that holds the ‘front clip’ on is the two bolts from the core support to the front of the subframe, one bolt on each side under the fender (down underneath going upward), and the two bolts on each side by the hood hinges to the cowl section (one on top going down and one pointed back into the ‘firewall’). There will be shims around all of these bolts that were used for alignment. Remember where they go. With LOTS of practice you can learn to fix bad alignments as few GM cars are put together perfect. But, once it is done right it makes all the difference!

    Although I don’t know why you want to do this removal, if your clip has not been apart before it might not be a bad idea to take it appart piece by piece so that you can clean, remove and treat rust that is hidden and protect (paint) things that are not usually accessable.

    A: Sorry about the last note. When you sais “bumper” and “radiator”, the “front clip” part didn’t register.

    As far as the front clip, he had some good points. The main thing to need to remember if you want to remove the front clip is to properly document what bolt and shims go where. Buy a box of re-sealable bags and as you remove them, mar them like “passenger side – top of fender at back of hood”. put the bolt and shims in the bag and place it where you can find it later. Do this with each bolt you remove. When the car goes back together, all the proper alignment pieces will be there.

    As far as hidden bolts, inside the fender wells you’ll find three that attach it to a bracket on the inside. I usually try to remove this bracket entirely to get it out of the way. Once you’ve done this and the other obvious bolts, remove the front tires to get them out of the way, too.

    Get a buddy and CAREFULLY start to remove the clip. Try not to twist it because the only thing holding it together will be the radiator support.

    When you go to reassemble the car, start with the doors and get them even and straight. then align the fenders to the doors. I hope this helps.

    A: I just removed mine from my 69. I don’t know hoe different it is but from what I’ve seen it very similar.

    • Remove the air dam

    • Remove the A/C baffles (If applicible)

    • Un-plug the headlights

    • Remove the bolts that attach the support bracket to the front of the fenders.

    • Look between the radiator support and the bumper support. The bumper support bolts to the frame horns (the pieces that curve up from the frame) in three locations and possible to a couple of places on the valance panel. Remove these bolts and the bumper assembly will come off.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Grill Color for 1967 or 1968

    I am getting two different answers from restoration veterans about the correct grill insert color on a 1968 with a 400 (RamAir or otherwise). Several guys have told me that the silver/gray was the only color available and that the extra chrome strip was the only difference. To back this up I have found an article in Januarys High Performance Pontiac Magazine about a purple 1967 RamAir 1 restoration. The magazine called the car “one of the most correctly restored 1967 Ram Air Firebirds”. It has silver grills. Still other people have told me that the 400 option included grills painted an almost black charcoal gray with the extra chrome on top. Evidence of this can be seen on the cover of the spring ’98 Year One Catalog (also a ’67). I need to paint my grills soon, so I can get the car back together before spring.

    A: The 1967-8 Firebird grilles were identical, except for how they were painted. The correct grille colors for the 1967-8 Firebirds are as follows:

    1967 – Argent Silver outer, with a Black center.

    1968 – Charcoal outer, with Argent Silver center.

    The Charcoal and Argent Silver are the same colors that are used on Rally II wheels and they should be a satin finish, not gloss.

    For both years, only the Firebird 400 came with a chrome (hockey stick) bar in the center of the grilles.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 1
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Headlight Pull Switch Removal

    Help! I would like some info about how to safely remove the headlight pull switch to replace the bezel on a 1969 bird. Thanx.

    A: There is a small button on the side of the switch that releases the knob and arm.

    A: There is a button on the side of the switch that faces the door. It is next to impossible to reach from underneath the dash without removing at LEAST the ball vent tube. I took a piece of welding rod and kept bending by trial-an-error until I could slide it through the gap between the dash panel and the windshield pillar (on top) and was able to press the button from the top. Take a flash light and shine through the gap and peek through the bottom of the windshield. You may be able to see it.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Parking Lamp Housing for 1968

    I am confused about the one-bulb or two-bulb parking lamp housing.

    A: Awhile back, there was much speculation about which 1968 Firebirds got the two-bulb parking lamp housings vs the one-bulb. I found the answer while reading the tech bulletins at firstgen. It was a mid-year change as well as a service swap-out.

    [pdfjs-viewer url=/dtb/docs/68-I-17.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]

    A: Actually, it wasnt a midyear change…. more like a false start in production. Ive had several late Sept cars that had the single bulb and some early Sept cars that had the 2 bulb. This leads me to believe that it was used only for a few weeks in early production and when they ran out they were replaced with the “cheaper” version.

    Here’s how this all happened. Model year of 1968 was mandated several safety changes/additions, one of which was front and rear side markers. PMD was unsure whether the front turn signal- parking lamp would be accepted as a side marker. When it was apparent that the side marker was legal without a separate bulb the first design was phased out. It was then that a replacement part superceded the earlier one.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rechroming Bumper

    I am looking for some info about getting my front bumper on a 1967 firebird 400 convertible. re-chromed. Can anyone give me names of some places that do this and are good?

    A: Try TriCIties plating in Tenn. They do good work at a reasonable price. Sandblast the inside of yours and knock off the rough edges and sharp edges at the rear portion and you will get a nice job.

    A: make sure that you tell them to buff the sharp edges where the dies cut metal off on the backside or trailing edge. It gives the bumper a nicer finish.The only part I wasnt thrilled with was the rear at the tabs with holes(that serve no purpose once installed) the plating didnt get all the way under neath the tabs. Franks says it wont as by design the plating comes from underneath in the tank. I noticed the originals didnt have any there also. Just clean off the surface rust and repaint with silver POR 15.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - General Info (2)

    Q: Body Seam Repairs

    At times I’ve seen small cracks in at the top of the windshield post at the roof line. Do you or anyone else know how to fix these permanently? I had a Bondo artist tell me to “just fill it with AllMetal and move on” but I’m quite leery about this. Do I have to solder them back?

    A: I have repaired small cracks or defects in body solder with 30/70 solder and a small low watt soldering iron. clean the area real well before soldering and use tinning butter to prep. You must melt the area around the defect to blend the new solder in. this takes some practice so you may want to try this on a junker first. Clean the area off with a baking soda solution to neutralize the acids and then follow with plain water a couple of times. This is a better approach than bondo or filler. Remember to wear a dust mask when grinding or sanding lead.

    A: I worked on new cars (back in the 70’s), not ones that were 30 years old. But I do know this. The weld between the windshield pillar and the roof is about an inch or so below the roof line. The solder however extends all the way to the roof line, about 1 1/2″ inches down the along the drip rail, and about 1″ along the roof windshield face toward the center of the car. The solder that extends past the welds becomes very thin after grinding. Given that it’s a soft metal I think it’s just cracking due to stress. The welds themselves and the metal reinforcement around the weld point is very strong (strong enough to not come apart during a roll over). I think you’ll see metal fatigue cracks above the pillar where the sheet metal is thin before you’ll ever see it on the pillar.

    The solder does not add any structural integrity to the body, it’s purely a cosmetic convenience (bondo takes too long to dry and the car is “dipped” about an hour after the body completes the welding process). I think it’s cracking at a “thin” point and just resolder it.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 1
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Emission/Tune up Label and Spare Tire Inflator Label

    What are some labels I need to make my restoration complete?

    A: Part of a proper restoration or just for a daily driver is to replace all decals and labels. Starting in 1968 there was an emission /tune up label on all Firebirds. This was on the front bumper upper structure. I havent seen any proper reproductions of this tune up decal for 68s as it was a clear decal with white lettering as to be placed over the black painted area of the bumper assembly. I do have some NOS ones that I will one day use as a pattern for the proper reproduction. The 1969 are different than the 68s but the content is the same.

    Another label thats out there is the spare tire inflator canister label. This too is incorrect but is a close copy. Rich has so graciously loaned his original canister to me to make a proper copy. After countless hours of having my computer crash while in the design stages, its finally done. I guess I could have just stuck one of these Osborne labels on and no one would have noticed. But its the striving for perfection that drives most of us to do the silly little details. Perhaps I can seek professional help on this like they do in Hollywood.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 1
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Hoods (5)

    Q: 400 Hood Scoops

    I just picked up a 1967 400 hood for $500 — straight, no rust, but has chromed scoop inserts. Question for list: are these an aftermarket item?

    A: No. Someone took the scoop inserts and had them chromed. I’ve seen quite a few cars with them painted black as well. This might have been something a dealer may have also done. But they were all originally painted the body color.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Hoods
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Hoods

    Can I put a 1967 400 hoods on a 1968? What type of problems or modifications will I need to make?

    A: For all you trivia buffs the difference in 1967 and 68-9 hoods is not the hinges, its in the inner frame and the hood latch. And yes, its important even to a non purist when he replaces his 350 hood and it wont latch, OR if it does latch and then comes open at 60MPH. The 1967 400 hoods had a inner structure that was unique to that model and year only. The 68-9 400 used the same inner structure as all 68-9 flat hoods. I havent tried to put a 1967 400 hood on an OHC-6 but I bet it wont fit. So question again ,whens someone going to repo these in USA?

    A: I always look forward to your comments. They agree with my own experiences and usually add to what I know. I just went through installing a nice 1967 400 steel hood on my 1969 bird. The following is what I learned in the process.

    *The 1967 400 hoods are unique. They have a different “flatter” hood catch hole (didn’t realize the rest of the substructure was also different and now I know to watch for rust through the scoop holes). The 1967 hood latch is also unique. It does not have the extra safety mechanism (ear on the passenger side) that shoves the safety part of the latch (upper catch) over if the primary catch releases. The secondary safety catch in 1967 relies solely on its spring to shove it into the path of the upcoming hood.

    *In 1968 Pontiac changed the catch in the understructure of the hood, it sticks down slightly farther on the drivers side. If you look closely you can figure out that this is required to work with the redesigned (more positive) latch. The new latch has an extra ear sticking out on the passenger side to force the safety catch into place if the primary catch releases. One other thing, the 1968 latch has the same “lever” pull as the 1967. So in summary, in 1968 the catch (which is spot welded into the hood substructure) changed, the hood latch mechanism changed and the pull lever on the hood latch remained the same.

    *In 1969 the hood remained the same as 1968, the hood latch also remained the same, and the hood latch pull was changed to a “rod”.

    So every year has its differences but all hoods can work for all years and external appearances are the same. However, do not try to cut corners and mix the wrong latch with the wrong hood catch. I know a few horror stories from those who have tried this.

    Oh and by the way it took me about 30 minutes with a drill, jig saw, and dremel to make a perfect “factory” hood tach hole. I’m sure the second one would be faster.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Hoods
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Looking at installing an aftermarket 400 hood on my 67 firebird. What do I all need to buy to make it work. They say use a 68 latch and catch plate but you can’t buy them aftermarket and they are hard to find used. I have the original 67 setup that came with the car. Can I just use the aftermarket 69 hood latch and catch plate?

  • does anyone know where I can find roof headers for my 67 400?, I already have new front windshield tracks but I need the metal to weld too

  • The 1967 400 hoods are unique. They have a different “flatter” hood catch hole (didn’t realize the rest of the substructure was also different and now I know to watch for rust through the scoop holes). The 67 hood latch is also unique. It does not have the extra safety mechanism (ear on the passenger side) that shoves the safety part of the latch (upper catch) over if the primary catch releases. The secondary safety catch in 1967 relies solely on its spring to shove it into the path of the upcoming hood.

    *In 1968 Pontiac changed the catch in the understructure of the hood, it sticks down slightly farther on the drivers side. If you look closely you can figure out that this is required to work with the redesigned (more positive) latch. The new latch has an extra ear sticking out on the passenger side to force the safety catch into place if the primary catch releases. One other thing, the 1968 latch has the same “lever” pull as the 1967. So in summary, in 68 the catch (which is spot welded into the hood substructure) changed, the hood latch mechanism changed and the pull lever on the hood latch remained the same.

    *In 1969 the hood remained the same as 1968, the hood latch also remained the same, and the hood latch pull was changed to a “rod”.

    So every year has its differences but all hoods can work for all years and external appearances are the same. However, do not try to cut corners and mix the wrong latch with the wrong hood catch. I know a few horror stories from those who have tried this

  • I’m having a major hood dilemma. I have a original 1967 Firebird 400 convertible. I bought an AMD GM licensed 400 hood to cut a hole and put a tach on (couldn’t stand to cut my original hood). I’ve got it painted and now the latch won’t work. My original latch worked with the flat receiver 1967 hood. The confusion is my 1967 latch has the other ear on the passenger side. My painter says the latch is too wide for the hole? Did they change the width of the latch in 1968? AMD wants to sell me a latch for a 69″ but it looks the one I have. Suggestions and info would be greatly appreciated!

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Hood Styles for Different Models

    I was under the impression there where two hoods the stock hood & the 400 hood. Is this not true?

    A: True. 1967, 1968 Firebird had (2) different Hoods. 1969 had (4) Hoods….

    1967 Standard (flat) 9788846
    1967 “400” (scooped) 9789418
    1968-1969 Standard (flat) 9793429
    1968-1969 “400” (scooped) 9793430
    1969 “400” w/Ram Air 9797763
    1969 Trans Am 5460140

    *NOTE: Despite the ‘modification’ to the underside of most factory Ram Air Firebirds in 1967 and 1968, there was not a unique “Ram Air” Hood for these years. The modification was done at the Dealership.

    The factory 1967-1968 “Ram Air” Firebirds used the standard “400” Hood and actually were shipped with closed Scoop Inserts installed and open Scoop Inserts in the trunk (for dealer to install along with Hood Baffle, Carb. Shroud and seals). So, a ‘functional Ram Air Hood’ for a 1967-1968 Firebird is no different than a regular “400” Hood (except the Scoops are open). Now, for the pursuist, there was a dealer modification required in order to install the Ram Air Hood Baffle. This involved trimming a portion of the under-structure of the Hood along the RH scoop.

    The 1969 Firebird (exc. Trans Am) used a slightly different Hood when Ram Air was ordered. This was due to the new Ram Air design (functional, driver controlled scoops). There was a different Hood Baffle for 1969 which combined with a ‘Flap-System’ that allowed the driver to pull a cable-controlled knob under the dash that opened or closed the scoops. The Trans Am Hood though different than the “400” Hood, also used a similar cable-controlled scoop system.

    A: I believe you may be mistaken there, that’s another one of those things about the 1969 TA that some sales literature states came with the car. The TA I owned didn’t have any provision at all for driver control of the intake scoops, nor have any others I’ve seen. We’ve most all seen that picture from the accessories brochure of the pull knob and the Ram Air decal on the mounting plate, but I have only seen that on GTO’s. I cannot answer for the 400 Sport Option cars, as I’ve only seen a couple in all the shows and POCI conventions I’ve attended, and don’t remember whether those cars were equipped.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Hoods
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: OHC Hood Emblem Restoration

    Hey guys, I searched the archives but could not find info about reworking the 3.8 Liter OHC hood emblems. Is it possible and who does it. Thanks

    A: There are still lots of 3.8 liter hood emblems left out there NOS… I ve been looking for 4.1s but it seems I always found 3.8 ones. PS dont bother reworking them its just not feasible.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Hoods
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Ram Air Hood Pans

    I was wondering if anyone has ordered and installed a reproduction Ram Air hood pan and air cleaner from either Ames or Year One for a 1968 Firebird? How was quality and fit? Thanks.

    A: …The reporduction ’67/’68 Firebird Ram Air Hood Baffle was orginally from a Barry Martin (Sonic Motors) project about 8 years ago. At the time, he had hired a retired die-maker to reproduce the Baffle with a Kirksite Die. The Die Maker was surprised when Barry said it must have all original ‘Draw-Marks’ because with today’s technology, the ‘draw-marks’ do not occur as they did 30yrs ago. Anyhow, he duplicted all draw marks and stamped out less than a 100 pieces. I believe the original price was $450 and then was reduced later. I do remember going by to see the first batch of Baffles and comparing them to the original that was used as a template. The large hole was cut out using a Laser Cutter. This produced very clean edges. At the time, I couldn’t tell the difference between the two. One note though is that Kirksite material is softer than most production Tool Steel used for dies. It’s cheaper and will only last for 75 or so hits until the sharp definition starts to diminish. The last thing I remember about this project was seeing the Dies sitting on a flat bed trailer (uncovered) about a year later. Who knows how many total pieces were produced (I saw the first 50). Perhaps Year One or someone else popped out a few more. I do know from speaking with several Die makers, showing them the part, that the work required to produce this die would not have been that involved; as with everything, quantity dictates the total investment.

    A: Barry Martin (Sonic Motors) did have Kirksite Dies made several years ago for the 1967-1968 Firebird Ram Air Hood Baffle. I believe he worked with Performance Years and they stamped out approx. 75 pieces and retailed them for $375-$450 ea. As for the Lower Ram Air Shroud, I’ve heard rumors of several dealers reproing this piece but have never seen one. Used, these items have been selling for close to what they went for on the recent auction. $400-$500 for the Carb. Shroud and about the same (or more) for the Hood Baffle. Scoops, wellll….. they’re all the same; Closed/Open.. doesn’t matter since the factory Ram Air Scoops were actually regular closed scoops, milled out and repackaged in a Ram Air Part Numbered GM Box. (So, don’t pay big bucks simply because of the ‘Ram Air’ label unless you’re a collector of NOS GM Boxes). If you are able to find an experienced Die Maker/Stamping facility and have the Hood and Carb Pans reproduced AND be able to sell these pieces for $400 a pair, you will have plenty of customers… no problem. Plus, remember the usage here:

    Hood Baffle: 1967-1968 Firebird (and 1969 for those non-pursuists) Carb. Shroud: 1967-1968 Firebird, 1968 GTO (and 1969 F, 68-69 non-pursuists)

    Thats a big market.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Hoods
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Paint (21)

    Q: 1969 Special Color Paint Chips

    Does anyone know if Special Colors were offered for 1969 Firebirds?

    A: The color will be followed by the Rinshed Mason #

    Regular Colors
    —————————————————-
    Mayfair Maize A-1715
    Cameo White A-2080
    Liberty Blue Irid. A-2098
    Matador Red A-2099R
    Warwick Blue Irid. A-2100
    Crystal Turquoise Irid. A-2101
    Midnight Green Irid. A-2102
    Limelight Green Irid. A-2103
    Expresso Brown Irid. A-2104
    Champagne Irid. A-2105
    Antique Gold Irid. A-2106D
    Burgundy Irid. A-2107M
    Palladium Silver Irid. A-2108
    Carousel Red A-2111R (my chart says FB only,indicating its age)
    Verdoro Green Irid. A-2110
    Goldenrod Yellow A-2119
    Windward Blue Irid. A-2123
    Starlight Black A-946

    Special Order Colors:
    —————————————————-
    Claret Red Irid A-6089R/169V51R
    Nocturne Blue Irid. A-5077/169V29
    Castillian Bronze Irid. A-5091/169V81

    Trunk Finish: #844 Black-Gray-Aqua Multiflek

    Stripe Colors:
    White A-1199
    Red A-212R
    Black A-946

    On the back of the chart, it lists the trim combo. # followed by Fisher #, then color and formula #.

    This info is then broken down into the actual part- Upper instrumnet panel, Radio Spkr grills, rear window defogger grill, AC Ducts, Steering collumn jacket etc…

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Acid Dipping

    I’m considering having my front subframe dipped to remove the old paint etc. The procedure is one type of acid to remove paint and grease followed by hydrochloric to remove rust (there is only a very small amount).

    A: One draw back to acid dipping is that if the clean-up isn’t thorough, traces can bleed through the paint and cause blistering or rusting, as Tom Sexton reports. Items with hidden nooks or pockets where the acid cannot be cleaned off adaquately can hold the acid, to come out later. Also, these hidden areas now have no paint or crud to protect the metal from rust since you cannot get paint into areas you cannot see. On thin sheetmetal parts like hoods, or body shells, this is a particular worry. The phosphate dip will probably not provide enough protection in the long run, especially in humid regions, or if the car is exposed to frequent rain or snow.

    On my car, I scraped off the grease, dirt, and flaking paint with a paint scraper and cleaned using a degreaser. Then I used a heavy wire wheel on an angle grinder to get the more stubborn paint and surface rust off my subframe (off the car).

    One advantage to this time consuming process was that I could then grind or chisel off the welding slag and other blemishes. It’s amazing how sloppy the factory was. I spent several hours over a number of days preping the subframe.

    A: I had mine acid dipped years ago. Mine came out great and has never had a problem with leaching of the acid. I did a couple of things to prevent this. First, I washed the frame with soap and water when I got it back. After a long rinse, I blew it dry with compressed air. Then I sprayed the whole frame with lacquer thinner and again air dried it. I then primed it. no problemo!!!

    I applied POR-15 to all accessable areas, even inside the boxed fram area, as far as I could reach. There were areas I knew would not be covered, but then I didn’t grind down to bare metal there either.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Autumn Bronze Irid.

    Was ‘I – Autumn Bronze Irid. (A-1996 F)’ available which I found listed on my paint chips as an optional color on Firebird Model only. Most books do not list it as an option. Also, most of the color descriptions end with ‘Irid.’ What was this an abbreviation for in the description?

    A: This is true. It is actually a color which GM offered on some of their models starting back in 1966. My father’s first 1967 Firebird had this color on it with a white cordova top and interior. I had my paint shop mix me up a quart of this color and I sprayed an old deck lid to help me decide whether to retain my original color, signet gold, or go with this color. It’s an interesting color because is is a base medium to darker red with gold flake. There is quite a difference in the color of the car from bright sunlight to twilight.

    Irid. is sort more iridescent, or in more common terms, paint with metallic flake in it.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Chassis Paint

    What is the correct paint for the chassis and components?

    A: HPP published an article on the detailing of Jim Mattison’s 400 car some time back. According to the experts, the whole axle assembly, pumpkin tubes and all was left unpainted (don’t know about the backing plates). GM then gave it a quick shot of black paint from the backside, so the front is unpainted and the back is painted black. I plan to paint my assembly with Seymour Stainless Steel paint first and then do the backside in black. That way, it won’t rust and it will look correct.

    As for dash paint, I plan to use PPG Ditlzer products. I have the original paint charts, so my guess is any ditzler supplier can mix it. You could use the reconditioning paint, but it probably won’t have the correct gloss level.

    A: 1968 Paint Chart from the 1968 Pontiac Service Information Bulletin:

    [pdfjs-viewer url=/dtb/docs/68-I-12.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q:Custom Colors / Special Colors / Spring Release Colors

    Just checked my paint code on my car (68 Firebird HT) And it says I-I —- Autumn Bronze and under the front fenders, Inside the doors, under the trunk lid it is bronze analyzer says custom color from other cars at customer Request I’m lost could use some help….

    A: It is considered a “custom color” since it was not offered as a Firebird specific color but came from the Corvette. Autumn Bronze is the only one which I have heard got their own code, “I,” instead of the “SPEC” designation on the body tag.

    Some body tags have “SHOW,” “SPEC,” “—,” or “PRIME” on them which indicated a show car, special color, or paint primer only. Have had a few people wanting me to tell them what their original paint was from this information. Interesting the things you could get done to your Firebird in the early years. Most of the “SPEC” paints were the spring release colors (Pink Mist, Carnival Red, Marigold Yellow, and Windward Blue).

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Enamel Paint and Primer

    When painting something with enamel, should I primer it first, I have heard both yes and no. Will priming it prevent future rust?

    A: Think of primer as the glue that sticks the paint to the metal. Without it you will find that the paint will chip easily, or even flake off. It is not a rust preventative. Make sure all rust is gone before painting and you should have no problems. Reappearing rust is always from not removing all of it prior to painting. This means sand blasting or chemically stripping, not just grinding it down.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Hood Hinge Color

    What is the correct finish for hood hinges ?? Black paint ?? Or Zinc plated ??

    A: Neither. Hood hinges should be Gray Phosphate, a coating that some platers can do for you. In the special “Pontiac Tech” issue from High Performance Pontiac, there is an extensive article by Jim Dietzler, who in consulting Jim Mattison, has listed a number of under hood, and under car details that are aimed right at the concourse restoration standards for a 1st gen. Firebird. Using color photos, Jim gives detailed information about what is correct for each area, and how some restorers failed to get it right.

    Plating costs can be made more reasonable by submitting a number of parts at one time. But if even this is too much for your budget, I believe that a company called OEM paints makes some spray can products that come close to matching the color and texture of the phosphate and oxide coatings used by the factories.

    http://www.oempaints.com/

    A: You don’t have to send parts to a plater. Go to garage sales and buy a hot plate with thermostat, some large Pyrex or stainless steel pans and dishes and plate your own . It does help to have a bead or sandblaster to clean them up first. I had a local plater do all the original hardware from about 5 early birds at once, handpicking all the best parts to do the yellow, silver, gray and black parts. All the black and gray parts started to rust almost immediately after assembly of entire frame-off. Even the plated parts I saved as spares rusted while in the sealed up containers. Only solution was to remove bolts one by one and replate myself. So moral is it may look good for awhile but if not prepped right, it will turn to Sh**.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Is it possible to get that issue of Pontiac Performance ?
    Do you know which issue it is, Year, Month ?

    I could really use those photos.

    Thank You,

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Lower Front Valance Panel Color (Front Air Dam)

    What color is the lower front baffle or spoiler suppose to be? I thought it was suppose to be the same as the body buy the auto body guy says it is suppose to be black.

    A: The Lower Front Baffle was not a spoiler and was not painted Body Color. Should be same color black as the Upper RH/LH Filler Panels. Only the Camaros had the front ‘chin’ spoiler (and deck lid spoiler) option for 1967, 1968, 1969.

    A: The correct color is Semi gloss under chassis black. Do yourself a favor and do it in POR-15 as it is almost impervious to rock chips bugs etc. It will fade in direct sunlight so make sure your car stays on all fours. Be sure and strip off all paint (sandblast) and use their metal prep.

    A: Black is correct for this, not body color. I have a couple originals and NOS ones and all appear the same.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Paint Chip Repair

    How do I repair and repaint rock chips and other small defects in the paint?

    A: Buy small factory pack of laquer paint. (this is assuming that your car hasn’t been repainted with cheap enamel). Degrease with preperation solvent. Sand a very small area about the size of a pencil eraser including inside of nick with 600 grit. Stir can of UNTHINNED paint very well. Metallics such as this need the extra stirring.

    Using a very small paint brush (local hobby store kind) fill the nick with a dab of paint. Dont try and fill all at once and dont brush the paint in the hole, wait a few hours and repeat until the chip or nick is completely filled and actually higher than surrounding area. Wait at least 2 days before sanding.

    Use 1000-2000 grit 3M wet or dry sandpaper and just knock off the top of extra paint trying to even it out with surrounding area.Dont sand anymore than necessary as the surrounding paint may be thin. Metallics have a habit of settling to the bottom of each coat of paint so be careful.

    Next rub with a small amount of good hand rubbing compound.(not the Turtle wax kind but something from auto paint store) rub the sanding marks out and a little in the surrounding areas. Do a good job and only an expert can tell is been done.

    Old timers call this matchsticking as they used matches instead of small paint brushes to do this. Just remember to use UNTHINNED laquer.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Paint Job Costs

    Regarding paint jobs, my 1968 needs one and I’m curious as to what an acceptable price would be for the job without the roof (vinyl) and with no rust or body work needed. I also want to go with the original color (good ol’ Verdoro green). I’m asking because I’ve been told everything from $1000 to $4000. I want a good job (stripped down to base metal) but really don’t want to get ripped either. I even had a neighbor suggest taking it to the local “Tech” school and letting the students do it. I must admit I went to a car show locally last year and saw a 65 Mustang that looked really good and that’s what the owner did. Anyway, just looking for a little input. Thanks in advance. (NOTE: Amounts listed were as of 1999)

    A: If all you need is sand and paint then the $1000 – $1500 range should be OK (for a driver). If you can do the disassembly and reassembly yourself, you should get a good job for that amount of money.

    I recommend you check with several shops and look at their work. Also ask them who’s paint they use. Stay away from the cheap synthetics, they just don’t hold up. PPG and DuPont are good products. Base coat / clear coat is the way to go.

    You may also inquire if you can help with the prep work to further reduce the cost. Be aware, however, that this will slow the process down.

    The tech school idea is a good one. I took auto mechanics in high school and we did a lot of work on other people’s cars. If they can fit you into their schedule and you can abide by their’s (remember they will only work a few hours a day) then you can get a good job for less $$$. Remember though, they are learning and spray painting is an acquired skill.

    A: Consider this: If a body shop charges $60 per man/hour, and it takes 60 hours to strip, prime, paint and re-assemble your car, that’s $3600 labor. Modern high-quality paints cost (depending on color) anywhere from $200 to $400 dollars for a gallon of color, plus thinners and hardeners. (I was quoted almost $1000 for the materials needed to do base/clear for the GMC Radar Purple.) Add to that a couple hundred for top-quality primers, and another hundred or so for sandpapers, masking tape, etc. This does not even consider the cost of any dent or rust repair that may be concealed with whatever paint is currently on the car! Granted, you may be in an area where you can find a shop that charges $35 an hour, but that’s still $2100 labor!

    That said, if you have somebody quoting you $1000 for a complete “paint job”, what are you really getting for your investment?

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Paint Types

    What type of paint should I use to paint my Firebird? I know I should not use the original type (even if available), but I want it to look original and take advantage of technology gains.

    A: I painted my own to but I used acrylic enamel it sprays great and with some color sanding and buffing when I was finished it really SHINES!! So far it has held up great and I have had it on the car for about a year now. Stay away from paint with metallic flakes in it until you really have a good hand on painting {learned this the hard way} and use a good paint like ppg or sherwin Williams and you will be fine.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Painting Base Clear or Acrylic Enamel

    For those who may not remember, my 1968 april gold bird was hit in the fall and it is now in the process of getting painted.

    I need advice in choosing the proper finish and maintaining its original character (and looking its best).

    The last owner painted it in acrilic enamel. I really like the way it looks but the painter says it is a cheap, non durable paint and will be hard to blend if ever needed. The painter suggests base clear, claiming it’s a better quality paint. The only doubt I have is the high gloss finish, will I be swaying too much from the original appearance with base clear, and will it look drastically worse (too much glare) than what I am accustomed to?

    Does anyone know how good April Gold looks in base clear, and is there anyone who can convince me to stay with acrylic enamel.

    A: I hope you get the answer you want on what the modern finish will look like. I will tell you from the modern paint jobs I’ve seen, the advances in chemistry make it almost essential to invest in the best you can buy. Even “inexpensive” paint will cost a bunch, since most of a quality paint job is in the labor. This is no time to go cheap!

    The original paint GM used was, as I understand, RM acrylic lacquer. That’s what I used to use when painting anything of mine. I am told that I would be wasting my time with that today however, because those paints do not have the same chemical makeup they had back in the day.

    A: I think you are a little confused in what the painter is talking to you about. I think the painter is talking to you about using a basecoat, clearcoat combination. That combination is available in a wide range of types of paint including Lacquer, acrylic enamel, urethane and other high-tech finishes.

    For the record, I would use urethane basecoat / clearcoat. It will cost you $100 to $200 more for the paint (and maybe more for prep) depending on what needs to be done to apply the finish. I’ve been using urethane since 1988 and have had excellent results. It’s extremely durable and will give you a very deep gloss.

    As far as originality, there were no acrylic enamels when our cars were built. It was either lacquer or regular (synthol) enamel which are both inferior finishes from a durability standpoint. I wouldn’t worry about originality of the type of paint unless you are going to a concours event. Just use an original color.

    A: Sanding and polishing the clearcoat will essentially level out the finish. The end result is that you will have a deeper mirror like shine. It is well worth the effort, but if I was going to spend that much, I most certainly would spend the extra on a urethane paint job. By the way, you can sand and polish the paint yourself. It doesn’t take any special talent other than patience, lots of water and a rubber sanding block along with some ultra fine grit paper (600 to 1000 grit). If you decide to do it yourself, go out and buy a book on painting cars that has pictures in it. That way, you’ll learn the tricks before you make a mistake on your fresh paint job. Heck, it’s worth the $30 to learn about paint jobs anyway. You’ll find that that if you bone up before you talk to your painter, you’ll probably get a better paint job at a better price.

    In case you’re wondering, I’ve painted more cars than I care to admit…. and I continue to make my fair share of mistakes. Probably the single biggest problem for a newbie to auto painting is getting the surface prepared properly. In fact, when you look at paint jobs done at the chain body shops, the reason they look “average” is because very little time is put into preparation. A general rule of thumb is that if a cars surface looks imperfect before painting, it will look even worse after painting.

    Sorry if I’m preaching to the choir, but as I said, I’ve made and continue to make my share of mistakes and they are very costly in time and money… So, before you spend any money, read a book on auto painting (and make sure it was printed within the last year as the finishes keep changing). Good luck!!

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Plastic Part Paint Stripping

    Does anyone have any advice for stripping paint off of plastic parts? I attempted to repaint my dash and let’s just say the first attempt didn’t go so well. Can I use off the shelf paint stripper?

    A: Paint stripper is probably too strong. I have used brake fluid on plastic parts in the past. If you can soak it in it, its quick. Other wise, it takes a while.

    A: My brother, a serious plastic model airplane hobbyist, gave me this tip for taking paint off plastic. He said to use Westley’s Bleche-White whitewall/blackwall tire cleaner. You can get this stuff at almost any auto parts store.

    Here’s my testimony: My painter got overspray on my turn signal lenses and on the rubber moldings along the rails for my convertible top. Naturally I was sick when I saw the paint on the turn signal lenses (have you priced 1968 lenses lately?). Anyway….I soaked the parts in the Bleche-White for 24 hours. ALL the paint came off, even the silver paint which is applied by the factory on the lenses. I used an old tooth brush to get the paint out of the various nooks and crannies of the part. The paint came off the rubber pieces just as well. The Bleche-White had absolutely no ill effects on the plastic or rubber parts. I wore rubber gloves when handling the parts in the solution as it is caustic to skin.

    Oh yeah, I masked off my turn signal lenses and painted them with the same silver that’s used on Rally II wheels. They look brand spanking new!

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Plastic Part Painting

    How do you paint plastic pieces? Do I have to strip it first then prime then spray with semi gloss black? What name products should I use? I figure on using spray cans but if that is a bad idea I probably could get a friend to spray it. I need a detailed list of supplies I need and good directions to use.

    A: Painting plastic parts takes a different approach than other stuff. There are special primers,and paints for each type of plastic. First remove all wax and or armoral all with strong degreaser/cleaner. Then wipe down with cheap lacquer thinner a couple of times. This will soften the plastic and make the paint “bite” into the plastic. You can then use the appropriate plastic paint. Spray cans are available from SEM, Mar Hyde, FabriColor, etc. made for hard plastic not just vinyl. This will work much better than ordinary paint and wont flake or peel off.

    A: Don’t forget to make sure you use a LINT FREE cloth for wipping. The softened plastic will want to grab the lint off the cloth, making a real mess.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: POR-15 Application

    Can anyone tell me more about POR-15? Is it black, clear? Can it be painted over?

    A: I used POR-15 on the undercarriage, firewall and frame of my car. It is not as simple as they make it sound to use but is worth it. You must thoroughly clean the surface. Do not use any petroleum based solvent (laquor thinner) because the POR 15 wont stick. The surface must be completely oil free but can have solid rust. Use a metal etcher on all bare metal and scuff any remaining paint. You can brush or spray the finish. If you spray tape off everything within 10 feet because over spray will stick forever!! I have heard that it is difficult to get brush marks to flow on highly visible surfaces. You must recoat in about 4 hours or when the finish is dry but tacky. I did find some problems.

    1. You can not remove POR 15 once it is dry

    2. You must recoat when it is ready-not when you are.

    3. It burns when it gets in your eyes.

    4. I had a problem with the gloss consistency when the finish dried. I have heard that is a typic

    Hope that this helps

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Pulley Color

    I am about to paint the pulleys and power steering pump on my 68. Can some tell me what color to paint them. Were they glossy black or satin black? Are the brackets the same gloss as the pump and pulleys? How about the Harmonic Dampner? Was it blue or black?

    A: Balancer is engine color. Pulleys ,P/S pump, brackets,air cleaner are gloss black.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Special-1

    My body tag for my 1968 Firebird has ‘special-1’ listed where the paint code should be. What does this mean.

    A: This code indicated a Custom Factory Paint was used to paint the car. Pink Mist, Carnival Red, Marigold Yellow, and Windward Blue are some examples offered on the 1968 Firebird series. The 1 indicates the car had a ivory vinyl top if a coupe or a ivory-white convertible top.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • I stand corrected.. my wife says it is a 50’s color from ford called “tropical rose” that is the color she ordered from the factory… had to have it. Lincoln/ford.. all the same to me.. ha, ha. This is the picture she found of the color.

    Attachment

  • Hi,
    my name is Greg and I want to throw a wrench in the works.. ha, ha… I purchased a 1968 “Pink” Firebird from a Lady – Neighbor, was watching and waiting for years for the right day, and finally one day she said it was. She purchased the car direct from the dealer and kept everything – I have it all. The biggest things that made the car “girly” – rear defrost, bench seat, clock, a/c, power windows, power brakes, parchment interior with deluxe door panels, automatic, factory alarm, 350 with a 2 barrel engine but the biggest “girly” feature was the color – on the dealership order form the Car salesman wrote “customer will supply color ” and then a few papers down I found a note given to the dealership, where she order a 1953 Lincoln fuscia “pink”. Now when I bought the car it was a Mary Kay or Pink Mist, as I call it “pepto Bismol” color. The story goes that after 16 years of New York and then coming to Florida and baking in the Florida Sun – the original color turned into an eye sore – still the Original “lady” owner did not want to repaint the car. While on Vacation to New York one year – her family decided to repaint the car as a X-mas present and surprise her. Well, they took it to Electro Bake a local $299.00 “at the time” repaint was put on the car and they went with the Pink Mist – Mary Kay “light pink” color. Thank fully since it was a quick/cheap painter the original color was never touched all over the car “jams, trunk, engine compartment, etc.” Well they pulled the car in the garage and waited for her return and the big reveal when she went to drive it the next day after her trip. From her story and out of the original owners mouth ” I about crapped myself and threw up” She was very upset with the family and it ruined many X-mas’s to come and she never drove the car since that day. Like I said – I watched this car everytime the garage door was open, looked for it everyday on the way to work and again on the way home. Asked several times, sat thru many a story, only to be told “NO” over and over again “maybe one day, but not now” . When one day came I brought her home and now have her back to her original color with the help of many paint chips and research on this 1953 Lincoln Fuschia color. she is still in my garage and finally got the engine up and going with the help of a new carb, gas and fuel drained and total go thru of plugs, wires, etc.

    So all this being said.. what do you think… 1 of 1 ????

    yes the trim plate on the Firewall says “spec” in the paint spot… I have tons of documents from her, the title is still in her name so original owner… she even had the key card, original keys..she brought this car back to the dealership for almost everything except tires and oil changes. Most of the receipts from the dealership where for the factory installed alarm.

    The only thing I improved on was the hood I put the 400 hood on with the scoops to kinda help put some muscle behind that fuscia – even thought the heart of the car is still powered by the original 350. “don’t worry” kept the original hood with the pepto pink color and if you scrape the paint – reveal the true factory color underneath !!!

    I am going to do the PHS thing.. for sure.. but any comments and or ideas on this lil car… I love the stories and history part, are appreciated, good or bad.

    will find better pictures.. and post…

    Attachment

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Two-tone Paint

    Where does the two tone split the colors?

    A: Two-tone cars look just like vinyl top cars, minus the vinyl. They paint the roof one color, and the rest of the car the other color. The stainless vinyl top moldings are used for the color break. On the firewall dataplate, both colors are listed. If you’ve ever noticed a single color non-vinyl top car, the paint code is stamped twice, meaning upper and lower color, and vinyl top cars have the vinyl top code at the PNT designation.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Under Body Color

    Do cars come black underneath, or painted? All my vehicles are body color underneath, w/ stuff bolted to it. Under the body paint there is black paint followed by bare metal. Why would they take the time to mask it and paint it black, when there’s someone under there w/ body color already in the gun.

    A: The body shells were painted before assembly, and the overspray was so heavy you would believe they intended to paint the whole bottom. Maybe some were heavier than others, but all I have seen were still only covered enough to be considered overspray. As you rub on it with steel wool or 400 wet sandpaper, you will see it comes off like overspray even though the color is fairly vivid, leaving the solidly applied black.

    A: theres a more logical explanation to all of this. OVERSPRAY. It is red because your car was red. It wont have the same gloss,color or texture as the upper body parts because it was never intended to be painted body color. Overspray will be evident even upwards into the transmission tunnel altho it probably wont reach the middle of it. I have a Meridian turquoise and 2 solar red 68s that have the same overspray patterns on the underside. The meridian turquoise one was Ziebarted (Paraffin based under coating that looks like beeswax) when new, which perfectly preserved the whole under side of the car. There is no evidence of any red primer on any 68s Ive ever had or worked on. Look under the gas tank as this is usually shielded from most of the harsh elements. You will find the same red overspray there.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Using POR-15

    I’m considering doing the front rails and vaious suspension bits. How did you prep. the parts ?? Sandblast ?? Did you use the POR topcoat or just the rust-preventer ??

    A: The POR-15 vendor I deal with strongly suggests sand or bead blasting items in preparation for painting for the smoothest finish, and best adhesion. If you do media blast, then the metal prep is not required. I’ve also wire brushed or sanded a number of parts or surfaces that weren’t practical to blast. For those items, I did use the metal prep to etch the metal, and to further kill/stop any rust.

    I have found that if the POR-15 paint is used as a top coat, it will discolor if exposed to UV light. Most parts under the car are not a problem, but parts of my subrame are showing the dulling/discolorization now. This shouldn’t apply to their Chassis Black paint. But I’ve found that this paint must be sprayed on. My experience using a brush was less than great.

    As for brush marks, this is a problem. Using a foam brush cuts this down, but the brush has a tendency to fall apart eventually. For parts that I want a very smooth finish, I coat with POR-15 (two coats), then dust with a primer. Once the POR-15 has cured, I then do at least another coat of primer, then spray a top coat of the final cover using an enamel or other paint of choice. This usually covers the imperfections left by the POR-15, and prevents the UV discolorization.

    Prior to getting my car painted, I removed the subframe, cleaned and prepped it, and painted (using a brush) it with POR-15. It came out quite nice, and then I bolted it back on and sent the car to the body shop. When it came back, the subframe was covered with sanding debris and overspray from the bodywork process. I had to sand that off and coat again with POR-15 to get it smooth again. The Catch 22 there was that since the new front sheet metal was bolted on the car at the body shop, the only time to prep the subframe was before the body work. I think that I should have pressed the shop to take greater care in protecting the subframe. Now I know better.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Plating Parts

    What parts can be plated?

    A: Parts that can be done are black oxide, black phosphate, gray phosphate, tin plating,to some degree white(silver) cad. Contact Carolina Chemco at 864.246.3836 for more info and to order stuff. Also Eastwood carries some stuff alto rather high in price.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Rear Bumper and Tail Lights (2)

    Q: Brake Lights Stay On

    I have an annoying problem: I changed my master cylinder due to a leak. The operation was a complete success, with no extra parts left over! When I drive the car, and then stop, my brake lights are on. I’ll tap them, they go out and stay out. What’s up?

    A: Two possibilities. There is a return spring on the peddal and if it came off for some reason while you were replacing the master cylinder (or maybe it wasn’t on from before) then you are relying on the internal springs of the master cylinder to push your pedal all the way back and not quite making it.

    The other possiblility is that you just have to adjust the switch a little bit forward. It’s on the peddal assembly under the dash.

    A: It’s probably the plunger switch down under your dash.

    A: Have you checked your brake light switch on the pedal assembly? There is a switch under the dash that turns the lights on until the brake pedal come up high enough to contact the switch and interrupt the circuit. You will either need to adjust the switch down a bit to insure contact with the brake pedal, or you may need to move the brake pushrod to a higher hole on the brake pedal if the pedal isn’t coming up far enough to touch the switch.

    My guess is that since you can get the brake lights to go off by taping the pedal, it will require only a small adjustment of the switch to make things right.

    A: Are you talking about the brake lights on the back of the car or the brake warning light on the dash? Others have addressed the brake lights on the back so I won’t go there. If it’s the brake warning light then the problem is in you splitter valve below the master cylinder. Most likely, it air in the line causing it to go out of balance. If this is the case, you must bleed the brakes again to remove all air from the lines.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • I had a similar problem and what I found was the bracket that holds the brake light switch was actually moving slightly as it had metal fatigue. I removed the brake light switch and used some JB Weld on the bracket to firm it up. Let it set for a day, bracket was now firm and then reinstalled brake switch. Adjusted the brake light switch so it was total depressed when brake was in resting position. Issue went away.

  • In regards to the previous post “Brake lights staying on or not working” I am going through the same issues. I noticed on my Camaro that the brake pedal moves left to right which indicates to me that the bushings in the brake arm assembly or worn. This is causing the brake arm not to center on the brake light switch (button) when the spring pulls the pedal back. I am going to attempt to adjust the brake switch for now until I investigate the bushing issue more. My brake light in the instrument panel stays on all the time too. I replaced the brakes, wheel cylinders and lines and bled the brakes twice. I will try a third time and maybe that will work.

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Tail Light Problem

    I am having a lot of problems with my tail lights. All the problems started after one of my bulbs burnt out and I tried to replace them. Any ideas?

    A: I guess I better go back to lightbulb school, or get glasses. I did not realize that the wrong bulb in the wrong socket would make the light do so many weird things. But as always, thanks to your suggestions, I solved it half way through ripping th dash apart.

    A: Let me guess, you found an 1156 single where an 1157 double filament should have been?

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Sheet Metal (9)

    Q: Bare Metal Panel Preparation

    I just bought some brand new metal panels for my car. Do I need to do anything to prepare the pans for priming? What type of primer and paint should I use? What do I do about the paint that burns/peels off when I weld?

    A: Clean the bare metal with lacquer thinner (the type you would use to clean a paint gun). This will remove all of the machine oil coating. Then, use a self etching primer. If you want to install them before painting you can. It’s just been easier for me to hit them with paint and then later retouch them as needed.

    I usually do all my cutting and trimming before priming, then tape off the area I plan to weld and prime and paint. After installation, clean the area with a light sand paper, then thinner, self etching primer (I like the aerosol cans), and paint. If your painting the whole car, It may be easier to wait on the paint.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Convertible Rear Quarter Panel for 1968

    I have come to the conclusion that I am going to have to replace the Right Rear Quarter Panel on my 1968 Convertible. Now the search begins for a suitable replacement. Any information in locating a RR Quarter for a 1968 Convertible would be greatly appreciated. Has anyone tried using a Camaro Quarter?

    A:
    …You have a few choices:
    1) Use a factory Coupe (used) Quarter Panel
    2) Repro Patch Panels
    3) Repro Full Quarters (available yet ?)
    4) Factory 1967 Camaro Quarter Panel (NOS)- Coupe

    *Still readily available despite being discontinued several years ago thanks to secondary ‘dealers’ who stashed them for investments*

    Finding a used original Conv. Quarter Panel will not be an easy task. However, finding a used Coupe Quarter Panel (relatively rust free) shouldn’t be that difficult Best bet is check with the South West Wrecking Yards (Stan’s Boneyard). Obviously, no matter what you do, there will be ‘fitting’ and finishing required. The NOS Camaro Quarter Panel will physically fit however, you’ll have to graft in the Louvered area and cut out the Marker Light hole. What you choose to do for replacing the Quarter Panel depends on how picky you are and what degree of correctness you’re seeking. If you want a factory look, seamless patch job, you may want to consider using a rust free (used) original 1968 Firebird Coupe Quarter Panel, cutting off the Sail Panel and having it butt-welded on to your car. If you simply want your car to look nice from the outside and could careless about ‘seams’ inside the trunk, use the patch panels.

    A: I owned a 1968 400 convertible that I installed camaro coupe quarters back in 1983. It was a lot of work, requiring additional seams in several places. Not only do you have to cut off the sail panel and add in the stamped section for the chevrons, the quarter window reveal area is different from coupe to convertible. That is the area the outer window weatherstrip attached to, and it was different in height, width, angle, and length. That dictated a seam be added somewhere below it. I chose to add a seam about 1-1/2″ to 2″ below, in the concave area just above the corner/edge of the rear fender. It was a bear to get the shape right and make it work, and when I sold the car a couple years later, there was some cracking starting to show, as this area of the body flexes more than I anticipated.

    If there’s ANY way to find a convertible quarter, even a camaro (requiring a patch for the chevrons), that will make for a FAR better job in the long run, in my humble opinion.

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Fender Alignments

    I can not get my fenders to align properly. Anyone have any tricks?

    A: Two tricks that you need to do a fender alignment properly.

    1. With fenders off the front end will sag, as fenders are a major part of front end structural support. Support the subframe and body so that there is no sag in the subframe and firewall before bolting the fenders back on. Also make sure the frame is aligned with the body via a 5/8 in rod thru the alignment hole in the front frame to body mount.

    2. The fender fits best at top if it is stretched a little more than the shape it has when off the vehicle. Get your gap right at the top and put spacers in the bottom to spread until the center crease lines up with door. Be sure and do this with no load on the subframe and body.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Floor Pan Replacement

    I am about ready to replace the floor pans in my Firebird. Anything special I need to do or suggestions for completing this task.

    A: I’m no expert, but I did replace the floor pans on my 1968 firebird. Some of the things I learned are:

    • Do one side at a time to keep the body straight. If you have a convertible, weld in some temporary supports from the dash to the rear seat. (Angle iron or square tubing)

    • Cut around the forward body mount brace and use that to locate that corner of the floor.

    • Cut around the extra bracing for the leaf spring front mount, and use that to locate the back of the floor.

    • The seat support has about a million spot welds, and you have to take that off to get to some of the spot welds for the body mount which is under it.

    • Measure the distance from the old floor to the top of the door sill or to the bottom of the rocker panel before cutting out the floor and use that dimension to locate the outboard side of the new one.

    • There are a couple of factory holes in the transmission hump which can be used as reference points to locate that edge. I left 3-4″ overlap so I could move the floor pan around, and to maintain the strength of the transmission hump without the old floor.

    • Set the new floor on top of the old one and mark the edge with a soapstone, then cut 3-4″ below the line, going around the aforementioned items.

    • It is easy for the floor to twist and get away from being level, so check that often while welding.

    • Plus the basics: tack weld in various areas, and move around a lot, so as not to warp the floor. Seal the seams when you are done with seam sealer, available from various suppliers.

    Again, I am no expert, and you may get better advice on this board to be 100% factory correct.

    A: I’m not an expert but I’ve done a couple of 1969 floor pans… One coupe and one convertible. First thing you need to no is that the convertible will be much more difficult than the coupe. When I did mine, I left the belly brace ( the brace that is underneath the car) in place. You may also want to support the car in to keep it from buckling in the middle. A brace at the top of the door between the door jam on each side is best. Do one side at a time to keep as much support a possible. After this I used these procedures:

    • TAKE NOTE OF THE LOCATION OF THE GAS AND BRAKE LINES IF THIS ISN’T A FRAME OFF RESTORATION.

    • prime and paint new pan.

    • removed the seat pedestal.

    • removed the rear seat floor brace (the angle piece connecting the tunnel to the rear jam).

    • remove bottom of old floor pan and clean up belly brace (take note of the different support pieces that are welded to the original pan. remove as much old metal as the pan will cover but leave these supports in place).

    • set new pan in place and scribe a line around the top of the pan onto the old sheet metal (make sure it sits tight on belly brace, use screws if necessary).

    • trim excess metal approx one inch below line.
    • re-install new pan and re-check scribe line. (make adjustments as needed).

    • while pan is in place, mark seat belt location, rear sub-frame attachment point and the different brace locations from underneath the car.

    • once your satisfied w/ fit, trim to 1/2″ of scribe line

    • cut holes for seat belt and frame attach point.

    • I drill holes in the pan to allow me to spot weld through the pan to the different brackets located on the bottom of the car.

    • install pan and weld (tack weld all the way around about 4″ apart then tack in between first welds until welds are 1 to 2 inches apart then weld solid).

    • re-install rear brace.

    • reinstall seat pedestal.

    • repeat for other side.

    • Be sure to caulk area between the new pan and the inner rocker panel.

    • TAKE YOUR TIME.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Floor Pan Replacement

    I’ve got some rusted floor pans front and rear, both sides. Going to pick up some replacements. I’m no welder, so I was just going to have a local welding shop do the job.

    Any advice or do’s and don’ts? Brake lines, cables, fuel lines? Welding scars or sealant?

    A: When it comes to floor pans, there are a couple different types. Most pans are designed to be dropped in and welded from the top. The rocker panel side is turned up. These are the simplest to install. All you do is use a air chisel to cut along the edge of the pan, flatten out what’s left and drop in the new pan. You can make a scribed line all the way around the pan then pull it back out and trim to 1/2″ to 3/8″ to the edge, less if your brave. Then simply just use sheet metal screw to hold everything in place and weld it up. I weld them as solid as possible and then use 3M seam sealer.

    The other type has the rocker panel edge rolled down like the original. These aren’t really any harder to install (except for maybe on a convertible) but do require some welding from underneath. The removal of the old pan is the essentially the same. The biggest difference is spot welding the replacement along the original pinch weld seam. From the bottom, they look more like the originals. That is IF care is taken to hide the other seams. I try to help this out by making the repair seam that runs along the tunnel as high as possible. Don’t forget to leave holes for the seat belts.

    Removal of the seat pedestal is the same for both replacement pans. I prefer to cut the whole pedestal out then try to remove as much of the old pan as possible. I suppose they could just be trimmed and cleaned and welded in place with the old pan on the bottom but be sure the original pan imprint is a very close match. Otherwise your seat may not sit level or square. Be sure to locate the hole for the subframe bolt.

    As far a repair projects go, this is probably a easy as they come. even if you don’t do it perfectly, almost no one will ever really see it. If done with care, it’s even hard to tell when the car is up on a lift. You may want to search the archives. I’ve been through this process before and I believe Geoff posted some of the instructions.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Floor Pan Replacement (revisited)

    I have just found that I need to replace the passenger side front floor in my 68 and wondered if anyone had any experience with this procedure. It looks as though I must remove the seat attachment structure then go at the floor after that is removed. My question is what type of tool is best suited to break the spot welds and other weldments? Cold chisel? Small explosive charge? Any words of wisdom would be greatly appreciated…Oh, also I have a weld pak 100 flux core welder would that work for the welding?

    A: I know there will be others responding to this question…. and I believe there is more than one way to perform this task. First off, if it is a convert, then you have more chances of twisting things out of place. I’m about 75% done with doing total floor pan reconstruction on both sides on my convert. I have taken an excessive and some would say obsessive amount of time in doing mine, but then I’m trying to make mine look close to factory both inside and out. My only advice to you is to support the vehicle carefully and with equal pressure on both sides. Consider welding in temporary braces if you have any doubts. I did not, but mine is just a shell and I have very carefully supported the shell in critical points. That may not be proper for your situation.

    Go slowly, AND PLEASE… CAREFULLY, mark the alignment of the seat support and frame brace before you remove them. Measuring afterwards is very difficult. Cut carefully and plan on it taking longer than you thought. As far as cutting goes, use a good spot weld cutter on the seat support brace and frame brace (underneath the seat support brace). Use an air chisel on parts of the old floor pan that you want to rip to shreds and be careful not to damage anything else with the air chisel. Once the floor is out, clean everything up carefully and get all of the rust off of the braces and rockers before repainting and re-welding. ONE BIG CONSIDERATION…..

    Examine the front floor board supports carefully. Mine were really bad due to rust. I had to remove them, reconstruct them with heavy gauge steel and reweld them in. It was really time consuming, but I won’t have to worry about doing it again.

    A: You’ve already received a lot of good advice so I won’t put you through a lot of details, just some details.

    If your planning on removing the seat pedestal, keep in mind the damage your going to do the existing floor pan. The spot welds run across the front, sides and back and as mentioned, there are also a couple you can only get to from the bottom unless you disassemble the pedestal (which I don’t recommend). Even if you only need – of the floor pan, consider buying the whole unit. This will give you enough metal to repair any damage cause by the seat pedestal removal.

    When you purchase your replacement pan, be aware that most replacement pans have the lip on the rocker panel side folded “up” te make welding easier. If you are doing a partial pan and you have to repair the rocker area, you’ll want a pan that folds “down” to match the original. I’ve only seen these sold by a company called C.A.R.S. Inc. (714-525-1956 California or 248-398-7100 Michigan: www.carsinc.com)

    I just finished replacing my third set of floors. The easiest way I’ve found to remove them is to drill the spot welds along of the top rocker panel then just cut the pan across the front, back, and tunnel. This will allow you to easily remove the pedestal from the car. Then just separate the old floor pan rom the pedestal. The replacement pan is designed to cover the area above the pedestal so repair is easy. The replacement bent to match the original bends so really, the pedestal can only go back to it’s original location. Plus, the spot welds on the rocker side will act as and additional locator point.

    Mock fit the panel in it’s final location and set the pedestal in place BEFORE welding. Use self taping sheet metal screws to hold it secure while fitting but pre-drill the outer layer (usually the replacement panel) first.

    Q2: I found your advise about removing the pedestal with the pan to be sound. Although I have not removed the floor yet I am planning on doing it as you described. If I might pose a few questions: along the front, back, tunnel side, and rocker to what elevation or point do I cut? Along the front I see the over lap, do I cut such that the overlap is removed? Rocker side: I have the turned down replacement pan I purchased at Classic Ind., seems to be perfect match, Do I drill out the spot welds along the flange underneath the car where the two meet? Looks like that might be the spot. Finally, along the back of the pedestal how far behind it can I cut? Directly at the termination of the pedestal rear sheet metal?

    I really appreciate this site and all who contribute! I could reinvent the wheel or I could just ask you all to help. And you do very much thanks again

    A: The cut along the front depends on two things, the length of your replacement pan and the amount of cancer. If you have a full length pan that extends up the kick board then you can remove all the metal up to the top of the pan.

    As far as the seam, a full length pan will cover this area. The full pan only mimics what was originally two pieces. The thing to look for in this area is the lower firewall extends under the toe kick. I usually cut around this piece and lay the new pan over the top of it. This way you can’t get the pan too low. You may have to trib. your pan on the rocker side or open the pinch weld at this point because the pan is originally sandwiched between the lower firewall and the rocker.

    I would not try to remove the spot welds along the bottom of the rocker. Instead, I would use a air chisel on the bottom side along the 90 degree bend. I usually start at the front and rip the old floor front to back. When the old floor is removed, hammer the edge of the old floor flat against the edge of the inner rocker. When you go to install the new pan, pre-drill the lip of the pan to mimic the spot welds along the bottom edge where it will attach to the inner rocker panel and weld.

    As far as how far to cut behind the seat pedestal, again it depends on how much new metal you’ve purchased. If it is just a partial pan, find a couple of common points to measure. If your new pan has a pre-drilled hole where the rear sub-frame bolts enters, use this point and compare it to the original. If this hole is not there, look at the tunnel side and note the slight bend. This should also be evident on the new pan and is also a good reference point.

    As far as the elevation of your cuts, once you remove your seat pedestal, lay the new pan in place and trace a line around the whole thing then, DON’T CUT ABOVE THIS LINE.

    Hope all this helps. Let us know if you have more questions,

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Floor Pan Replacement on Convertible

    I got me floor pans for the conv.. Here we go … Get ready for the questions. Going to pull the seats and carpet out this weekend to take a peek.

    1. Does that Scott Jason camaro restoration book have any good info on this subject?

    2. I have a Fisher Body book for 1968 I find it screchty on the Fbody data covers all body styles is there a manual in print just on the F body,

    3. Anyone ever done this with out taking the subframe out of the car?

    4. Seat perches have to come out?

    5. How about that cross member on the tunnel for convertibles. I ain’t seen a car yet with that installed. Does it bolt to the floor pans? No threaded wholes in the new pans.

    6. Body bushings bolt to the floor pans … right. No holes. Logic tells me that fabricaing and welding the pan in takes some BFH and that you measure and align after all is welded in place. How? Measurements?

    The pans are one piece left and right from Classic Idustries. I beleive the sticker says the company that made them are American Design. Anyone had any expreince with these? Should I stop right now and send them back? Fit like _hit. Knowledge is everything. I am not a body man. I plan on doing everything but cutting them out and putting them in. I will find a body guy to do this. I need to arm my self so I can ask the right questions and tell if the job is going to be done right. This is not a concours restoration I’m looking to get it done quickly and cheaply.

    A: Just a couple of things that may help…

    Floor pans can be replaces without removing the sub-frame. I’ve done it on both a convertible and coupe without any problems. I also highly recommend additional bracing for the convertible. Also, take measurements of the door gap BEFORE you rip out anything. Check these measurements BEFORE you weld anything.

    Coupes are pretty easy and straight forward. Refer to the FAQ for a previous write-up.

    Convertibles are a little more difficult because of the belly brace but once you remove the seat pedestal and the old pan, it will help you align the new pan. Remember the additional brace that is just in front of the rear seat hooks.

    On both installations, I used the “turned up” style of replacement. This makes welding easy as it’s all done from the top. I used tube style body caulk to fill the cap at the bottom. Once painted it looks OK. While my car was up on the rack getting a new exhaust, I received a lot of good comments on the pans from a guy who runs a local restoration shop.

    There are pans available that turn down to mimic to old pans. I found some from a vendor at a swap meet. I don’t have his card but I think a company called C.A.R.S. (www.carsinc.com) carries them. These will allow you to make the pinch-weld below the rocker panel like the factory.

    I pre-drilled all my welding hole and the rear frame rail mounting hole before I welded the pan. First I trim and install the pan with sheet metal screws until I’m satisfied with the fit. I temporally re-mount the seat pedestal also using sheet-metal screws. Once satisfied, I use a pencil to trace around the bottom brace and through the seat pedestal. This gives you an idea where to drill the spot-weld holes and where to drill the hole for the body to frame-rail bolt.

    After I’ve drilled all my holes, I remount the pan, seat pedestal, and frame-rail bushing and bolt, check my measurements and weld. If your door opening seems to have sagged a bit, try to position some jack stands under the rocker panel closer to the front of the car to allow more weight on the rear. Do this slowly with a floor jack under the rear-end.

    A: 4. Seat perches have to come out?

    If I recall correctly,which I do,them there “perches” are spot welded in,and as such can be hacked out. Thats what I did,I never even considered going the route of removing the sub frame, though if you do,that would be a good time to get some new body bushings.

    A: I have just finished putting floors in a 1968 Convertible. You can’t see all the areas that may be rusted from the inside. Get and Ice pick or something sharp to poke with.

    3. since the subframe bolts to the seat perches I don’t see a way to get them out with out removing the subframe.
    4. If you are going to replace the whole pan and I would suggest that, then yes they will have to come out. There is also a reinforcement plate at the rear of the floor that will have to come out too. Under this is one place I found a lot of rust that I couldn’t see before I removed it. There was also a lot under the seat perches. The Hooks for the rear seat will also pose a problem. I cut the old floor and new floor around them and left them attached. My floors were fine in that area.
    5. The Convertible Plate bolts to the frame not the floor pan.
    6. I cut the holes in the pans for the subframe after I had the seat perches welded in. I drilled and small hole from the inside through the mounting nuts fastened to the seat perches to mark the center of the holes and then used a cut off toll to make them large enough.

    One other area that was a problem was that the new floor turns up or in on the out side of the floors and the originals turned down or out. I did different things with each side of mine and wasn’t happy with either so I will leave that up to you.

    A: 1. Nope, Jason Scott says nothing, however the list archives contain very good explanations of what to do.

    4. Definitely remove seat perches and rear reinforement plate, these covered a lot of hidden rust on my car. These can generally be repaired and reused.

    5. The conv. reinforement plate bolts to the belly-brace, not the floor. It is much easier if you can remove the floor and leave all underfloor bracing in place. This assumes that your floor is rusting from the inside out and the underfloor bracing is good.

    I used the Classic pans and even though I haven’t welded yet, trial fit is fine. Seems that SFH will suffice.

    Again read the archives for the old posts.

    A: On the Passenger side I cut the old pan at the edge of the Rocker. This tended to leave a gap where the new floor meets the Rocker from the bottom. It has the potential to get and hold water. I plan to seal it with seam sealer. On the drivers side I cut the old floor about 1/2 to 3/4 of an inch from the rocker and set the new floor on it and welded it to it. This creates a better seam from the bottom but creates a possible problem in areas where it was hard or impossible to weld. The cross member and the support on the bottom Front of the floor.

    Another thing I did was to do one floor pan at a time. This was a suggestion I read earlier on this list. This was because the floor is such a big part of the support for the car.

    I have mine turned on its side to make it easier to work on.

    A: I’ll answer what I can:

    3. My subframe was out
    4. Take out the seat perches
    5. Convertible reinforcement plate bolts to the extra bracing that only the convertible has (under the floor boards)
    6. I measured and then drilled the holes after installation. The subframe “nut” is loose and can move around a little. The hole has clearance so the bolt and nut can be move for alignment.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • I’ve installed a complete new floor pan in my 68 convertible. I notice that the floor pan at the seat perch area is sloped from the transmission tunnel to the rockers on both sides. I have about 1/2 elevation difference across the seat perch. Is this normal?

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Interchangeability of the Body Panels

    Are the front fenders from camaro are interchangeable with firebird?? any other major componentes??? what work needs to be done to adapt a hardtop quarter panel to a convertable..

    A: Front fenders for 67/68 Firebirds/Camaros are interchangeable but the turn signal cut-outs are different. You’ll need to do some mild welding to make your turn signals work.

    Quarters are not interchangeable due mostly to the chevrons on the Firebird quarters. Fenders for 69s are not interchangeable.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Quarter Panel Fit for Quarter and Full

    Have heard a few things about partial rear 1/4s vs full gm 1/4s (camaro only?). I haven’t heard very good things about partial 1/4s-alignment plus problems with Firebird louvers behind doors.

    A: The aftermarket rear quarters will work with a fair amount of body work. I understand that convertibles represent more of a challange to get them to work. In somecases, rust free used quarters from the Southwest are a good alternative.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Sheet Metal
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Trunk (4)

    Q: Luggage Rack

    Was the luggage rack an option available from the factory? My buddies Firebird has one on the roof and he insists it came from the factory that way.

    A: The luggage rack was dealer installed only. I have only seen pictures with it mounted on the trunk and not the roof so I am curious also.

    A: It was indeed trunk mounted only on the Firebirds. It was the same as the Corvette except a minor change on the feet. I have a friend that has one that came on his 400 convert. He has removed it and put a deck lid without holes. He says the mounts started leaking, and was really hard to clean around. Speaking of obscure options anyone got the snow ski mounts?

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Trunk
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Deck Lid Spoiler

    Did pre 1969 Birds have a spoiler option from the factory? I thought that it was only available for 1st Gen Birds on the 1969 TA.

    A: 1) No, the only way to get a spoiler on a 1967 or 1968 Firebird was to get a Camaro spoiler and add it on. Some dealers were willng to do this to deliver a car new this way, but that will never be “factory installed”.

    2) The only way to get a spoiler on a 1969 Firebird was to order the Trans Am option, there was no separate option available for a spoiler only. Same again, though, you could get it through parts after April 1969 and add it on, or use the wider 1969 Camaro spoiler aquired through the parts department.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Trunk
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Trunk Floor Replacements

    I am looking into purchasing the trunk floor for my 1967. I noticed differences in prices from $69 to about $105, from different companies. If anyone has ordered one that they would recommend please let me know.

    A: The trunk floors vary in size. The larger ones will go all the way up the hump between the shock towers. These cost a little more but it eliminated the weld in the reinforcing ribs on the incline (which makes it harder to smooth and hide). There are also several pieces that you may or may not need. Originally, the trunks were installed in the factory as one piece. This is not practical for a rebuild because the pieces need to be small enough to fit into the trunk opening. This is why a “kit” will include the trunk floor, trunk foor extension, and two trunk floor reinforcement ribs (the pieces on the bottom of the floor above the gas tank).

    Additionally, you may consider the trunk “drop offs” and “shock towers” depending on how severe the rust is on your project. If all you need is a new floor, you may still need new reinforcing ribs. Look at what is included in a kit and the cost of the components separately and compare.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Trunk
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Trunk Paint

    I’m about to start grinding out my trunk for restoration. I have two conflicting records on the trunk area. One calls for a rubberized black coating. The other refers to the GM’s spackle paint. Can someone tell what the original appearance of the trunk area was?

    A: My 1969 has spatter paint. Be sure to clear coat it when your done.

    A: Just a quick note. Be careful when you spray around and over the wheel wells. I went wild when I did my trunk and gummed up the rear window mechanisms.

    A: I hope you remembered to order the clear coat that goes over the spatter paint. The spatter paint is a water based type stuff, and needs the clear coat to make it work. Also, the surface needs to be a little rough for the spatter paint to stick. If the surface is too smooth, the spatter paint will sag, leaving the smooth surface to show. Get everything super clean.

    Take your time. Between coats needs time to cure, especially the clear. They told me 3 cans would do it. I would have 4 on hand. 1 can of clear is enough. Mask off good before you clear coat. That stuff goes everywhere, and will make you goofy. I think the marker light assembly should have a little overspray??

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Trunk
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Vinyl Roof and Trim Moldings (5)

    Q: Vinyl Top Installation at Factory

    Just a note about the Vinyl Top removal. It was mentioned earlier this year that a lot of the time cars got Vinyl tops due to welding problems or other flaws in the roof. Also, if they knew the car was getting the top, they would not do as good of a job.

    A: No, the vinyl top was a scheduled option. The reason for this was special studs were welded to the body that hold the moldings trim that goes around the vinyl. These are the same studs you would find around the windshield and rear window frame that hold the window molding in place. As the car passed us we would lower a jig that clamped to the roof that had guides to insert the stud welding gun. There were several different types of jigs depending if the car had a full vinyl top, Landau top, etc. The jig did not guide the studs around the window frames however. These we installed free hand and you tell this because the studs are not evenly spaced nor was the distance from the edge of the flat surface of the roof.

    If a vinyl top was added after passing through the body shop, it was done at the dealer. There was no facility to add it at the factory.

    The solder and grind procedure used on cars without vinyl tops was an art that took a significant amount of time for a worker to develop (I know, I did this job too). If you run your hand across the joint between the upper quarter panel and roof seam, you may feel a wave and notice small grind marks next to the window drip rail. You may also notice a build up of lead solder around the end of the drip rail. The same is true for the front window posts. This is the trademark of a new worker who did get much training. Training was on-the-job and there weren’t extra cars to practice on, so you just did the best job you could. As the car progressed through the body shop, inspectors would look at the grind job. If it was really bad, they would have people called “metal finishers” touch up the solder joints as it passed finial inspection point. The metal finishers also touched up any other body flaws the inspectors caught.

    A: When I worked at the GM Fremont, CA. plant I worked in the body shop where the car’s shell was welded together. For cars that didn’t get a vinyl top, we filled and grinded smooth the weld joint between the top of the quarter panel and roof. The windshield post joint was also soldered.

    The cars that got a vinyl top had filler similar to bondo put in. Why this was done I don’t know but was probably related to cost. I’m mentioning this for those who are planing on permanently removing the vinyl top. You’ll be faced with re-doing this seam.

    I have 2 orginal vinyl top cars here ,a 1968 and 1969 and both have body solder at the pillars and the sail panels. However they didnt have the rain gutter filled with seam sealer. I did have alot of work to the 1969 at the upper 1/4 seams to fix the poor body work as the vinyl isnt going back on it.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Vinyl Top Removal

    I have a 1968 FB 400. It was originally green with a black vinyl top. Its now white with white top. Does anyone know whether I can remove the vinyl top and repaint as a hard top. I want black with purple glitter.

    A: You can remove the top and repaint but youre probably going to be disappointed when you do . Every one I ve taken off has had some sort of problem hiding under neath. the factory didnt do a very good job of body work or paint under when they knew a vinyl top was going on it. hence youll find lousy lead joints at the top of quarters and maybe even some rust you didnt know you had. I retired my first 1968 that ive had since 1970 due to severe rust under the top. Its in the back forty and I looked the other day and it looked like it had T-Tops.I am currently restoring 2 other vinyl top cars ,a 1968 which was painted over and Im putting the top back on, and a 1969 that is being painted. My advise is this. If you take the top off for good then WELD the holes closed and use no bondo. The tits that hold trim on can be hacksawed off and carefully ground smooth . use a mininum amount of heat and cool carefully or youll warp the panels. take the whole top area down to bare metal and metal prep , then use a good urethane or epoxy primer. Good luck

    A: Anything you do to deviate from stock is going to dramatically decrease the value of your bird. If you are concerned with resale, restore it. If you are going to be buried in it go balls out and paint the whole thing black with purple glitter, and put a 455 in it.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Vinyl Top Replacement

    I stripped off the vinyl off my 1968 and,after getting it down to bare metal,was wondering:
    1- whats the best undercoat? I was thinking along the lines of a rust inhibitor topped off with rust-oleum.
    2-whats the adhesive of choice?

    A: When I worked at the GM plant in Fremont in the 70’s, cars that were to get vinyl tops got the same rust preventative (i.e. tank dunk!), primer and paint on the roof as the rest of the body. The difference was the weld seam joining the quarter panel to the roof. Cars that did not get vinyl tops had this seam filled with lead solder. I know because I was the guy who would grind the solder smooth (that job was great for you long term health – not!). Cars with vinyl tops had the seam filled with a bondo like product, after the area was painted. My father, who opened the Fremont plant in ’62, said they did it this way ever since they started putting vinyl tops on cars there.

    A: In this game never say two words: never and always…. Ive got 2 vinyl top cars in my garage right now, both have been stripped to bare metal and both HAD body solder at the 1/4s and at the front pillars. I seriously doubt that these are the only ones that factory did this to. Ive had other vinyl top cars and all that I can remember had body solder in all joints. What is apparent is the lack of detail on finishing any body solder under the top.

    A: I worked in a body shop for awhile and talked to the owner about this very subject due to the fact that my 1968 had a vinyl top. he said they were bare metal at the factory when the tops were put on,if you put too much stuff up there the top may come off.I would just use eastwoods coroless primer under the top,this will give you great rust protection and should not cause problems.be sure to scuff the primer alittle(just alittle,do not go through it…lol).this guy does resto work and insurance work,when I was there he had a 65 GTO conv. body hanging on the wall!!!! it was going through a frame off resto,I was in heaven….lol I did not work on that car,but did work on a 1969 camaro and a 57 chevy that already had pictures taken and was going to be in hot rod when done,don’t know if it ever was,but I would like to see it finished. well,hope this helps out.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Vinyl Top Replacement

    I stripped off the vinyl off my 1968 and,after getting it down to bare metal,was wondering-
    1- whats the best undercoat? I was thinking along the lines of a rust inhibitor topped off with rust-oleum.
    2-whats the adhesive of choice?

    A: When I worked at the GM plant in Fremont in the 70’s, cars that were to get vinyl tops got the same rust preventative (i.e. tank dunk!), primer and paint on the roof as the rest of the body. The difference was the weld seam joining the quarter panel to the roof. Cars that did not get vinyl tops had this seam filled with lead solder. I know because I was the guy who would grind the solder smooth (that job was great for you long term health – not!). Cars with vinyl tops had the seam filled with a bondo like product, after the area was painted. My father, who opened the Fremont plant in ’62, said they did it this way ever since they started putting vinyl tops on cars there.

    A: In this game never say two words: never and always…. Ive got 2 vinyl top cars in my garage right now, both have been stripped to bare metal and both HAD body solder at the 1/4s and at the front pillars. I seriously doubt that these are the only ones that factory did this to. Ive had other vinyl top cars and all that I can remember had body solder in all joints. What is apparent is the lack of detail on finishing any body solder under the top.

    A: I worked in a body shop for awhile and talked to the owner about this very subject due to the fact that my 1968 had a vinyl top. he said they were bare metal at the factory when the tops were put on,if you put too much stuff up there the top may come off.I would just use eastwoods coroless primer under the top,this will give you great rust protection and should not cause problems.be sure to scuff the primer alittle(just alittle,do not go through it…lol).this guy does resto work and insurance work,when I was there he had a 65 GTO conv. body hanging on the wall!!!! it was going through a frame off resto,I was in heaven….lol I did not work on that car,but did work on a 1969 camaro and a 57 chevy that already had pictures taken and was going to be in hot rod when done,don’t know if it ever was,but I would like to see it finished. well,hope this helps out.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Vinyl Top Restoration for Faded Material

    I need advice from those of you with vinyl roofs. Mine is in excellant shape, just a tad faded. I was wondering what anybody has come up with, or uses, to get the”black” back and protect the vinyl. I checked the owners page and have seen some really nice tops. Just want to get that “New” look again. Thanks

    A: SEM makes an unbelievable vinyl and leather dye. I got some from my local auto body supply house to dye a pair of boots and it worked great. I did them sometime ago and none of the dye has faded or flaked off. After that experience, I used some of it on some vinyl headrests in my van. Worked great there as well. I’m not sure how well it stands up to weather but I would suspect pretty good. Even if it starts to fade you could re-do it pretty easily. I believe it was less than $20 for a pint which should be more than enough to do a top a couple of times. it is pretty easy to apply as well. Clean the surface, rough it up with a Scotchbrite pad, clean with alcohol, apply product with a foam brush (I believe in 3 coats). The label recommended several (more expensive) SEM cleaner products but the guy at my shop said just use a wax and grease remover to clean it followed by alcohol to open up the pores – it worked great for me. It came out very smooth with the brush but I’m sure you could use it in a gun if you prefer.

    A: Why not try black vinyl dye? I wouldn’t use the $3 type you buy in a spray but the professional type. Check with your local automotive interior installer and ask him what he would use. Get several opinions before you spend $$$.

    A: there are several good vinyl restorer products avaliable but try this one for replenishiment of vinyl products…… Baby oil or Vasoline. It puts the oil back into the vinyl that the sun and years of aging took out. leave it on for awhile and buff off the excess. also works on tires

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body - Windows (20)

    Q: Etched Bird Glass

    I was looking at the Bird emblem on my side window which people say is etched. It does not look etched but instead some type of paint. Is mine original?

    A: I dont know where the phrase of etched glass was started but they arent. Its actually a type of paint similar to silkscreen,and can be scraped off. If it was etched it wouldnt be higher than the glass, it would be engraved. Check yours out and see.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Tags: glass, paint
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 4
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Conv/Coupe Windshield Wipers for 1968

    Does anyone know exactly what the difference is between Coupe and Convertible Wiper Arms and Blades. Is it both the Arms AND Blades that are different or just one of the two?

    If nobody knows, maybe someone could measure the length of their Couple Wiper arms and Blades and let me know……

    A: I don’t have my coupe wipers here, but the easiest way to tell the convertible wiper arms are they are marked! They have stamped on the back of the arm RH CONV and LH CONV, and there’s about (this is from ancient memory) 3/8″ to 1/2″ difference in length from right to left, the left is shorter. The stamping is just past the casing, on the piece the blades clip onto.

    A: …I measured my original 1968 conv. Wiper Arms.
    RH 12″
    LH 11.75″
    This measurement was taken from the tip of the arm where the Blade attaches to the end near the pivot. Also, original conv wiper arms have “RH CONV” & LH CONV” stamped on the reverse side. Repro arms are both the same length unlike originals.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 1

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Door Glass for 1968 and 1969

    Is the door glass for the 1968 same as for the 1969?

    A: There were actually differences between 1968 and 1969 glass, but the July 1969 parts book lists the replacement as the same. On your 68’s with original glass the glass has a straight line across the bottom, the 69’s have a curve across the bottom. You cannot see this with the door assembled. Then there’s the “bird emblem” issue on some 68’s, I don’t think of the few I’ve seen any have been of the later curved style.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Etched Window Glass

    I have a 1968 Firebird that has the firebird emblems etched in the glass. My bird has power windows and also the “Custom” interior. Is there any connection to these options? how are is this??

    A: Regarding the ‘Bird’ etching found on some 1968 Firebird’s…

    The process used to produce the ‘Bird’ Logo on the front side glass was referred to as ‘Etching’. To Etch does not necessarily mean to ‘sandblast’ an image into the glass; this can be accomplished in the same way as the supplier/date code info is ‘etched’ onto the glass. This was not simply painted on.

    As far as verifying the reason’s behind why some received this special glass and other’s did not; the following is NOT true…

    * Used on all Firebird’s built before 5-1-68
    * Used only on Air Conditioned and/or Power Window cars
    * Used only on Early Production cars
    * Used only on Tinted-Glass cars

    From the Registry-Survey I have been conducting over the past 8yrs, I have found ORIGINAL 1968 Firebird’s w/the ‘Etched’ Bird and also with or without the above features…in other words; mystery not solved. The only thing I have found is that all cars in the Registry w/the special glass are “400” cars…. all built between Nov.’67 and Jul.’68 including Lordstown and Van Nuys cars. Still need more info to be able to establish a consistent trend here.

    A: Regarding the 1968 Firebird ‘Bird’ Glass mystery; I’ve collected documentation from many 1968 Firebirds during the 10 yrs I’ve been working on the 1st Gen. Firebird Registry. Out of the hundreds of cars, I have yet to decipher this mystery other than to say that the Etched White Birds on the front side glass appeared only on the early 1968 Firebirds. I’ve found them on original, documented, one owner cars that have been 400s, 350s, with and w/o A/C, with and w/o Custom Trim Option, Coupes, Convs, Clear Glass and Tinted, automatics and 4spds. I’m currently trying to establish the latest build date for cars having this special glass. It could be that this feature was pulled due to production costs. Your 1968 350 Firebird w/Bird Glass being built around the 1st week of March is certainly one of the later ’68s I’ve heard of getting this feature. I’d be interested in adding any of your current/former Firebirds to our Registry. If you wouldn’t mind sharing the VIN, Trim Tag info as well as descriptions and/or documentation. We’re still doing quite a bit of research into this and other 1st Gen. mysteries. Thanks very much for your interest and support.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Hello, wanted to comment on the etched glass. I bought a 67 firebird from a fella 8 years ago in Paso Robles. The two vent windows each have etched birds on them. They also have the names of Diane under the bird on the drivers side and the name Mark under the bird on the passenger side. If you would like more info such as vin and such Id be glad to respond. Wish the privacy act to research who used to own the car before didn’t exist. Would be cool to know how many owners this car had.

  • this topic has come up again on Facebook. was there any more info ever found out about the Bird glass? from what I remember and have read on here over the years is that from Oct to Dec 1967 the Bird glass was in production and installed on Firebirds from the second to the third week of Nov 1967 to second to third week of Jan 1968. I there any more info on this matter.. any investigations going on now is flawed as in the last 30+yrs people have been installing the Bird glass in their cars

  • I recently purchased a 1968 Firebird Convertible that is a 350, auto, roll-up windows and it has the etched bird on the windows. It is a 223678U vin. Does this add value to the car or is it just cool 🙂

  • My dad found a passenger window at a junkyard for his 69 camaro and when he cleaned it found the bird etched in it. Needless to say he had to find another glass but still has it sitting around.

  • I recently purchased a 1968 Firebird convertible that was disassembled and in the early stages of restoration and as I have been learning more about my Firebird, I read that factory AC cars typically came with tinted windows. So I decided to checked the glass in my doors and quarters to verify that my glass was tinted. What I found was that only the drivers (LH) side was tinted and, to my surprise, I found that other glass was clear and that my RH side glass was clear with the Firebird emblem on it. Assuming that the RH side is original and the LH side had been replaced, I wanted to share as much info that I can on my car to add to the research. I do not know all the details on what model Firebird (350, 400, etc.) my car was, by this is what I can share:
    Date Code: 11C
    ST Code: 68-22667 LOR
    Body Code: 2062
    TR Code: 259 (Black Deluxe interior)
    Paint Code: G-2 (April Gold – Black Top)
    VIN: 223678U122107

  • My brother has 1968 firebird with the etched windows. Where do I send the info on it for the research?

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Glass Differences Between Years

    Can I use 1969 or 1967 glass in my 1968?

    A: Remember the basics, gentlemen – all three years had different glass. Although the 1968 and 1969 appeared the same when installed, the concealed bottom was different. The 1968 was straight across, while the 1969 glass has a curve across the bottom. I have only seen etched bird glass with the straight (68 style) bottom.

    A: Not true ole buddy… I have 1968 Birdglass thats curved like the 69s. So may we say that its could be that 1968 and 1969 share a same glass, in certain cases. Use the date code if in doubt as to what it is. Also they changed manufacturers between 1968 to 69. PPG to LOF. I think some 69s had PPG.

    A: One thing I know for sure, the July 1969 parts book gives a replacement glass listing for 1968 and 1969 as the same, eliminating the earlier design 68 glass. Do you ever remember seeing the etchings on curved glass (later) style?

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 1
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Power Window Motor Removal

    My 1968 convertible bird has stock power windows. They work, but are real sluggish and draw a lot of current when raising or lowering. I installed new wiring recently so the problem must be in the motors. I am considering removing the motors (all 4) and cleaning, re-greasing, and maybe taking them to an electrical shop that specializes in motor repair. Has anybody had any experience with this? What’s the best way to get the motors out?

    A: I have power windows on my car also. My car is a low mileage car, but my windows stuck also. In replacing my quarter panels, I had easy access to the window mechanism. The grease had mixed with dirt and turned into a clay like substance over time. After cleaning and regreasing, they work fantastic. Also, don’t forget to examine the rollers. If they are worn badly, they will cause the windows to bind.

    By the way, high current draw from the power window motors usually comes from high mechanical resistance to movement. That in turn creates the high current draw.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Power Window Switches

    First the scenario – I took apart the back portion of the interior to attend to the power window switch (as well as a really shaky window). I re-seated the single switch (3 prong) to the “female” receptor and tried it again… no good. Then I simply put a little pressure on the switch and receptor with my fingers and it worked… if I take the pressure off it don’t. So now for the question… is it the switch or the receptor?

    Any one experience this or had experience with the switches?

    A: most likely the problem is the wiring connector and the plastic base that holds it. the hairpin type wiring connector loses tension after it is overheated( usually due to a poor connection or a binding motor or window).I would first check the switch pins and clean them with a scotchbrite pad. Next is to disassemble the plastic connector harness. remove the small screws and carefully lift out the wiring and connectors. Squeeze the connector togeather at the point where it slides onto the switch post this will retension the connector when reassembled . As with any electrical work ,disconnect power(battery) first. a little electrical no-corode at the terminal will help to maintain the contact.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Power Windows Adjustments

    My 1968 bird has power windows on it. As with any car with 100K plus miles of service, the windows, particularly the rear windows,are a pain to get up (No Viagara jokes here please!). I resort to the old tug methos to get them started (again, no other jokes here,please!) and then using the window switch they eventually get to where they are supposed to seat. My question is, to alievate this, is this just a matter of adjusting the window alignment??? or is there a tension adjustment somewhere? I looked at the service manual, but I am still conffused about the remedy.. Any help would be appreciated.

    A: I don’t know about 1968 birds, but my 1969 cougar convert had the same problem. I removed the motor unit, and opened it up. What was once grease had the constancy of tar. I used carb cleaner cleaned and regressed them. The ones I have done this work much better. Also some time in the past someone had reinstalled a helper spring back wards on one window. And finaly check the switch or relays, the window draws a fair amount of currant and if there is carbon scoring on the switch this might be the problem. Try using De-Oxit to remove the carbon.

    Becarefull when disassembling the unit, there is a spring that helps push the window up that stings like the dickens when (if) you let it hit you.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Problems Rolling Rear Window Down

    My rear glass has not rolled down since I bought the car, it was nice out yesterday, decided to take a look. I couldn’t get them to move at first, then I took out the regulator and it appeared fine. I could slide the window up and down by hand, but after reinstalling the regulator I could only get it up and down using both hands; one on the crank and one on the window maneuvering it up, down, in, and out. Any ideas with “walk me through instructions”?

    Also, the chrome and rubber seal on the front of the glass; the rubber is rotten. Is this replaceable, is it a rubber piece and a separate chrome piece, or a single rubber and chrome piece? Instructions?

    A: If the rear windows weren’t used much, chances are the grease got too hard. On my 1969, I used a combination of Liquid Wrench and lithium grease to get them moving again. I took the jamb vent out and sprayed the tracks and regulator drive gear and kept working the window up and don until it moved smoothly. Then, I lubricated the tracks and the regulator with white lithium grease. Both the Liquid Wrench and white lithium were in aerosol cans.

    The rubber weather seal in the quarter window is replaceable but the chrome edge is not. Keep looking at the swap meets or try and buy some out of Arizona or So Calif.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Quarter Window Rollers / Channel

    My rear quarter windows don’t go up or down very well. I have to help them. I bought new rollers, but I can’t figure how to get the old ones out or new ones in. Any suggestions.

    A: One of my rear manual crank windows needs help, too. It’s because it tilts forward so I’d bet the track needs to be repositioned properly. Maybe same for yours?

    A: My 1969 convertible had this problem. Usually it’s not the track since it would be VERY hard for it to come off. There are 3 wheels and it seems that the middle one seems to be the usual culprit. That’s what it was on mine. I bought it at a Pontiac dealership but I think they are available through the catalog companies.

    As far as getting to the channel, you need to pull your back seat out and then remove the side pannels. You will see an access plate that you can remove to get to the mechanism but you will need to remove the channel out (I did anyway) to get to everything.

    I’m going by memory since I did this about 2 years ago but it’s fairly obvious once you get in there.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Window Channel

    Well, it looks like the sides of the rear-window channel in my ‘bird are rusted out pretty bad. The left, and right sides are starting to flake away but the top and bottom part looks okay. It appears as if someone removed the rear-window and didn’t seal it properly allowing water to enter that area and sit and cause rust.

    So, my question is what repair options do I have? Could I sand the area out and fill it in with lead? Should I cut apart a junker and weld the rear window area in? Should I just weld in some sheet metal? Should I just have a body shop do it?

    A: Had this problem on the 1969 Bird I’m working on now. I went down to the local sheet metal shop and had them bend some 22 gauge metal in four foot sticks to repair them. The “sticks” were bent with a 3/4″ lip (the portion that goes under the window), a 3/4 rise (the portion that the trim clips will be attached), and a 1/4 overhang (I Mig-welded this to the outside along the sail panel). I had to buy a 4×10 foot sheet of the metal. Total cost for fabrication was about $60. For the rounded corners I notched the metal to make a smooth sweep. I followed this with a product called “All Metal” ( a water proof filler). So far it look pretty good but I haven’t installed the clips or window yet. However I don’t foresee any problems.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Window Removal

    How do I remove my rear window on my Firebird.

    A: A special tool is available that is basically an L-shaped blade with a good handle that will cut the adhesive around the glass so it may be lifted out. All auto glass shops have them.

    A: The first (and only) time I tried to remove a windshield was with this type of tool. Insert, twist, and POP! Crack shoots across the glass…. I’m not sure the tool was sharp enough, though…

    I believe it’s an art…..

    My next attempt will be using Piano Wire (or guitar string, or similar). Poke hole in sealant, push wire through, wrap each end of wire around a stick, and have one person on the inside and one on the outside and slowly and carefully saw around the edge of the window. Well, that’s my next attempt, and I’m sticking with it. Especially after I ruined that windshield

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Window Sticks

    The specific incident that I am referring to in regards to a window malfunction is as follows: I lowered the passenger-side rear window about two-thirds of the way. When I tried to raise it the crank wouldn’t budge. One of us had to pull up on the glass while the other cranked. It went up but was left “off track” and tilted forward a couple of inches. I was told by them and others that this is a common problem for Firebird/Camaro owners with no real solution except to leave the windows up or put them back on track in a hurry when it rains at the cruse. As usual, any help you guys can give me is appreciated.

    A: Have you ever noticed that convertible rear windows work smoother than coupes? I have (had) both. My theory is that the convertible rear windows get used more because the car looks better that way when the top is down. Unless there is someone in the back seat of the coupe, the windows hardly ever get rolled down.

    If your quarter window is tough to move up and down you may want to remove the thirty year old grease (at least it used to be grease) and replace it with some white lithium. If you do a good job, they will work better then your front windows.

    A: I had the same problem with my 1968 when I first got it. I pulled the back seat and back door panels to find that both rear windows had broken rollers. These rollers are plastic that fit into a metal track and after 30 years, they just plain give out. I ordered new rollers, I think from Classic Industries for about $3 each. Now both windows work great. Pull the door panels, you may find the same problem, or maybe something else, but it can be fixed!

    A: If that’s the case, I would remove the glass. Look at the guide rollers, guides and everything that moves. Get everything clean and lubed. If there are broken, loose or missing parts, now is the time to correct it. Work the regulator without the glass in it untill it is really smooth. Keep checking the lube on the regulator and pivots (ya gotta have the little plastic louvered vent thing removed from the post for this). Clean the rolling parts on the glass untill they operate smoothly. I used a penetrating spray oil to clean, and Tetra-Gun white grease for lube. There are probably better products for this, but that’s what’s on my shelf. When you re-install the glass you make all the adjustments (up and down travel, where the top meets the wx stripping, and the tilt). Things should work better. You still might have to assist the window slightly. Oh yeah, watch what you touch, your hands WILL be filthy! Also, keep small children and tender ears away while you’re working on these D*** windows. Now is the time to install new water shields too. Heck, might as well do the front door regulators too.

    The procedure is outlined in the manuals. If you dont already have these, they will pay for themselves in no time. I recomend the chasis service manuel, the Fisher Body Service manual, the Pontiac Parts catalog, and the Parts illustration book. These are the best reference for your car, and the illustrations are good. The price for all four will exceed $100, a price you will forget long after you remember the conveneince and quality. Even if you get stumped, you will have a good idea of what some of us are talking about (assuming we know what we are talking about)!

    A: I have had lots of 67-9 Birds and never had one of the windows fall of track they do get stubborn as the gease hardens with age. An easy solution for 1968,69 is as follows. Take out the black plastic “vent” for flow thru ventilation (one screw ) this will enable you to get to the rollers without removing the side panel (sorry 1967 owners you must do this) get a fresh can of Brake Kleen and fabricate an extra long straw to get to rollers and track. Spray until most of the old grease is removed. Get a can of spray white lube and respray the rollers and track. work the window up and down helping it until the grease is worked in. respray and work in again. If this doesnt work then the roller must be replaced, which requires window removal. Forgot to mention that all convert. are minus the flow thru vent. Must do as 1967 hardtop and remove the side panel or possibly just the u shaped weatherstrip to gain enough access

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Window Tracking Problem

    Guys I am going to have a little time soon to work on the bird and i have a question I hope someone can help me with. The back windows in my bird fall forward when I roll them down you have to fight with them to get them back on the tracks to let them up again, I looked at the bushings and they looked ok but they probley need replacing has anyone else fixed this problem .

    A: Remove the roller/guide thats got a stud in it that swivels like a ball joint and replace with a new one. Remove all traces of old grease and relube all the guide/rollers with good white lube. Move glass up and down several times helping it by grasping top , until lube is spred out like it should be. Keep windows lubed up and should work fine. Youve got a 1968 hardtop so youre lucky as you can relube without pulling rear panel off . Just pull out the flow thru grille.

    A: In addition to the above, you can also replace the other two rollers. The one with the spring is easily replaced (after removing the bracket from the glass) and the other more difficult because the stem that holds the roller is riveted in place and the rivet must be ground off, drilled and tapped and put back in with a wide but thin machine screw. I have power windows so this may not apply if you have only one roller – I don’t know if the bracket that goes on the glass is different from manual windows. Anyway , I have done this and the windows work like new. The only place that I have found the roller parts (other than the swivel roller mentioned above) is “Rick’s First Generation Camaro” catalog. See http://www.firstgen.com/

    A: I replaced one of the center wheels in my convertible and that fixed the problem. Basically you have 2 outer plastic wheels and one inner wheel that rides in a slot. If the inner wheel is broken then the window doesn’t track correctly and you have to help it with your hand. I bought it at a Pontiac dealership parts department (they had to order it). They didn’t have the exact drawing for the bird but in flipping through some books we found one that looked correct from a different car. I’ll see if I still have the paper work with the part # (I know I should have documented this but ….). It was only $10.00 or so. You’ll need to pull your back seat out as well as the side pannel and then you can get to the access pannel to the window mechanism.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Replacing a Broken Windshield

    A rock flew up from a gravel truck and broke my windshield over the weekend. Should I attempt this myself or have some cheap/quick glass company assigned by my insurance company fix it?

    A: For The $150 it costs for a new one is it worth it? you ll sleep better at night doing it yourself. Dont forget to use urethane sealer between the glass and mouldings. It keeps the moisture and leaves,dirt out to prevent rust. The grey sealer for header moulding can be found at HomeDepot or electrical supply house. Its called DuxSeal and comes in 1 or 5 lbs clumps like modeling clay.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Tinted Glass

    Hi everyone, I was pulling my doors apart on the weekend and noticed that my passenger side door glass is tinted. No other windows are tinted. Probably a really stupid question but if you have tinted glass is it for all windows or just the front two and not for the quarter windows ?

    A: …You either got a Tinted Windshield or Tinted Glass (all) which meant all side glass including quarter glass.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Window Alignment Problem

    My 1968 convertible has problems with the windows. The front window has a gap of 1/4″ in the front lower corner.The front and back windows arces don’t match. Could this be wrong windows? we have had these windows adjusted and no improvement. Are there other windows that could have been installed or is there any way to correct them. The frame is good it’s never been a wreck. any ideas would greatly appreciated

    A: I’m not sure if there is any adjustment in the front windows but I have removed the back window in my 1969 convertible to replace one of the rollers that go up and down on the guides (the center one) and there are quite a few adjustments to get the window to lign up correctly again. The guide mounts on 3 studs (it may be 4 but as I recall it was 3) that allow you to change the pitch of the window (to align it parallel to the front one) as well as it’s tilt (front to back). It takes a while to get it right but with some patience it’s doable. You need to remove the back seat and the arm rest and side covers to access the area.

    Does the window go up and down smoothly? If not, it could be that one of the rollers is broken or popped off the guide. I actually bought mine at the Pontiac dealer (special order) for about 10 bucks.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • There are some great YouTube-videos showing the alignment. it works well, but takes some time. It’s worth it!

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Windshield Molding

    I need to install a new front windshield. Did it include the rubber molding around the windshield?

    A: There is no rubber molding around the first gen birds. Both front and glass ws installed using butal rubber tape (kind of a tar like substance). These days, most glass installers use stuff that even better.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Windshield Washer Pump Won’t Stop

    Early on in the restoration of my 1968 convertible I replaced the windshield washer pump because it was leaking. As a lot of restoration projects go, the car wasn’t put back together and run for several years after the install of the pump.

    I later discovered that when I started the windshield wipers and then then pressed the button to start the washer that the washer would start but not turn off unless I turned off the windshield wipers. Now every time I start the wipers the darn washer pump goes on without me pressing the washer button.

    I thought my windshield wiper/washer switch was broke so I replaced it with another one purchased at a swap meet. Guess what? The washer pump still activates when I turn on the wipers.

    Any help would be greatly appreciated.

    A: I remember my birds doing this in the 70’s, and part of the problem was the gear was worn, or the position of the pump needed to be adjusted slightly. There’s not really any room to adjust much, but somehow I got it working again, I believe it was purely a mechanical thing, not electrical. It’s been a long time, and I am being rather vague, but it’s all I’ve got for you.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Category: Body - Windows
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Body – Antenna (9)

    Q: 67 and 68 Antenna Mast Angle

    I would like to know what the angle of the antenna mast was to the deck on the rear-mounts for a ’67/68.

    A: Straight out of my ’67 Firebird Service Manual suppliment:

    …. antenna should lean inboard approximately 4 deg. when viewed from front or
    rear and should stand vertically when viewed from the side”. This is stated
    for both front and rear fender mounts. I would think that the ’68 would be
    the same; anyone have anything different?

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Antenna Part Numbers for 1968

    Does anyone know the correct part numbers for the 1968 bird rear mount antenna mast and the mount itself?? How about for the front mount antenna??

    A:
    MAST
    Front and Rear 67-68 F 3934224

    BEZEL
    Frt Fender 67-68 F 3897333

    BEZEL
    Rr Qtr. 67-68 F 3903424

    BODY
    Frt and Rear 67-68 F 3880695

    NUT- MOUNTING
    Frt and Rr 67-68 F 3863499

    RING- GROUND
    Frt 67-68 F 3863239

    RING- GROUND
    Rear 67-68 F 3903406

    LEAD IN
    Frt 67-68 F 3897334

    LEAD IN
    Rear 67-68 F 3897311

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Antenna Parts from a Camaro?

    Is the 1968 Bird AM front fender mounted Antenna the same as the 1968 Canaro front fender antenna???

    A: The Antenna Body, Bezel and Nut are identical. As for the Mast, I would think it’s the same as well… difference would be minor if any.

    A: If memory serves me right the mast is different,theres no “AM/FM” pontiac antenna, chevy there is, body is same, large nut is the same I think bezel is different.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Antenna Placement for 1968

    Where does the 68 antenna go? I have seen front and back. How do I find out the correct placement for that?

    A: …The Front Fender (RH) Antenna was the standard location on ’68 Firebirds Optional, was a Rear Quarter Mounted Antenna (RH). This will be noted on both the Body Broadcast Sheet (if you find it in your car) or on the Billing History. Parts are available (repro) for both applications. As far as antenna location… I use the Camaro assembly manual. It gives the exact dimension for the proper location (I assume Firebirds were located using the same).

    A: To take you back to our original discussion, someone requested information on the factory location of the rear mounted antenna. Someone volunteered to measure some of his cars to determine the factory mounting location and send them to me. I, in turn, was to verify that his measurements and the factory drawing from a 68 Camaro assembly manual were the same. The confusing part was that the factory drawing listed the location at 114.25″ PV and 28.94″ PV with no description of what PV was. I suspected that the 114.25″ was from the firewall back and 28.94″ PV was from the centerline of the car.

    I have confirmed that this is mostly true. The 28.94″ is indeed from the centerline if the car. The 114.25″ is from the front edge of the air box where the heater-A/C fan motor is located. This seam sticks out approximable one inch beyond the firewall. So if you want to use these measurements, use 113.25 from the firewall back.

    He measured from the back of the car forward on three cars and got measurements of 14 1/2″, 15 1/4″, and 15 1/4″. He also noted that along with the 1.12″ diameter hole there is a small notch. This notch corresponds with the notch on the antenna base (called the bezel key) and I suppose it’s used to insure the correct rotation of the base.

    The measurements for this notch is 0.14″ wide by 0.12″ long (approximately 1/8″ by 1/8th”) and rotated 75 degrees from horizontal (i.e., if standing behind the car while looking down at the hole it would be in approximately the 5 o-clock position.

    He also noted that, although the hole and the notch were the same size in all cars, the notch was at a slightly different angle. This, along with the slightly different hole locations, gives reasons to believe that the factory used a hand punch and measureing tape to make the hole and not a machine.

    The bottom line is this; if you mark the location for the hole approximable 15 1/4″ from the back and 27″ from the centerline of the car, drill a 1 1/8″ hole with an 1/8″ notch at 5 o-clock, you’ll do as good as the factory.

    A: View the Camaro Assembly drawing for this which is the same application for the Firebird (Did not verify if the part numbers are the same for the Firebird):

    Description

    A: I double checked my previous dimensions for locating the ’68 Firebird Rear Antenna Hole in the RH Rr. Qtr. Panel since some questions have come about differences seen with other originally equiped First Generation Firebirds:

    1.125 dia hole
    1.875 CL to Qtr. Edge at Trunk Gap
    1.750 CL to Qtr. Character Line (outboard)
    15.375 CL to Btm Edge of Qtr. Panel (at Trunk Edge Line)
    (CL = Center Line)

    As far as a “correct” measurement, there is no true correct answer. I’ve measured four Firebirds with rear antenna and no two were exactly the same. The process on the assembly line was not a true science but instead involved the placement of a template to roughly guide the location to stamp the hole for the rear antenna. It was a hastily done process like a lot of other processes on an assembly line during that era.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 1
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: ’68 Antenna Style

    I have a question regarding the radio antenna of my 68 bird. The current antenna is the telescoping (manual) oval type with my radio AM/FM. I am looking to replace or have mine rechromed. I read in the year one catalog that the telescoping manual ant. only came with the AM only radio, and the AM/FM radio came with the whip antenna.

    A: …I don’t believe that the factory used any ‘whip’ antenna on the ’68 Firebird (or other 60’s models for that matter). They were all telescoping until the 70’s. The biggest variations is in the Ball of Tip design. Some with one groove, some with two. Some with none. Some with round tips, some with oval. I would think you’re better off finding an NOS one since rechroming would be difficult and costly.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Tag: antenna
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 67, 68, and 69 Antenna Styles

    For the First Generation Firebird, I have seen several types of antennas (power/manual) located both the front and rear. What is correct?

    A: The RH Front Fender Manual Antenna was standard with the radio option on all
    67-69 Firebirds.

    For 67/68 Firebird only, there was an optional Rear Manual Antenna that was
    located on the RH Rear Quarter Panel.

    Late in ’69, the Power Antenna Optional became available for the Firebird.
    This was located on the RH Rear Quarter Panel.

    The Manual Rear Antenna was not available for the ’69 Firebird
    (at least not in any documentation I have)

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Tag: antenna
    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Move Antenna from front to back

    Would it be easy to change the antenna to the back from the front? Mine is non-power and up front. I’ve seen a few birds with the antenna in the back. I think it looks sleeker in the back. Has anyone ever moved one from the front to the back and why were some up front vs.. in the back?

    A: I’ve done the swap and intend to do it again on my current car. The mounting dimensions are on the website I believe under the tech section, so you should have no problems there. The only issue is that you have to weld in a patch on your front fender and paint it.

    To my knowledge, the rear mount antenna was an option. The biggest issue is if you want an OEM unit, they are very difficult to find. I found a Camaro one, but is slightly different.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Power Antennas for 1969

    My 1969 Firebird was originally equipped with a power antenna. When I bought the car a bent antenna with motor was unbolted and sitting in the trunk. I am not positive this assembly is the original one, but it correctly fits the mounting bracket and the wiring harness. The mast is chrome, four segments, and has a hex head which is rounded at the very top. A metal case fits over the lower 10.5″ of the mast and is attached to the motor assembly by three screws. The code ‘P – 6050’ is cast on this case, just below is the name ‘Empire’ in script, followed by ‘1 – T’. The motor case has ’11 – 22 8AAXA’ cast on it in a semi circle. Can anyone tell me about these codes, if they match codes on other Firebirds or codes in a reference book?

    Two other points that someone can probably clear up: 1) I was told by a guy trying to sell me a new mast that there was a different power antenna for convertibles vs. coupes; and 2) if I reinstalled the antenna described above the mast would probably stick out of the rear fender 6+ inches when fully retracted, does this sound right?

    A: The Optional Power Antenna for the 1969 Firebird was part number 9796289. The ‘Drive’ Assy itself was the same for the coupe or conv. The Mast was unique to the 1969 Firebird (pt. # 546557). Only the ’68-1969 Tempest had different Adaptors/Brackets for the Conv. No components were different on the 1969 Firebird conv. Empire was the Supplier for most Pontiac Power Antenna’s. ’11 – 22 8AAXA’ …this would be the Assy Build Date for the Antenna (Nov.22’68) The problem with the Mast would be…. since the only one being reproduced is the Mast common to the ‘A’ Bodies and Full Size Pontiacs (orig. # 541963) yu may find that fully retracted, your mast may stick out a little more than the original. The Firebird used a shorter mast than the Tempest, Grand Prix, Full-Size. With a little modification to the bottom part, you could duplicate your original.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Mounted Antennas for ’68

    I bought a used rear mount antenna that is supposed to be correct for my 68 bird. I haven’t had a correct one (ever). Perhaps one of you can verify whether or not the mast is correct (The base sure looks correct from pictures I’ve seen). My mast is a single solid piece that has a slight taper to it (thicker at the bottom). It also has a round ball on top and is 29 1/2 inches from the top of the ball to the point where the rod begins at the tip of the conical base. I’m told it is correct for a 68 AM/FM rear mount, but the AM (only) antenna is slightly different.

    Recently, someone else told me that the correct rear mount antenna is multi-sectioned, collapsible and has an oval top. Which is correct?

    A: Sounds like some Camaro guy told you this was a correct AM/FM antenna. Truth is Firebird didnt have a different antenna for FM or AM. Really hard to say what you do have and would send it back if possible. The correct antenna mast is a multisection (3) with oval shape. The correct tip is oval with a groove. Correct lenght is 19″ tip to tip collapsed and 47 1/4″ fully extended. There are several variations of factory and replacement antennas . But the aforementioned is era correct. NOS masts for 67-8 are hard to find and are model specific. This adds to the hard to find formula. The mounting end is a threaded stud that has an exposed nut to lock the antenna mast into the correct position with the oval facing front to rear. This windcheater design also cut down on wind noise. Repro bases and bezels are avaliable but I know of no correct repro masts. 69 is a different story with a power mast also avaliable.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Codes - Data Plates (15)

    Q: 1967 Body Tag Model Number and RPO Codes

    I just bought a 1967 Firebird 400 and I picked up a Firebird ID Numbers book that covers 67-93. According to the book the “series” number is not correct. My number is 67-22637 which translates into 1967, Pontiac divission, series ? (27. The book shows 23 for Firebird), 2 door coupe. Can anyone shed some light? Also, where do you look for the RPO (regular production options) codes?

    A:…The Trim Tag Model Number for 1967 Firebird deciphers as follows… 67- Year 2- Division (Pontiac) 2637- Style (26-Custom Trim, 37-Firebird Coupe) The “23” you mention refers to the VIN I.D. number (which didn’t denote Standard or Custom Trim).

    The ‘RPO” (Fisher Body Accessory Codes) options are listed on the bottom of the 1967 Firebird Trim Tag. Examples: L, 2GW, 3F, 4Q *3F denotes the “400” option for 1967 Firebird.

    A:You can find some more information about the RPO Codes which is often times called Five Group Accessory Codes:

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 1967 Five Group Accessory Code System

    Need help decoding the following for a 1967 Convertible, if anyone could help out i would really appreciate it. i noticed that running the vin # and body tag number on oakmediacreations firebird page the production numbers of the vehicle didnt match one another.

    ===========================================================
    
    Firewall Tag: (as close to possible in the actual locations)
    
    278     07B
    ST  67-22667      LOR     9854   Body
    TR  256-Z                  K-2   Paint
    		  EX  2EWGH  3M
    		  4F   5Y
    =============================================================
    

    A: 278…. This code sometimes found in the upper LH corner or the Trim Tag is most likely the Fisher Body Sequence Number (for production).

    A: The consecutive build number codes (9854) found on the body tag will not match the sequential production number code (102345) on the VIN. These numbers had different meanings at the plants.

    A: Group codes and their meanings. If you have numbers that are different, register your car with Generation-1 Registry since they are working on deciphering the meanings to these codes. There are many codes that are unknown. These codes were used at the factory to determine what cars needed special modifications. These modifications then correlated with additional options/modifications. Unfortunately for the restorer, these codes were discontinued after the 1967 model.

    1st Group (Digit not shown)
    D…. Power Convertible Top
    E…. Soft-ray Tinted Glass (All Windows)
    L…. Folding Rear Seat (Firebird)
    O…. Two-tone Paint (Chrome separator strip)
    T…. Power Seat – bucket, left seat only
    V…. Remote Control Deck Lid Release
    W…. Soft-ray Tinted Glass (Windshield Only)
    X…. Power Windows
    Y…. Power Seat – Bench

    2nd Group (2)
    A…. Foam Bench Seat Cushion (non-GTO)
    B…. 3-spd Manual Transmission Floor Shift
    C… ???
    E…. Air Conditioning, diff ducting (Firebird, GTO)
    F…. ???
    G…. Console
    H…. Heater Delete
    K…. A/C
    L…. 4-spd Manual Transmission Floor Shift
    R…. Rear Seat Speaker
    S…. Rear-mounted Manual Antenna
    T…. Rear-mounted Power Antenna
    U…. Stereo 8 Track Tape System
    V…. Verba-Phonic Rear Speaker
    W…. 2-spd Automatic Transmission
    Z…. 3-spd Automatic Transmission

    3rd Group (3)
    B…. Rear Window Defogger
    C…. ??
    D…. ??
    F…. 400 Option (Firebird)
    H…. Rally Stripe (Firebird)
    J…. custom option (?)
    K…. Dome Courtesy Lamp
    M…. 326 HO Option (Firebird)
    N…. Roof Rail Reading Lamps
    W…. ??

    4th Group (4)
    F….. Outside Remote Control Mirror
    Q…. Fullsize Spare Tire (Firebird)

    5th Group (5)
    B…. Luggage Light (KAN plant only)
    C…. Shoulder Belts, Front Seat (Firebird)
    J…. Underhood Light
    M…. Rear Center Seat Belt
    P…. Luggage Light (FRA and PON plants)
    Y…. Deluxe Front Seat Belts
    Z…. Shoulder Belts, front seat (GTO)

    A: If you have more special codes to add to this list and want to help solve some of the mysteries, send them to us using the “Report a Problem” button at the bottom of this page or use the contact link below and found in the pull-down menu above. Every little insight will help solve these mysteries.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 3
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Am trying to decode the firewall tag from my 1967 Firebird. Any help would be appreciated.

    99 02C
    ST 67-22637 LOR 9555 BODY
    TR 259-2 0-0 PAINT
    W 2WG
    49 5Y

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 1968 Body Tag – Interior Code 281

    My body tag has interior code 281. I can not find this in any of the resource books. My interior is brown if that helps.

    A: Brown/tan interior *was* offered in 1968. I can attest to this because my 1968 FB was ordered with and has the saddle (tan) leather interior (trim code 281). In addition, the car if original, should have matching brown/tan/goldish dash pad. Lastly the convert boot and deluxe wheel (if applicable) should also be tan/brown to match the tan/brown interior. Keep in mind though that 281 leather option was a late year addition (early June) so check your invoice date (billing history) to see when your bird was invoiced.

    BTW, what do your door panels look like? The 281 option used tan/brown vinyl with a “faux leather grain” finish. (Quite bizarre looking actually…)

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • I also have a Van Nuys built ’68 Firebird with interior code 281. A buddy of mine refers to it as “the leatherbird”.
    I’m currently in the process of restoring the car and the interior portion has proven to be expensive and difficult.
    Would it be possible for you to send or post some pics of your interior?

    Thanks!

  • I have a 1968 Firebird that also has the interior code 281 which was the deluxe saddle leather interior with folding rear seat and front shoulder seat belts. The build date on the car is May 13 1968. It was built in Van Nuys, Cal. I purchased the car from the original owner, who was the renowned architect Euine Fay Jones. It is an April Gold car and is all original with still only 48,390 miles.

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 1969 Upper Body Color is “F”

    I have a 1969 Firebird with a paint code of 61F. The paint is Expresso Brown the original vinyl top was dark brown but I cant find a code or match anywhere. Any suggestions?

    A: Let’s see if this helps. I believe “PNT 61” is correct for Expresso Brown, I am going on a questionable memory here as I can’t put my hands on my paint charts. In 1969, the colors were designated by a confusing crossover of numbers from the Order Form to the firewall Data Plate. If you ordered Expresso Brown, you checked off letter “B” on the form, and if you wanted a vinyl top option (called the Cordova Top) you checked a number, in this case number “8” for Dark Fawn.

    My 1969 Firebird Order Form shows 5 available Cordova Top colors:
    2=black
    3=dark blue
    5=parchment
    8=dark fawn
    9=dark green

    In the case of convertibles:
    1=white
    2=black
    3=dark blue
    9=dark green

    On the Firewall Data Plate, they are shown as:
    A=white (convertible)
    B=black (all)
    C=dark blue (all)
    E=parchment (coupe)
    ?=dark fawn (coupe)
    G=dark green (all)

    I cannot remember ever making note of what dark green and dark fawn are represented by in letter form, but the ones I DO know are the corresponding number positions of those letters in the alphabet, but I am willing to guess there’s more to this. I don’t think I’ve ever seen letters “H” and “I” on Data Plates. If this sequence follows, then numbers 8 and 9 for dark fawn and dark green would be the 8th and 9th letters of the alphabet, but I cannot find anything to prove this. Looking at the sequence with question marks in place of letters, one might imagine letters “F” and “G” fitting there.

    My guess then is that code “F”, the 6th letter, likely represents the Dark Fawn Cordova Top Option.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Tag Assembly Date

    The body tag on my car is missing and I’m wondering what the assembly date would have been. Can any of the dates shown on the PHS documentation be coorelated to the assembly date? Was it a random generated number?

    A: There are companies that reproduce the firewall Fisher Body Trim Tag. As for the Build Date Code on this tag, it was unique to the ‘shell’ of the vehicle and would not appear on the Billing History. The only other place this would appear is on the original Warranty Protec-to-Plate. Generally, the Body Build Date was about a week before the Billing History Invoice Date. Sometimes this varied but usually only on special order vehicles (RAII, Show Cars, etc). The difference being that the Body Tag Date was when the Body was sequenced for build by Fisher Body. The Invoice Date was when it actually was ‘cleared’ to leave Final Assy and Certification (just prior to shipping). So, from start to finish, it took about a week or so to build the complete car. If you send me your VIN, I can check it against the Registry Files and probably come up with a pretty close Body Build Date Code based on other VINs close to your’s.

    A: Actually, the Fisher Body Unit Number was not randomly assigned. It was generated from ordering info and created by Sequencing (Broadcast). This number represented a specific build order within a batch for a specific time-frame. Factors that Fisher Body used when converting a dealer/customer order into a Body Unit Number included…. Exterior Colors, Models, Options, Special Orders. Just as it is today, cars were not necessarily built in the exact sequence they were ordered. In the world of mass produced vehicles, orders are processed based on production scheduling which in turn is established using many different variables. There was most certainly a process standard for assigning Body Unit Numbers however, I’m not aware of any factory documentation that survived. The Camaro Research Group has been trying to decipher this same issue for several years; What we do know is based primarily on common-practice and first-hand from former and current production plant employees.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Tag Code C363

    What does the c363 mean I cant find it any where.

    	04d                                        c363    
    ST 68-22637         LOS         1721
    TR 259                                       I-I
    

    A: The code you refer to comes from the Van Nuys, CA Assy Plant. Since no formal documentation has surfaced as to exactly what that code represents, the best guess is an internal plant – Fisher Body sequencing code. Somewhat connected to the vehicle order number. It has no significance with regard to the VIN, Body number, date or options.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Tag Code K464

    I haven’t been able to find the K464 code anywhere. Has anybody ever seen this code?

     05D            K464
     ST 68-22437 LOS 3573 BODY
     TR 253            I-2
    

    A: This number was an internal sequence number used at the Van Nuys Assembly Plant. It does not have any connection with the Body Unit Number, VIN, Engine Unit Number or Invoice Number. It was strictly a Plant Sequencing Number. So far, no GM or Fisher Body documentation has been discovered that would decipher this number. On the Body Broadcast Copy and Chassis Broadcast Copy (‘Build Sheet’ sometimes found under the seat, etc), there is a box for “Sequence” Number. Lordstown did not use the same numbering system as Van Nuys nor did they put it on the Trim Tag. Unfortunately, Van Nuys Firebirds rarely (if ever) left the plant with either of these sheets still in the car. (If anyone has ever found one, I’d be very interested in a copy). The Sequence Number is derived from the Dealer Order Number. There are a few Firebirds in the Registry with very close VINs that do not have sequential Body Number and/or Sequence Numbering. In other words, the Plant Assigned Numbers do not have a direct association with the VIN.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Tag Special Codes

    I have a question about a 1969 body tag. The second line has TR, 208, then a 1967, then “B”, PNT (Black Morrokide interior, Burgundy exterior, black vinyl top). Their third line has the 12D in it (December 1969 build date) and about an inch over is a “T339”. What would T339 code for on the 1969 tag?

    =============================
    Firewall Tag:
    
    ST-69 22367 VN 516941 Body
    TR 208        67B    Paint
    	   12D	   T339
    
    =============================
    

    A: Each Plant in 1969 (Los Angeles, Lordstown, Norwalk) used a different code system for In-Plant tracking, special-options, etc. The code “T339” is one of them. Since no records from the plants have ever surfaced, this is hard to decipher.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Unit Number

    The number on the body tag (firewall) and the Fisher Unit number, how were these sequenced.

    Also, how does the build date on the Body Tag correlate to the Billing date from GM? How long did it take to put the entire car together?

    A: The Fisher Body Unit Number found on the Firewall Trim Tag was unique to each assay plant and was not a sequential number nor was it sequential with the VIN or any other number or build-date information.

    The Unit Number was an internal Fisher Body Number used for sequencing the build of a vehicle relative to certain production factors such as color, model, options, etc.

    Once the order was placed by a dealership, PMD routed this to the Plant for scheduling by the Broadcast Dept. That particular order was assigned for build according to the above factors and not necessarily in the order it was received.

    If the same dealership ordered 2 different Firebirds on the same day, one a 6cyl verdoro green coupe and the other a Ram Air I black conv, chances are the coupe would be sequenced for build first. Both may have similar VINs but the Body Unit Number could vary quite a bit. Here’s an example:

    VIN- 164250 Body Unit No.- 4886
    VIN- 164279 Body Unit No.- 7679

    The Build Date on the Trim Tag was assigned by Fisher Body when the Sequence Number was assigned and scheduled for build. This represents the Month/Week when the body began to take form in the body-shop (Body in White- BIW). Again, there are factors here that dictate how long it took for a Body in White to be fully assembled and roll off the Final Assy Line. Part availability, Drivetrain availability and color all factored in. Generally, it took less than a week from the time a body received it’s Trim Tag until it left Final and the Certification/Buy-Off Line. Once a vehicle was painted and transferred from the Fisher Body Facility to the Final Assy Plant, it generally only took a day to complete the car.

    The Billing History Invoice Date was the date that the vehicle was “bought-off” after Final Assy. This is buy-off initiated the billing and delivery process. It’s not uncommon to find some vehicles with a few weeks between the Body Build Date and Invoice Date due to special orders (colors, engines, etc.).

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Deviations from Normal Codes on a 1969 Body Tag

    I recently purchased a 1969 Firebird with a body tag as follows:

    ST 69-22367        VN514538  BDY
    TR 206		         73  G  PNT
    	  12C		S093
    

    What I am puzzled over is the G in the body tag. I have pictures with what is supposed to be the original top and I have the original boot. Both items match the color of the interior which is midnight green. What does the G stand for????

    A: I’d have to say that the “VN” is just a variation for the Van Nuys Plant loc. code. There are others within the Registry with this same variation. One is a “2B” date code….. VN512949 and the other is a “12C” date code….. VN513857. “73” is obviously the Fisher Body code ofr Verdoro Green. The only listing I find using the “G” is Pontiac Factory Coding which used “G” for Antique Gold. This may be a legit color that has just not been published in any lists yet or, it could be a typo or mis-read. My guess is that the paint was Verdoro Green and the conv. top was Antique Gold which is listed on the 1969 Order Form as an “Upper Color”… “G”.. Antique GoldPlease fwd. the photo again of the Trim Tag (as a .jpg please). I couldn’t get it to open.

    A: The information that is found on Fisher Body tags, especially the 1968-9 tags, don’t tell you anything about a car, except the body style, color and the trim. Even then, I’ve seen some deviations in this information, from one plant to another and even from shift to shift at the same plant! Remember these cars were built in “BC” (Before Computer) and a lot was left to human interpetation.

    For the most part Fisher Body used the GM corporate codes for body color and top color, as opposed to the codes that were used by the divisions, in this case Pontiac. Code “73” converts to Pontiac code “Q”, for Verdoro Green. The “G” that immediately follows, converts to Pontiac code “9” for Dark Green. At least the trim codes are the same for #206, or Standard Green Vinyl. Confussed??? So are all of us so-called experts!!! 1969 is the worst of the bunch!

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Fisher Body Sequence Number

    My body tag has 111 to the left of the build date code (05C) on the top line. What does this code mean?

    A: The three digit codes in this location are most likely Fisher Body Sequence Number (for production).

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Paint Code is SPECIAL-1 on My 1968

    We are trying to get the body tag for our 1968 Firebird. The problem we are having is with the paint code. It says the paint code is special-1. Is there another code for that?

    A: You have the “Special Paint Option” which is indicated by ‘special’. When the original owners ordered their car they wanted a color that Pontiac did not offer as an optional color. These colors in 1968 were normally Pink Mist, Carnival Red, Marigold Yellow, or Windward Blue Irid (Irid. means metallic with all others solid).

    A: Keep in mind that some of these colors were a Spring release, late year option. Also any color was avaliable as an option if the OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) could supply it. I’ve seen Cars with SPEC on data plate and they had an extra QT of paint shipped with them.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Paint Code PRIME-2 on 1968

    We are having a problem with the paint code found on the body tag. It says the paint code is PRIME-2. Is there another code for this?

    A: I’ve heard of several cars with special paint codes or PRIME-XXX Various reasons for this I’m sure.. special order, race cars, company cars requiring special paint. Not a common thing to see. The ‘2’ represents Black top.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: SHOW-1 Paint Code

    My body tag has “show 1” where the paint codes should be. What does this mean.

    A: In regards to your question about a “Show 1” Body Tag, yes I have seen those before on a GTO as well as other makes/models. They are quite rare because they were generally very early production vehicles (but not always). Even to this day, the auto companies produce “SHOW” vehicles early in production. Working in Advance Mfg. at DaimlerChrysler, I see vehicles with these same Body Tags… “SHOW 1”, “SHOW 2”, etc. Also see: “PILOT” and “SPEC” as well.

    Generally, these special build vehicles were scheduled during the pre-production phase by Engineering or Styling. A “SHOW” Build is built on the regular Line but is treated special and fit/finish are very usually a little better. Paint is also unique and given an extra shine. As with most pre-production or even some early build vehicles, many were destroyed due to various test requirements. A “SHOW” vehicle would have survived if no other Dept. requested it after it’s purpose of “Show” was over. Example: Usually, every fall, the Plants will run a few “SHOW” vehicles for Detroit AutoRama. When the new Grand Cherokee came out in ’92, I personally remember seeing (3) “SHOW” vehicles built. All were Red and each had an ‘escort’ to ensure all trim/exterior parts were show worthy. In addition to the Body Trim Tags stating the vehicles purpose (BTW, at Chrysler, these Tags are temporarily ‘wire-tied’ to the front lower cross member until mid-way through the Chassis Line). “SHOW” vehicles have special Broadcast Sheets as well as hand-written sheets attached to all sides to let Operators know that this vehicle is to be treated special. To find a “SHOW” 1st Gen. Firebird is indeed a rare thing. Finding the Broadcast Sheet would be an interesting discovery. If I can answer any similar questions, feel free to let me know.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Vin, Body Tag, and Engine Code Information

    Running the vin number and body tag number on oakmediacreations firebird page the production numbers of the vehicle didn’t match one another plus what do the codes on the engine stand for:

    Block Casting numbers on R/F of engine (only numbers I can see)
    GM4

    Stamped numbers on the right front of engine block
    508743
    YJ

    A: This is correct, these two numbers found on the body tag and the VIN will not match. The numbers on the VIN represent the Sequential Production Number. The numbers on the Body Tag represent the Unit Number or consecutive build number. The last tells in sequence when the car came off the assembly line. Again, the body tag number will not match the actual sequential VIN number.

    Block Casting numbers on R/F of engine (only numbers I can see) GM4
    I do not know what these represented on the block.

    Stamped numbers on the right front of engine block
    508743 = Motor Unit Number
    YJ = 8 cyl, 326 cid, 250 hp, 9.2:1 comp. ratio, 2 bc carb, auto trans.

    Sources: Firebird Red Book, Catalog of Firebird ID Numbers 1967-93, Pontiac Historic Services, Year One Catalog

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Codes - Drive Train Codes (5)

    Q: Rear End Code Facts

    I am confused by the codes found on the rear end.

    A: After reading all the comments, I thought I’d better give some facts. The 1967 Firebird axle housings have the loops (where control arm bushings would mount) on top of the center chunk as if they were getting A-body control arms, but they also have the spring perches for leaf springs, and the brackets for the factory style “traction bars”. There should also be a date code cast into the center section somewhere. In 1968 they left off the control arm bushing loops and the traction bar mounts, but seemed to use the same codes as 1967. In 1969 the date code position moved from one side of the center section to the other, but I can’t get to my rearend housings to see which are which. Another change from 1968 to 1969 was the addition of flattened spots on top of the axle tubes where the snubbers meet the housing, 1967 and 1968 did NOT have the flat spots. Again, check your cast date codes if at all readable.

    Also, all 3 years had the 2-letter stamped code in roughly the same position, about 3-5 inches to the LEFT of the center section, on the rear of the left axle tube (left being the driver’s side of the car). Many times it is obscured by the steel brake line – you’ll need to loosen the clip welded to the axle tube and raise the brake line a bit to see it.

    The 1969 codes were different. Here’s the list (first the open ratio, then the posi):

    1967, 1968, and 1969 Axle Identification Codes

    Ratio

    1967

    1968

    1969

    Std. Diff. Code

    Lock Diff. Code

    Std. Diff. Code

    Lock Diff. Code

    Std. Diff. Code

    Lock Diff. Code

    2.56

    XB

    UN

    XB

    UN

    YB

    ZB

    2.78

    XC

    UP

    XC

    UP

    YC

    ZC

    2.93

    XD

    UR

    XD

    UR

    YD

    ZD

    3.08

    XE

    US

    XE

    US

    YE

    ZE

    3.23

    XF

    UT

    XF

    UT

    YF

    ZF

    3.36

    XG

    UV

    XG

    UV

    YG

    ZG

    3.55

    XH

    UW

    XH

    UW

    YH

    ZH

    3.90

    UX

    ZP

    ZK

    4.33

    UY

    ZR

    ZM

    I hope this clears up some confusion and misinformation. Whenever possible, ask about date codes (same style of codes as engine parts), axle codes (rear of left tube), spring perch depth (67 Monoplates are shallow), whether it has the extra brackets for traction bars (67 only), or if there are flattened spots on top (69 only).

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 2
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • This is what states on my PHS for the 1968 just wondering why the discrepancy. I am headed for a long drive (36 hrs) to pick up a ZM & ZN next weekend both supposed to for 68
    AXLE ID 1968
    sales code
    Ratio col.37 STD AXLE SAFE-T-TRACK
    2.56 (41:16) C XB ZB
    2.78 (39:14) D XC ZC
    2.93 (41:14) E XD ZD
    3.08 (40:13) F XE ZE
    3.23 (42:13) G XF ZF
    3.36 (37:11) H XG ZM
    3.55 (39:11) K XN ZN
    3.90 (39:10) P _ ZP
    4.33 (39:9 ) S _ ZR

  • Hi there. I recently purchased a ’68 Firebird 400, auto with A/C. It was restored completely body off frame in ’06 with 166 miles on it since 2002 till now. (30,007 original) The rear end code is XB. Is that a standard duty diff? The springs were replaced during the restoration and are 5 leaf. I don’t know what was on it from the factory, either a 4 or a 5 set up form what I have read. I think knowing if the XB was a standard duty or not would help me decide if the 5 leaf was the correct choice then. It’s sitting way high.

    Attachment

  • Hi Just wanted to let you know that axle codes are stated incorrectly for 1968 3.90 and 4.33.
    3.90 is listed as UX and should be ZP and 4.33 is listed as UY and should be ZR.

    Thanks

    NOTE From ADMN: Fixed

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Axle Codes 1967-1968

    I received a note concerning axles and how to identify the Sales Code for the axle ratio that is shown on the Billing History cards.

    A: In 1967, the ratio will be shown in the box marked 74 and in 1968, it will be shown in box 37. In both instances, the codes used to identify the axle ratio will be the same and they are as follows:

    C = 2.56:1
    D = 2.78:1
    E = 2.93:1
    F = 3.08:1
    G = 3.23:1
    H = 3.36:1
    K = 3:55:1
    P = 3.90:1
    S = 4.33:1

    Note: Do not confuse these Sales Codes with the two-digit code that is stamped on the axle tube.

    I hope that this information helps answer most axle ratio related questions.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Axle Codes for 1967 and 1968

    How do I identify the Sales Code for the axle ratio that is shown on the Billing History cards.

    A: In 1967, the ratio will be shown in the box marked 74 and in 1968, it will be shown in box 37. In both instances, the codes used to identify the axle ratio will be the same and they are as follows:

    C = 2.56:1
    D = 2.78:1
    E = 2.93:1
    F = 3.08:1
    G = 3.23:1
    H = 3.36:1
    K = 3:55:1
    P = 3.90:1
    S = 4.33:1

    Note: Do not confuse these Sales Codes with the two-digit code that is stamped on the axle tube.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rear Axle Code Location

    On a safe t track rear axle where is the two letter code stamped?

    A: Axle code should be on the left (drivers) side of the axle housing about 6 inches give or take from diff. cover.

    A: The code is stamped on the drivers side axle tube facing the rear. This code took me forever to find it is to the left of the brake clip. You must do a lot of sanding to find it.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Rearend Decode 1967

    I would like to know how to tell if the rearend of my 1967 car is original to this particular model year, what can i look for on the housing that will help me identify the original numbers’s matching rear.

    A: From the 1967 Firebird Supplement to the 1967 Pontiac service manual:

    “Eight different axle ratios are available from the Firebird models. They can be identified by the two-letter code stamped on the rear of the L.H. axle tube”.

    Here are the codes:

    XB – 2.56 open
    XC – 2.78 open
    XD – 2.93 open
    XE – 3.08 open
    XF – 3.23 open
    XG – 3.36 open
    XH – 3.55 open
    UN – 2.56 limited slip
    UP – 2.78 limited slip
    UR – 2.93 limited slip
    US – 3.08 limited slip
    UT – 3.23 limited slip
    UV – 3.36 limited slip
    UW – 3.55 limited slip
    UX – 3.90 limited slip

    If the rear end is original, the two letter code will tell you what axel ratio you have and whether it is an open or limited slip rear end.

    A: In 1967, there was no “XL” code for the Firebird Axle….there was however, a “YL” code which was for the 4:33 ratio. Only 13 Firebirds received the 4:33 axle in ’67; none of them were Ram Air cars. There was an “XL” code axle for the ’65 GTO… Std.Axle w/Metallic Brakes and I believe that Camaro used an “XL” code though, not positive.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Codes - Engine Compartment Codes (9)

    Q: 350 HO Codes for 1968

    What were the possible options and codes on my:
    1968 Firebird 350 H.O.
    L-76 H.O. Engine, 4Bbl Carb, Dual Exhaust, “H.O.” Side Stripes

    A:
    Engine:
    350 H.O. Man. Trans. “WK” 320 H.P. 10.5:1 Compr.
    350 H.O. Auto. Trans. “YM” 320 H.P. 10.5:1 Compr.

    Trans:
    3-Spd. Standard (C/S) Saginaw “RJ”
    3-Spd. Standard (F/S) Dearborn “DB”
    4-Spd Optional Muncie “FX”
    2-Spd Auto ST-300 “MB”
    2-Spd Auto (w/A/C) ST-300 “MC”

    Cylinder Heads: “18”
    Carburetor: M.T. 7028269 A.T. 7028266
    Intake manifold: (same as all 4Bbl) 9790140
    Exhaust Manifolds: (same as Std. & 400) 9794320RH/9777755LH)
    Distributor: M.T. 1111447 A.T. 1111282

    *There were 2,087 400 H.O. Firebirds made in 1968. I’d guess that there were close to that for the 350, perhaps less.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: 400 Engine Block Code for 1967

    I’m trying to decipher a code cast into the block on my 1967 firebird. The code is located near to where the distributor fits into the block. I think it is the cast date of the block but I would like to know for sure. The code is 86133. (As best as I can tell).

    I know this isn’t the sequential build number, (serial number), of the block since that is locate on the front on the block on the passenger side of the car.

    I’d appreciate any information you can provide.

    A: That is the blank block casting number. It’s like a part number. According to my info the whole number is 9786133. This denotes a 1967 400 cid block. I got the info from a book called Pontiac Muscle car performance 1955-1979 by Pete McCarthy

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Carburetor Codes

    I’ve posted this carb number a couple of times and the only response I received was the number didn’t match anything. So I’ve triple check the carb number and this is really it. So the question is can anyone identify the carb.

    7037262

    A: Its a 67( 4th digit) and is for a late half of year(3rd digit) with Calif emissions V-8 automatic( last number is even, odd is a stick shift.) Doesnt show as a Firebird tho. Still a rare carb for some GTO guy, to trade for a Firebird carb maybe. I wouldnt spend alot of money fixing the incorrect carb.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Decoding Engine, Carburetor, Manifolds

    I know I had a reference to decode some of these numbers, but I have forgotten if it was a book or website. My engine has ‘YR’ and ‘33202’ stamped just to the left of the top of the water pump, and ’23N108627′ stamped below the water pump. The intake manifold has ‘E220’ cast into it and the exhaust manifold has ‘9796155’ cast into it. The numbers on the carb are 17054905 and just below, 2738. Would someone please tell me what these codes mean. Thanks.

    A:
    YR ….. This is the specific Engine Usage/Type Code
    33202…. This is the Engine Unit Number
    23N108627…. This is the partial VIN, unique to the car the engine came from
    E220….. This is a Date Code (May 22 ’70 ?)
    9796155… This is a Part/Casting Number
    17054905…. This is the Usage Code for a Rochester Carb
    2738….. This is the Build Date Code (273rd day of 1968 ?)

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Engine Code Confusion for 1969

    I’m completely confused about the the engine serial # vs. the partial vin # on the engine….

    A: In 1969, the partial VIN was stamped on the front, RH face of the Engine. It could also be found on Manual Transmissions in addition to the “hidden” partial VINs stamped onto the Body Shell. Besides the VIN plate attached to the upper RH Cowl (dash), there was also a Fisher Body Trim Tag attached to the RH Cowl (firewall).

    Documentation for the 1969 Firebird (sequentially listed) consisted of:

    1) Chassis Broadcast Copy (for engine/chassis Line Workers)
    2) Body Broadcast Copy (for Trim & Final Line Workers)
    3) Car Billing Invoice (for accounting)
    4) Window Sticker (for dealer/customer)
    5) Owner Protection Warranty Protecto-Plate

    The VIN was used to identify the Vehicle Division, Assembly Plant, Body Style, Vehicle Series, Production Model Year, Engine Type (6cyl, V-8) and Sequential Unit Number. (NOTE: Vehicles were not always built completely sequentially per VIN) ((More on that later)). The VIN is found on all Documentation.

    The Fisher Body Unit Number was used during the Scheduling Phase for both Fisher Body and the Final Assembly Plant. For 1969, this included Lordstown, Norwood and Van Nuys. Each plant used a different method for assigning this number. Despite what many people claim, this number was NOT entirely a Sequential Unit Number. Vehicles were built in batches; The VIN was assigned from a batch set of numbers. Build Scheduling was based on many factors and not simply on who ordered first. As with the VIN issue, the Body Unit Number requires a more in-depth explanation. ((coming soon to a web-site near you)). The Body Unit Number can be found on the Broadcast Copies, Protecto-Plate and the Window Sticker.

    Starting in 1969, the Fisher Body Unit Number and Identification Number (as noted on the Broadcast Copy) were both the same numbers. On the Car Billing Invoice, there was another type of Identification Number used for accounting purposes only.

    The Invoice also noted the “Dealer Order Number” (for accounting).

    The Broadcast Copies also used a “Sequence Number” (3-digits). This was used for scheduling batch builds at Fisher Body. No sequential connection to any other numbers.

    The Trim Tag Date Code refered to the Fisher Body Scheduled Build Date (week & month). This was for the “Body in White” (bare shell) and not the Final, fully assembled vehicle. The closest date for Final Assembly can be found on the Invoice. There were (3) different dates identified: – “Date Shipped”, “Date of Note”, “Date of Execution” The “Date Shipped” would usually be no later than a few days of when the vehicle actually left the Final Line Certification Buy-Off.

    The Engine Unit Number for the 1969 Firebird (stamped on the RH front face of the Block) was used during Engine Assembly (Sub & Final) and for the Engine Installation Sequence at the Final Assembly Plant. The Engine Unit Number can be found on the Protecto-Plate and the Chassis Broadcast Copy (not Body Broadcast). Starting in 1969, the Engine Unit Number was not used on the Car Invoice. Once the Vehicle left Final Assembly, the only purpose for the Engine Unit Number was for Warranty related work which is why it was stamped onto the Protecto-Plate. The Accounting Dept. used the VIN and their own “Identification Number” found only on the Car Billing Invoice (microfiche files from PMD). This Number was used for billing between the Assembly Plant, Accounting and the Destination Dealer.

    In order to verify a correct numbers matching 1969 Firebird, the VIN on the Dash must match the VIN on the front of the Engine Block. Unless you have the original Protecto-Plate, the Engine Unit Number cannot be verified since it was not related to any other vehicle number.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Engine Codes

    I am currently in the process of having my engine for my 1967 400 Convertible rebuilt. The mechanic has cross-referenced the (YD) code to a 1967 400, but it says it is a 2 barrell, and my engine has a 4 barrell. I am unable to find a cross reference for the engine code under the 1967 sectioin of this site. I do not see the letters referenced in this section. Can someone help me?

    The code on the block is: 0081718 YD
    Also stamped is: 20P105982

    A: The 20P105982 is your clue to what that engine really came from. The first zero means it’s from a 1970 car, and the letter “P” means it was from a car built at the Pontiac assembly plant, where that year they were building full-sized cars like Catalina and Bonneville. The YD for that year indicates a 2 barrel 400, 290 gross HP from a Pontiac, meaning big car. Although the chart I have says a 10.0:1 compression ratio, it does not say what head cast numbers were used.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • i am having the same problem- I bought 1968 Firebird and was the told the engine was replaced. Found the marking for 350 but could not determine the Year. The code on front of engine block is
    OC81981 YL

    Attachment

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Engine Date Code for 1967

    I have confirmed that the engine number on my 1967 is: 415371 is the motor unit number, YT is the engine code: 400 AT with AIR, and the number on the distributor pad, is actually 9786133 and denotes a 1967 400 cid block.

    What I am curious about is if there is any sort of build date number located anywhere on the block or encoded in the motor unit number itself. The reason I am interested is that I would like to find another 1967 YT motor for my car. The build date on my car is 03 B, which translates into the second week of March. Since GM didn’t start stamping the engine blocks with the car’s VIN until 1968, all I need to do is locate a 1967 YT block which has a build date of prior to the second week in March, providing the blocks have/had any build dates associated with them in the first place.

    So, if I am going to go through the hassle and expense of finding another YT block, I need make sure that the block I do find would actually be date correct for my car.

    A: I got the following email reply to a simliliar post I did to rec.autos.antique. It explains where the date code is, and how to decode it. I checked on my motor and sure enough, my date code is B157, which is a build date of 2/15/67. Which makes perfect sense if the build date of the car was the second week of March. So, I thought I would share the information with the list:

    You probably saw the build date code and just didn’t recognize it. On the top surface around the distributor hole you will find a code that starts with a letter and has 3 digits. The letter indicates the month, the next two digits are the day, the last digit is the last digit of the year. In your case a correct date code might be B077. This would read “B” = February, “07” = 7th day of the month, “7” = 1967.

    The only time this gets fuzzy is with the use of the letter “i”. Some factories skipped the letter so that it would not be confused with a “1”. However this is not a perfect rule, some factories did use it but not all. The other problem you will have is that since your vehicle was built early in 1967 there are a lot fewer motors to choose from as Pontiac just moved from the 389 to the 400 in ’67. To be totally authentic you need a date code within about three months of your build date. Engines weren’t left laying around any longer than that and a judge in the really picky levels of competition will count off for anything outside of that.

    A: Check out the date code near the distributor. It’s 4 digits, starts with a letter and 3 numbers. The letter is the month A=Jan, B=Feb…the last digit is the year. Starting in sometime in Sept the engine would be for the next model year. If you have any questions, post the code.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Engine Serial Number does NOT Match Vehicle Identification Number

    I was told buy one of my local specialty wrecking yards that the engine serial number and the VIN number didn’t always match from the factory. I’m inclined to believe him. My 1968 convertible was built in Los Angles and it’s all original. Nowhere in my delivery documentation does the engine serial number appear, only the VIN and Body Tag data. My engine and VIN don’t match – not even close. What’s the truth here?

    A: Short Answer:
    * The VIN on the car should match the VIN on the Engine (68 & up)
    * The Engine Unit (Serial) Number was a separate number stamped on the Engine. This number has nothing to do with the VIN and appears with the VIN on the Billing History.
    So, you are correct when you say the Serial Number and VIN did not always match. Infact, they will NEVER match because they are different/separate numbers. If the VIN on the front of the Block matches the VIN on the Dash, that is the original correct engine for that car. You can also search for the B’Cast Sheet in the car, that will also ‘authenticate’ your car.

    A: Engine ‘Serial’ Number (manifest number) has no connection whatsoever to the Vehicle Identification Number. This number was used within the Plant for sequencing. There is a VIN stamped on the block however that should match the VIN on the car. This is stamped on the front, lower face of the block next to the timing chain cover (way down low near the harmonic balancer). People have tried explaining the purpose of the Engine Serial Number yet, nothing official from PMD has ever surfaced explaining when it was stamped and for what exactly it was used for. My guess is that is was used by scheduling/sequencing in order to match a particular engine with a specific car. The VIN would have most likely been stamped on the engine just prior to going into the car.

    While working on the 1967, 1968, and 1969 Firebird Registry, I have found that you can have two cars with very close VIN numbers and yet, their Engine Block Serial Numbers are hundreds (or even thousands) of numbers a part. The Engine Serial (Unit) Number can be found on the Broadcast Sheet and the Billing History Sheet. Once the car was built, only the VIN had any significance since the car, engine and trans (manual only) were tied together through it.

    Here’s another clue about the Engine Unit Number…. Looking through Service Bulletins, if an engine issue is addressed, most everytime the Engine Unit Number is mentioned. Example: for the 1967 Firebird w/Ram Air, there were two types of Engines; the 1st Type was used up through Engine Unit Number 646615. The 2nd Type started at 646616. Another Bulletin addresses the issue of 1967 Cylinder Head Oil Return Passage Modifications. It lists those vehicles involved including the range of VIN numbers and the Engine Production Number involved. Based on these examples, I would say the Engine Serial (Unit, Production, Manifest) Number was stamped onto the block somewhere within the Engine Assembly Line (not the foundary) along with the Engine Usage or Application Code (Two-Letter). I say this because the Foundary did not assemble the engine and had no idea whether it was going into a GTO or Firebird and if it was to be a manual or automatic Engine. Once the Engine Assembly Line received the Block, scheduling would have given it a specific Usage Code (2-Letter) in order for the Line to install the correct components on the Engine. Perhaps the Engine Unit Number was stamped at this point as well (according to scheduling/sequencing). At some point following the Engine Assembly, the Engine Unit Number was ‘connected’ to a VIN in order for the Plant to know which engine to ‘pick’ (or schedule) for a specific car.

    I doubt that 30yrs ago, the assembly plants were using the same sequencing (or “Just in Time”) delivery methods we use today however, I’m sure they did have some sort of scheduling/sequencing system. Also remember that the engine had a large white label with red letters attached over the two-letter code stamped on the front of the block. This was another aid in determining usage/application for a specific engine (much easier to read this white/red label than to squint to see the 2-letter stamped code). Anyhow, That’s my ‘long-winded’ opinion on the issue of Engine Unit Numbers.

    A: I used to work at the GM assembly plant if Fremont, CA. Engines came fully assembled less optional accessories. I’m sure this was the case at the sister LA pant as well. When the engine s/n number was stamped I don’t know. But I do know that sometimes there were problems with engines after they were installed and were swapped out at the plant. Also, sometimes there were problems like more bodies than engines (remember Buick engines going into Chevys – it’s true!), and they would grab whatever engine they could find and throw it in to keep the line moving. For what it’s worth!

    A: …Yes, Engine usually came to most Final Assembly Plants fully assembled. (Not always the case though). In addition to a Forging/Casting Plant, there was also an Engine Plant where they were assembled. I’d guess this is where the engine received its Serial Number stamp. This number was used by the Final Assembly Plant (for the vehicle) to coordinate scheduling/sequencing for the engine to body. No matter what the situation in the Plant, I seriously doubt that they would grab whatever engine they could to keep the line moving. Especially after ’67. Engines were sequenced with the body and were controlled for many reasons. The case of the Chevy/Buick engines was unique and different. Despite the mix of engines, all still had serial/VIN numbers stamped on them and they matched a specific car. It’s not like there was just this big batch of engines and a Line Operator going.. “eenie meenie minee moe….”

    A: The VIN got stamped on the block starting in 1968. I have a 1968 Ram Air I, and the VIN on the block, just to the left (looking at the front of the engine) of the timing cover, matches the last 6 numbers of the VIN. This number can”t be seen unless you remove the lower radiator hose from the water pump housing, or if you get a mirror and shine a light down by the harmonic balancer, you can see it

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Hey guys I have a 1972 455 H.O. hat came in a trans am , is there anyway I can use the engine number to try to find the body?

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Engine Unit Number Does Not Match

    The engine unit number stamped on my 1968 does not match the Billing History but I know it is an original engine. The engine code is WK, and the number next to that is 205848, engine unit production number per the Firebird page Tech info and has no reference to VIN number. Then the “engine unit number isted on the PHS Billing history is 205818. Note the number varies in one number: 4 vs 1. Could this be a miss stamp or some type of mistake.

    A: Engine Unit Number is the number stamped on the fron of the Block next to the Engine Code. Also found on the Billing History. These numbers should be the same. The Engine Unit Number and partial VIN were stamped on manually and were not as deep as the Code stamp. Also, there was not alot of quality assurance & certification back in 1968.

    The Gang-Stamp Tool could have slipped during the strike causing a partial stamp. Wouldn’t doubt that a mis-stamp could have happened either. Considering the numbers you shared are so close, seems obvious they are one in the same… despite their seemingly different appearance. I wouldn’t lose any sleep over it. Who would believe that you had the wrong engine and it just happened to be 30 units different from the original ?

    A: My guess is that the digit “4 ” is correct and that the digit”1″ stamped into your block is a weak stamping of the number “4”.Ive seen several weak stampings of production #s and VIN #s Some of which appeared to even skip a digit. This was actually a very weak stamping and had only a small portion of the number visable. Take a real close look, Im betting its a 4.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Codes - General Info (16)

    Q: “Numbers Matching”

    How do you know if you have a numbers matching car.

    A: People still call cars “numbers matching” if all of the Part Numbers and Casting Codes are correct and pre-date the car by the correct 1-3 months (in general).

    A:
    Use the following web pages on the First Generation Firebird web site as a guide:
    1967: https://FirstGenFirebird.org/1967-info/1967-technical-information/1967-drivetrain-id-number-information/
    1968: https://FirstGenFirebird.org/1968-info/1968-technical-information/1968-drivetrain-id-number-information/
    1969: https://FirstGenFirebird.org/1969-info/1969-technical-information/1969-drivetrain-id-number-information/

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Billing History Card Decode for Fiberglass Belted Tires

    I just received my billing history from PHS. The tire protion reads as follows:

    F70x14 RL FG $57.93 TMT $41.80 $2.93

    What did these codes represent?

    A: ….This is the breakdown for the type of Tires that were originally installed on your Firebird. (F70x14 Redlines, Fiberglass-Belted). The “TMT” is the Sales Code for that particular tire. The amounts listed are Tire Cost and Final Destination and Handling Charges.

    The Fiberglass Belted Tires were NOT a mid-year upgrade in 1969; that happened for the 1968 model year.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Billing History Codes

    I just received my Billing History from PHS. How do they equate the codes on the Billing History to the other sheet which itemizes it.

    A: The numbers on the Billing History you refer to are the Sales Codes which are broken down into groups (34 -thru- 80). Within each group, there are specific options. Depending on which options you have on your car, the last digit in the Sales Code will vary.

    Example: 34 is the group for Engine Options. If you have a Ram Air Firebird, the complete code would be 347. If it is a Sprint, 341.

    If you have more than one option in a group, the sales code for that group is determined by adding the specific option numbers together.

    Example: Group 52 includes Disc Brakes and the Custom Shifter Knob. If you have just Disc Brakes, the Sales Code would be 521. If you have the Disc Brakes and the Custom Shifter Knob, it would be 525.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Body Broadcast Sheet

    What is the body broadcast copy and where can I find one for my car? Are the codes similar to the billing history?

    A: The Body Broadcast Sheet was used in the assy plant as a way for the line- worker to easily recognize which component, accessory, engine, etc. to put on each vehicle. Once the car was complete, there was no other purpose for this sheet so, it usually was not left with the car. I have found though, that MOST ’68’s built at the Lordstown, OH plant will have at least one (sometimes 4) full or partial B’Cast Sheets still within the car (provided that the car was never restored). Also, its not uncommon to find a Broadcast Sheet in your car for the car built BEFORE yours… Remember, to the Line-Worker, this was just a piece of paper !

    Common Locations for Body Broadcast Sheet:

    • Under Rear-Seat (Lower Half)

    • Under Rear-Seat (Upper Half)..sometimes stuck in springs

    • Between track assy and seat assy on Passenger-side front seat

    • Under the carpet underlayment (sound-deadner)…pass.cmprtmt. floor pan

    • Between the seat covers and the seat cushion…only look if cover is bad!

    • Between Gas-Tank and Trunk Floorpan

    • Behind Door-Trim Panels

    • Behind Rear Qtr. Trim Panels…esp. on convertibles

    • Under the Instrument Panel Pad (usually only partial)

    …..One other ‘tip’…if and when you DO find the B’Cast Sheet…handle with care as it is usually very brittle. Some found under the sound-deadner are actually ‘bonded’ to the oil-based underlayment so…keep the whole thing, its still readable.

    Let us know if you do find the Broadcast Sheet; the codes listed on it are useful in our research. Please send us a copy or we can fwd. you a ‘blank- copy’ to fill out & return. Also, look for a new feature on the WebSite for Broadcast Sheets…… Decoding.

    A: The Body Broadcast Sheet was coded according to supplier component codes and Fisher Body codes. The Billing History used the sales codes. The only similarities between the two would be the basics like VIN, trim/paint colors & key codes. It is true that if you decode them properly, you can determine basically the same info… engine, trans, options, wheels, etc.

    The Broadcast Sheet can also provide authentication for a car. You can also use these codes to detail the components on your car. So, two different documents with two very different coding systems. Both very important in documenting a car but not the same.

    A: Use the following to help decode:

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0
  • Hi I have a body broadcast copy for my 1967 firebird, but I can’t decode it. is there a document that decodes this page?

  • Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

    Q: Date Codes

    While comparing the date code on my 1967 engine to the Fisher Body Tag, the dates are about three weeks apart. Should I be concerned my engine is not original even though it has the correct engine code (matches docs)?

    A: As for date coding, the general rule of thumb for drivetrain components compared to Body Assy Date is anywhere from 2 weeks to 3 months. I’ve seen documented cases where some components were the week before Body Build and as distant as 3 months for things like an alternator. Generally, 6 weeks is the usual maximum. Keep in mind that there are no absolutes when it comes to date coding. Inventory Control 30 years ago was not like it is today. Most people will say that NEVER should a drivetrain component be dated AFTER the Body Build Date however, “never say never”. There have been special cases where the entire engine assy had a casting date after the Body Build Date. This could have been the result of production shortages and/or special build orders.

    Also, remember that the Fisher Body Build Date on the firewall Trim Tag is not the final assy date. This Month & Week Code denotes the week that the body shell was assembled at Fisher Body. Again, in special cases, the body shell might have been pulled or put aside from the regular production flow due to a special order or part shortages. The Final Assy Date can be found on the Billing History. Listed as the “Invoice Date”, this is when the car left the final assembly line and was ‘certified’ to be shipped (bought-off). Once again, there could have been factors that delayed this date from being assigned to the vehicle or shipped. Part shortages, mis-builds, repairs would delay buy-off.

    Your Firebird body shell was scheduled and assembled during the 4th week of October 1967 (23rd – 27th). This was the basic painted shell with glass, carpet, headliner, seats, some trim. From there,. it was transferred to the Final Assy Plant (Lordstown, OH) for Final Assy. This is where the front fenders, hood, bumpers, trim and drivetrain were installed. The Invoice Date on your Billing History would tell you when the car left Final Assy. The “WK” Engine Block you have (I177) was cast on Oct. 17th 1967. From there it was sent to the Engine Assy Plant and then to the vehicle Final Assy Plant where additional components were added to it before being installed to the vehicle. One could estimate that if it was cast on the 17th (Tues.) then it was probably not assembled until the 20th or 23rd. Figure another couple of days until it arrived at Lordstown for Final Assy into the car. In this hypothetical scenario, there is a chance that this particular engine COULD have been installed into a Body built during the 4th week of Oct. 1967. Variables would be how long it sat at the foundry, shipping time, scheduling and routing through selectivity banks, etc.

    Often times, lower production vehicles were built according to a batch order. This would result in many of that particular model, color, engine being routed through production within the same week or period of time. This explains the Body Unit Number found on the Trim Tag and special in-plant codes found on the corner of the Trim Tag (usually found on Van Nuys or Norwood cars in late 1968 or 1969).

    Hope this helped. As always, this information is from various sources and research others or myself have done. Exceptions usually DO exist to every rule.

    Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

    [php function=1]

    Did you find this FAQ helpful
    Thumbs Up Icon 0
    Thumbs Down Icon 0

    Leave a Reply

    Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *


    Q: Dealer Zone Codes

    How do you decipher the dealer codes found on the build sheet and billing history?

    A: The Pontiac Motor Division dealer codes and most of their meanings have been collect by the Ultimate GTO Picture Site, GENERATION-1 FIREBIRD REGISTRY, and Wallace Racing. A couple branches of this data will be found at Ultimate GTO Picture Site and Wallace Racing.

    Do you have information to add to our research? Use the form found below the dealer code information?

    [php function=1]

    Zone 1 – Boston, Massachusetts (MA)
    01 ??? Abbott Automovile Co, New London, CT
    01 003
    01 021 Anson Motors Inc, 469 Pleasant St, Attleboro, MA 02703
    01 023 Arrow Pontiac Inc, 21-23 Massachusetts Av, Arlington, MA 02174
    01 035 Balch Pontiac-Buick, 67 Post Rd, East Windsor, CT 06088
    01 047 Barry Pontiac Inc, 166 Connell Hwy, Newport, RI 02842
    01 083 Blue Ribbon Auto Co., Inc, 400 West Thames St, Orwich, CT 06360
    01 091 Brigham-Gill Pontiac, Inc, 817 Worchester Road, Natick, MA 01760
    01 092 Brigham-Gill Pontiac, Inc, 817 Worchester Road, Natick, MA 01760
    01 111 Cannon Buick Pontiac, 95 Wareham St, Middleboro, MA 02346
    01 129 Arthur Center Pontiac, 360 Main St, Springlfield, MA 01101
    01 ??? Centerdale Motor Sales, Johnston, RI
    01 154 Cirle Pontiac, 401 Broadway, Route 1, Saugus, MA 01906
    01 171 Colongial Motors, Wareham, MA
    01 175 Columbia Pontiac Co, 650-700 Morrissey Blvd, Dorchester MA 02125
    01 179 Tom Connelly Pontiac, 70 Providence Hwy, Norwood, MA 02062
    01 196
    01 197 Conanover Pontiac, Inc, 475 Federal Street, Creenfield, MA 01310
    01 ??? Court Pontiac, Inc, Portland, ME
    01 207 Damon Pontiac Inc, 761 Bedford St, North Abingto, MA 02351
    01 208 Griffin Pontiac, 134 Main St, Brigewater, MA (See also 01-256)
    01 215 Shaw Pontiac DBA Samoset Garage, 40 Samoset St, Plymouth, MA 02346
    01 216 Cannon Pontiac, Middleboro, MA (?? 01-111 same ??)
    01 222 Rollins Inc DBA Shaw Pontiac, Plymouth, MA
    01 232 Hoxsie Pontiac, Westerly RI
    01 250 Barry Pontiac, Newport RI
    01 256 Griffin Pontiac, 134 Main St, Brigewater, MA (See also 01-208)
    01 259 Fiore Pontiac Inc, 399 Bald Hill Rd, Warwick, RI 02887
    01 263 Fitzgerald Pontiac Oldsmovile, Inc, 37 Liberty Street, Newbury MA 01951
    01 266 Franklin Pontiac-Cadillac Inc.,S Main St. Rt 7, Vermont 05701
    01 277 Fratus Motor Co, 479 Washington St Quincy, MA 02169
    01 288 Germano Pontiac-Buick Inc, Springfield Rd, Westfield, MA 01085
    01 289 Gilbert Pontiac-Cadillac, 103 N Main St, Woonsocket, RI 02895
    01 295 Grappone Inc, 167 N State St, Concord, NH 03302
    01 332 Haynes Pontiac Inc, 460 Yarmouth Rd, Hyannis, MA 02601
    01 347 A.C. Hine Co, 189 Washington St, Hartford, CT 06106
    01 359 Hosmer Motor Sales Inc, Medford, MA
    01 402 Kemp Pontiac/Cadillac, Newington, CT
    01 403 Kelley Pontiac, on Broadway in Bangor, Maine
    01 407 Keyes Pontiac-Oldsmobile, 129 Worchester St, Southbridge, MA 01551
    01 415
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Became Handy Pontiac in ’68

    W.E. Krupp Pontiac, St Albans, VT

    01 ???
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Sold to Rick Starr Pontiac-Cadillac early 80’s

    Lawless Pontiac-Cadillac, Shrewsbury St, Worcester, MA

    01 439 R.H. Long Motor Sales, 624 Waverly Str, Framingham, MA 01701
    01 444 Lorber Pontiac, Warren, RI
    01 445 Lorber Pontiac, 803 Taunton Av E. Providence, Providence, RI 02914
    01 446 Lyons Pontiac-Cadillac, Barre-Montpelier Rd, Barre, VT 05641
    01 471 McAdams Pontiac, 940 S Main St, Athol, MA 01331
    01 473 Mc Andrew Pontiac Inc, 209 S Broadway, Lawrence, MA 01843
    01 479 Mc Corrison-Cole Pontiac Inc, Depot St, Thorndike, ME 04986
    01 499 Miller Pontiac Inc, 250 President Ave, Fall River, MA 02722
    01 501 Miskinis Buick-Pontiac Co, 1000 Main St, Bridgewater, MA 02324
    01 512 Moody Pontiac – Buick, 712 Main St, Rockland, ME 04041
    01 535
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    They were bought out in 1988 by Sid Porter, who went out of business in Feb of 2002. Sid Porter sold the Pontiac franchise to Dick O’Connor in December of 1999. The current dealer (as of 2007) is O’Connor Pontiac-GMC-Buick, 187 Riverside Drive, Augusta, ME which kept the same dealer code.

    Nichol Pontiac, 337 State Street, Agusta, ME 04330

    01 541 Ocean Pontiac, 443 Rantoul St, Beverely St, Beverely, MA
    01 566 Pine Tree Pontiac Inc, Rt 16B Old Rochester Rd, Dover, NH 03821
    01 571 Russell Pontiac, 612 New Park Ave, West Hartford, CT (See also 647)
    01 573 Pontiac Center Inc, 620 New Park Av, West Hartford, CT 06110
    01 575
    01 577 Pontiac Village, Commonwealth Avenue Boston, MA
    01 585 Prince Pontiac Corp, Newton, MA
    01 647 Russell Pontiac Inc, 625 New Park Ave, Hartford, CT 06110 (See also 571)
    01 679 Sea Crest Cadilliac-Pontiac, 730 Lynnway, Lynn, MA 01905
    01 696 Ricky Smith Pontiac, Inc, 25 Main Street, Weymouth, MA 021188
    01 705 Rick Starr Pontiac, 832 N MAin St, Leominster, MA 01453
    01 707 Steingold Pontiac, 766 Broadway, Pawtucket, RI
    01 711 Stephen Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 1097 Farmington Ave, Bristol, Ct 06010
    01 724 Talarico Pontiac, 63 Elm St, Milford, NH 03055
    01 731 Tarbox Motors Inc, 1100 Tower Hill Rd, North Kingston, RI 02852
    01 748 Tedbetts Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, Sanford, NH 04073
    01 749 Tulley Buick/Pontiac, Nashua, NH
    01 767
    01 775 Waldimer Pontiac Inc, 1369 Middlesex, Lowell, MA 01851
    01 795 Ted Ware Pontiac, MA
    01 832 Yankee Pontiac-Buick Inc, Corner Main & Marshall St, North Adams, MA
    01 991 Pontiac Motor Division
    Zone 2 – New York, New York (NY)
    02 015 Alpine MOtors Corp, 8729 18th St, Brooklyn, NY 11214
    02 023
    02 024 Apuzzo Pontiac Corp, Bronx, NY
    02 034 Astro Pontiac Corp, 353 Grand Concourse, Bronx, NY 10451
    02 039 Ballston Motor Sales Inc, Ballston Spa, NY 12020
    02 043 The Barberino Brothers, Inc., 505 N Colony St, Wallingford, CT
    02 063
    02 064 Biener Pontiac, Great Neck, NY
    02 ??? Downes Pontiac, Matawan, NJ
    02 066 Garden State Auto Park Pontiac, Eatontown, NJ
    02 093 Harry Brown Pontiac, New Hyde Park, NY
    02 ??? Capitol Pontiac, 1200 State St, Albany, NY
    02 100 Cardinal Pontiac Inc, 9 New Broad St, Port Chester, NY, 10573
    02 120 Bob Clarke Pontiac Inc, Quaker Rd, Glens Falls, NY 12803
    02 129 Bill Conda Pontiac INc, 428 West Main St, Waterbury, CT 06702
    02 141 Cross County Motors Corp, Broad Street, Port Chester NY 10573
    02 143 Cunningham Pontiac, 1212-02 Jamaica Ave, Richmond Hill, NY 11418
    02 167 Glaxy Pontiac, 761 N Bedford Rd, Mount, Kisco, NY 10549
    02 ??? A.C. Hine Co, 189 Washington St, Hartford, CT
    02 ??? Joseph Gray Inc, Freeport, NY
    02 187 Kalaydjian Pontiac, 761 N Bedford Rd Mount Kisco, NY 10549
    02 256 Heath Buick-Pontiac, Inc., S Broadway, Saratoga Springs, NY 12866
    02 257 Holroyd Pontiac, Inc, 532 Fairfield Ave, Bridgeport, CT 06603
    02 265 Tom Jones Pontiac, Inc, Bridgeport, CT
    02 287 Kellogg Theiss Pontiac Cadillac Inc, Danbury Rd, Ridgefield, CT
    02 289 Kemper Pontiac/Cadillac, Bridgewater, NJ
    02 296
    02 299 Knowles Pontiac, Troy, NY
    02 302 Yager Pontiac INc, 470 Central Ave, Albany, NY
    02 303
    02 349 May Pontiac INc, 831 Main St, New Rochelle, NY 10805
    02 368
    02 370 Midtown Chevrolet Pontiac, New York City, NY
    02 371 Miller Motors, 328-30 Division ST, Amsterdam NY
    02 391 Montauk Pontiac, Bay Shore, NY
    02 ??? Myers Pontiac INc, Hawthorne, NY
    02 415 Myrtle Motors Corp., 61-20 Fresh Pond Rd., Maspeth, NY.
    02 417 Napoli Motors, Milford, CT
    02 419
    02 433 Otten Pontiac, 6233 Jericho Turnpike, Commack, NY 11725
    02 463 Mal Pierce Pontiac Inc, 3979 Hempstead Turnpike, Bethpage, NY 11714
    02 ??? Prince Pontiac, Newton, MA
    02 466
    02 ??? Regal Pontiac Ltd, 1220 Bloomfield Ave, West Cadwell, NJ
    02 502 Reydel Pontiac, Edison, NJ
    02 555
    02 560
    02 ??? Rockville Centre Motors, Inc, 510 Sunrise Highway, Rockville Centre, NY 11751
    02 565 Rukle Pontiac, Yonkers, NY
    02 567 Rushneck Pontiac, Tarrytown, NY
    02 591 Wipple Motors Inc, Hempstead, NY
    02 ??? Sarintino Pontiac/ Cadillac, Bridgeton, NJ 08302
    02 607 South Shore Pontiac 750 W. MERRICK RD. VALLEY STREAM, NY
    02 611 Star Pontiac, 2582 Hyland Boulevard, Staten Island, NY
    02 622 Suburban Pontiac INc, 611 Glen Cove Hwy, Glen Head, NY 11545
    02 637
    02 643 Turnpike Pontiac INc, 777 E State St, Westport, CT 06880
    02 651 Vail Bros Inc, Peconic Lane Pt 25, Peconic, NY
    02 691 Wipple Motors Inc, 209 N Franklin St, Hemstead, NY 11550
    02 991 Listed as the “ship to” dealer. May have been in PA
    Zone 3 – Philadelphia, Pennsylvania (PA)
    03 010 Fort Pontiac/Buick, ??
    03 019 Ardes Buick-Pontiac, Phoenixville, PA 19460
    03 ??? Arnold Pontiac & Olds, Maytown, PA
    03 027 Atlantic Cadillac-Pontiac, Phoenixville, PA 19460
    03 033 Bayliss Oldsmobile Inc, Reading, PA
    03 040 Baker Pontiac/Buick, Princeton, NJ
    03 071
    03 081 Bradley-Lawless Pontiac, Scranton, PA
    03 083 B. B. Brumbaugh INc, 114 E Baltimore Ave, Landsdowne, PA 19050
    03 088 Burrell, Halifax, PA
    03 102 Carpenter Pontiac, 220 East 8th St, Wyoming, PA 18644
    03 104 Cathcart Pontiac, Trenton, NJ
    03 129 Dave Cole Pontiac Inc, Camden, NJ 08105
    03 137 Cooleauge Pontiac, Tunkhannock, PA
    03 139 County Sales & Service Inc, High & Bridge Sts, Selingrove, PA 17870
    03 154 Harry Cramer Inc, Middletown, PA
    03 155 Davis Pontiac Inc, Second St Pike, Richboro, PA
    03 159 Shelley Pontiac Cadillac Inc, Lewistonwn, PA 17044
    03 167 Ebersole Pontiac, 1900 Cumberland St, Lebanon, PA
    03 174 Eldridge Pontiac-Buick, Inc., Princeton, NJ
    03 175 Deising (2nd Listing), 2812 N 3rd St, Milwaukee, WI
    03 203 Delaware Olds Inc, Wilmington, DE
    03 207 Fisher Motors, Lehighton, PA
    03 ??? J.L. Freed Sonds, Inc, Lansdale, PA
    03 215 David M Fogel Pontiac, 314 East Lancaster Ave, Wayne, PA
    03 223 Federick Pontiac INc, Woodbury, NJ
    03 ??? William B Fry Pontiac, Lititz, PA
    03 239 Gasko Pontiac, 412 Cape May Ave, Mays Landing, NJ 08330
    03 247 A.W Golden Inc, 801 Lancaster Av, Reading, PA
    03 248 Hall Buick-Pontiac Co., Smyrna, DE
    03 254 Hunsberger Buick-Pontiac, Inc., Hamburg, PA
    03 263 Kellam Pontiac-Buick, Inc.,Tasley, VA
    03 273 Martin Pontiac-Buick, New Hope, PA
    03 276 Hertrich Pontiac Buick Co, Blades Casueway, Seaford, DE 19973
    03 278 Holly Pontiac Inc, Rt 38, Mt Holly, NJ
    03 ??? Hunsberger Buick-Pontiac, 318 Walnut St, Hamsburg, PA
    03 286 Jones Pontiac Inc., Lancaster,Pa. 17604
    03 296 Johnny Johnson Pontiac Inc, 337-41 Broad St, Philadelphica, PA
    03 ??? Al Johns Pontiac INc, Kingston, PA
    03 299 Roberts Pontiac?, Quakertown RD, Philadelphia, PA
    03 300 Knopf Pontiac, 3401 Lehigh St, Allentown, PA 18104
    03 303 Bob Leitz Pontiac, Main St, Tuckerton, NJ 08087
    03 ??? March Pontiac, 211 E Lancaster Ave, Ardmore, PA 19003
    03 347 Meridith Auto Sales, Inc, Sunburst Hwy & M, Cambridge, MD 21613
    03 ??? Roger Migdon Pontiac, Strasburg, PA
    03 399 Reedman Pontiac, Rout 13 & Second Ave, Bristol, PA 19077
    03 401
    03 404 Rapp & Hopkins Pontiac, Rte 130 & Taylor La, Cinnaminson NJ 08077
    03 416 S & H Pontiac, 352 S Cameron St, PO Box 2015, Harrisburg, PA 17111
    03 419 Schreffler Pontiac/Buick, Sunbury, PA
    03 455 , Altoona, PA
    03 460 Paul S. Spaar, Inc, route 29, Palm PA 18070
    03 ??? Steffy Pontiac, Ephrata, PA (Sold 2001 to Ziemer Buick in New Holland, PA)
    03 483 John S. Stratton INc, Pitman, NJ
    03 ??? Strausbaugh Pontiac, Glen Rock, PA
    03 493 Teffy Pontiac, Jenkinstown, PA
    03 527 Union Park Pontiac, Wilmington, DE
    03 532 Victor Pontiac Inc, 336-41 S Broad St, Philadelphia, PA
    03 540 Wamsley Pontiac, Morrisville, PA
    03 ??? Wilmann Pontiac, Johnsonburg, PA
    03 568 Al Wilson Pontiac, Inc, 555 W Street Rd, Warminster, PA
    03 579 Woody Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 809 E Lincoln Highway, Coatesville, PA 19320
    03 591 Zipay Pontiac Buick, Inc, 954 Main Street, Peckville, PA 18452
    03 592 Zipay Pontiac Buick, Inc, Scranton Carbondale Why, Eynon, PA 18403
    03 991 Pontiac Motor Div, GMC, Delaware & Taska St, Philadelphia PA
    Zone 4 – Washington, Chevy Chase, Maryland (MD)
    04 011
    04 024 Bendall Pontiac, Alexandria, VA
    04 029
    04 047
    04 051 Bratten Pontiac Corp, 891 Little Creek Rd, Norfold VA
    04 064 Brown Pontiac, 1550 Wilson Blvd, Arlington, VA 222209
    04 ??? Brown Pontiac Inc, 1550 Wilson Blvd, Arlington, VA 222209
    04 ??? Chieftain Pontiac, York Rd, Towson, MD
    04 091 Clare Pontiac Sales, King George, VA
    04 111 Colony Motors, Inc., Williamsburg, VA
    04 119
    04 149 Fenner Pontiac INc, 1200 Rockville Pk, Rockville, MD 20852
    04 151 Keith Fletcher Motors, 281 Broadview Ave, Warrenton, VA 22186
    04 155 Flood Pontiac Co, 4221 Connecticut Ave, Washington, DC
    04 157
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    In 1985 Dealer Code changed to 04-159

    Fuquay Pontiac Inc, Danville, VA

    04 158
    04 159
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    In 1985 Dealer Code changed from 04-157

    04 179 Haley Pontiac, Richmond, VA
    04 185
    04 187 Harding Pontiac Co, Laurel, MD
    04 196 Haydon Pontiac, Kilmarnock, VA
    04 204 Hollomon Pontiac, Hampton, VA
    04 205 Hollomon Pontiac INc, 1010 W Mercury Blvd, Hampton, VA 23366
    04 207
    04 213 Jones Sales and Service Inc., Highway 220, Hot Springs VA 24445
    04 214 Jarman Pontiac, Inc. 301 West 29th St. Baltimore MD
    04 219 Kelly Pontiac Inc, 5801 Belair Rd, Baltimore, MD 21206
    04 220 Kern Motor Co Inc, 603 Loudoun St, Winchester, VA 22601
    04 223 King Pontiac City, Gaithersburg, MD
    04 239
    04 243 Kapalka Pontiac Inc, 30 Morgantown St, Fairchance, PA 15436
    04 263 Marbert Motors Inc, 284 West Street, Annapolis, MD 21401
    04 278 Steve Smith Pontiac, Inc., Fairfax, VA
    04 278
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Dealer Name changed from Steve Smith Pontiac

    Fairfax Pontiac-GMC Truck Inc, Fairfax VA

    04 291 Meekins Pontiac Corp, 1833 Laskin Rd, Virginia Beach, VA 23451
    04 ??? Prince Pontiac-Olds, Manassas, VA
    04 315 O’Donnell Pontiac Inc, Baltimore, MD
    04 318 Bill Page Pontiac Inc, Falls Church, VA
    04 331 Peyton Pontiac Cadillac, Inc, 358 West Main St, Charlottesville, VA 22903
    04 351 Dave Pyles Motors Inc, 4722 St Barnabas Rd, Marlow Heights, MD 20031
    04 359
    Info

    Codes Based On Following Info:

    Document Year: 1967

    Document Source: Bill History and window Sticker PHS

    Comments: This was the Dealer that my Firebird was shipped to.

    Raleigh Motor Sales Inc, Beckley, WV

    04 ??? Renn Pontiac, Inc, 15 # Sixth St, Frederick, MD
    04 379 Roughton Pontiac Corp, 1401 Monticello Ave, Norfolk, VA 23510
    04 399 Spangler Pontiac, Rossville, PA
    04 405 Sponsler Pontiac, Hughesville, MD 20637
    04 407 Standard Pontiac, 7125 Baltimore Blvd, College Park, MD 20740
    04 411
    04 412 Steen Miller, Oakhill, WV
    04 431 Town & Country Motors, Inc, 1775 South Main St, Harrisonburg, VA 22801
    04 455 Ward Pontiac Sales Inc, 3201 Warwick Blvd, Newport News, VA
    04 457
    04 ??? Waters Pontiac, High St, Portsmouth, VA
    04 471 Wilson Pontiac-Buick, Inc., Radford, VA
    04 475 Wilson Pontiac, Silver Spring, MD
    04 479 Bob Cutts Pontiac, 1154 W Main St, Salem, VA 24153
    04 480 Woodson Pontiac Inc, Williamson Rd, Roanoke, VA 24012
    04 995 Pontiac Division, Marland Zone Office, MD
    Zone 5 – Buffalo, New York (NY)
    05 026
    05 029 Averill-Laughlin Pontiac-Buick Inc, 37 West South St, Corry, PA 16407
    05 078 Carbone Pontiac, Yorkville, NY 2248
    05 ???
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Now located at 8129 Main St
    DBA Jim Culligan, Inc.
    Ad

    Jim Culligan Pontiac, 5326 Main St, Williamsville, NY 14221

    05 129
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Name changed from Al Ives Pontiac ’72,
    delear code changed from 05-297,
    and relocated somtime to 2845 Bailey Ave, Buffalo, NY.
    Now located at 2277 Niagara Falls Blvd, Buffalo, NY.

    Don Davis Pontiac, Buffalo, NY 2795

    05 136 Donman Pontiac, Rt 11, Brewerton, NY 13020
    05 140 Bob Duell Pontiac Cadillac, Inc, 1511 Pennsylvania Ave, Warren, PA 16305
    05 163 Fox Motors, 39 Buffalo St, Gowanda Ny 14070
    05 185 Win Gurney Pontiac, Inc, 811 W Genese St, Syracuse, NY 13204
    05 212 Hetzell-Dean Motors, Inc, Wellsville, NY
    05 224 Al Ives Pontiac Inc, 2277 Niagara Fals Blvd, Tonawanda, NY 14150
    05 ??? Kimmel Pontiac Inc, 1524 W 26th St, Erie, PA 16508
    05 251 Krueger Motor Sales Corp., Niagara Falls, NY
    05 297
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Incorporated: Septeber 12, 1967,
    Name changed to Don Davis Pontiac 1972,
    delear code changed to 05-129,
    and relocated somtime to 2845 Bailey Ave??, Buffalo, NY.
    Now located at 2277 Niagara Falls Blvd, Buffalo, NY.
    Ad

    Al Ives Pontiac, 75 Main St., N Tonawanda, NY 14120

    05 324 Outwater Pontiac-Cadillac Inc
    05 351 Piehler Pontiac Corp.,1560 Lake Ave., Rochester, NY
    05 355
    05 379 Ralph Pontiac Inc, 685 W Main St, Rocherster NY 14611
    05 433 Scutti Pontiac, Rochester, NY
    05 527 Don Watson Pontiac, Clinton, NY
    05 666 DaBrescia Motors INc, Bridge & Front St, Hancock, NY 13783
    05 991 Pontiac Motor Division, G.M.C, 5225 Sheridan Drive, Williamsville, NY 14221
    Zone 6 – Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania (PA)
    06 003 Acon Pontiac Inc, 1070 Midland Ave, Midland, PA 15059
    06 020 Arnold Pontiac-GMC Inc, 12 North Main St, Houston, PA
    06 027 Bauman Pontiac Inc, Wilkinsburg, PA
    06 029 Beatty Buick Pontiac & GMC Truck Co, 71 Murtland Ave, Washignton, PA 15301
    06 055 Babeck Pontiac, Nanty Glo, PA 15943
    06 064 Bowser Pontiac, Route 51 South, Pleasant Hills, PA
    06 075
    06 084 Carroll Pontiac, 537 St Clair Ave, Clairton, PA 15025
    06 ??? Clark Pontiac, Rebecca Ave, Wilkinsburg, PA
    06 090 Wright Pontiac, Carnegie, PA
    06 096 Constantin Pontiac, 6314 Forbes Ave, Squirrel Hill, PA
    06 097 Roy Friend Pontiac Inc, Gibsonia, PA
    06 098 Cochran Pontiac, Route 22, Monroeville, PA
    06 115 Lew Davies, Meadville, PA
    06 128 Downtown Pontiac of Pittsburgh, 2001 West Liberty Ave, South Hills Pittsburgh, PA
    06 140 F & P Pontiac, Morgantown, WV
    06 143 Fisher Pontiac Inc, 5748 Kennedy Ave, Export, FA 15632
    06 158 Freeman Buick Pontiac Co, Ellwood City, PA
    06 197 Hamilton Pontiac, Route 30, Irwin, PA
    06 233
    06 309 Towanda, PA 18848
    06 326
    06 329 Mikan Pontiac, route 356, Butler, PA
    06 ??? Gil Morrow Pontiac, 245 West Jefferson, Butler, PA
    06 347 Napoleon Pontiac, 341-45 E Seventh Ave, Tarentum, PA 15084
    06 421 Al Schwartz Pontiac Inc, 1400 Labanon Church Rd, West Mifflin, PA
    06 427
    06 449 Speck Pontiac/Oldsmobile, Huntingdon, PA
    06 468 Stupka Pontiac, 1361 E State St, Sharon, PA 16146
    06 469 Summers Motors Sales, 402 Colgate Dr, Marietta, OH
    06 476 Teter Motors Pontiac-Buick-GMC, 1013 N Randolph Ave, Elkins, WV 26241
    06 486 Palmer Pontiac, 7th and Market, McKeesport, PA
    06 487 Thomas Pontiac Co, 501 7th St, Parkersburg, WV 26102
    06 523 Walker Pontiac Inc, 658 Washington Rd, Mt Lebanon, PA 15228
    06 550 Wheelock Buick-Pontiac Inc, 501 S Liberty Blvd, Duboise, PA 15801
    Zone 7 – Pontiac, Michigan (MI)
    07 ??? Andy Anderson Buick- Pontiac, 7551 Auburn Rd, Utica, MI
    07 016
    07 018 Audette Pontiac, 1850 West Maple Rd, Troy, MI 48084
    07 031 Barnett Pontiac, 5524 Schafer Rd, Dearborn, MI
    07 034 Belcastro Pontiac Inc, Ferndale, MI
    07 035 Belford Motor Sales, Davison, MI
    07 ??? Berry Pontiac Inc, 874 West Ann Arbor Rd, Plymouth, MI
    07 048 Aubrun Pontiac
    07 054 Bockey Motor Sales, Delphos, OH
    07 074
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Became Auburn Pontiac in 1980’s



    Packer Pontiac, Auburn HIlls, MI

    07 075 Bukoski Sales & Service, Inc, Ubly, MI
    07 088 Ken Canfield Pontiac, Inc, 106 Hable, Durand, MI 48429
    07 099
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Names Change History:

    • Priehs Sales Pontaic Cadillac, Co 95-103 Macomb St, Mt Clemens, MI

    • John Rumel Pontiac-Cadillac-GMC 1967

    • Split Pontiac Div off to Randy Wood Pontiac late 1960’s

    • Randy Wood Pontiac, 38111 Gratiot Ave, Mt Clemens, MI

    • Jim Causley Pontiac, 38111 Gratiot Ave, Mt Clemens, MI

    • Sometime relocated to 17677 Mack Ave, Detroit, MI 48224 from 38111 Gratiot Ave, Mt Clemens, MI

    • James Pontiac 1970’s

    Changed Dealer Code from 07-099 to 07-100 at some point in time when called Jim Causley Pontiac

    Priehs Sales Pontiac Cadillac, Co 95-103 Macomb St, Mt Clemens, MI

    07 100
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Previous Address To: 17677 Mack Ave, Detroit, MI 48224
    Names Change History:

    • Priehs Sales Pontaic Cadillac, Co 95-103 Macomb St, Mt Clemens, MI

    • John Rumel Pontiac-Cadillac-GMC 1967

    • Split Pontiac Div off to Randy Wood Pontiac late 1960’s

    • Randy Wood Pontiac, 38111 Gratiot Ave, Mt Clemens, MI

    • Jim Causley Pontiac, 38111 Gratiot Ave, Mt Clemens, MI

    • Sometime relocated to 17677 Mack Ave, Detroit, MI 48224 from 38111 Gratiot Ave, Mt Clemens, MI

    • James Pontiac 1970’s

    Changed Dealer Code from 07-099 at some point in time when called Jim Causley Pontiac

    Jim Causley, 38111 Gratiot Ave, Mt Clemens, MI

    07 101 Cawood Auto Co, 2516 Pinegrove, Port Huron, MI 48060
    07 123 Clohecy Pontiac Inc, 22520 Grand River Ave, Detroit, MI
    07 132
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Was Goodwin Pontiac until 1970’s
    Then changed Dealer Code from 07-133

    Orson E. Coe Pontiac, Inc, Grand Rapids, MI

    07 133
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Became Coe Pontiac 1970’s
    Then changed Dealer Code to 07-132

    Goodwin Pontiac, Division St, Grand Rapids, MI

    07 167 Might be Maxton Motors, Butler OH?
    07 ??? Feder Pontiac Inc, 3620 Lee Rd, Shaker Heights, OH 44120
    07 243 Flannery & Sons, 320 E Huron, Bad Axe, Ml
    07 263 Glen Pontiac Inc, 15860 Grand River Ave, Detroit, MI
    07 263 Glenn Pontiac, 1560 Grand River, Detroit MI 482277
    07 267 Front Pontiac Sales, Perrysburg, OH
    07 275 Garber Pontiac & Cadillac, 5155 State Rd, Saginaw, MI 48603
    07 276 Kyle Motors, 350 N Main St, Mountain Home,
    07 278 Jim Gilmore Cadillac Buick Pontiac, 411 W Kalamazoo Ave, Kalamazoo, MI
    07 283
    07 ??? Glover Pontiac, Almont, MI
    07 303 Grant Motors, 161 Maple, Grant, MI 49327
    07 331
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Became Randy Hosler Pontiac on Dixie Highway

    Jack V. Haupt Pontiac Sales Inc, 7151 N Main St, Clarkston, MI 48016

    07 347 Jim Herrin Pontiac, 335 East Main Cross St, Findlay, OH
    07 359 Higgins Pontiac Inc., 23225 Woodward Ave, Ferndale, MI 48220
    07 361 Red Holman Pontiac, Westland, MI
    07 399 Pontiac Motor Division Retail Store, 65 University Dr, Pontiac, MI
    07 449 Ray Lathem Pontiac-Buick-GMC
    07 455 M L Reams, 3 Castle Dr, Battle Creeek, MI
    07 456 Stan Lassen Pontiac-Cadillac, Inc, Battle Creek, MI
    07 ??? Stan Long Pontiac Inc, 10450 Grand River Ave, Detroit, MI
    07 493 Clausey Pontiac, MI
    07 525 McDonald Pontiac-Cadillac-GMC Inc., 5155 State RD Saginaw, MI 48603
    07 ??? McMullen Pontiac, Pontiac, MI
    07 596 One Pontiac-Buick, 211 Auglaize, Wapakoneta, OH 45895
    07 607 Packer Pontiac, 18650 Livernois, Detroit MI
    07 607 Packer Pontiac, 500 South Opdyke Rd, Pontiac, MI 48341
    07 631 Pontiac Motor Division Retail Store, 65 Uiversity Dr, Pontiac, MI
    07 ??? Rafferty Pontiac, Niles, MI 49120
    07 672
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    1965 located at 25420 Van Dyke, Centerline, MI

    Rinke Pontiac, 27100 Wan Dyke Ave, Warren, MI

    07 675 Roth Pontiac, Cherry St, Toledo, OH
    07 679 Royal Pontiac, Royal Oak, MI
    07 708 Bob Sellers Pontiac, 22520 Grand River Ave, Detroit MI
    07 720 Shelton Buick-Pontiac, 855 S Rochester Rd, Rochester, MI 48307
    07 731 Silveus Motor Sales Inc, Jefferson St, Cromwell, IN 46732
    07 735 Simpson, Pontiac, Southgate, MI
    07 738
    07 ??? Skinner Pontiac, 68811 South Main St, Richmond, MI 48062
    07 767 Stevenson Pontiac, Ludington, MI
    07 780 Somerset Pontiac, Troy, MI
    07 783 Superior Pontiac-Cadillac, 1717 South Dort Hwy, Flit, MI 48053
    07 787 Sweeny Buick-Pontiac, 70 E Chicago St, Coldwater, MI
    07 ??? Tessier Pontiac-GMC, 16100 Fort St, Southgate, MI 48192\
    07 813 Underwood Cheverolet-Pontiac, 105 Brown St, Clinton, MI 49236
    07 828
    07 850 Porterfield-Wilson Pontiac, Grand River Ave, Detroit, MI
    07 ??? Wilson Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 1350 North Woodward, Mirmingham, MI
    07 855 Windatt Pontiac, Muskegon Heights, MI
    07 859
    07 867
    07 875 Woody Pontiac Sales, 12140 Joseph Campau, Hammtramck, MI 48212
    07 880 Charlie Burk Pontiac Inc, 12740 Gratiot Ave, Detroit, MI 48205
    Zone 8 – Cleveland, Ohio (OH)
    08 ??? Macafee Pontiac, Miamisburg, OH
    08 ??? Miller Pontiac Cadillac Inc, Fremont, OH
    08 024 F.E. Avery Co, 4700 Broad Street, Columbus, OH
    08 069
    08 103 John Edwards Pontiac (The Edwards Motor Company – now Spitzer Pontiac GMC)
    08 117 Don Everett Pontiac, 1904 Cleveland Rd, Sandusky, OH 44870
    08 120
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Became Bob Morris Pontiac 1978 and then Morris Pontiac

    Ray Faro Pontiac, Elyria, OH

    08 155 Grabski Pontiac Inc, 6872 Broadway Ave, Cleveland, OH 44103
    08 167 “something” Pontiac Inc, Columbus, OH 43228
    08 189 Jay Pontiac, Bedford, OH
    08 197
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Home of the “TIN INDIAN” race team

    Knafel Pontiac Inc, Akron, OH

    08 219 Marte Pontiac Inc, 1224 N High Ave, Columbus, OH
    08 223
    08 231
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Changed to Axlerod Pontiac

    Lou Meliska Pontiac, Brookpark Rd, Parma, OH

    08 242 Mikesill-Crosky Motors Inc, 700 Lincoln Ave, Cadiz, OH
    08 249 Morrison Cadillac/Pontiac, Zanesville, OH
    08 297
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Became Roulette Pontiac 1969,
    Classic Buick Pontiac GMC 1980s and relocated

    Redman Pontiac in Painesville, OH

    08 283 Paradise Pontiac, 8004 Lorain Ave, Cleveland, OH 44102
    08 331 Taylor Pontiac GMC Inc, 161 E Main St, Geneva, OH
    08 328? Maple City Auto Co Inc, Market Place, Albion, MI 49224
    08 351 Tidball Garage, South Main St, Killbuck, OH 44637
    08 354 Trotter Pontiac Inc., Niles OH
    08 371 Weidner Pontiac Co, Mansfield, OH
    08 387 Waynesburg Buick/Pontiac, Waynesburg, OH
    08 391 Howard Wilson, North Lima, OH 44452
    08 392 Howard Wilson Pontiac Inc, 7230 Market Street, Youngstown, OH 44512
    08 949 Cleveland Avenue, N.W., Canton OH 44702
    Zone 9 – Cincinnati, Ohio (OH)
    09 ??? Buckles Motors, Urbana, OH
    09 ??? Means Auto Inc, Main St, Ft Wayne, IN
    09 ??? Don Medow Pontiac Inc, 1900 Lincolnway East, South Bend, IN 46613
    09 ??? Paintsville Sales & Service (Pontiac Buick GMC), Paintsville, KY (Changed to Con Pontiac ’65)
    09 029 Banyas Pontiac-Cadillac, Chillocothe, OH
    09 047 Bell Pontiac-Buick Inc., 1385 South Tenth Street, Noblesville IN 46060
    09 079 Burnett Pontiac Inc, 8166 Montgomery Rd, Cincinnati, OH 45236
    09 099 Chenoweth Motor Co Inc, Xenia, OH
    09 100
    09 131 Cooke Pontiac Co, Louisville, KY
    09 170 Tom Easterly Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 138 E Main St, Danville, KY 40422
    09 177
    09 181 Fiehrer Motors Inc, 2531 Dixie Hwy, Hamilton, OH 45015 (old code, see new code 186)
    09 182 Bernie Fields Motors, 131 S Main St, Batesville, IN 47006
    09 186 Fiehrer Motors Inc, Hamilton, OH (new code, see old code 181)
    09 223
    09 227 Haas Bros, East Pike St, Jackson Center, OH 45334
    09 231 Hageman Pontiac Co, 4114-20 Montgomery Rd, Norwood, OH 45212
    09 247 Hanson Motor Co, 1327 N Walnut St, Bloomington, IN
    09 249 Hardin Motors, 250 W Dixie Ave, Elizabethtown, KY
    09 255 Hedge’s Pontiac Inc, Indianapolis, IN
    09 271
    09 278 Ralph Hockett Inc, 1302 W Main St, Greenfield, IN 46540
    09 289 McAfee Pontiac Inc, Miamisburg, OH 45347
    09 373
    Info

    Codes Based On Following Info:

    Document Year: 1967

    Document Source: Bill History and Window Sticker from PHS

    Comments: Not sure if the Address. I know this dealer still exists, but it’s a different name and might of moved?

    Liddie Pontiac Cadillac Inc, Clarksville, IN

    09 384 Marsh Pontiac Inc, 9101 Colerain Ave, Cincinnati, OH 45239
    09 386 Maher Buick-Pontiac Inc, 1618 Broad St, New Castle IN 47362
    09 392 John Lynch Chev-Pont, 941 Milwaukee, Burlington, WS
    09 402 Meeks Pontiac-Buick, 636 S Main St, Winchester IN 47394
    09 435 Moses Pontiac Sales Inc, Huntington, WV 25719
    09 443? Murphy-Graef Pontiac, Troy, OH
    09 455 Nally-Mudd Pontiac, Springfield, KY
    09 463 Noll Motors, Inc, 2001 National Rd, Columbus, IN 47201
    09 467 Oaklandon Sales Co, Oaklandon, IN
    09 475 Paddock Pontiac, N Main St, Dayton, OH
    09 483 Pannell Pontiac, Lousia KY
    09 503 Parsons Pontiac Sales, 117W Main Cross Street, Edinburg IN 46124
    09 505 Passarello-Hurst Pontiac, 505 S Main St Williamstown Ky 41097
    09 544
    09 545 Russ Regenold Pontiac Inc, 303 Pendleton Ave, Anderson, IN
    09 557 Larry Risher Pontiac Inc, Vine & Galbraith Cincinnati, OH 45216
    09 562 Larry Risher Pontiac Inc, Springfield, OH
    09 589 Schlingman Buick-Pontiac Inc, Piqua, OH
    09 625 Ray Steidle Pontiac, Inc., Milford OH
    09 639 Charlie Sturgill Motor Co, 129 E High St Lexington KY 40507
    09 648 Jake Sweeney Pontiac, Cincinnati, OH
    09 672 Troutwine Auto Sales, 9 North Main st, Arcanum, OH 45304
    09 693 Dave Waite Pontiac Inc, 5350 N Keystone Ave, Indianapolis, IN 46220
    09 696
    Info

    Codes Based On Following Info:

    Document Year: 2002

    Document Source: Source worked there approx 2002-05

    Comments: I was a Mechanic here at Jack Walker Pontiac a few years back. Kyle

    Jack Walker Pontiac, 8457 Springboro Pike, Miamisburg, OH 45342

    09 708 Wells(?) Pontiac, Richmond In 47374
    Zone 10 – Chicago, Illinois (IL)
    10 ??? Virgil Anderson Motor Co, Aledo, IL
    10 ??? Borg Pontiac Inc, 2300 Ogden Ave, Downer’s Grove, IL
    10 ??? Finazzo Pontiac Co, West Frankfort, IL
    10 ??? Gustafson Motors Inc, Park Ave (Rt. 176) & Milwaukee Ave (Rt. 21), Libertyville, IL
    10 007 Anthony Auto Sales Inc, 1473 Central Ave, Dubuque, IA 52001
    10 014 Bert Adams Pontiac, Joliet, IL
    10 017 Batjes Pontiac Inc, 201 S Prairie Street, Elkhart, IN 46514
    10 043 Blackhawk Pontiac Sales, Rockford, IL
    10 044 Blackhawk Pontiac Sales Inc, 802 W State St, Rockford, IL 61102
    10 051 Borek Pontiac, 12215 S Western Ave, Blue Island, IL 60406
    10 095
    10 110 Coloma Motor Sales, East Center St, Coloma MI 49022
    10 111 Coloma Motor Sales, Coloma, MI 49038
    10 112 Colonial Motor Sales, Naperville, IL
    10 113
    10 115 Community Motors Inc, Chicago, IL 60649
    10 147 Davis Pontiac Inc, 420 N York St, Elmhurst, IL 60127
    10 150
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Moved to Zero Boulder Hill Pass, Montgomery, IL 60538 1989

    Jim Detzler Pontiac Inc, 23 Washington St, Oswego, IL 60543

    10 160 Elizabeth Garage, 201 N Main, Elizabeth, IL 61028
    10 163 Peter Epsteen Pontiac, 7501 Lincoln Ave, Skokie, IL
    10 177 Wiele Motor Company, PO Box 71, Columbus Junction, IA 52738
    10 185
    10 195 Bert Adams Pontiac, Joliet, IL
    10 197 Greenway Pontiac-Oldsmobile, Inc., Morris IL
    10 199 Grossinger Pontiac, Chicago, IL
    10 208 Haggerty Pontiac, Villa Park, IL
    10 223 Charles R. Hearn Inc, Chicago, IL
    10 245 Horst-Zimmerman Inc, 1740 5th Ave, Rock Island, IL 61202
    10 247
    10 254 C James Inc, 6060 North Western Av, Chicago IL
    10 260 Johnson Pontiac Inc, 611 N Second St, Clinton, IA
    10 261 Jones Buick-Pontiac, Pontiac, IL
    10 268 Key Pontiac Inc, Corner Grand Ave & Church, Elmhurst, IL 60127
    10 280
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Changed name to Mike Haggerty Pontiac

    Kole Pontiac, 9301 S Cicero Ave, Oaklawn, IL

    10 287 Warren Langwith, Inc, Davenport, IA
    10 296 Dick Ludwig Pontiac, 7501 N Lincoln Ave, Skokie, IL 60076
    10 299 Lawmaster Pontiac in Plymouth, IN
    10 314 Mecum Pontiac-Buick Inc, 801 W Grant Highway, Marengo, IL 60152
    10 349 Ken Nelson Buick Pontiac, 1000 N Galena Avenue, Dixon IL 61023
    10 367 Ormsby Motors, 50 N Main St, Crystal Lake, IL 60014
    10 383 Peoples Pontiac Inc, 6060 N Western, Chicago, IL
    10 391 Petersen Pontiac, 1949 St. Johns Ave, Highland Park, IL
    10 395 H.L. Pierce Motor Sales Inc, Elgin, IL
    10 401 Don Pittman Motors, Inc, 845 Main St, Antioch, IL 60002
    10 412 Public Pontiac, 7501 N Lincoln Ave, Skokie, IL 60078
    10 421 Ridge Motors Inc, 1533 Des Plaines Ave, Des Plaines, IL 60016
    10 424 Right-Way Pontiac, Inc., 160 W. Lincoln Hwy., DeKalb, IL
    10 455 Seltzer Pontiac Inc, 5301 West Irving Park Rd 2, Chicago, IL
    10 465 Scholl Pontiac Inc, 1101 Chicago Ave, Evanston, IL
    10 475 Henry Susk Pontiac, Chicago, IL
    10 480 Bill Sullivan Pontiac Inc, Arlington Heights, IL
    10 509 Village Pontiac, 601 N Washington St, Naperville, IL
    10 512 Hendrickson Pontiac, 5151-5201 Madison St, Chicago, IL
    10 513 Waller-Welsh Pontiac Inc, 5601 LaGrange Rd, LaGrange, IL
    10 532 Jack Wolfe Pontiac-Cadillac, Belvidere IL
    10 634 Browning Motor Service, 785 S. Chestnut, Platteville, WI 53818
    10 754 Pioneer Motors, Inc., 1111 Madison Street, Lancaster, WI 53813
    10 991 (ship to) Regional Warehouse Pool, Pontiac Zone Office in Illinois. Vehicles shipped there were used for “PR purposes” before being sold through a dealer.
    Zone 11 – Milwaukee, Wisconsin (WI)
    11 ??? Duckler Motors Inc, 1309 S 70th St, West Allis 14, WI
    11 032 Badger Pontiac, Milwaukee, WI (Later Foster Pontiac)
    11 044 Bauer-Zorn, Inc, 113 East Main St, Whitewater, WI 53190
    11 096 Bruenol Pontiac-Buick, Inc, Fairwater-Union, Ripon, WI 54971
    11 133 Copper Pontiac-Olds Inc, 532 Division St, Box 223, Stevens Point, WI 54481
    11 219 Grogan Motor Sales, Inc. 422 Milwaukee Street, Lomira, WI 53048
    11 240 Deising Pontiac, Fond Du Lac, WI
    11 250 Jaeger Pontiac Inc, 3636 South 27th St, Milwaukee, WI
    11 252 Jenny Pontiac, Janesville WI
    11 260 Don Kinas Pontiac, Oakwood & Lisbon Roads, Oconomowoc, WI 53066
    11 305 Mackens Pontiac, 139 S Washington St, Green Bay WI
    11 313 Public Service Garage, Corner 4th & Washington, Marquette, MI
    11 374 Olson-Clason Pontiac, Inc., La Crosse, WI
    11 424 Schappe Pontiac, 801 E Washington Ave, Madison, WI 53703 (now Don Miller Pontiac)
    11 443 Sommer S Inc, 139 N Main St, Box 27, Thiensville WI 53092
    11 463 Swenson & Son Inc, 815 Wisconsin Ave. Boscobel, WI 53805
    11 467 Taber Motors, Inc., 105-11 Madison Street, Beaver Dam WI 53916
    11 475 Phil Tolkan Pontiac Inc, 2301 W Silver Spring Drive, Milwaukee, WI 53209
    11 487 Tusler Motor Co., Inc., 1303 W. Wisconsin Ave., Appleton, WI 54910
    11 499 Ernie Von Schledorn Pontiac-Buick, Inc., N88 W15415 Main St., Menomonee Falls, WI 53051
    Zone 12 – St. Louis, Missouri (MO)
    12 ??? Armacost Pontiac, 15th & Baltimore, Kansas City, MO
    12 ??? Hundley Pontiac Co, 1801 Madison Ave. May have been in Illinois
    12 ??? Shikles Motor Co, 208 Broadway, Jefferson City, Missouri
    12 ??? Travis Cadillac-Pontiac, Main St, Peoria, IL
    12 002 A&G Motor Sales, 12th Washington, Tell City IN 47586
    12 056 Barton Pontiac Inc, 9001 W Florissant Ave, St Louis, MO
    12 059 Cochran Pontiac Cadillac, West Plains MO
    12 061 Ken Bender Buick Pontiac Inc, 2311 First Capitol Dr, St Charles, MO
    12 082 Briggs Motor Sales, 109 W Vincennes St, Linton, IN 47441
    12 112 Cape GMC-Pontiac, 755 S Kings HWY, Cape Girardeau MO
    12 119 Carmody Pontiac Inc, 622-628 St. Louis Ave, East St Louis, IL
    12 137 Carson Pontiac Inc, 10230 Manchester Rd, St Louis, MO 63122
    12 138 Central Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 614 Kings Highway, Rolla, MO 65401
    12 260 Lou Fusz Motor Co, 1025 N Lindbergh St, St Louis, MO
    12 263 Glenn Pontiac-Cadillac Co, Fifth & Logan, Lincoln, IL 62956
    12 283 Hahn Motor Sales, Olney, IL
    12 332
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Bought in 1991 by S&K Pontiac 1400 S Dirksen Pkwy, Springfield IL 62708

    Huber Pontiac Inc

    12 381 Kempf Motor Co, 301 W Morrison, Fayette, MO 65248
    12 457 Maxon Buick Pontiac Inc, 120 N Commercial St, Branson, MO
    12 462 Mcaleer Buick-Pontiac, 115 W North St, Danville IL 61633
    12 467 Dave McCormick Pontiac, 1020 Broadway, Quincy, IL 62301
    12 506 Montgomery Motor Sales Inc, 288 S Jefferson, Lebanon, MO 65536
    12 514 Neely Pontiac, 1955 E Pershing Rd Decatur Il
    12 549
    12 551 Poland Pontiac-Buick Inc, 600 East Fayette St, Effingham, IL 62401
    12 665 Stoyer Motors Inc, 524-32 Avenue G, Ft Madison, IA 52627
    12 674 Taggart Motor, 1102 W Main, Shelbyville, IL
    12 683 Thompson Sales Co, M-A BOX 1007 S. St, Springfield, MO
    12 687 Thoms Pontiac Inc, 5225 Delmar BLVD, St Louis, MO
    12 715 Twin City Pontiac Co, Champaign, IL
    12 723 Charles E. Vincel Pontiac, 3295 S. Kingshighway, St Louis, MO
    12 768 Winkle Inc, Lougoote, IN
    12 777 Gene Worn Pontiac Inc, Hwy 61&67, Crystal City, MO
    Zone 13 – Kansas City, Missouri (MO)
    13 ??? Mizell Motor Co, 111 South Second, Norton, KS 67654
    13 ??? Tommy Young Motor Sales, 503 Broadway, Monett, MO
    13 051
    13 052? Buxman Motors Inc, Newton KS
    13 103 Emil S Pontiac, 509 Monroe St, Scott City KS 67871
    13 121 Finley Pontiac, 1603 Main St Goodland Ks 67715
    13 160
    13 168 Griffith Motor Co, Neosho, MO
    13 234 Bill Kennedy Pontiac, 301 West Helm, Brookfield, MO 64628
    13 243 Andy Klein Pontiac, 7801 Metcalf (69 Hwy) Overland Park KS 66204
    13 251 Kriegh Motor Co, 107 N Sheridan, Minneapolis KS 67467
    13 259 Laner Pontiac Co, 4235 Troost Ave, Kansas City, MO
    13 276 Lucas-Fredlake Pontiac, Twelfth & Faraon, St Joseph, MO
    13 318 Miller Pontiac Co, Kansas City, MO
    13 340 Morganfield-Mc Kenna Pontiac, Inc. 1219 North Washington, Junction City, KS 66441
    13 355 D. Hara Motor Co., 104 East 4th Street, Hutchinson KS 67501
    13 355 O’Mara Motor Co. 104 E. 4th, Hutchinson KS 67501
    13 379 Quality Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 1040 Vermont, Lawrence, KS 66044
    13 397 Roper Pontiac Inc, 921-25 Joplin St, Joplin, MO
    13 410 Scholfield Bros Pontiac, 7633 E Kellogg, Wichita, KS 67207
    13 435 Dale Sharp Pontiac, Topeka, KS
    13 446
    13 449 Clare Smith Motors Inc., 2910 W Highway 50, Emporia, KS 66801
    13 471 Byron Stout Pontiac, 1214 E Douglas, Wichita, KS 67207
    13 490 Koons Pontiac Olds, 7105 Sudley Rd, Manassas, VA
    13 514 Frank Waters Pontiac, 7707 State, Kansas City, KS
    13 514 (2nd listing) Frank Waters Pontiac, 1212 Minnesota Ave, Kansas City, KS
    13 991 Pontiac Motor Division (Zone office), 800 West 47th St, Kansas City MO
    13 991 (Regional Warehouse) – The regional warehouse was National Garage at 1104 Mc Gee, Kansas City MO. This appears to be a parking garage where the cars ordered by the KC zone office were delivered and prepped.
    Zone 14 – Omaha, Nebraska (NE)
    14 ??? Mike Gorges Pontiac, 24th and Deer Park Ave, Omaha, NE
    14 ??? MacKenzie Pontiac up till about 1980
    14 ???
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Became Park Place Pontiac-Cadillac-GMC, Inc.

    Vanice Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 1201 Q Street (12th & Q) Lincoln, NE

    14 004 Ray Ackley Pontiac, Indianola, IA
    14 015
    14 095 Carriage Motors Inc, ?th and Stuart, Clarinda, IA 51632
    14 109 Christeson Motor Sales Inc, 116 East Second St, Webster City, IA 50595
    14 110 Bob Cobb Pontiac, McComb, NE
    14 120 Don Danskin Pontiac-Cadillac-GMC, PO Box 595, Marshaltown, IA 50158
    14 179 Eymann Implement Co, Forrest City, IA
    14 189 Feldman Pontiac, Inc. 800 Commercial St, Waterloo, IA 50701
    14 216 General Pontiac, 2401 W Broadway, Council Bluffs IA 51501
    14 226 Graf Motors, Inc., Grand Island, NE
    14 233 Gregg Motor Co, 214 Capital St, Yankton, SD 57075
    14 357 Koopman Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, E on Hwy 18, Sheldon, IA 51207
    14 377 Leist Oil Co, Highway 20, Rockwell City, IA
    14 421 McGrath Pontiac Inc, 601 2nd Ave SE, Cedar Rapids, IA 52301
    14 467 Ethan Myers Garage, Adel, IA
    14 497 Stan Olsen Pontiac, 27th Av Omaha NE 68131
    14 527 Pews Incorporated, Hwy 75 North, LeMars, IA 51031
    14 539 Plainview Farm Equipment Co, Main St, Plainview, NE
    14 601 Schultz Bros, Algona, IA
    14 603 Sedars Pontiac-Cadillac, 3rd Street & North Federal, Mason City, IA 50401
    14 625 Bob Souders Pontiac Inc, 100 West 7th Street, Sioux City, IA 51103
    14 647 Summer Pontiac Company, Des Moines, IA
    14 671 Vander Ploeg Motor Co, Monroe, IA 50170
    14 695 Wagner-Abbott Pontiac Inc, 903 S Riverside Dr, Iowa City, IA 52240
    Zone 15 – Minneapolis, Minnesota (MN)
    15 ??? Holzkamn Pontiac Co, 2nd Ave NW & Main, Hillsboro, ND
    15 011 Anderson Buick-Pontiac, 116 5th Ave, South Lewistown, MT
    15 014 Henry Anderson Motors Inc, Chippewa Falls, WI 54729
    15 019 Anderson Pontiac Co Inc, 625 Center Ave, Moorhead, MN
    15 021 C.P. Anderson Pontiac, 5245 Lyndale Ave, Minneapolis, MN 55419
    15 047 Arrow Pontiac Co, 1515 University Ave, St Paul, MN
    15 083 Beaman Pontiac, Nashville, TN
    15 102 R. L. Brookdale Motors Inc, 6801 Brooklyn Blvd, Brooklyn Center, MN
    15 123 Carlson Motors, 207 E Hiawatha Dr, Wabasha, MN 55981
    15 191 De Vinck Pontiac-Cadillac, 1525 Broadway, Superior WI 54881
    15 193 Dibble Pontiac-Buick Inc, PO Box 246, Austin, MN 55912
    15 203
    15 204 Robert F Dye, Inc, 512 East Main St, Bozeman, MT 59715
    15 209 Ede Motor Sales, 203 E Main St, Mondovi, Wl
    15 271 Gilbert Motors, 1621 Coulee RD, Hudson, WI 54016
    15 282 Goetz Everson Motors, Highway 10 West, Wadena, MN
    15 303
    15 305 Tropical Pontiac, 2101 N. Main St, Gainesville, FL 32601
    15 311 Hanover Garage, Railroad Ave, Albany, MN
    15 331 Hansord Pontiac Co, Minneapolis, MN
    15 342 Heintz Pontiac-Cadillac, Inc. 130 North 2nd Street, Mankato, MN 56001
    15 360 Hornquist Motor Co, 210 South Central Ave, Milaca, MN 56353
    15 374
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Changed Name to Schwan Pontiac GMC

    Iten Pontiac GMC, 3812 Memorial HWY, Mandan, ND 58554

    15 423 Kater Auto Company, Pine River, MN 56474
    15 430 Kindler Pontiac Cadillac, 324 West 9th, Sioux Falls, SD 57102
    15 475 Larson-Quinn Company. 405 West Main St, Ellsworth, WI 54011
    15 499 Lindner Motors Inc, 208 S Olive, Waconia, MN 55387
    15 536 Mahowald Motors, 128-132 W Main St, New Prague, MN 56071
    15 559 Mesaba Motors,Inc, 2205 First Ave, Hibbing, MN 55746
    15 573 Miller Pontiac-GMC Inc, St Cloud, MN
    15 602 Newcomb Motors, 210 Northwest 2nd St, Madison, SD
    15 636 Oxendale Pontiac Inc, Rochester, MN
    15 675 Reaume, 301 N Main St Lesueur Mn
    15 698 Roster Pontiac Inc, 520 E 7th St, Saint Paul, MN 55102 (Became Peterson Pontiac)
    15 698 Peterson Pontiac-GMC Inc, 8801 Lyndale Ave So, Bloomington, MN (was Roster Pontiac)
    15 726 Schoon Motor Company, Hwy 14 at 11th Ave NW, Rochester, MN 55901
    15 739
    15 767 Stenzel Motors Inc., 11th St. and E. Hwy. 212, Watertown, SD 57201
    15 797 Thorp Auto Co Inc, Britton, SD 57430
    15 809 Tretsven Auto Company 507-08N Main St., Milltown, WI 54858
    15 813 Tribble Motors Inc, 114 – 6th St West, Brookings, SD
    15 815 Twin Falls Pontiac, St Croix Falls, WI
    15 833 Ken Vance Motors, 5252 Highway 93, Eau Claire, WI 54701
    15 842 West River Motors Inc, Hittinger, ND 58639
    Zone 16 – Charlotte, North Carolina (NC)
    16 ??? Amburn Pontiac, Hillsboro St, Raleigh, NC
    16 ??? Bob Hill Pontiac, Winston-Salem, NC
    16 ??? Hughes Motor Co, Burlington, NC
    16 ??? Payne Truck and Tractor, West Jefferson, NC
    16 004 Amburn Pontiac, Raleigh, NC
    16 011 Attaway Easterlin Pontiac, Greenville, SC
    16 023 Barnes Motors Inc, 218-30 Clay Street, Kingsport TN 37662
    16 029 Bill Beck Pontiac Inc, Charlotte, NC
    16 035 Bernard Pontiac, Morganton, NC
    16 041 Blanchard Pontiac-Cadillac, Shelby, NC
    16 050 Boyd Pontiac-Cadillac Hendersonville, NC
    16 051 May be somewhere in Raleigh, NC area
    16 071 Brown & Wood Inc, Greenville, NC
    16 075 Brunson Automobile Sales Inc, PO Box 188, Hampton, SC 29924
    16 079 Brushy Mountain Motors, Taylorsville, NC
    16 083 Bryan Pontiac-Cadillac Co, 12 W Russell St, Fayetteville, NC 2830
    16 085 Bush Oldsmobile-Pontiac, Lenoir, NC
    16 091 Caswell Pontiac, Yanceyville, NC
    16 092 Cardell Carter Pontiac-Buick, Kannapolis, NC
    16 100 City Motors, Valdese, NC
    16 108 Don Clark Pontiac-Buick Inc, 1015 Bluefield Ave, Bluefield, WV
    16 111 Coggin Pontiac, 4611 Durham-Chapel Hill Blvd, Durham NC 27707
    16 156 Tom Duncan Pontiac, Greer, SC
    16 192? Gibbs Pontiac, Princeton WV 24740
    16 195 Gill Quick(?), Zebulon NC 27597
    16 215 Griffin Motor Co Inc, Monroe, NC 28110
    16 233 Hampton Pontiac Inc, 2024 Main St, Columbia, SC 29202
    16 238 J.C. Harris Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, Wilson, NC
    16 239 Harry’s Cadillac-Pontiac, Ashville, NC
    16 251 Herlong Motors- Johnston, SC
    16 252 Don Hill Pontiac, Kingsport, TN
    16 307
    16 338
    16 339
    16 345 Knox Pontiac-Olds, Lumberton, NC
    16 353 Lytle Buick-Pontiac, Gastonia, NC
    16 355 Madison Motor Co, 205 Highway St, Madison, NC 27025
    16 395
    16 399 Wohles Pontiac Buick Inc, 1003 E Main St, Rock Hill, SC 29730
    16 403 Morgan Motor Co Inc, 304 East Main St, Albemarle, NC 28001
    16 417 Mike Murray Pontiac, Charleston, SC
    16 418 Bob Neill Pontiac, Winston Salem, NC
    16 419 Neill Pontiac Inc, 902 N Main St, High Point, NC
    16 431 Oglesby Pontiac-Buick Inc, 160 North First St, Wytheville, VA 24382
    16 464 Quality Pontiac Inc, 1226 Roanoke Ave, Roanoke Rapids, NC
    16 502 Rogers Pontiac-Cadillac, 208 W Dixon Blvd, Shelby NC 28150
    16 511 Salem Pontiac Inc, PO Box 917, Havelock, NC 28532
    16 533 Smith Chevrolet-Pontiac Co., West Main St, Walhalla, SC 29691
    16 535 Smith-Mills Pontiac-Buick, Washington, NC
    16 539 Smith Motor Co, 229 E Main St Laurens SC
    16 583
    16 625 Thomas-Woodley Pontiac Inc, 930 S Fayetteville St, Asheboro, NC 27203
    16 626 Dan Thomas Pontiac Inc, 930 S Fayetteville St, Asheboro, NC 27203
    16 627 Townsend Pontiac-Cadillac, Greenville RD, Easley, SC 29640
    16 639
    16 647 Wall Pontiac Co., South Main St., Pilot Mountain NC
    16 659 Frank Woods, 516-22 S Tyson Charlotte NC
    16 665 Zane Pontiac, Greensboro, NC
    16 991
    992
    993
    etc.
    where cars delivered to the Charlotte Zone office
    16 992 Pontiac Division, Charlotte NC
    Zone 17 – Jacksonville, Florida (FL)
    17 ??? Platt Pontiac Inc, 3261 Kings Ave, Jacksonville, FL
    17 ??? Proctor & Proctor Inc, 216 N Monroe St, Tallahassee, FL 32302
    17 022 Backus Cadillac-Pontiac Inc, PO Box 3796, Station B, Savannah, GA
    17 028 Bainbridge Motors Inc, 1910 Reid Street, Palatka, FL 32077
    17 031 Banta Brothers, St. Augustine, FL
    17 043 Sunshine Pontiac, Miami, FL
    17 078 Coggin Pontiac Inc, PO Box 8828, Jacksonville, FL 32211
    17 080 Colonial Pontiac Inc, 8301 NW 7th Ave, Miami, FL
    17 084 Crown Pontiac Inc., 360 9th Street North, St. Petersburg FL 33733
    17 110 Jerry Earl Pontiac, 2400 South Federal Hwy, Delray Beach, FL 33344 (Became Jack Nicklaus Pontiac)
    17 ??? Jack Nicklaus Pontiac, 2400 S Federal Highway, Delray Beach, FL 33444 (Was Jerry Earl Pontiac)
    17 131 Al Gallman Pontiac Inc, 3621 S Cleveland Ave, Fort Meyers, FL
    17 132 Bill Gallman Pontiac-GMC Inc, 2601 Airport Rd, Naples, FL 33940
    17 143 Hallet Pontiac, Miami FL
    17 145 Tom Hamilton Pontiac GMC Inc, Cocoa, FL
    17 146 Jim Harrell Pontiac, 3800 W Hillsborough Ave, Tampa, FL 33614
    17 150 Charles Harris, Clearwater, FL
    17 185 Land Pontiac Inc, 833 Volusia Ave, Daytona Beach, FL 32014
    17 208 McNamara Pontiac, 1010 W Colonial Dr, Orlando, FL 33802
    17 219 Moody Pontiac Inc, 500 N Federal, Ft Lauderdale, FL
    17 223 Claude Nowlan Inc, Main & Orange St, Jacksonville, FL 32201
    17 231 Packer Pontiac, 665 SW 8th St, Miami, FL
    17 240 Platt Pontiac, PO Box 523? Jacksonville, FL 32207 (? = either 9 or 0)
    17 241 Pioneer Pontiac Inc, 30501 S Federal Hwy, Homestead, FL 33030
    17 257 Roberts Brown Motor Co, Po Box 528, Douglas, GA
    17 269 Stephens Pontiac, Daytona Beach, FL
    17 279
    17 283 Stewart Pontiac Co, 1928 S Dixie Hwy, West Palm Beach, FL
    17 291 Stinnett’s Pontiac Service Inc. 240 N. Washington Blvd, Sarasota, FL 33577
    17 293 Sunshine Pontiac Inc, 6700 SW 81st St, Miami 43, FL
    17 294 Hallett Motors Inc, DBA Sunshine Pontiac, 6701 S Dixie Hwy, Miami, FL 33143
    17 296 Stinnet Sales Pontiac Service, 5005 Tamiami Trail, Sarasota, FL 33581
    17 298 Superior Pontiac-GMC Inc, 3800 W Hillsbourgh Ave, Tampa, FL 33614
    17 294 Hallett Motors Inc, Miami, FL
    17 308 R.R. Van Landingham, 901 NE First Ave, Cairo, GA 31728
    17 319 Waldron Pontiac, 360 Ninth St North, St Petersburg, FL 33733
    17 320 Bill Walker Pontiac-GMC, Inc., Brunswick GA
    Zone 18 – Atlanta, Georgia (GA)
    18 ??? Cecil Corley Motor Co Inc, 235 West Broadway, Gallatin, TN 37066
    18 ??? Griner Motors Inc, Quitman, GA
    18 ??? Nicholas Olds Pontiac Buick, Dothan, AL
    18 038 Baggett Pontiac, (street unknown), Pell City, AL
    18 053
    18 062 Benton Pontiac-Buick, Inc., Cleveland, TN 37311
    18 071 Boomershine Pontiac, Inc, 390 Spring St NW, Atlanta, GA
    18 083 Bradley Pontiac-Chevrolet Inc., 6 Broad Street, Greensboro GA 30642
    18 089 Brooks Chevrolet Company P.O. Box 887, Millen GA 30442
    18 091 Brownell Pontiac, 2900 Avenue E, Ensley, AL
    18 092 Brownell Pontiac Co Inc, 2017 Ensley Ave, Birmingham, AL 35218
    18 125 Central Gwinnette Motors Inc, 579 W Crogan St, Lawrenceville, GA 30024
    18 172 Cobb-Kirkland Motor Co Inc, Mongomery, AL
    18 192 Crawford Pontiac Inc, 204 N Main St, Lafayette, GA 37728
    18 210 Davidson Pontiac Buick Inc, 2375 W Broad St, Athens, GA 30601
    18 219 Griffith Motors Inc, New Jonesboro Hwy, Johnson City, TN 37602
    18 243 Al Dykes Pontiac-Cad Inc, 37 La Grange St, Newnan GA 30263
    18 283 W.H. Gailey Pontiac Co, South Cornelia, GA
    18 326
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    Now Harrison Pontiac, 1250 Florence Blvd, Florence, AL 35630

    Harrison-White Pontiac, 114 West Reeder St, Florence, AL

    18 330 Haynes & Galley Pontiac Inc, Hwy 441 South, Cornelia, GA
    18 331 Delmar Haynes Pontiac, Inc., P.O. Box 1396, Maryville TN 37801
    18 427 LaFollette Sales Co, LaFollette, TN
    18 431 Lamar Pontiac Co, 1690 Riverside Dr, Macon, GA 31208
    18 498
    18 499 Meadows Motors Inc, 232 W Main St, Manchester, GA 31816
    18 534 M L Moore Motors Inc, PO Box 638, Andalusia, AL 36420
    18 579 Outlaw Pontiac Co, 319 E College St, Wrightsville, GA 31096
    18 600 Parks Motor Sales Inc, Columbia, TN 38402
    18 617 Plaza Pontiac Inc, 4241 Lavista Rd, Tucker, GA 30084 (Becae McNamara Pontiac)
    18 635 Price Motors Inc, Box 99, Morristown, TN 37814
    18 642 (842?) Doug Willey Pontiac, 3500 S 6th Av Birmingham Al
    18 679 Rodgers & Co, W. Main St @ Henley St (now on Kingston Pike), Knoxville, TN 37901
    18 695 Ryman Pontiac-Cadillac Co., Dalton, Ga
    18 705 Shaw Pontiac-Buick Inc, U.S. Highway 72, Athens, AL 35611
    18 712 Skinner Motor Co Inc, 3186 Washington St SW, Covington, GA 30209
    18 723 Smith-Johnson Pontiac 2191 Main Street, East Point GA 30044
    18 727 Smith Waldrop Pontiac-Buick, 104 West Arnold St, Cullman, AL 35055.
    18 755 Stone Pontiac-GMC, Centre-Ceder Bluff Hwy, Centre, AL 35960
    18 764 Taber Pontiac Inc, 3264 Peachtree Rd, Atlanta, GA
    18 775 Trail Pontiac, Mobile, AL
    18 777 Trotter Pontiac Co, Chattanooga, TN
    18 836 Vince Whibbs Pontiac Co., 3401 Navy Boulevard, Pensacola FL 32501
    18 842 Doug Willey Pontiac, Birmingham, AL
    18 871 Wynn Motor Company, Dublin, GA 18871
    18 922 L&L Buick-Pontiac Co, Broad St, Douglasville, GA 30134
    18 991 Pontiac Motor Division, 55 Marietta St NW, Atlanta, GA
    Zone 19 – Memphis, Tennessee (TN)
    19 030 Benafield Motor Co., England AR
    19 044 Big 4 Pontiac-Cadillac, P.O. Drawer 649 Tupelo Ms
    19 053 Frank Brasher Buick-Pontiac-GMC, P.O. box 787, Jackson, TN 38302
    19 089 Carroll Motors & Equipment Co Inc, Highway 17, Oak Grove, LA 71265
    19 191 Douthit-Carroll Pontiac Co, 1011 Union Ave, Memphis, TN
    19 237 Fisher Pontiac Inc, 1813 15th Ave, Gulfport, MS 33531
    19 352 Tom Hydrick Motors Inc, Forest, MS 39074
    19 416 LANE-MOAK Pontiac 912 S. State St, Jackson Miss. 39205
    19 418 Long Motor Company, Inc. 407 So. Main St. Farmerville, LA 71241
    19 456
    19 507
    19 517 Overby Pontiac Co, Mayfield, KY
    19 528 Paretti Pontiac Company, Inc. 420 North Rampart St., New Orleans, LA 70116
    19 600 Rowlin-Adams Buick-Pontiac, Natchez, MS
    19 648 Hanks Pontiac, Plaquemine, LA
    19 669 Horace-Terry Pontiac Co. 806 W.Capitol, Little Rock, AR 72203
    19 731? Woodson-Smith Pontiac, Baton Rouge, LA
    19 732? Woodson-Smith Pontiac, Baton Rouge, LA
    19 996 Slay Motors Inc, 213 South 2nd St, Brookhaven, MS 39601
    Zone 20 – Oklahoma City, Oklahoma (OK)
    20 ??? George Morgan Motors, El Dorado, AR
    20 006 Brown Russell, Amarillo, TX
    20 076 Terry Pontiac, Little Rock, AR
    20 100 Gianera Pontiac, LaCresenta, CA
    20 107 Charlesworth Pontiac Co, Highway 71 South, Springdale, AR 72764
    20 126 Cline-Burnett Motors Inc, 209 West Moses, Cushing, OK 74023
    20 143 Chick Coker Pontiac Inc, 800 N W 4th, Oklahoma City, OK
    20 149 Cole-Bynum Motors Inc, Portales, NM
    20 153 Dockum Pontiac Inc, 2365 S Robinson, Oklahoma City, OK 73109
    20 155 Quinn Connely Pontiac, Lubbock, TX
    20 219 Bill Eischeid Pontiac Inc, 514 S. Broadway, Edmond OK 73034
    20 228 Ferguson Pontiac-GMC, Norman OK 73069
    20 256 Greiner Motor Co Inc, 500 Towson Ave, Fort Smith, AR 72901
    20 264 Haley Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, Ponca City, OK 74601
    20 284 Champ Hinton Pontiac, 500 Towson Av Ft Smith Ar 72901
    20 362 Mathis Chev Pont Olds, Burkburnett TX
    20 371 Melton Pontiac, 205 N Missouri, Claremore, OK 74017
    20 372 Miber Motor Co, PO Box 846, Miami, OK 74364
    20 375 Ernie Miller Pontiac Inc, 701 W Kenosha, Broken Arrow, OK 74012
    20 380 Milner Pontiac, 2111 E 11th Street, Tulsa OK 74101
    20 381 Bob Milner Pontiac, 1014 Avenue Q, Lubbock, TX 79401
    20 399 Nash Bros, 524 Main St, Guymon, OK 73942
    20 479 Clair Robbins Inc, 214 S Mekusukey, Wewoka, OK 74886
    20 485
    20 560 Vaught Chevy-Olds-Pontiac, Quanah, TX
    20 991 Pontiac Motor Division, 329 Van Norman Rd, Montebello, CA
    20 991 Pontiac Motor Division, 1919 Penn Sq, Oklahoma City, OK 73118
    20 992 Pontiac Motor Division, 1919 Penn Sq, Oklahoma City, OK 73115
    20 992 Woods Industries, 4900 Santa Fe, Oklahoma City, OK
    Zone 21 – Dallas, Texas (TX)
    21 ??? Elieson Motor Co, Jacksboro, TX
    21 ??? B&K Pontiac-Buick, PO Box 1055, Killen, TX 76541
    21 018 B & K Pontiac-Buick, PO Box 1055, Kileen, TX 76541
    21 040 Star Pontiac GMC Truck, Plano, TX
    21 059 Brew (or Drew) Pontiac, 206 W. Marshall St, Longview TX
    21 081 Joe Carlat Pontiac, Inc., 109 Elm Street, Waxahachie, TX 75165
    21 144 R.O. Evans Pontiac GMC, Garland, TX
    21 146 Elieson Motor Co, 219 S Main, Jacksboro, TX 76056
    21 148 R D Evans Pontiac-GMC, 12100 E Northwest Highway Dallas, TX
    21 162 Pete Ganis Pontiac, 2100 Cedear Springs, Dallas, TX
    21 176 Ed Hammock Motors, Atlanta, TX
    21 217 Leo Jarnagin Pontiac Co, 401 Commerce St, Fort Worth, TX 76102
    21 234 Kircher Pontiac Inc, Loop 820, Fort Worth, TX
    21 235 Monk King, 200 S Locust Denton Tx
    21 247 Luke Pontiac, Arlington, TX
    21 281 Bill McDavid Pontiac Inc, 2917 West 7th St, Fort Worth, TX 76107
    21 283 David McDavid, 2630 W Irving Blvd, Irving, TX
    21 295 Mitchell Pontiac, Kaufman, TX
    21 299 Mizell Olds Pontiac Inc, Texarkana, TX 75502
    21 305 Musser Motors Inc, 1212 West Moore Ave, Terrel, TX
    21 328 Permian Pontiac, Inc. 701 West Texas, Midland, TX 79704
    21 364 Schneider-Gilbert Pontiac, El Paso, TX
    21 399 Taylor Pontiac, Dallas (Oakcliff) TX
    21 423 Van Winkle (Motor Co), Dallas, TX
    21 447 Paul Winn Motor Co., Hamilton TX
    21 453 Young Motor Co, 316 East Hubbard, Mineral Wells, TX
    21 812 Ernie Miller Pontiac GMC, Tulsa OK
    21 833 Joe Pistocco Caddy Pontiac, 1008 7th St, Wichita Falls, TX 76301
    21 991 Pontiac Division Zone Office
    Zone 22 – Houston, Texas (TX)
    22 ??? White Pontiac, Rosenberg, TX
    22 ??? Al Welling, Alvin, TX
    22 ??? Lester Goodson, Houston, TX
    22 065 Clyde V. Lee Motors, Clute, TX
    22 131 Frizzell Pontiac Inc, 3040 Woodridge Drive, Houston, TX 77032
    22 133 Everett Frizell Pontiac, 1014 Lamar, Austin, TX 78703
    22 134 Gay Pontiac, Dickinson, TX
    22 139 Gay Pontiac, Dickinson, TX
    22 147 Gillman Pontiac, Houston, TX
    22 151 Gladden Pontiac, Victoria, TX
    22 162
    22 186 Leo Jarnagin Pontiac, Houston TX
    22 188 Leo Jarnagin Pontiac Inc, Houston, TX
    22 226 Mahaffey Motor Co, Texas City, TX
    22 239 Mid City Motors, Inc., Beaumont TX
    22 274 Bert Ogden Motors, 302-304 W University Dr, Edinburg TX 78539
    22 281
    22 287 Peterson’s Garage, 200-206 Sidney Baker, Kerrville, TX
    22 288 Maynard Phillips Motor Co, Sinton, TX
    22 301 Quality Pont-Buick-GMC, Bryan, TX
    22 365 Wayne Strand Pontiac/GMC Inc, Corpus Christi, TX
    22 368 Superior Pontiac Co, 711-23 Broadway, San Antonio, TX 78215 (Now owned by Red McCombs)
    22 373 Tindall & Son Pontiac Inc, 3915 San Pedro, San Antonio, TX 78212
    Zone 23 – San Francisco, California, (CA)
    23 ??? Nelson Pontiac, El Monte, CA
    23 003 Livingston Pontiac, Woodland Hills, CA
    23 009 All American Pontiac, 2103 N 1st St, San Jose, CA 95113
    23 015
    23 025 Balestra Pontiac, 1039 El Camino Real, Redwood City, CA 94064
    23 031 Bianco Motors 4th & E St, San Rafael, CA
    23 055
    23 058 Art Bridges Pontiac Inc, 1701 Van Ness Ave, San Francisco, CA 94109
    23 063 Gianera Pontiac, La Crescenta, CA
    23 089 Courtesy Pontiac-GMC, 5000 Chiles Rd Davis Ca
    23 093 Cunha Pontiac, 2556 Telegraph Ave, Berkeley, CA 94701
    23 098
    23 099 Dan Day Pontiac-GMC Inc, 663 Alma St, Palo Alto, CA 94302
    23 100 Delta Pontiac, Stockton, CA
    23 101 Dexter Pontiac-GMC Inc, San Rafael, CA
    23 107 Doten Pontiac, 2556 Telegraph Ave, Berkeley, CA (Became Cunha Pontiac)
    23 107 Cunha Pontiac, 4145 Broadway, Oakland, CA (Was Doten Pontiac)
    23 108 Doten Pontiac Inc., 4145 Broadway, Oakland CA 94611
    23 127 Erickson & James Pontiac-GMC, Yreka CA
    23 144 Forehand Motor Sales, Inc., Madera CA
    23 160 George Growney Motors, 1140 Main St, Red Bluff, CA 96080
    23 173 Bill Hawks Cad-Pontiac, Hawthorne NV
    23 195 J.F.G. Motors Inc, 112 E 2nd St, Alturas, CA
    23 163 Hansen Pontiac, 640 Main St, Watsonville, CA 95077
    23 173 BILL HAWKS CAD-PON, HAWTHORNE NV,
    23 189 Larry Hopkins Pontiac, 322 W El Camino Real, Sunnyvale, CA
    23 229 Lee Pontiac, PO Box 96, Davis, CA 95616
    23 234 Mazzei Pontiac-Cadillac Co., 1530 W 10th Street Antioch CA
    23 240 Meridian Motors, 3300 Burnett Ave, Concord, CA 94520
    23 247 Millheim Motors, Merced, CA 95341
    23 263 Olson Pontiac, Inc., 418 F Street, Marysville CA 95902
    23 271 Paradiso Automotive Service, Los Banos CA
    23 279 McCoy Auto Co, PO Box 1563, Vancouver, WA 98660
    23 295
    23 299 Rodgers Buick Pontiac, Corning CA
    23 305 Mike Salta Pontiac, 2820 Fulton Ave, Sacremento, CA
    23 319
    23 345 Stevens Pontiac-GMC Inc, 620 Blossom Hill Rd, Los Gatos, CA 95030
    23 350
    23 355 Talmadge Babe Wood Co., Santa Rosa, CA
    23 363 Herman Theroff Pontiac, Fresno CA
    23 386 Wasmuth Pontiac, 663 Alma St, Palo Alto, CA 94302
    23 393
    23 401 Wilson-Stevens Pontiac GMC, Inc., 620 Blossom Hill Road, Los Gatos CA
    23 407
    23 423? Van Winkle Motor Co, 4023 Oak Lawn Ave, Dallas, TX
    23 991 PMD San Francisco Zone, Storage Lot at Souther Warehouse Co., 2200 Toland St, San Francisco, CA
    Zone 24 – Los Angeles, California (CA)
    24 ??? Richmond Motor Co, Richmond, CA
    24 ??? Roy Carver Pontiac, Costa Mesa, CA
    24 ??? Ron Cutri Pontiac, Firestone Blvd, Southgate, CA
    24 ??? Kennedy Pontiac, Corona, CA
    24 ??? Majestic Pontiac, Crenshaw Blvd, Los Angeles, CA
    24 010 Jack Barnes Pontiac, Oxnard, CA
    24 011 Barber Pontiac, 500 Oak St, Bakersfield, CA 93304 ’67 GTO
    24 012 Bill Barry Pontiac 2000 E. First Sreet, Santa Ana, CA 92705
    24 014 Bud Beck Pontiac Inc, 7000 E. McDowell Rd, Scottsdale, AZ 85257
    24 019 Bruin Motor Co, 10860 Santa Monica Blvd, West Los Angeles, CA (Became Jules Meyers Pontiac ’69)
    24 023 Bryant Pontiac, 535 S Citrus, Covina, CA
    24 031 Casey-Beckham Pontiac, formerly at 801 S Anaheim Blvd, Anaheim, CA
    24 034 (dealer unknown),38 N Albany Ave, Atlantic City, NJ 08401
    24 051 Pat Clark Pontiac, Las Vegas, NV
    24 054 Coast Pontiac, 626 South Euclid Ave, Fullerton, CA
    24 061
    24 068 Dolman Pontiac, 4201 W Imperial Hwy, Inglewood, CA 90307
    24 074 Donkersley Pontiac-Buick, 276 Orange Ave, Yuma, AZ
    24 075 A. E. England, 6161 Hollywood Blvd, Hollywood, CA
    24 083 Louis Frahm Pontiac, Inc., 7255 Firestone Blvd., Cowney CA 90241
    24 100 Gianera Pontiac, 3333 Foothill Blvd, La Crescenta, CA
    24 109 Green-Ross Pontiac, El Centro, CA
    24 124 ?? in CA
    24 133 A.I. Hendrie Buick-Pontiac-GMC, Coolidge AZ
    24 138
    Info

    Codes Based On Following Info:

    Document Year: 1971

    Document Source: Bill History from PHS

    Comments:

    John Hine Pontiac, San Diego, CA 92110

    24 143
    24 159 Jones Bros. & Sons, 534 Santa Clara, Fillmore, CA 93015
    24 161 Johonson Olds Cad Pont GMC, 804 1st Ave, Safford, AZ 85546
    24 180 Lamerdin Pontiac, Compton, CA
    24 183 Linhart Buick – Pontiac Co, 437 North -M- Street, Lompoc, CA
    24 185 Bob Longpre Pontiac, Los Angeles, CA
    24 186 Bob Longpre Inc., 13600 Beach Blvd Westminster CA
    24 188 Livingston Pontiac, Woodland Hills, CA
    24 189
    24 191 Bob Longpre Pontiac, Inc., Monrovia, CA
    24 193 Lukens Pontiac, La Mesa, CA
    24 195 Harry Maher Inc, N Hollywood CA
    24 197 Majestic Pontiac, 329 Van Norman Rd, Montebello, CA
    24 219 Mecham Pontiac, 4510 W Glendale Ave, Glendale, AZ, 85301
    24 224 Jules Meyers Pontiac Inc, 10860 Santa Monica Blvd, Los Angeles, CA 90025
    24 225 Mid-Way Pontiac Co Inc, San Bernardino, CA
    24 227 Mission Pontiac Co, 1100 South -E- St, San Bernardino, CA 92410
    24 237 Nelson Pontiac, P.O. Box 995, El Monte CA 91714
    24 267 Perry Motors, PO Box 637, Bishop, CA
    24 270 Quebedeaux Pontiac, 3566 E Speedway, Tucson, AZ
    24 271 Tom Ray Pontiac, Brand Blvd, Glendale, CA
    24 282 Bob Ruehman, North Hollywood, CA
    24 286 Scott Robinson Pontiac, Inc. 20340 Hawthorne Blvd, Torrance, CA 90503
    24 287 Rothe Pontiac, CA
    24 290 Royal Pontiac, 1245 Lankershim Blvd, North Hollywood, CA
    24 291 Salta Pontiac, Long Beach, CA
    24 293 Savage Pontiac Co, Monrovia, CA
    24 310 Stallings Motor, 1316 N Broad St Globe Az
    24 314 Sun Pontiac Inc, 1600 W Main St, Mesa, AZ 85201
    24 316 Suburban Pontiac, 17639 Bellflower Blvd, Bellflower, CA 90706
    24 319 Tate Motors, Pomona, CA
    24 321 Superior Pontiac Inc, Monterey Park, CA
    24 322 Swope Pontiac Buick GMC, 280 E. Ramsey, Banning CA 92220
    24 329 Don Turpin Pontiac, PO Box 1167, Redlands, CA 92373
    24 331 Ulrich Pontiac, 10101 Washington Blvd, Culver City, CA
    24 335
    24 339 Peninsula Pontiac, 2909 Pacific Coast Highway, Torrence, CA 90505
    24 340
    24 345 Webster Pontiac, 2601 National Avenue, National City California 92050
    24 348? Westward Pontiac, 4635 N Seventh St, Phoenix, AZ 85014
    24 349 Jim White Pontiac 1908 Santa Monica Blvd, Santa Monica, CA 90404
    24 351 Wilkins Pontiac, Van Nuys Blvd, Van Nuys, CA (Became Prestige Pontiac ’70s)
    24 367 Roc Cutri Pontiac, 3125 Firestone Blvd, South Gate, CA 90280
    24 560 Van Nuys, CA area
    24 819 Meacham Pontiac, Glendale, AZ
    24 991 Pontiac Motor Division (S.Calif. Zone)
    Zone 25 – Portland, Oregon (OR)
    25 026 Betz Chev Pont Olds Co Inc, Cottage Grove, OR 97424
    25 056 Mel Campbell Chevrolet-Pontiac-Olds, Dallas, OR
    25 063 Central Pontiac Inc, Broadway & East Pine, Seattle, WA 98122
    25 064 Century Pontiac Inc, 10075 SW Canyon Rd, Beaverton, OR 97005
    25 094 Courtesy Chevrolet Pontiac Inc. 300 W. Spruce, Newport, WA 99156
    25 105 East Side Pontiac Co, 400-116th Ave NE, Bellevue, WA
    25 142 Jack Grant Motors Inc, PO Box 98, Bainbridge Island, WA 98110
    25 143 Graves-Anderson, 10 N Colville St, Walla-Walla, WA 99362
    25 184 Horner Pontiac, Grandview WA 98930
    25 215 K & J Pontiac, Davenport, WA
    25 243 Dick Lewis Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, Plum & Union, Olympia, WA
    25 276 Jim Marsh Pontiac Inc, 11th and Tennant Way, Longview, WA 98632
    25 279 McCoy Auto Co, PO Box 1563, Vancouver, WA 98660
    25 282 McKee Pontiac Inc, 1404 Main St, Oregon City, OR 97045
    25 287 B Meadows Pontiac, 2705 NE Sandy Blvd, Portland, OR
    25 289 Bud Meadows Pontiac, Inc., 4724 Roosevelt Way, Seattle, WA 98105
    25 289 Bud Meadows Pontiac, Inc., 12800 Aurora Ave. North, Seattle, Wash
    25 295 Menasco Motors, Grants Pass, OR
    25 299 Mills Motor Co, Junction City, OR
    25 321 Murray Newell Inc, Gresham OR
    25 325 Utter Motor Co, W. 1219 Second Ave, Spokane, WA 99204
    25 327
    25 343
    25 362 Red Ralls Pontiac-Cadillac-GMC, 812 N Wenatchee Ave, Wenatchee, WA 98801
    25 374 Robideaux Motors Co, 1603 Sherman Ave, Coeur d’Alene, ID 83814
    25 379 Roseburg Motor Co, Roseburg, OR 97470
    25 399 Simpson Pontiac-Cadillac Inc, 3002 Rucker Ave, Everett, WA 98201
    25 433 Totem Pontiac, Seattle, WA
    25 455 Utter Motor Co, W. 1219 Second Ave, Spokane, WA 99204
    25 457 Valley Pontiac-Buick-GMC, 3104 Auburn Way, Auburn, WA
    25 461 Walker-Marson Pontiac Inc, Yakima, WA
    Zone 26 – there is no headquarters listed for zone 26
    26 289 Bud Meadows Pontiac, 2300 Aurora Ave, N. Seattle, WA
    26 468 Valley Pontiac – Buick – GMC, Auburn WA 98002
    Zone 27 – Denver, Colorado (CO)
    27 ??? Socorro Motors, Socorro NM
    27 ??? Victors Motors, Brigham City, UT
    27 031 Baum Motor Co, 335 N Main, Logan, UT
    27 075 Fred A. Canleson Pontiac, 535 S Main St Salt Lake City Ut
    27 104 John Chris Motors, Twin Falls, ID
    27 127 Collier-Ponsford, 2971 North Ave, Grand Junction, CO
    27 ??? Nick Davidson Inc, 1604 N Lincoln, PO Box 148, Loveland, CO 80537
    27 153 Dreiling Motors 230 SC College St, Fort Collins, CO 80521
    27 156 Eddie S Chevrolet-Pontiac, Inc., Deadwood, SD
    27 159 Eley Motor Co, Park City, UT
    27 187 Fisher Hess Pontiac, Ogden UT
    27 212 Harmon Sales Inc, Provo, UT
    27 217 Hart Pontiac-Cadillac, Idaho Falls ID
    27 231
    27 235 Johnson Pontiac, Colorado Springs, CO
    27 236 Steve Johnson Pontiac-GMC-Jeep, 1250 S Nevada, Colorado Springs, CO 80901
    27 259 Ketchum Auto & Garage Co, 201 Main St, Ketchum, ID
    27 275 Kramer Motors Inc, 17th & B, Scotsbluff, NE 69361
    27 276 Kyle Motors, Mountain Hope, ID
    27 311
    27 315 Laury Miller Pontiac, Salt Lake City, UT 84115
    27 317 Laury Miller Pontiac, 3535 South State St, Salt Lake City, UT 84115
    27 332 Nagel Motors Inc, 944 E. A Street, Casper, WY 82601
    27 354 Pansing Pontiac, Inc., 5500 South Broadway, Littleton CO 80121
    27 361 Leo Payne Pontiac Inc, Lakewood, CO
    27 378 Porter Pontiac Inc, 945 Broadway, Denver, CO 80203
    27 382 Price-Carleson Pontiac, Salt Lake City, UT
    27 387 Quality Pontiac, PO Box 531, Albuquerque, NM 87101
    27 396
    27 440 Seifert Pontiac Inc, 6300 East Colfax Ave, Denver, CO
    27 462 Sparks-Payne Pontiac Inc, Lakewood, CO
    27 471 Stoker Motor Co, 44 East 1st North, Tooele, UT 84074
    27 483
    27 487 Taylor Pontiac Buick Co., Cheyenne, WY
    27 499 Vondenkamp Pontiac, 638 Main St, Longmont, CO
    27 519 Weld County Garage Inc, 810 10th St, Greeley, CO 80631
    27 545 Owen Wright Inc, 570 N Main, Layton, UT
    27 993 Collingwood Pontiac, Greybull, WY
    27 994 PMD, 50 West Broadway, Salt Lake City, UT
    Zone 28 – There is no zone 28 listed
    Zone 29 – Newark, New Jersey (NJ)
    29 ??? Maozek Auto Sales Inc, Linden, NJ
    29 007
    29 016 Banner Pontiac, 217 W Washington Ave, Washington, NJ
    29 031 Blauvelt Pontiac Co, Montclair, NJ 07042
    29 035 Broad St. Pontiac, Princeton, NJ
    29 039 Burnweit Pontiac, Main St & Midland Ave, Nyack, NY 10960
    29 042 Carami Pontiac, Paramus, NJ
    29 045 Cerami Pontiac Corp, 21 N Maple Ave, Ridgewood, NJ 07450
    29 046 Chief Pontiac, Rt 46, Little Falls, NJ
    29 047 City Motor Sales Co Inc, Passaic, NJ
    29 061 Day Pontiac, 138 Orange Ave, Suffern, NY 10901
    29 063
    29 066 Dietzen Pontiac Cadillac, 151 Court St, Binghampton, NY 13901
    29 087 Eldridge Pontiac, Princeton, NJ
    29 095 Ray Forshay Inc, Long Branch NJ
    29 119 Ideal Pontiac-Buick, Newton, NJ
    29 120 K-Mack Pontiac Inc, 297–305 Kinderkamack Rd, Oradell, NJ 07649
    29 123 Khan Motors Inc, 54 S Dean St, Englewood, NJ 07631
    29 141
    29 155
    29 158 Lonstein Motors, Ellenville NY
    29 163 Mallon Suburban Motors, Irvington, NJ
    29 167 Mallon Surburban Motors, Irvington, NJ
    29 136 Kemper Pontiac Cadillac Inc, 300 Finderne Ave, Somerville, NJ 08876
    29 136? Reydel Pontiac, Edison, NJ
    29 139 Walter Kollmar Pontiac, Highstown, NJ
    29 143 Kramer Pontiac, South Orange, NJ
    29 146 Ralph Lamorte, 1128 Springfield Ave, Irvington, NJ 07111
    29 155 New Jersey
    29 176 Maxon Pontiac Inc, Route 22 West, Edison, NJ
    29 183 Miller Pontiac, Rahway, NJ
    29 191 Monsey Garage, 114 RT 59, Monsey, NY 10952
    29 203 Mrozek Auto Sales, Linden NJ
    29 204 Mrozek Auto Sales Inc, Linden, NJ
    29 219 Don Owen Inc, 2301 East Main St, Endwell, NY 13760
    29 239 Queen City Pontiac, Greebrook, NJ
    29 247 Rassas Pontiac, near the train tracks, Route 35, Red Bank, NJ
    29 260 Regal Pontiac Ltd, 1220 Bloomfield Ave, West Caldwell, NJ 07006
    29 263 Reiman Pontiac, 1000 Market St, Paterson, NJ 07513
    29 271 Reydel Pontiac, Route 1, Edison, NJ
    29 272 Reydel Pontiac, Edison NJ
    29 273 Kingston, NY
    29 291 Royal Pontiac/Oldsmobile, Butler, NJ
    29 332 Thorpe’s Pontiac, Tannersville, NY
    29 361 W & S Motors, West New York, NJ
    Zone 35 – Michigan (MI) – PMD Special Zones
    35 929
    35 997 Pontiac Motor Division Engineering
    35 998
    Zones – Not Defined
    37 207 Lonstein Motors, Ellenville, NY
    38 001 Canadian Export Office
    Zone 40 – Export Zone
    40 001 Stacks-Holden, Australia
    40 006
    40 204 Mercer Auto Storage, Bronx, NY
    40 220
    40 222
    40 223
    40 225 Kapiolani Motors Ltd, 1341 Kapiolani Blvd, Honolulu, Hawaii 96814
    40 239 Military base exchange through GM Overseas Operations.
    40 259 Kapiolani Motors, Honolulu, Hawaii
    Zones – Not Defined
    42 050 Don Boyer Chevrolet-Pontiac Inc, 1281 West Pioneer, Oak Harbor, WA
    42 445 O.M. Foxworthy Inc, Lafayette, IN
    50 012 Hurst Research, 24175 Telegraph Rr, Southfield, MI
    60 206 AC Spark Plug Division – GMC, Flint MI
    72 397 Hawkiins Pontiac, Auburn, WA
    Zone 79 – Export Zones
    79 001 GM Overseas Distributors, 767 Fifth Ave, New York, NY
    79 015
    79 256 GM Overseas Distributors, 767 Fifth Ave, NY, NY
    Zone 81-96 – Canada (CA)
    81 001
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    This is a Canada Dealer, changed Zone 01 to 81 in 1967.

    John McGowan Motors Ltd., Trans-Canada Highway, Abbotsford, BC, CA

    81 012 Maloney Pontiac Buick, Caslegar, BC
    81 013 Buchanan Pontiac-Buick, Chilliwack, BC
    81 015 Arthur & Chant Motors, Campbell River BC
    81 074
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    This is a Canada Dealer, changed Zone 01 to 81 in 1967.

    Trapp Motors Ltd., 834 Carnarvon Street (at 8th Street), New Westminster, BC, CA

    81 075 Bob Brown Pontiac Buick, Penticton, BC
    81 118 Bowell McLean Motor Co, Vancouver BC
    81 123
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    This is a Canada Dealer, changed Zone 01 to 81 in 1967.

    Bill Conroy Ltd., 680 Marine Drive (at Taylor Way), West Vancouver, BC, CA

    81 127
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    This is a Canada Dealer, changed Zone 01 to 81 in 1967.

    Jim Pattison Ltd., 3434 Main St. (at 18th Ave.), Vancouver, BC, CA

    81 128
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    This is a Canada Dealer, changed Zone 01 to 81 in 1967.

    Carter Pontiac-Buick Ltd., 5799 West Boulevard, Vancouver, BC, CA

    81 137
    Info

    Additional Dealer Info

    This is a Canada Dealer, changed Zone 01 to 81 in 1967.

    Empress Motors, 900 Fort Street (at Quadra Street), Victoria, BC, CA

    86 388
    86 579 Giles Bedard Ltee, Levis Quebec
    88 934 Antonio Labbé Pontiac Buick, Vallée-Jonction, Quebec, Canada
    95 442 Marvin Starr Pontiac Buick, Scarborough Ontario Canada
    95 516 Addison On Bay Pontiac, Toronto Ontario Canada
    95 577 Gus Brown Motors LMT, 1201 Dundas Street East, Whitby On Canada
    ?? ??? Harvey Motor Sales Pembroke Ltd., 294-8 Mackay St, Pembroke, Ontario 96300
    ?? ??? Slessor Motors, 91 Yonge Street N, Newmarket, Ontario
    Zone 99 – PMD Special Zone
    99 998 Pontiac Motors Racing Division

    How to decipher the codes:
    If your code is 309-079, it breaks down like this…

    3

    Pontiac Region Code. Sometimes this “3” is omitted

    09

    Zone code (Cincinnati Zone)

    079

    Dealer Code (Burnett Pontiac)

    Another example of a code, this one is 318 427…

    3

    Pontiac Region Code. Sometimes this “3” is omitted

    18

    Zone code (Atlanta Zone)

    427

    Dealer Code (LaFollette Sales Co)

    By 1990, because of Zone Office consolidations and other GM Divisional changes, these old Dealer numbers were abandoned and a new system had been installed.

    Contribute to the Research

    Do you have information which can help our research? Please use the form below and as you can see from above, we will not publish private information.

      Your Name (required)

      Your Email (required)

      Zone Number: (required)

      Dealer Number: (required)

      Dealer's Name: (required)

      Dealer's Address:

      Dealer's Name:

      Dealer's State: —Please choose an option—AL AlabamaAK AlaskaAS American SamoaAZ ArizonaAR ArkansasCA CaliforniaCO ColoradoCT ConnecticutDE DelawareDC District of ColumbiaFM Fed. States of MicronesiaFL FloridaGA GeorgiaGU GuamHI HawaiiID IdahoIL IllinoisIN IndianaIA IowaKS KansasKY KentuckyLA LouisianaME MaineMH Marshall IslandsMD MarylandMA MassachusettsMI MichiganMN MinnesotaMS MississippiMO MissouriMT MontanaNE NebraskaNV NevadaNH New HampshireNJ New JerseyNM New MexicoNY New YorkNC North CarolinaND North DakotaMP Northern Mariana Is.OH OhioOK OklahomaOR OregonPW PalauPA PennsylvaniaPR Puerto RicoRI Rhode IslandSC South CarolinaSD South DakotaTN TennesseeTX TexasUT UtahVT VermontVA VirginiaVI Virgin IslandsWA WashingtonWV West VirginiaWI WisconsinWY WyomingAB AlbertaBC British ColumbiaMB ManitobaNB New BrunswickNF NewfoundlandNT Northwest TerritoriesNS Nova ScotiaON OntarioPE Prince Edward IslandQC QuebecSK SaskatchewanYT Yukon

      Dealer's Country: USCanadaOther

      Dealer's Zip Code:

      Dealer's Status: Does Not ApplyStill In BusinessOut of BusinessChanged NamesMoved Locations

      Document Source(s):

      (Source of information that Verifies the Zone Codes - Use Comments below to add more)

      Document Source Year(s):

      (Year on the Document that Verifies the Zone Codes)

      Comments / Additional Information:

      Do you have a copy of a PHS report, invoice, or build sheet that you'd like to share? Use File Upload below.

      File Upload:

      document.getElementById( "ak_js_176" ).setAttribute( "value", ( new Date() ).getTime() );

      A: The Dealer Zone Codes can be found on the following documentation:

      • Window Sticker

      • Billing History

      • Broadcast Sheet

      • Protecto Plate

      A: Pontiac produced numerous builds for Zone Stock, cars that were shipped to Storage Lots within each Zone for subsequent sale to a retail Dealer on a first come, first served basis. These cars sat unused for days, weeks, even months before purchase by a Dealer. Not to be confused with Company Cars that also came thru the Zone but were used by Zone employees and later sold at steep discount to a Dealer. These Zone Storage Lots were always identified by a “99*” code as the “Dealer No.”. There were likely multiple locations in each Zone.

      Q: Duplicate Dealer Codes

      Is it possible for a dealer name to have two codes?

      A: It is possible to have one dealer name with two codes. A dealer’s code can change even if there has not been a name change. This occurs when the dealer principal named on paragraph three of the franchise agreement changes.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I have an 69 gto from zone 16 dealer # 040 from Blanchard Pontiac Co. INC. 112 North College St. Wallace, NC 28466

    • Added:
      09 373 — Liddie Pontiac Cadillac Inc
      09 696 — Jack Walker Pontiac
      23 247 — Millheim Motors
      24 138 — John Hine Pontiac

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Document Summary

      What are all the possible documents I can use to research my Firebird?

      A: For those “connoisseurs” of originality, codes and numbers, here is an overview of the documentation associated with the 1967, 1968, and 1969 Firebirds.

      DEALER ORDER/TRIM TAG

      When a Dealer ordered a car, an Order number was created and routed to the Assembly Plant. At this point, the Scheduling Dept. sorted the information for sequencing and established a Build Sequence & Build Date. A VIN and TRIM TAG are generated during this phase. Fisher Body is where the car was ‘born’ meaning, the Trim Tag Data is used to define the basics (model, color, trim, glass, major power options affecting the Body in White ‘shell’). The Trim Tag Date Code was the Month and Week that the Body Shell was Assembled. The date that the car rolled off the Final Assembly Line could have been as much as a week or more later in some cases. Fisher Body then transfers the painted Body to the Final Assembly Plant.

      CHASSIS BROADCAST SHEET

      One of the forms of ‘instructions’ for building the 1st Generation Firebirds was a Broadcast Sheet. This ‘electronically’ generated Form was attached to the car either in the Fisher Body facility or upon arriving at Final Assembly. There were (2) different types of Broadcast Sheets used; the first being a “Chassis Broadcast Copy”. This sheet contained various ‘codes’ related to the Chassis of the car such as specific Engine, Trans, Axle as well as sub-components like Belts, Pulleys, Hoses. Brakes, Steering, Suspension, Radiator details were also on this sheet. This is the sheet that allowed the Operator to pull the right parts for that specific car as well as final assemble the engine down the last item like the Air Cleaner. Just prior to securing the Fuel Tank to the Trunk Pan, an Operator would sometimes place the Chassis Broadcast Sheet onto the Tank leaving it there for a lucky owner to find 30yrs later. These are very rare to find in 1967-1969 Firebirds.

      BODY BROADCAST SHEET

      Once the car left the Chassis area, it received another Broadcast Sheet, this being the “Body Broadcast Copy”. This was used within the Trim and Final area of the Assembly Plant and affected most everything else except the Chassis items. Things like… Console, Radio, Seats, Emblems, wiring, options, etc. Quite often, the Operator installing the Rear Seat would place a Copy of the Body Broadcast Sheet within the springs of the Seat Cushion. Sheets have also been found under the carpet, sound deadener and in the Bucket Seats. Many Codes were duplicated on both the Chassis and Body Broadcast Sheets since some components had related operations in another area of the Assembly Plant. For example, the Chassis Sheet has detailed instructions for the Rear Axle defining the Ratio and whether or not it was Posi (Saf-T-Track). There was also a Box on the Body Sheet for Axle however, this was likely used for the ‘Saf-T-Track Warning Label’ that was attached to the backside of the Deck Lid. It is likely that there were several copies of each sheet attached to various parts of the car during assembly. Most were thrown away once the instructions were no longer needed. Finding one in your car is the result of an Operator who chose to stick it in the car rather than take it to the trash can. Finding a Broadcast Sheet in your car or having one available during a possible purchase does allow one to ‘document’ the essentials of a car on the spot w/o paying or waiting for the Billing History paperwork. So far, no official PMD document has been discovered that explains anything about the Broadcast Sheets.

      BILLING HISTORY

      This document was used to track a vehicle and it’s cost’s from the Plant to the Final Destination. All the essential information is on the Billing History from Key Codes to Engine Unit Number, Options, Drivetrain equipment and Dealer Codes. The Option/Equipment Codes were based on Sales Code Numbers and are easily decoded. Also included was the Invoice Date which is closer to the actual date the car left Final Assembly than the firewall Trim Tag since the Invoice was not created until the car was completely built. These files were saved on Microfiche and made available to the public in the mid-80’s for the purpose of documenting your car. Back then, one could simply call the 800 number, give them your VIN and they would send you a copy of the Billing History. For FREE. Then, as the Muscle Car boom created a frenzy for documentation, PMD ‘gave’ their files (or access to them) to a Pontiac employee (Jim Mattison) who formed his own company (Pontiac Historic Services) which added a ‘Fee’ for this Copying of the Microfiche Service. Without a doubt, the Billing History is probably the most important of all documents for your Firebird but the Broadcast Sheets do add a little more background to the car as does an original Window Sticker or Warranty Booklet. More detailed information about documentation will soon available on the “Generation-1” Firebird Web Site as well as through other Web Sites including Geoff Martin’s. All of the above information is subject to change and correction due to the limited amount of material circulating with regard to Factory Documentation. For specific questions concerning the Billing History, contact Jim Mattison at Pontiac Historic Services (or PMD). This information is pretty much common knowledge. The codes used on the Broadcast Sheet are being deciphered all the time.

      Key Words: Buildsheet

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fisher Body Sequence Number

      My body tag has 111 to the left of the build date code (05C) on the top line. What does this code mean?

      A: The three digit codes in this location are most likely Fisher Body Sequence Number (for production).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hidden VINs

      I have heard there are hidden VINs scattered throughout my car. I want to use this knowledge to help me authenticate a purchase. Anyone have any ideas where these might be located.

      A: …The only hidden VIN that most are aware of is the Cowl VIN stamped below the Cowl Cover. Obviously, non-factory weld seams will be easy to spot. Many like to claim that they know of other ‘Super Secret’ VIN locations simply to leave novices wondering (& worrying ?). Other ‘suspected’ places…. somewhere on the Sub-Frame, Along the Trunk ‘Gutter’, On the floor pan.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Identification Numbers

      What are the identification numbers I should look fo to verify a numbers matching Firebird.

      A: The question of ‘Numbers Matching’ has always been a topic for debate amongst some die-hard enthusiasts. I thought I’d share with everyone what I’ve discovered. If I’ve stated anything in error, please let me know. Numbers Matching basically means the Body and all of it’s components match according to VIN and Part Numbers, Casting Numbers, Date Codes. The Engine/Trans/Axle are considered the ‘Brain’ of the car and they should be the original parts that came on the car when it rolled off the Final Line. Yes, it is possible to rebuild a matching numbers car but that is a touchy area because it starts to get into ethical and illegal practices. A Numbers Correct Car is not necessarily an original Numbers Matching Car.

      – VIN (VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER)

      Assigned to a Body once it has been scheduled for build (Body in White) prior to Final Assembly (while at Fisher Body). This 13-Digit Number included the Division (Chevy, Pontiac, etc.), Series, Model, Year, Assy Plant, Engine (V-8 or 6cyl). The last 5-Digits were the specific Serial Number. The VIN was stamped into a metal tag riveted to the top LH side of the Dash. New for ’68 was the stamping of the VIN (minus Series & Model) onto the Engine Block and onto the Manual Trans Case. This would have occurred at the Vehicle Assembly Plant just prior to (or during) installation into car. Additionally, there were ‘Hidden-VINs’stamped onto various parts of the Vehicle. Generally, these were stamped onto a part of the frame, upper cowl and sometimes on the rear body section (trunk gutter).

      – BODY NUMBER

      This was the consecutive body number as assigned by Fisher Body. For 1968, there were 2 Assembly Plants, LOR (for Lordstown, OH) and LOS (for Van Nuys, CA). This number was stamped onto the Firewall Trim Tag and will appear anywhere from a 2-Digit number up to a 5-Digit number. This number will also appear on the Broadcast Sheet. There is no consistent (numerically consecutive) pattern between the VIN and Body No.

      – ENGINE UNIT NUMBER

      A 6-Digit Number was stamped onto the front RH face of the Engine Block. This was a tracking number used for sequencing an Engine to a specific car. All V-8’s started with a 2 while the 6-Cyl’s began with a 6. This number was most likely stamped at the Engine Assy Plant prior to delivery to the Vehicle Assembly Plant. Also found on the Car Billing History Sheet and on Owner Warranty Data Plate. No consecutive connection to the VIN as this number was not unique to a specific Model.

      – IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

      Once a car was ordered and scheduled for build, an Identification Number was created and routed through to the Assembly Plant for scheduling. This 6-Digit number was entered into the Broadcast System at Fisher Body and the Final Assembly Plant. This number is found on the Broadcast Sheet and along the bottom of the Window Sticker. There is no direct sequential connection between this number and the VIN although the Identification Number is usually higher than the VIN and does climb higher as VIN does.

      – SEQUENCE NUMBER

      Found only on the Broadcast Sheet, this number was used within the Plant as assigned by the scheduling dept. Usually a 3-Digit number with no sequential connection at all to the VIN, Body Number or IDENT. Number. Perhaps assigned in batches and/or daily.

      – INVOICE NUMBER

      A 6-Digit number proceeded by a letter. Used for Billing purposes and found only on the Car Billing History. No connection to any other vehicle number.

      – CASTING NUMBERS/PART NUMBERS

      Most all parts on a car that were cast usually had a Casting Number. This was usually the part number but not always. Many times it represented an assembly. Engine Block, Heads, Intake/Exhaust Manifolds, Timing Chain Covers, Transmission, Axle Housing all had a Casting Number on them. Additionally, other parts had a Stamped Part Number and/or a Tag/Adhesive Label attached primarily for Operator I.D. during the Assembly Process. Many of the Codes found on the Broadcast Sheets could also have been used on these ‘Tags/Labels’ sometimes still on the part (though, most fell off within a few weeks of delivery).

      – DATE CODED PARTS

      Along with the Casting Number, many parts had a Date Code Cast or Stamped onto them. Various formats were used to denote the Date the part was cast, and/or assembled. One example is the Engine Block. “L227” represents Dec. 22 1967. Yes, the letter “I” was used in 1968 despite what many magazines/books say. There was also a ‘Julian Date’ code used on some parts. Some Date Codes were built into the Part Number (carburetors). Other items used a unique coding system such as the Transmission, Glass, Alternator and Distributor. Parts that had a Date Code were the Engine, Cylinder Heads, Manifolds, Carb, Alternator, Starter, Transmission, Axle, Glass, Shocks, Gauge Clusters, Tachs, Clocks, Shifters, Fan Blade Assembly, Master Cylinder, Side View Mirrors, Waterpump, Distributors, Mufflers, Brake Drums, Calipers, Steering Gearbox and possibly other pieces. The thing to remember about date codes is the part should be dated before the Body (Trim Tag date). There is no firm rule on how far back the part must be dated before the body. Most agree that parts should be no more than a month or so before the car.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Protecto Plate

      What is a Protecto Plate?

      A: I’m not sure if that’s the right name for it but it’s basically a metal credit- card type of plate that’s in the owner’s manual that identifies your car for when it used to be taken in for service. I guess they put it through a credit- card type machine to get an imprint of it.

      A: I have the Protecto-Plate for my 1969 OHC6 coupe, and it is plastic. My buddy’s 1969 Z-28 (he bought new) has a metal plate that is imprinted in reverse, my Pontiac reads normally. His is mounted on a card of thick paper, mine is loose. I understand they were used for warranty purposes.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Rally II Wheel Codes

      Does someone know the correct codes for Rally Rims? Specifically, I heard there was a different code for rims on drum versus disc.

      A: Check out the Classic Pontiac Server web site: http://www.pontiacserver.com/wheels.html It is a fairly comprehensive page dedicated to pontiac rims and codes. Another site with good information about all the codes on a rim: http://www.wallaceracing.com/rally-wheel-date-code.htm

      A: Parts book published in 1971 says 1967 used JA for disc and JC for drums 68 was JC for all. Try and figure this one out. All the parts for disc were the same for 1967 and 1968 so what made the difference I don’t know. A-body was just as confusing.

      Application Size Style Bolt Circle Diam Code GM Part Nm
      1967 Firebird 14×6 Plain Steel 4.75″
      1967 Firebird 14×6 Rally I 4.75″ JB 9787860
      1967 Firebird w/Disc Brakes 14×6 Rally II 4.75″ JA 525708
      1967 Firebird w/Drum Brakes 14×6 Rally II 4.75″ JC 546495
      1968 Firebird 14×6 Plain Steel 4.75″ HG HK
      1968 Firebird 14×6 Rally II 4.75″ JC 546495
      1969 Firebird 14×6 Plain Steel 4.75″
      1969 Firebird 14×6 Rally II 4.75″ JC 546495
      1969 Firebird 14×7 Plain Steel 4.75″ 362052
      1969 Firebird 14×7 Rally II 4.75″ JK 525709

      The 1968 Rally II had the wheel rim code on outside of the rim just next to the valve stem (see picture below):

      Wheel Code - 1968

      For the 1968 Rally II, there were codes on the inside of the rim (flat part that connects both outside and inside of rim) which included the date code, plant code, inner wheel code (JJ), and size (14 x 6).

      Key Words: Ralley II, Rally II, Rallye II, Wheel Codes, Rim Date Codes

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I have a 67 with an Ames performance disc conversion for 14 inch wheels ( front) and was able to keep the same spindles. Do you think JC codes will work all around? Have a chance to buy a set.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air Features for 1968

      *Please review and advise on any discrepancies. If you have corrections, please provide references for verification (Pt.No’s., etc.) Thanks !

      1968 Firebird Ram Air Features…

      ENGINE BLOCK
      Casting Number… 9792506
      Codes… WI (RAI-MT), XN (RAI-AT), WU (RAII-MT), XT (RAII-AT) {4-Bolt Main}

      CYLINDER HEADS
      Casting Number… 31 (RAI ‘D’ Port) 96 (RAII Round Port)…’stamped’
      * Not all “96” Cyl.Heads were stamped

      EXHAUST MANIFOLDS
      Ram Air I & H.O….. Cast Iron Long Branch (‘D’ Port) 9779424-R…9779495-L
      Ram Air II….. Cast Iron Long Branch (round-port) 9794036-R…9794038-L
      * w/Thermostatic Heat Control Valve in RH manifold

      AXLE
      3.90… “ZP” (4-Pinion)
      *No Ram Air Firebirds came from the factory w/4.33axle although it was available. Safe-T-Track was mandatory.

      TRANS
      Manual Trans… M-21 Close-Ratio Muncie (“FX”)
      Auto-Trans… T.H.M (“PQ”)
      * ALL 1967-1968 Ram Air Firebirds came with two-piece speedo cables and gear reducers. ((( ? PART NUMBER ?)))

      INTAKE MANIFOLD
      Casting # 9790140 (1st Type…. all 4Bbl’s incl. the RA I… exc. RA II)
      Casting # 9794234 (2nd Type….all 4Bbl’s incl. the RA II … after May’68)

      CARBURETOR
      RAI…. (MT) 7028277 (AT) 7028276
      RAII… (MT) 7028273 (AT) 7028270

      CARB. VAC. BREAK CONTROL
      Pt. # 7038237 (Ram Air I) …Black plastic Cover
      Pt. # 7038239 (Ram Air II) …Green Plastic Cover

      THROTTLE CABLE BRACKET
      Pt. # 9792242 was used on the 1st Type Intake Manifold (9790140)
      Pt. # 9797415 was used on the 2nd Type Intake Manifold (9794234)
      * 2nd Type stamped “F-4”

      OIL FILTER ADAPTOR
      (Alum.- filter to block) *Used on all RA & H.O. engines Pt.# 9794111

      DISTRIBUTOR
      Pt. # 1111449 (exc. RA II)
      The Ram Air I cars used the same Distributor as found on 400 M.T. and H.O. cars
      *Only the RAII had a unique Distributor, Pt. # 1111941. (MT or AT)

      RADIATOR
      All Ram Air cars used the H.D. Harrison Radiator.
      Manual Trans: “UQ”
      Auto Trans: “UP”

      RAM AIR HOOD BAFFLE
      (pentagon shaped stamped sheet-metal pan, screwed to hood)
      Pt. # 9793161

      RAM AIR HOOD BAFFLE SEAL
      Pt. # 9789883

      RAM AIR CARB. SHROUD (Air Inlet)
      (round stamped sheet-metal ‘tub’, set on carb.)
      Pt. # 9792987

      RAM AIR CARB. SHROUD SEAL
      Pt. # 9793163

      RAM AIR AIR FILTER ELEMENT COVER (black)
      Pt. # 6424398

      RAM AIR AIR FILTER ELEMENT
      Pt. # 6421746 (A212CW & A-274C- paper wetted)

      RAM AIR HOOD SCOOPS
      (Cast-Metal Scoops “open”)
      Pt. #9794283/84

      NOTES:
      * All Ram Air cars were shipped to the dealer with the Ram Air Baffle, Shroud, Air-Filter, Seals and Open Hood Scoops shipped in the trunk. From ’67 until early 1968, the parts were removed from the trunks and returned to the parts-crib by guards/inspectors while preparing to ship as they suspected theft. This discrepancy was corrected and it is assumed that parts were forwarded to the dealership for installation.

      * All Ram Air cars came with a standard 4-Blade Rad’t. Cooling Fan unless optioned with the ‘Flex-Fan’.

      * Ram Air Firebird’s ordered with the Ram Air Option and Underhood Lamp were modified at the Dealership in order for the Lamp Assy to clear the Hood Baffle. The Lamp was moved slightly outboard to clear the Baffle.

      * The Underhood Structure req’d. a modification to the RH side near the Scoop in order to allow proper fit/sealing of the Ram Air Baffle & Seal. This was performed at the dealership while the Ram Air parts were being installed. A small section of the Underhood Metal was snipped away. In most all case’s, this was a crude alteration and is usually quite noticeable.

      * The Code used on the Broadcast Sheet for Ram Air Engines was “Y”.

      * No identifying codes were noted on the Firewall Trim Tag and/or VIN to indicate the Ram Air option.

      * Less than 50 Ram Air Firebird’s have been accounted for to date.

      * The Ram Air I production was from Aug 1967 until May 1968.

      * Ram Air II production started May 20th 1968. The option code was still “347” however, the package price was increased. (sometimes found noted on the Billing History).

      * Earliest known RA I was built in Oct. 1967 (Verdoro Green)

      * The last 1968 RA II ‘Bird produced was invoiced Aug. 6 1968 (4spd coupe)

      *For more information…please contact John Schuh FRamair@aol.com

      “GENERATION-1 Firebird Registry” http://members.aol.com/Framair/Gen1.html

      A: If you were surprised about the “standard” block for the 1967 Ram Air cars, how about learning that most of the blocks for the 1968 Ram Air II engines were “standard” 400 cid blocks (9790071) that were fitted with four-bolt caps!!! Some had the last four digits ground off and were re-stamped with —“2506”, but most were left with the 9790071.

      Also your 1967 and 1968 lists show that the cylinder heads had their numbers stamped on them. Not so! All of the ’67 Ram Air “997” heads and the 1968 Ram Air I and II (“31” and “96”) heads were cast!!! Any heads with the numbers stamped on them were done by racers to satisfy the folks at the NHRA, for drag racing.

      Find that information on a build sheet or trim tag!!!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Special Paint Option CODE SPR and Carousel Red for 1969

      I have a couple of questions regarding the info I have received on my Firebird from PHS.

      What is the significance of the special paint option CODE SPR? Mine is carousel red. What is special about that ?

      Does anyone know what the last 2 items on the options list are. They are:

      OPTIONAL LOC CODE 011
      ADV.ASSN.COL CODE 011 $10.00

      A: * Carousel Red was a Special Order Paint in 1969 for Firebird

      A: The ADV.ASSN.COL that is shown on a dealer invoice means “Advertising Association Collected”. The local dealer advertising groups will charge a certain amount for each car to fund the tv and local newspaper ads.

      OPTIONAL LOC means that the car was unloaded by the driver of the car carrier at the dealers “Optional Location”. Many dealers have a different location or storage lot, where they store their new-car inventory.

      I assure you that neither of the notes on an invoice are showing this car, or any car as being used for promotional purposes! By the way………… lots of invoices had these notes. They are nothing special.

      The story on Carousel Red is a good one, but there is absolutely no truth to it! Pontiac did release four (4) special order colors for 1968. These colors were:

      Windward Blue, Goldenrod Yellow, Pink and the equivalent of Carousel Red. These colors were available on all 1968 Pontiacs, not just the Firebird. To the best of my knowledge, the reasoning for releasing these special colors was that both Ford and Chrysler had some very popular “bright” colors, including an orange in their color lineup. Remember, this was the psychedelic era! This was GM’s response to those offerings, nothing more!!!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Tire Jack Codes

      I want to find original tire jack parts but do not know what part numbers I should look for when I see them. Does anyone have the information?

      A: This is what I could find about the jack codes (this is a sample from the 1967-1973 Firebird parts catalogue)

      Group Part no. Year / Discription
      Base Assembly, Bumper Jack
      8.820 9783363 1967/all – 6 x 6 rounded keystone rack
      8.820 9781295 1967/all – 6 x 6 squared keystone rack
      8.820 9775045 1967/all – 6-1/ x 7-1/2 squared
      8.820 9793349 1968/all – keystone rack 1-1/4 X 1-5/32 Blue
      8.820 9793540 1968/all – keystone rack 1-1/4 X 1-1/4 Blue/Sup-9793542
      8.820 9794470 1968, 1969, 1970/all – square rack /Sup -9793334
      8.820 9794472 1968, 1969, 1970/all – T -type
      8.820 484803 1969-72/all – keystone rack /Sup -9794471
      Handle, Jack
      8.820 9775167 1967, 1968, 1969, 1970/all – also used as wheel wrench
      Jack, Assembly, Bumper
      8.820 9793539 1967, 1968, 1969, 1970/all – also used as wheel wrench
      8.820 484805 1968, 1969, 1970, 1971/all

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Vehicle ‘Tracking’ Numbers For 1968

      What are the important numbers for my car and where are they located?

      A:

      VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)

      Assigned to a Body once it has been scheduled for build (Body in White) prior to Final Assembly (while at Fisher Body). This 13-Digit Number included the Division(Chevy, Pontiac, etc.), Series, Model, Year, Assy Plant, Engine (V-8 or 6cyl). The last 5-Digits were the specific Serial Number. The VIN was stamped into a metal tag riveted to the top LH side of the Dash. New for 1968 was the stamping of the VIN (minus Series & Model) onto the Engine Block and onto the Manual Trans Case. This would have occurred at the Vehicle Assembly Plant just prior to (or during) installation into car.

      BODY NUMBER

      This was the consecutive body number as assigned by Fisher Body. For 1968, there were 2 Assembly Plants, LOR (for Lordstown, OH) and LOS (for Van Nuys, CA). This number was stamped onto the Firewall Trim Tag and will appear anywhere from a 2-Digit number up to a 5-Digit number. This number will also appear on the Broadcast Sheet. There is no consistent (numerically consecutive) pattern between the VIN and Body No.

      ENGINE UNIT NUMBER

      A 6-Digit Number was stamped onto the front RH face of the Engine Block. This was a tracking number used for sequencing an Engine to a specific car. All V-8’s started with a 2 while the 6-Cyl’s began with a 6. This number was most likely stamped at the Engine Assy Plant prior to delivery to the Vehicle Assembly Plant. Also found on the Car Billing History Sheet and on Owner Warranty Data Plate. No consecutive connection to the VIN as this number was not unique to a specific Model.

      IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

      Once a car was ordered, an Identification Number was created and routed through to the Assembly Plant for scheduling. This 6-Digit number was entered into the Broadcast System at Fisher Body and the Final Assembly Plant. This number is found on the Broadcast Sheet and along the bottom of the Window Sticker. There is no direct sequential connection between this number and the VIN although the Identification Number is usually higher than the VIN and does climb higher as VIN does.

      SEQUENCE NUMBER

      Found only on the Broadcast Sheet, this number was used within the Plant as assigned by the scheduling dept. Usually a 3-Digit number with no sequential connection at all to the VIN, Body Number or IDENT. Number. Perhaps assigned in batches and/or daily.

      INVOICE NUMBER

      A 6-Digit number proceeded by a letter. Used for Billing purposes and found only on the Car Billing History. No connection to any other vehicle number.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Codes - Interior (2)

      Q: Custom Trim Option

      I am confused that my car has the custom option trim (554) but it only has standard interior.

      A: The Custom Trim Option with custom seats for the 1968 Firebird was identified on the Firewall Trim Tag as Style 22667 (conv) -or- 22637 (coupe). (22467 and 22437 were Std. Interiors). According to the sales literature, the Custom Trim Option (code 554) included the following…..

      • Deluxe Wheel Discs

      • Deluxe Steering Wheel

      • Door and Quarter Trim (molded vinyl)

      • Vinyl and Weave pattern Seats

      • Roof Rail Mldgs

      • Wheel Opening Mldgs

      • Instrmt. Panel Grip (Grab Bar)

      • Pedal Trim

      • Dual Horns

      There are other features that were apparently associated with the Custom Trim Option that were not so obvious such as the different (longer) window regulators. Some items have also been speculated to have been also included such as…

      • 160 mph Speedo

      • “BIRD” Emblem on Glove Box Door

      • Custom (Deluxe) Seat Belts (brushed metal buckles w/GM button)

      • Small white “BIRD” etched onto fwd/lower corner of front side glass

      • Windshield ‘A’ pillar Mldgs (interior) ??

      • Wheel Trim Rings (when ordered w/Rally II wheel option)

      All items in the Custom Trim Option could have been ordered individually on a 22467 (or 22437) car except the Deluxe Interior, 22667 (or 22637).

      A: The body tag series number changed to reflect the custom trim option (Code 554) and had a different number for custom interior (26) or standard interior (24):

      • 22437 std interior with custom trim option (coupe)

      • 22467 “” (CONV)

      • 22637 deluxe interior with custom trim option (coupe)

      • 22667 “” (CONV)

      A: Use following link to find more information about the Custom Trim Option on FGF: More Information

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Codes - Interior
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • From our Body Tag Analyzer (https://firstgenfirebird.org/body-tag-analyzer/):

      1967 Pontiac Firebird Coupe with Custom Trim Option
      The paint was Gulf Turquoise with Ivory vinyl top.
      The trim color and material were Parchment Custom Option Vinyl Bucket Seats without headrests.
      This car has the Fisher Body Unit Number 22,637 built in the 3rd week of April at the Lordstown, Ohio plant.

      Five Group Accessory Codes Entered: WL 2ZGS 3JF 5Y

      1st Group (digit not shown)
      L ….Folding Rear Seat (Firebird)
      W ….Soft-ray Tinted Glass (Windshield Only)

      2nd Group
      G ….Console
      S ….Rear-mounted Manual Antenna
      Z ….3-spd Automatic Transmission

      3rd Group
      F ….400 Option (Firebird)
      J ….Custom Option

      4th Group
      No Accessories in this Group (or No Codes Entered)

      5th Group
      Y ….Deluxe Front Seat Belts

      Further info:

    • My 1967 Firebird 400 has the custom option (J) on group 3. I have no idea what’s custom option stands for, please help.
      721 O4C
      ST 67-22636 LOR22636 Body
      TR 260-Z K-1 Paint
      WL 2ZGS 3JF
      5Y

      Attachment

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Custom Trim Option (Code 554)

      My billing history indicates my 1968 came with custom trim. What was included with this option?

      A: For the 1968 Firebird, the Custom Trim Option (554) included the following….

      Custom Seat Covers (Morrokide and stitched knit vinyl)
      Custom Molded Door and Quarter Trim Panels, Assist Bar (above Glovebox) Dual Horns, Deluxe Wheel Covers, Deluxe Steering Wheel, Custom Pedal Trim, Front & Rear Wheel Opening Moldings, Drip Rail Mldgs (Coupes), Windshield Pillar Garnish Mldg. There are some who have been saying (in error) that only those cars with the Custom Trim Option had the etched white ‘Bird’ on the front side glass; this is not so and has been proven by many original STANDARD trim Firebirds.

      The RH sideview mirror was not a part of the Custom Trim Option.
      Many owners upgraded or opted to delete certain things beyond the Custom Trim Option (wheel opening mldgs, wheel covers, steering wheel). Additionally, all of the components of the Custom Trim Option could be ordered separately on a Standard Trim car except for the Custom Seats and Trim Panels and Assist Bar

      A: Use following link to find more information about the Custom Trim Option on FGF: More Information

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Convertible (20)

      Q: Convertible Header Molding Removal

      I need to replace/rechrome my header molding on my convertible. Does anyone have any suggestions?

      A: It’s a tricky job. Once you’ve removed every screw & the pillar post weatherstripping and trim (there’s a couple of nice little hidden scres there), you have a go at rolling the header chrome forward towards the front of the car.

      Start with the piece on the side that overlaps the other side at the centre above the rear view mirror (which I’d suggest you remove if you haven’t already). Stand up in the inside of your bird and get your thumbs up under the trim and sort of roll it upwards whilst pushing forward. On my bird, the passenger side overlapped the driver side at the centre so I started with that side.

      There’s a lot of grey putty-like caulking under it that holds the trim on pretty firmly to the actually metal frame. It looks like the same stuff that holds the kick panels on around the vent area. I also sprayed a LOT of RP7 under the trim to break the contact between the chrome and the grey goo. Not knowing what was under there I figured the RP7 couldn’t hurt. As it turns out I think it helped break the seal between the goo & the trim…….maybe a bit.

      Anyway, like I said, roll it forward and apply a fair amount of pressure. Once I got the piece just barely off at the centre I put a screwdriver shaft under it and work my way towards the outside, trying to push the whole trim sideways as well as over the top. I also used a very small screwdriver to remove the grey sealer as I went. When I could, I removed the gunk before pulling the trim away from that section. In the end it sort of slid up and over and rolled towards the outside of the car. The other side will be easier.

      Take your time and be prepared to walk away and come back the next day….I did this a few times. It is pretty frustrating but the trim is also pretty tough and won’t be too easy to actually bend out of shape.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Power Top Blowing Fuses

      I have recently been blowing fuses when I put up or down the power top. It is now taking 2 fuses to put up or down. It goes about 1/2 way (in either direction) then blows. If I am quick I can change the fuse before it collapses to its previous position. With the new fuse in I can then usually get the last part of the movement completed but it oftens blows again. I am not familiar with the power top as our other cars is manual. What can be causing the “burn outs” and should the top collapse back to where it came from or is the hydraulic system a problem also. What is the possibility it is short of ???hydraulic fluid ??? which is causing the pump to over draw and blow the fuse?

      A: You should probably pull the back seat to access the pump and see if it’s overheating a lot when it’s running. Maybe the internal motor is going out and blowing the fuses once it starts to overheat and draw too much current.

      The repro houses have the pump for about $200.00

      It’s a simple system so there shouldn’t be too much to troubleshoot.

      A: I have had some “power drain” when lowering my power top, but I have yet to experience what you have explained. I would suspect that the wires leading to the pump might be suspect. (I have run mine with very little fluid and too much fluid… no problem with the fuses.) Again I would suspect the wires/pump.

      A: ur 1969 does the same thing, except that I can hear that the pump is low on fluid. If I help the top along, it won’t blow the fuse, but the minute I let off, it will blow. I have a leak in one of my cylinders. If I top off the fluid, it fixes it. Maybe one possibility to check.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Side Rails

      I need to replace my convertible top and found the frame at a junk yard. The siderails have the following codes stamped on it:

      F P L and F P L

      Is this correct for my Firebird?

      A: On the outboard side of the Front Side Rail, there is an identification stamp:

      F P R (or L)

      I believe this to be “Firebird, Power, RH, LH”

      (from my 1968 Firebird w/PwrTop)

      A: In response to those letters being stamped into the siderails, wouldn’t “F” mean F-body? Firebird guys know the Firebird was the better car, but we do have all those cramos to scarf up some parts from!

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Top Cleaner

      Does anyone have a suggestion for a Convert top cleaner protector? I put a new black top on my 1967 last year, and would like to know what I can use on it.

      A: I have used Mother’s Convertible Top Cleaner and Mother’s Vinyl Protector works great on plastic and tires too. here’s no shine like Mother’s shine…………so they say.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Top Kit

      What parts do I need? A entire convertible top kit, or just the header sealer kit or what….I have catalogs and I cannot figure out what I need to order.I found some sort of “kit” for $188

      A: The parts company will be your best source for answer the questions since each company will change their kits. I am betting you will need the kit which should include the header sealer (strip over windshield) and top pad. The convertible top should include the top and window. Sounds like you might need the rubber weatherstripping, grommets, bumpers, top hold-down bracket, tacking strips, spring and cable assemblies, and pinchweld molding clamps. See if the kits include any of these parts. Hope this helps. I looked at my conv and Year One catalog to come up with my list.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Top Switch for 1968

      Was the original switch all black or was the switch chrome. I’ve seen both types.

      68_TopSwitchChrome
      68_TopSwitchBlack

      A: Mines original and chrome as I have had the car since it was new.

      A: While your working on it, did the factory do a real sloppy job cutting out the hole for it on yours?

      68_TopSwitchSideView

      A: Yes, mine is sort of sloppy. Is their suppose to be a bezel of some sort on the outside? Mine does not have one and the looking at the diagram I do not see one.

      A: No bezel, just looks like the one above.

      A: I’ve burned through 4-5 switches through the years. I used to put the top up and down a lot when it was a daily driver. There are threads here where owners have put relays in the circuit to dampen the high current that burns the switch points.

      A: I’ve only seen the black switch being reproduced. Is there a source for the chrome switch? I’ve seen a few Nos on ebay . I currently have a black switch.

      A: Performance Years part number RFI242

      A: Mine is black (early 68) and it is original. I have also had mine since it was new and know I have never replaced switch. Purchased new January 1968. Never a problem with the top motor or switch.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Does anyone have a photo of where the convertible top switch is located on a 1968 Firebird. My car came to me with a aftermarket switch that is held with Velcro. I also have an aftermarket gauge cluster on the dash.

      Thanks
      Ray

    • Mine is also black and the original. Maybe it depended on which factory your car was built out of? Mine was Van Nuys, CA

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Top Water Drainage

      Does anyone know the exact path that the water should take from the convertible rain gutter to the road , or have any suggestions on how to improve it. My inner rocker panels are rotted and wonder if the problem is water drainage.

      A: It’s common for water to get into the rocker panels. As a mater of fact, that’s the way they are designed. The water that drips down the back windows (on both sides), drains into the rockers. There is a drain at the rear of the rockers on the inside edge. Look under the car, just ahead of the rear wheel well and you’ll se a rectangular opening. If still there you may see a small square rubber flap hiding the hole. This is the drain. There is also a hole in the bottom of the rocker (I think) toward the front. If these holes get plugged, the sand a junk that normally collects in the bottom of the rocker will hold moisture and rot them out.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Trim Removal for a 1969

      How do I remove the following trim items for a 1969 convertible:

      1. Front Fender “Louvres” Do they just use a stud with a nut on the back? Will there be any trouble accessing the back side?

      2. Convertible Well Molding – Does this just “Pop” off, and if so, is there a special tool or trick that should be used so it doesn’t get damaged?

      3. Front Windshield Lower and Side Moldings

      4. Any tips on removing the nose from the rubber headlight bezel cushions forward would be great.

      A: 1. Front Fender “Louvres” – Do they just use a stud with a nut on the back? Will there be any trouble accessing the back side?

      * These will be the hardest to take off. They were bolted on from behind with those speed nuts like the ones that hold you hood emblems on but larger.

      * Accessing the back side will be impossible unless you loosen or take off the fender.

      2. Convertible Well Molding – Does this just “Pop” off, and if so, is there a special tool or trick that should be used so it doesn’t get damaged?

      * The important step to take here is to first remove the screws holding this molding on. There should be one on each side toward the front of the molding were the molding is vertical and inside the well facing the conv. top. There might be a screw in the middle as well. I don’t remember. I think you can just gently pull the molding off from the well towards the back of the car. You have to twist and push at the same time so the inner lip will clear the clip.

      3. Front Windshield Lower and Side Moldings

      * The lower molding is screwed down and is the easiest one to remove. You have to remove the windshield valence and the screws are just underneath. The top and side windshield moldings require a special tool. This tool looks like a Y with to hooks hanging off it on the outside. These hooks go under the molding and catch the clips. Once you have located a clip you just pull toward the middle of the windshield and the clip will release the molding. The side molding that covers the pillar post is screwed on and strip caulked on. You have to take off the windshield molding, weather stripping, and the weather stripping bracket or Track (also polished stainless). Once the windshield molding is off you can see the two small screws holding the outside of this molding. They will be down by were the windshield meets the car. Next you will have to pull the weather stripping out and take out the screws that are holding the weather stripping track on. Underneath this track are a few more screws holding the pillar post chrome on. After all the screws are removed there will still be a pretty good hold on this piece because they were strip caulked onto the body. Just be very careful and take your time. All these pieces are very hard to find and very expensive when you do find them.

      4. Any tips on removing the nose from the rubber headlight bezel cushions forward would be great.

      * The headlight bezels are held on by five carriage bolts each. These bolts are very hard to get because of their extra long carriage. You will have to drop the whole nose to access the two top corner bolts. I would recommend dousing these nuts and bolts with a lot of penetrating fluid a night or so before you plan on taking them off. They made the carriage longer because it has to go through the fiberglass bezel and then anchor on the metal of the nose. A normal carriage bolt won’t make it through the fiberglass and will crack it while tightening.

      BTW…I have found a good, cheap way to remove the drip rail moldings on a hard top. I use one of those cheap bottle openers with the pointed side on one end and the bottle opener on the other. Tape the large rounded side of the opener (the side that would be on top of the bottle cap. Use masking or duct tape, something with a little cushion to it. Put the opener on the corner piece and it will pop right off. Then start at the beginning of the molding and move back. Using the opener like you would to open a bottle. Taped side pointed toward the sky. It works, give it a try.

      A: Are you in for a big job. Here’s what I know:

      1. Front Fender “Louvers”

      * Next to impossible to remove without removing the fender. They are held on by stamped steel speed nuts. You may be able to squeeze you hand up behind the fender if you unbolt the fender from the chassis and the fender well then pry the fender out. I hope you have thin arms.

      2. Convertible Well Molding

      * This is the one piece that I haven’t removed, yet. I, too, would be interested in anyone’s advice. From what I hear, you have to unbolt it from the well side but I really don’t know.

      3. Front Windshield Lower and Side Moldings

      * The lower piece is bolted in place. Most of the bolts are under the cowl but there is a clip on each end that is behind the top of the fender. I found I had to unbolt the fender to work mine back into place. The side moldings are screwed in place but (if I remember correctly) the screws are behind the window weather strip that runs up the pillar.

      4. Any tips on removing the nose from the rubber headlight bezel cushions forward would be great.

      * Your not going to like this one but, to remove the rubber you have to totally dissemble the front bumper setup. I recommend that you remove the whole bumper setup first by unbolting it from the bumper brackets that extend up from the subframe. I think there are only six bolts/nuts total. three on each side. You can then lay the whole thing face down on a couple of saw horses to make it easier. If you have a die grinder, cut the locking nuts off, not the bolt, just the nut. Don’t even try to un-screw them because you’ll wind up breaking the plastic mounting tabs for the headlight surround. Pay special attention to all the little spring washers and plastic washers. The bolts are carriage type and have extra long shoulders. Save as many as you can. As in everything… be patient and make notes.

      Funny thing is, after you remove the from bumper assembly and hood, the fenders come off rather easily. You may consider this when trying to remove the fender louvers and windshield chrome.

      Well, I hope I didn’t scare you. It’s a lot of work but the details can really make or break a great paint job.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Manual to Power Conversion

      What is the difference between a Manual and Power Convertible Top frame for a 1967-1969 ‘F’ Body? Can a Manual Frame be converted to a Power system simply by adding the Cylinders ?

      A: Yes, you can convert your manual top to power. What you’ll need is the pump, cylinders, and hose kit as well as a switch and, of course, wiring. I’m planning on doing the same thing when I get to my 1969 convertible project.

      I’ve been keeping one eye out for a good used set-up but haven’t committed any $$$ toward it yet. I did come across a 1969 dash with power top switch (it was in a 1969 Camaro drag car and the guy took it out and gave it to for FREE!). The dash isn’t in the greatest shape but the switch is OK and the dash can be used as a template for my good dash. If I remember correctly, Year One has a factory diagram in their catalog.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Manual vs Power Top Parts

      Does anyone know or have lying around the frame for a convertible top?…. I could use the side rails over the rear windows. One of my cars has these pieces bent. Brings up a not-so-funny image of what happens if you try to raise/lower the top with the car moving (just a guess, I bought it that way).”

      A: Remember that the Convertible top mechanism is different for power and manual tops. The power top has a different linkage that brings the front bow up and over while the manual design depends on you lifting the front bow. If you put power pistons on a manual top the side linkage will bend a lot. (I speak from experience).

      A: Aside from the obvious parts related to the power top lift mechanism versus the manual mechanism, the parts book shows that the only frame parts that are different are the roof side rails as Glenn mentions. Here are the items:

      Group 14.170 RAIL,SIDE ROOF

      7639060 7639061 1967-69/All/-67/-Center- with manual top

      7639062 7639063 1967-69/All/-67/-Center- with power top ^^ ^^ (the two part numbers seem to be for right and left)

      A: About the differences between power and manual top frames. Years ago the power top frame on my 1967 bird developed a big crack. It was already having problems blowing fuses beforehand, so I just took the off the whole frame, pump and the hydraulic rams and put on a manual top frame. As an aside, I didn’t know about the hold down latches for holding down the manual top in the folded down position, so I never put them on and never noticed the difference!

      Somebody posted that the part numbers are different for the side rails between manual and power top frames. So, I finally got my lazy butt out to compare the manual and power top frames in my garage. He is right. The rails themselves are similar but the brackets welded on them are different. And the attaching levers are different as well. So, at a minimum, if you want to change from a manual top frame to a power top frame you are going to need to change the side rails and the accompanying levers. So I am guessing that only the front header bow and cross bars are the same? At this point, I would say that if somebody wants to change from a manual top to a power top, you might as well change out the entire frame!

      A: Sometime ago there was a discussion on the differences between the Manual Conv. Top Frame and the Power Conv. Top Frame. It was noted that only one of the Side-Links was different (Center).

      Looking through the Parts Catalog, I found the following items associated with the differences. Obviously, the Lift and various Pump, Hose items will also be unique to the Power Top.

      FOLDING TOP SIDE ROOF RAIL (Front)
      7639042/43      67-9 F  w/man. top
      7639044/45      67-9 F  w/pwr. top
      
      FOLDING TOP SIDE ROOF RAIL (Center)
      7639060/61      67-9 F  w/man. top
      7639062/63      67-9 F  w/pwr. top
      
      BOLT, ROOF RAIL CTRL. LINK TO FRT. RAIL (w/pwr. top)
      7641987     67-9 F
      (3/8-16 x 1 5/8)
      
      BUSHING, ROOF RAIL CTRL. LINK TO FRT. RAIL (w/pwr. top)
      7641986     67-9 F
      
      BUSHING, LIFT TO REAR RAIL (w/pwr. top)
      4613551     67-8 F
      (3/8 ID x 1/2 OD, 1 1/2 dia Hd - 11/32 Shldr Lgth)
      
      WASHER, CTRL. LINK TO REAR RAIL (w/pwr. top)
      4414102     67-9 F
      

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Moulding Removal Help

      I have another question. I have a 1968 convertible that I am taking in for a paint job and want to remove the moulding that is around the top on the rear deck but can’t figure out how to get it off. How does one release the clips for this molding. I assume that it is held on with clips of some sort. I looked in the chasis manaul but it was’nt much help. Is a special tool required?

      A: He asked about removing the moulding around the top on the rear, There are clips and six screws holding it in place the screws are accesible only after you remove the three rear tacking strips that are bolted to the body, I have not tried but may be possible to fold top back slightly and to use one of those stanley ratcheting screw drivers.

      A: The six retaining screws can be removed by folding the top back a bit. The molding has to be removed with the retainig clips still attached. The pinch weld is at a 45 degree angle so the molding must be pulled towards the interior of the car and that angle.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Pinchweld Moulding Removal

      I need to remove the chrome trim that goes around the back opening where to top folds into the well. (there some rust underneath in the corners) I looked up inside and felt some bolts accessible just above the “drip tray” but dont’ want to take them out for fear of not being able to put it all back together (next winter I’m planning to do a more thorough body job and top relacement) Any advice on how to remove the trim? Easy?

      A: I took this part (pinchweld moulding) off my car in December in preparation for body work and paint. I don’t remember any bolts. I do remember that there were about 4 philips screws, plus about 8 funky trim clips. I used a trim removal tool (available at your local auto parts supplier). My trim has been sent to the plating shop so I can’t check it out to make sure about the bolts you mention.

      It was easy to remove, especially since I wasn’t taking care to not scratch any paint.

      The pinchweld area is quite susceptible to rust, so it’s really a good idea to look it over.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Power Top Cylinder Removal

      Has anyone on the list ever changed the lift cylinders with a power top? I have the Fisher Body Manual but it is not too clear in this area. I believe that you need to take the assembly completely out, that is attached to the cylinder, but I am not too sure. The manual clearly defines the other models but the “F” body is a little bit unclear. Anyone?

      A: I’ve done this on a 1969, not sure if it is the same. When I took mine out, I removed ONLY the cyinder. I first detached it from the top. Took out the seat and panel covers. Detached the hydraulic hose from the bottom. Then removed the bolts/pins which hold it in place near the top. This was the hardest part. I could get the inner one off pretty easy but the outer one was hard because there wasn’t enough room to get it out. I had to pry a bit with a large screwdriver in order to get enough space to get it out.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Power Top Problem

      When I hit the button to raise the top, the motor starts and lifts it about two feet. Then the motor spins faster as if there’s no load on it and the power top stops raising. Has anyone had this problem? Do I have a fluid leak or are the hydraulic cylinders bad?

      A: You are most likely low on fluid and yes, you would have a leak. If the leak happened over the course of 10 years or so, then, it might just be the seals slowly leaking. If you don’t see any puddles in the front of your quarter panels or next to the pump, I would refill and go. Otherwise, fix the leak before you refill. You will need to purge the system of air after you refill.

      A: Thanks for the suggestions guys, my power top is working once agian.

      I opened the pump resevoir, disconnected the cylinder arms from the top and ran them up and down a few times. This brought the air to the resevoir which I then filled up with PS fluid and closed. Once I connected the cylinder arms and greased a few of the joints on the top, everything worked perfectly. About a one hour job.

      My power top works again — Oh that magic feeling!!!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Removing Chrome Strip Around Trunk Well Lining

      I need to replace my trunk well lining. How do I remove the crome strip around it and then replace it? What do I need to buy to replace the rubber looking stuff under the trim to seal it to the body?

      A: REMOVAL:

      There shouldn’t be too much to it….but I didn’t find it easy….especially knowing it’s expensive to replace! So…

      (1) : remove all of the retaining screws (philips head). Most of these are on the seat back side of the trim. I think there is also one facing more upwards right at each end of the trim. This may not be easy if you haven’t taken the trunk well liner out and if the screws are rusted. Mine were so I gave them a dose of RP7 (WD40) every day for a week, put the philips head screwdriver in and tapped the end of the scredriver with a hammer to help break the rust seal. You should also be able to spray the screws from inside the trunk.

      (2) Start at one end and wiggle the trim loose slowy. It’s held on to the metal lip with retaining clips but these should slide off the lip with a bit of force. The hard part is that there is a putty/sealer under it running the full length of the trim and this is pretty good at holding the trim on. I also wiggled the whole trim by standing where the back seat is (was) and rocking it where the two pieces of trim join at the centre.

      I’d suggest you take your time and if the trim doesn’t move easily spray under the full length of it with RP7 to loosen it all up, including the putty/sealer. It will come off but it took me a fair amount time!

      A: REASSEMBLE:

      There’s no rubber involved that I’m aware of, I can’t exactly tell what the putty was but I bagged a sample of it for when I reassemble the car. It’s Black and putty like but not really sticky (maybe because it’s so old).

      It should sit within the “channel” back from the lip all the way around where the trim will sit and seemed to be all one continuous flat piece the same width as the trim. Also, it extends a 1/2 inch or so back from the metal lip, over the lip and then down under towards the trunk for about a 1/4 inch. This seems to make a good seal to stop moisture. It doesn’t look like the stuff that’s used on the bodywork, it’ was reasonable pliable even though very old. When I took the trim off, the trim came off with the mounting clips and the putty was still sitting there in the “channel” (the half inch or so dip back from the metal lip), over and under towards the trunk as above. So, I guess to reassemble in reverse is spot on.

      That is…

      (A) put the putty down first (about 3 millimeters thick),

      (B) put the mounting clips onto the trim evenly spaced making sure that there was one close to each outer end…but not too close as there’s a screw to hold it down….I don’t think I’d put the mounting clips on the lip and then try to put the trim onto the lip & clips…seems pretty awkward given the way I took it off although that’s probably how the factory would have done it?,

      (C) mount the trim starting from one side and working my way towards the centre and then around to the other side….assuming the two trim pieces fit together in the centre hasn’t been compromised…that is, if it was polished or re-chromed they still fit together as per original…the female? side has the same size opening.

      Sounds pretty simple but I’m sure you’ll have a lot of fun getting it all centred.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Replacing Convertible Top (Vinyl)

      I need to replace the vinyl for my convertible top. Does anyone have any tips?

      A: I’ve replaced two tops on my 1969 Firebird the things I recall are:

      1. Make sure its at least 70 degrees out side (This allows the top to be stretched)

      2. Buy a new tack strip (This goes on the front bow on the bottom side) and glue it down.

      3. Use a HD staple gun that works with the small diameter round end staples.

      4. Measurer the locations and angles of the roof supporting bows before you remove the old top. Use these measurements as references for the new top.

      5. Apply spray on glue on the top of the front bow to help keep the convertible top from pulling out the staples on the tack strip that on the underside of the bow.

      6. Last – The fist top I installed was the low density cheapy stock type vinyl material. This install was relatively painless. (This top lasted 5 years out in the Texas sun about the same time the rear window started to smoke over.)

      – The second top was the HD high density vinyl. This was a bear to work with and I never quite got it stretch and install correctly. But 7 years later the rear window and top are still in very good shape. Very little shrinkage (This top was manufactured by Royal Crown ? Royal something)

      The next top I install with be the stock type low density vinyl.

      I did buy the fisher body manual , I don’t recall it having a lot of useful information on convertible top installations.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Tack Strips for Bows

      I have a few questions:

      1. The top bows need new tack strips. APE and Year One sell universal tack strips that should fit some of the bows, but where do you find the ones that go in the last bow above the rear window and in the tack bars that attach underneath the rear well, holding the rear of the top to the body? They are different sizes…

      2. Any hints on installing the top would be appreciated…I have the Fisher Body manual which has a detailed instruction set, but other useful comments would be great!

      3. Should I flush the hydraulic fluid, or does it not go bad?

      4. What is the correct color to repaint the bows?

      A: I installed a new convertible top back in 1976 on my first 1969 Firebird. I didn’t have a clue what I was doing, had NO manual, and just took my time, total was around 24-25 hours. I repainted the bows, probably wrong then. I think they get a satin finish, likely 30 percent gloss, but I need to find my color charts to see if it’s listed for the top frame.

      For tack strips (this was before the hobby recognized these cars, and trim parts were mostly gone from the factory/dealer source), I went to an old Italian shoemaker and got scraps of the thick leather he used to make the heels and soles, and cut it into strips that fit, worked great!

      You probably don’t need to worry about the fluid, though.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Top Hydraulic Pump Restoration

      I am currently in progress of restoring the pump for my 1968 Convertable top. I have the pump back in great working order, and was wondering if anyone knows if it takes a certain hydraulic fluid, or if regular will work? Is there a recommended way to flush and fill the system when I go to put the pump back on?

      A: If I remember right, the Fisher Body Service Manual says to use Dextron II Automatic Transmission Fluid. This manual is available at most Firebird parts companies.

      As a side note, my system had brake fluid in it when I bought it, I had to change a cylinder once and didn’t want to flush and refill the system so I left it with brake fluid and it works fine. I hope there aren’t any long term affects to doing this.

      A: Dont use brake fluid in place of any other fluid i.e. ATF or hydraulic fluid, it will attack the rubber and break it down. Use brake fluid only in brake systems!

      A: I have been through this two different times, one time wrong, one time right. DO NOT USE STANDARD HYDRAULIC FLUID because it foams and is too viscous. It will burn out your pump motor! Use hydraulic jack fluid ( floor jacks etc.) that you will find in auto parts shops. I recommend that you purchase the kit that AMES performance engineering sells for doing this procedure. This kit consists of a Tupperware container, rubber hose, instructions and special hose end that pushes into the pump reservoir. It is a little expensive for what you get but it works well. If you have a fax number I can send you the instructions that came with my kit. You could probably put together the kit yourself.

      As far as flushing the old system, I believe that the only way to properly do this is to take apart the lines and stoke the cylinders. If you haven’t used the incorrect fluid yet I would just refill the system

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Top Replacement

      After checking with various shops about installing a conv. top on my 1968 Firebird Conv., I’m considering doing this myself. (just can’t see paying $400-$500 just for labor) Anyhow, I did a vinyl top before and it took a good day to do but wasn’t really that difficult. Any thoughts, suggestions on a conv. top ‘do-it-yourself’ project ? How about aby reference material for doing a conv. top ? Fisher Body Manual, Restoration Guides, Articles, etc. ?

      A: Yeah, I did one on my first 1969 Firebird back in ’76, spent a weekend doing it. No reference materials, just tackled it in almost complete ignorance, and it came out perfectly. Start at the rear, don’t be afraid to pull it tight as you attach it moving to the front. I’ll give you details later if you decide to try it. Keep in mind I’m no expert, and it’s been more than 20 years, but I did get some advice from the upholstery man my Dad was using then.

      A: I have a friend that has done several tops all GM cars with no training, self taught they all look and perform great, His advice to me be patient and save the old top for comparison and marking, get the fisher body manual has good directions, hope every thing works out well.

      A: I understand AMES sells a book on this matter. So far I’ve heard about……

      Fisher Body Manual AMES Conv. Top Book “Restoring Convertibles” Book (out of print ??)

      Personally, I would think the critical details for such a job would be….

      1. Measure carefully; recheck

      2. Use the correct Tools

      3. Make sure you have all required replacement components (good top, pads, tack strips, etc)

      4. Let the Top stretch for a few days before hand (warm)

      5. Put the Top on while its soft and warm (sunny day works best)

      6. Have a friend help

      7. Read all the reference material you can find; ask others who have done it.

      As with any restoration project, many tasks can be done yourself if you prepare and have patience.

      A: I am currently in the middle of replacing the convertible top on my 1968 Firebird.

      For reference manuals I am using the 1968 Fisher Body Service Manual and How to Restore Auto Upholstery by John Martin Lee (1994 – Motorbooks International Publishers and Wholesalers)

      I am installing a Crown vinyl top purchased from Classic Industries.

      I purchased the pads from Ames Engineering.

      I have run into one glaring problem in regards to the Fisher Body Service Manual. The manual says that you need to position the rear bow 13-3/16″ from the front of the rear bow to the center of the center bow. I carefully positioned my rear bow with spacer sticks and duct tape to the exact dimensions in the Fisher manual, installed the pads and trimmed them to the rear edge of the rear bow. Imagine my surprise when I attached the back curtain assembly to the trim stick, bolted the trim stick in place and found the top of the curtain about 2-1/2″ short of the rear bow!

      Either this particular replacement top is not an exact reproduction of the original top or the dimension given for F cars in the Fisher Manual are wrong.

      Anyway, I’ve purchased new pads and my plan is to mark the top, as outlined in the Fisher Manual, as to where it should line up with the rear bow; then install the top via the listing pocket and retainer; then position the rear bow in relation to the marks on the top and secure it again with the spacer sticks and duct tape.

      In spite of these setbacks I think it’ll turn out all right. I try at least once to do things myself on my car. For what installers charge around here (metro Detroit) I figure I can purchase and ruin three tops in attempted installations and still come out ahead. ‘Course a professional would get it done a LOT sooner than I will but this has been a pretty leisurely paced project.

      If anyone on the list has info about the missing 2-1/2″ in my dimensions I’d like to hear from you.

      A: When I replaced my top I ran into the exact same situation ( I also had to buy a second set of pads ). The key to getting the rear bow correct is to locate the seam properly on the rear window, and then position the bow so that it hits the notch that is cut in the top. If you don’t get this right, the seam will pull away from the edge where the rear most weatherstripping mounts.

      A: If you are going to do it yourself, here are my suggestions:

      1. take lots of measurements on where your top bows are now, measure from the header and draw a picture.

      2. take the old top off and keep it aside

      3. take a day to clean and paint up top bows and ensure tacking strips are OK

      4. wire the top bows in position measured in #1, make it strong wire and keep it tight.

      5. fit the rear window loosely to the rear top bow and lower tack strip (realize it may not be permanent.

      6. fit the top to rear top bow where it has its side tucks (no tacks in rear bow yet)

      7. wrap front of top around front header and get a general idea of fit, depending upon how top covers rear window and fit at 1/4 glass you may have to reposition rear top bow and this means refitting rear window.

      Once the rear top bow, lower tack strip and 1/4 glass fits the final step of cables and front header takes just a few minutes. My best advice is don’t be intimidated, just when things look like they will never finish(and there will be a point when it will), the last 75% goes extremely fast.

      I have found that on many new tops the slide-in top bow(middle bow) has the slide-in pocket mounted in the wrong spot, do not try to position your top with it.

      A: First, I do remember that there was a major difference in top quality when it came to comparing the 200 dollar (materials alone) top with the 400 or so dollar one. And since the labor to install is about the same for each (if not a bit more for the cheeper top since it does not fit as well) I strongly recomend getting the more expensive one.

      Also, before doing a top replacement it is a really good idea to go ahead and do a bunch of prep work that can only be done with the top off. these jobs include:

      Removing and stripping the frame, painting it fresh, fixing rustholes, installing new bushings (if you got’em) and new staple to areas, new weatherstrip, and making sure to get new padding with the new top. Once your frame is ‘restored’ it can be adjusted to fit perfectly with your windows before installing the canvas so that you end up with a perfect fit in the end. Oh yes, and if you have a ele. top- what a great time to clean and refill the pump!

      And, there is that ‘packagetray’ area material that can be replaced at this time too.

      So, when it comes to the labor, a good shop should be able to do it for 300-400 dollars. It really pays to have a pro do it because there are tricks to it and if you make one mistake, the top is wasted… go buy another one.

      I hope this info helps a little.

      A: I’ve got a 1968 350 conv. that had a severely dilapidated non-colormatching white vinyl top on it when I bought it. So the first thing I did was shop around for a new top. I also got some advice from my father-in-law who does professional-quality restoration on hot-rods and muscle cars in his spare time. He told me that despite the cost, have a professional top-installer or upholstery shop do the work. Doing it your self, even if your good, is a pain in the ass if you don’t do it all the time, and 9 times out of 10 the job will end up loose-fitting. I priced tops on the net and they varied from $250 for vinyl to $500 for canvas, and professional installation would almost double that. Despite not being originally available on the car, I had a black (original color) canvas StayFast top installed by a shop that only did convertible tops. The whole thing cost ~$850.00 installed, and I’d do it again in a second (the same place would have charged $500 for vinyl, installed). I couldn’t be happier with it. My car is a daily driver in Seattle, WA and despite the rain this winter, my interior has stayed tight and perfectly dry! Now I know that several of you are sticklers for originality, but I’ll put my canvas top next to any new vinyl and I’d bet that 9 out of 10 people on the street would say mine looks better. It really give the car a great look. Anyway, I realize opinions may vary. Good luck. Oh, and BTY, I was recommended against buying the split glass rear windows because the gasket that hold the two pieces of glass together wear out quickly, but I have no personal experience with them. Someone else on the list who has one may want to comment.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Windshield Header Molding

      Is the top of the front windshield on a 1969 convertible suppose to be chrome or painted a flat silver? (the part where the convertible top rests on). How do these get removed?

      A: …Starting in 1968, Federal Safety requirements changed the bright chrome plated Conv. Windshield Header Moldings to a ‘dull’ finish on half of the molding. (the side facing the driver). This was to cut down on sun glare. Some say the finish is a bead blasted, brushed finish. Others say it’s a silver spray on finish. I have NOS moldings that have a sprayed on dull finish. The repros available are all chrome plated; no dull finish. The moldings are held on by trim screws.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Convertible
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Dealer Technical Bulletins - Section 02 - Frame and Body (1)

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 1

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Dealer Technical Bulletins - Section 04 - Rear Suspension, Differential, Prop Shaft (1)

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 1

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Electrical (16)

      Q: “GEN” Dash Light On

      What could the problem be when my dash “GEN” light stays on all the time? In the last 2 weeks on a 1968 350 2bbl, I replaced the alternator with a Delco remanufactured unit and then the regulator went so I replaced it. Last week, only a day after the regulator was replaced, the “GEN” idiot ight began to blink on and off randomly. I let the car cool and check the connections to the alternator, the regulator, and the plug through the firewall that connects to the fuse box I believe. The “GEN” light stopped flashing but is on very dull.

      I took the alternator off and had it tested last night. It tests okay. I am not familiar with any test procedures for a regulator. I did buy a new one though and will try and put it in tonight. One odd thing I noticed last night. When I start the car, the “GEN” light comes on dull. HOWEVER, when I turn the ignition on, but don’t turn it all the way to start the car, none of the idiot lights come on any more. It used to be that if you turned the key left or right so it just opens the circuit for the battery to run (i.e. to listen to the radio), the TEMP, GEN and another light came on. I haven’t checked the fuse yet to see if the fuse for the dash lights is still good. But if the fuse were blown, why would the “GEN” light be on, as dull as it is. ANY CLUES???

      A: It’s possible that you have a faulty ground in your dash cluster and this is causing a “ground loop” through the GEN light. You can make a temporary ground with a clip lead (a test lead) or just a piece of wire and see if that cures the problem.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Backup Lights on a 1968

      I have a 1968 Firebird, 6 cylinder with 3 speed standard shift on the steering column. I’m trying to figure out how to adjust when the back up lights come on. I can’t find the sensor. Any ideas where it is?

      A: From the 1968 Pontiac Service Manual, pg 12-22:

      Back Up Lamp Switch

      ….(T)o adjust back up lamp switch use the following procedures and Fig. 12-27. (For auto, see neutralizer switch adjustment instructions).

      All Manual Transmission with COLUMN Shift

      1. Insert 0.090 gauge pin thru hole in switch body, and into hole in Drive tang.

      2. Set transmission gearshift lever in reverse position.

      3. Insert switch drive tang in shifter tube slot with tang touching R.H. edge of slot and assemble switch.

      4. Remove gauge pin.

      All Manual Transmission with FLOOR Shift

      1. Place lever in reverse position.

      2. Position switch so that plunger is fully depressed against lever.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ballast Resistor

      Does anybody know what the voltage going in and out of the ballast resister should be? I know I asked before but is a resistor wire going into the ballast resistor normal? Also our new resistor seems to get quite warm…is this normal when new? or always? The wiring going in and out seems fine. Also is anybody using an Accel supercoil? You know the big kinda boxy yellow one…does it have internal resistance? If so does that alter the requirement for an external ballast resistor or resistor wire?

      Here are my particulars…My Accel Supercoil has 1 ohm resistance so I’m assuming it has no internal resistance. With my ballast resistor in place and connected i have like 9.6 volts going in and only like 4.6 going out to the coil. But if I disconnect the ballast resistor I have 12.3 volts coming from the resistor wire. If I connect the resistor wire (coming from the ignition switch) to the ballast resistor but dont connect the wire from the ballast resister to the coil + I have 12.3 volts at BOTH sides of the ballast resistor. Then when I hook the wire from the resistor to the coil my voltage drops back to like 9.6 going in to the resistor and 4.6 coming out and the resistor gets quite hot. The ballast resistor itself has 1 ohm resistance across the terminals with nothing connected. Also the ballast resistor gets so hot that it actually smokes but the wiring seems fine on both ends

      A: You should NOT have BOTH a resistance wire AND a ballast resistor. I think our Firebirds (at least in 1969) used a resistance wire. If you have a coil with internal resistance, then you should NOT use an external resistor or resistance wire. If you want to know if you coil has an internal ballast resistor, measure the resistance across the coil. It should be 1.0-1.5 ohms if there is NOT an internal ballast resistance and about 4 ohms if there is.

      Information about your configuration (ballast wire/resistor/internal coil) and what the voltages should be at different places:

      First, you will always get battery voltage (12.3 in your case) at the end of the wire going to the coil when it is NOT connected. You could put a 1k resistor on the end and you’d still get battery voltage. This is because currect is not flowing and the Potential of 12.3 Volts is still there.

      Next, I’m assuming that when you took your voltage reading that you grounded the “-” side of the coil or made sure that the points were in contact, with the ignition in the “on” position but the car not running. If so, then your reading indicate that your resistor wire is about 0.6 ohms. That is just about what it should be. That being the case, I’m not sure why you have a separate ballast resistor at all. Does it look factory, like it aught to be there? If not, ditch it. Your 0.6 ohm resistor wire and 1 ohm coil will give you about 7.5 Volts to the coil (static) which is fine.

      As a side note, during cranking you should have full battery voltage to the coil to provide a “hotter” spark. This is accomplished either by a wire to the coil from the starter OR a separate wire from the ignition switch “start” terminal.

      DON’T STOP READING.

      Having said everything above, I just read the ACCEL catalog. It says:

      “NOTE: ACCEL 140001 Super Coils are supplied with a 0.85 ohm Ballast Resistor which must be used in conjunction with the vehicles original ballast resistor, if equipped”

      I think I remember you said you had a super coil. If you do and you’re using their ballast resistor, I’d call ACCEL and find out why it gets so hot and smokes. That or go back to a standard coil.

      A: GM didn’t use ballast resistors, they used resistance wire to the coil. The voltage at the coil should be about 9 volts. The yellow accel supercoils used an extra ballast resistor to lower that to 6 volts. Sounds like someone did a little creative wiring. Maybe they replaced the resistance wire to install a GM HEI distributor, then changed their mind and rather than find resistance wire, used a ballast resistor, plus the one for the super coil.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Okay where do I start at least once a year I have to replace one of the following. Resistor wire or ignition switch. Or starter solenoid period or coil. I used to use points. And kept having the same problem. More often. I changed my points too a pertronic electronic ignition. After replacing out the points my problem only happens once a year but it’s still happening any advice would be helpful.
      RJ67Firebird

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Brake Lights Stay On

      I have an annoying problem: I changed my master cylinder due to a leak. The operation was a complete success, with no extra parts left over! When I drive the car, and then stop, my brake lights are on. I’ll tap them, they go out and stay out. What’s up?

      A: Two possibilities. There is a return spring on the peddal and if it came off for some reason while you were replacing the master cylinder (or maybe it wasn’t on from before) then you are relying on the internal springs of the master cylinder to push your pedal all the way back and not quite making it.

      The other possiblility is that you just have to adjust the switch a little bit forward. It’s on the peddal assembly under the dash.

      A: It’s probably the plunger switch down under your dash.

      A: Have you checked your brake light switch on the pedal assembly? There is a switch under the dash that turns the lights on until the brake pedal come up high enough to contact the switch and interrupt the circuit. You will either need to adjust the switch down a bit to insure contact with the brake pedal, or you may need to move the brake pushrod to a higher hole on the brake pedal if the pedal isn’t coming up far enough to touch the switch.

      My guess is that since you can get the brake lights to go off by taping the pedal, it will require only a small adjustment of the switch to make things right.

      A: Are you talking about the brake lights on the back of the car or the brake warning light on the dash? Others have addressed the brake lights on the back so I won’t go there. If it’s the brake warning light then the problem is in you splitter valve below the master cylinder. Most likely, it air in the line causing it to go out of balance. If this is the case, you must bleed the brakes again to remove all air from the lines.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I had a similar problem and what I found was the bracket that holds the brake light switch was actually moving slightly as it had metal fatigue. I removed the brake light switch and used some JB Weld on the bracket to firm it up. Let it set for a day, bracket was now firm and then reinstalled brake switch. Adjusted the brake light switch so it was total depressed when brake was in resting position. Issue went away.

    • In regards to the previous post “Brake lights staying on or not working” I am going through the same issues. I noticed on my Camaro that the brake pedal moves left to right which indicates to me that the bushings in the brake arm assembly or worn. This is causing the brake arm not to center on the brake light switch (button) when the spring pulls the pedal back. I am going to attempt to adjust the brake switch for now until I investigate the bushing issue more. My brake light in the instrument panel stays on all the time too. I replaced the brakes, wheel cylinders and lines and bled the brakes twice. I will try a third time and maybe that will work.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q:
      Dash Printed Circuit Board

      Does anyone know where I can get shematics for the Dash Printed Circuit Board for a 1969 ?

      A: You can order a wiring diagram from Classic Industries, or from most of the other resto catalogs. They run about $7.00 and are about 20 pages in length.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Engine Compartment Wiring Diagram for 1968

      I’m in the middle of installing a new engine wiring harness. Would you Mine is attatched to the rear of the exhaust manifold on the passenger side. I feel this is not correct because the new wiring harness does not reach it in that position. The wiring harness that I’m replacing looks as if it was homemade so I can not use it as a referrence.

      A: I found a schematic in the 1968 Pontiac Service Manual.

      eng-harn

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fuel and Temperature Gauge Problems

      I have an inoperative fuel gauge ( always full ) and temperature gauge ( always cold ); the oil pressure and alt gauges are both operational. Several “shadetree mechanics” tell me the problem may be in an improperly grounded rally cluster metal case. I recall that the wiring harness plug has a green wire that is attached to the metal case with a sheetmetal screw. I thought that was a ground wire. However one fellow was talking about grounding the unit/case by way on the metal strip that is behind the high-beem indicator light in some way ??? I’m lost !!! What advice can be offered. I’ve removed the gauges several times before and may have not gotten a solid ground.

      A: There are actually multiple “grounds” on the rally cluster. When I get home tonight, I pull the wiring diagrams and check out where the fuel gauge and temp gauges derive their grounds. Is it possible that the problem is not in the rally cluster itself, but in the fuel and temperature sending units themselves? Do you have an ohm meter that you can use to check the inputs from these sending units?

      I know from experience that disconnecting the wire at the sending unit in the gas tank will cause the fuel guage to read full. There is also a ground wire on the fuel guage sending unit which tends to get rusty and break off after a few years. If this happens, you will see the same problem – fuel guage reading full.

      Concerning the temperature guage, one simple test of the temp guage is to hook up an ohm meter to the temp sending unit located on the intake manifold when the car is cold. Take take a reading. Then start the car and allow it to come up to operating temp. The value on the meter, (the measure of resistance in the sending unit) should change as the engine warms up. If it doesn’t move, you have a bad sending unit, or the wrong sending unit. I’ve seen a case where someone installed a temp sending unit that was designed for the “idiot light cluster” instead of the rally gauge cluster. The temp sending unit for the idiot cluster is a switch, the temp sending unit for the rally cluster is esentially a variable resister based on temp. If the readings change, then it is a safe assumption you have a rally guage sending unit and it is operating normally. The next step would be to then check if you get the same reading at the plug which goes into the back of the rally guage cluster. The temp wire is the green wire going into pin 2 of the connector.

      Did your car come stock with a rally guage cluster? If not, the problem may lay in the fact the the “pin-out” for the rally guage cluster is different than the pin-out for the idiot light cluster. I can provide the pin-out for the connector if you need it. (Note: See ‘Replace an original Dash cluster’ for more information)

      A: I pulled the wiring diagrams on the rally guage cluster and wiring harnesses last night. Before I get into the gory details, I’m not sure how familiar you are with basic electrical circuits so here is what you need to understand about them before you can understand and diagnose your problem.

      The electrical circuit(s) in the car are 12 volt, DC. That means, that every circuit must have a complete connection from the positive side of the battery to the negative side of the battery. The negative side of the circuit is usually refered to as “ground” and in most cars, (your firebird included), the negative side of the battery is connected to the frame/chasis of the car esentially making every metal part of the car the negative side of the battery.

      Now, in reference to your gauge problem:

      The first thing to keep in mind is that your problem is probably NOT being caused by ANY missing “ground”s on the guage cluster itself. Why? Two reasons. 1) The ground connections on the rally guage cluster are ONLY used for the instrument lighting, turn signal indicators, and high beam indicator circuits. 2) The “ground”s for the gauge circuits, (oil preasure, temp, and fuel guage), are at the “sending units”, (the ammeter is a completely different type of circuit and totally independent). However, I say “probably not” because I don’t have the specifics on the internals of the gauges themsleves so I can’t say if the gauges use any “reference ground” source.

      The way the cluster and gauge circuits are designed is that the fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge, temperature guage, and brake indicator light, ALL share the same +12V feed, which comes into the cluster on pin 10 of the connector via two PINK wires. Since the oil pressure gauge is working, then you have the +12V into the cluster on these pink wires AND any possible “refernce ground” source for the gauges is probably there as well.

      Since you have +12V to the gauges, that means that one of four problems exist for the fuel gauge and the temperature guages. (They will have to be diagnosed seperately since the problem with the fuel gauge circuit might not be the same as the problem with the temp gauge circuit.) The possible causes for the malfunctioning gauges are: 1) a break in the wire from the gauge to the sending unit, 2) a bad sending unit, 3) a bad ground at the sending unit, or 4) the gauge itself is bad.

      To diagnose the fuel gauge, here is what I would do. Locate where the rear wiring harness, (the one from the tail lights) meets the main harness. (Starting in the trunk, follow the wiring harness from the tail lights up to the where the rear harness connects to the main harness. There will be a seven wire connector at this point. Disconect the two harnesses. (The TAN wire is fuel gauge circuit). Working with the connector coming from the FRONT of the car, take a piece of wire and make a connection from the TAN wire in that connector to a GOOD ground, (a clean metal part on the body.) Now sit in the driver’s seat and turn the key to the on position. No need to start the car.) IF the gauge and the TAN wire from the gauge are good, the fuel gauge should immediately drop to EMPTY. (Don’t leave the key turned on for more than 5 – 10 seconds). If the gauge doesn’t drop to EMPTY, then the problem is either the gauge itself, or the tan wire from the guage cluster connector to the connetor you currently have your grounding wire attached. If the fuel gauge drops to EMPTY, then you are bummin’ because you will have to drop the tank to get at the fuel sending unit. There is either a break in the TAN wire in the rear harness, a broken ground wire on the sending unit, (the most likely source of the problem), or a bad sending unit itself.

      The temperature guage is a little easier to test. The temp sending unit is located on the intake manifold on the top left front right near the thermostat housing. Disconnect the wire from the sending unit and run a length of wire from that connector to a nice clean ground on the engine. The sending unit wire should be dark green by the way. Once again, sit in the driver’s seat and turn the key to the on position. The temp guage should immediately jump to HOT side of the gauge. If it does, you have a bad sending unit. If it doesn’t, then either the dark green wire from the sending unit to the gauge cluster is broken or the temperature guage itself is broken.

      Keep this in mind, the idea is to complete a circuit from the positive side of the battery to the negative side of the battery by going through the gauge in cluster AND the sending unit. Any break in the circuit along the way and the gauge quits working. The positive side of the ciruit is at the gauge cluster and the negactive side of the circuit is at the sending units.

      I hope this helps. Good luck in your diagnosis

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • This has been helpful, but while I am now more informed I am still a rookie. My fuel gauge isn’t working either. I will test the from the rear connection forward as describe. But if I need to drop the tank and check there, what exactly do I test and how? Thanks.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gauge Conversion for 1967-1968

      I’m getting ready to convert from idiot lights to a gauge cluster on my 1968 conv. I’ve been to the FAQs and there’s a lot of good related stuff, but I do not see a wiring diagram for the gauges. Did I miss it?

      A: Chip as you can see theres lots of discusion on gauge conversions. 1967 and 8 pose a big problem in that the pinout is different on the dash connector. However regardless of what you hear,its not as simple as changing a few pins around. Sure you can get the oil and water to read, but to get the ammeter to work you will have to rework the harnesses all the way to the voltage regulator. This will mean a new forward lamp harness as well as a dash harness. There are extra wires in the rally gauge setup that the idiot light ones dont have. You could redo the lamp harness and add wiring to the bulkhead connector , change the pinout and add wiring to the dash harness. OR buy the correct harness(s). Any way you go its not as easy as changing speedo /dash assembly. 69s are a different story… bout time they wised up.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: How do I hook up my reverse lights

      I have a question regarding my car’s backup lights… I have a coulumn shift automatic, and I am unsure which switch is connected to the backup lights. All I know is that they do not work. My neutral safety switch does work though. If anyone has a diagram, or some pictures of where this switch is, please send them to me. Thanks

      A: They are both in the same switch housing, the purple wires are the neutral safety, the thinner wires (I forget the colors) are the back-up connection. Check power in and out, wiggle the shifter while you do that. Jump the connector to see if the BU lights actually work!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Identifying the Correct Dash Cluster

      I am at a loss as to what is the proper gauge cluster for my bird. The build sheet for my car calls for a clock (which is nonexsisteant) and gauges. I have a console and an automatic TH400, what could be the configuration. The build sheet is for my car, I checked the numbers.There is a large hole in the front of the console, I am guessing that this was for the clock. any information would be greatly appreciated.

      A: The only “hole” should be some what oblong with two mounting holes, a large hole indicates butchering by previous owner. The rally guages are available at major parts shows [67/68 differ] not cheap! The wire harness would show additional connectors designating that car had ralleys. The under dash 3 guage was available at that time, but is even more rare.

      A: The optional clock was mounted on the console, ahead of the shifter. If you’ve got a hole, that’s it. I’d start looking around for one! They aren’t too hard to find, but they can be pricey if you want one that actually works. You might try checking out Hemmings, or the Ames Performance website. Good luck!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Loose Ground

      I have a 1969 coupe, that has a pecuiliar problem. Whenever the headlights are on, the turn indicators & hi beam indicator are dimly lit. When the turn signals are engaged,(either direction) they all blink. Furthermore, the gas guage indicator drops as soon as the lights are engaged. If you turn the rheostat on the headlight switch all the way down (where you can’t see the lights), the gas reads normally, and the the turn signal indicators work properly. I have replaced the headlight switch and the dimmer switch. I have not been able to locate a wiring diagram of the car, particularly the instrument panel, short of searching for an original service manual, (and shelling out the big bucks for one.) If anyone has dealt with this type of problem, or happens to have the wiring diagrams, I would greatly appreciate it.

      A: I had the very same problem on my 69. It turned out to be bad dash ground. The dash gauges/lights are grounded through a thin metal strip that is sandwiched between the radio and the dash. If the radio has been removed or changed or if the connection is not tight, your dash lights/gauges will go nuts. I corrected mine by adding a ground jumper from the back of the gauge cluster to the metal dash at a convenient location.

      A: The turn signal indicators and gas gauge are likely source by the same circuit that sources the cluster lamps. When the dash lamps are at the brightest intensity, most of the current is diverted toward the shorted lamp and starving the turn indicator (flasher which requires significant current to operate) and gas gauge. This is why the turn signals stop working. Moving the rheostat to the dim the cluster lamps removes the short and current is available to turn indicators/gas gauge causing them to work correctly.

      A guess is that there is a low resistance shorted lamp on the cluster assembly. The short should identify itself by excessive heat. Feel around the back of the cluster for a spot that appears warmer then the rest. If you don’t find it, remove cluster lamps (instrument illumination only) one at time until all have been checked. If all the lamps are removed and the problem seems to remedy as each lamp is removed, there is a low resistance short in the main feed to the rheostat. If all the lamps are removed and the problem persists, there is short between the rheostat and the circuit card on the back of the cluster.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Is it possible some bad connection behind the dash can cause my car to die? I’ve been thinking something is going on with my ignition switch and/or the ignition lock cylinder too, Is there a connection?

    • My tailgates weren’t working, but the brake lights were. Had the harness replaced. For years I’ve had an issue when I turn on my headlights the gas gauge goes down and my blinkers glow. When I press on the dash it goes away. I realized that I’ve been driving it for over a year with one screw holding up my rattling dash cover. I found the screws in my console and tightened them in. The problem went away, but the next night I couldn’t start it, and it kept dying. They seemed to have come a little loose and I’m afraid to mess with it. When I’m at a stop it seems close to dying again. There’s also a slight miss. I just had my car with my mechanic for a week and he says everything is flawless and it wouldn’t die for him. So tonight was my first drive and it’s idling low which I’ll just have set a little higher. This problem started after I put the screws in, but both my mechanics seem to think there’s no connection. Can anyone help please?

    • Hi All,
      I have a 67 400HO –All four headlights don’t work. Front parking/turn signals work fine. Since I’m assuming that the headlights are on the same circuit as the front parking lights, could it be the switch? Pulling it out closes the circuit on the parking lights on the first “step” in the switch, and all the way out to the second step should be the headlights. But nothing happens. Thoughts?

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Power Window Problem

      Okay Guys, I need your help. Yesterday, the power windows on my 1968 Convt quit. I tried looking for a fuse in the fuse block that handles the power windows. None there specific to power windows. On 12-41 of the 1968 Service manual (the tan one, not maroomn one) it shows a circuit breaker tied in with the horn circuit. Where is this circuit breaker?? is it the fuse?? cuz the fuse for the horn appears good. Help!!! It’s damn hot in a convertible with the windows up

      A: There is a Circuit Breaker under the Driver’s side Cowl-Trim Panel (kick panel). There is also a Junction Block on the Firewall near the Fuseblock and one on the engine side of the Radiator Support (passenger side). One of these is for a conv. so try checking that first. If all looks ok, you might have to replace the motor unit.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Rear Tail Light Problem

      I am having a lot of problems with my tail lights. All the problems started after one of my bulbs burnt out and I tried to replace them. Any ideas?

      A: I guess I better go back to lightbulb school, or get glasses. I did not realize that the wrong bulb in the wrong socket would make the light do so many weird things. But as always, thanks to your suggestions, I solved it half way through ripping th dash apart.

      A: Let me guess, you found an 1156 single where an 1157 double filament should have been?

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Replace an Original Dash Cluster

      Does anyone know if it is possible to replace an original Dash cluster with telltale lamps with a Ralley Gauge cluster without big changes in the wiring of the dash. I hope somebody has some info on this.

      A: Information can be found in the Interior F.A.Q.s – Dash: https://FirstGenFirebird.org/f-a-q/interior/dash/

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Starter Wire

      Does the purple 12 ga wire from the wiring harness to the starter go to the “R” terminal or the “S” terminal on the starter? and what is the other terminal for?

      A: The 12 gauge purple wire goes from the starter switch, through the firewall plug harness, then down to the “S” terminal of the starter. The “S” terminal serves to actuate the starter SOLENOID windings. When the solenoid pulls the starter drive to engage the starter, it also closes a couple contacts via a disc on the solenoid assembly. This energizes the starter motor windings and turns the starter. The other contact that is made with this disc is the “R” terminal (Relay). This terminal supplies a “direct” path to the ignition coil positive terminal while the starter is energized. The reason for this dedicated path is to maximize coil current while the starter is “taxing” the system, i.e., creating a voltage drop. When the engine starts and the starter switch is released, the “R” terminal is disconnected. The ignition coil then continues to be energized via the ignition switch loop and the resistance wire. I have diagrams if you need them.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Wire/Solenoid Problem

      After driving my 1968 on the highway when I pull into my neighborhood, the car starts to cut out a little. If I stop the car, many times it won’t start until it cools down, and when it does start, it runs very poorly, cuts out and dies. I started looking at the set up and the selenoid is very close to my headers. Also, the wire running to the selenoid is potentially touching the pipes. I plan on redoing the wire, but what else could it be. Is the selenoid just getting too hot and how about the poor running?

      A: The wire and solenoid running too close to the exhaust will cause starting problems. However, after starting it should not affect the running characteristics of the motor unless you’ve burned through the wire insulation and it’s shorting out. I would check the positive battery very carefully. Also, check the negative cable and make sure it is making a solid connection to the motor. Also check the gas line and make sure it is not too close to the exhaust. You could be boiling the fuel and creating vapor lock.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Electrical
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - 400 Specific (4)

      Q: 400 Engine Block Code for 1967

      I’m trying to decipher a code cast into the block on my 1967 firebird. The code is located near to where the distributor fits into the block. I think it is the cast date of the block but I would like to know for sure. The code is 86133. (As best as I can tell).

      I know this isn’t the sequential build number, (serial number), of the block since that is locate on the front on the block on the passenger side of the car.

      I’d appreciate any information you can provide.

      A: That is the blank block casting number. It’s like a part number. According to my info the whole number is 9786133. This denotes a 1967 400 cid block. I got the info from a book called Pontiac Muscle car performance 1955-1979 by Pete McCarthy

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: 400 Rebuild Suggestions

      i have 1968 firebird i restored last year. I’m get ready to rebuild my 400 and looking tricks and tips for a pontiac motor. can you help me

      A: The following is some helpful information on properly building a street strip Pontiac 400. If built properly, the engine will make 450+ HP with commonly available parts.

      BLOCK:
      Start by boring the block .060 to get max cubes (413), hone to a #625 Sunnen finish with .003 piston clearance and minimum deck it. Leave, or add the scallops at the intake valve side of the bore to unshroud the valve. Make sure the main bearing saddle alignment is + -.001 or better. A 2 bolt block is ok providing you use studs. Remove *all* the casting flash in the lifter valley and re-tap/deburr the whole block. Don’t forget to tap the oil galleries for threaded plugs, drill an .042 hole in the right rear plug for dist gear cooling and chamfer the oil filter block and oil pump holes nice and big. Take your rotary file and elongate the oil return hole in the front of the block down to the valley floor for immediate drainage to the pan, there are others along the sides between the lifters if you feel energetic. Do *not* scrimp and try to save money on the block! You get what you pay for so use a competent machine shop!

      When cleaning your freshly-machined block for assembly use *hot* water and dish soap, a *steel* rifle-cleaning rod will work great for the oil passages, a 12 ga. shotgun brush for the lifter galleries and a 9mm for all others. After cleaning soak the block with WD-40, wipe the cylinders, you will see more blackness on you *paper towls*, clean again with soap and hot water using a pressure nozzle. If you have an air compressor blow dry the block and coat the cylinders immediately with oil.

      CRANK:
      Get an early 350 crank, have it magnafluxed for cracks, heat treated (case hardened), shot-peened and straightened. Grind it -.010 on the mains, offset grind the rod journals .015 (more stroke), you’ll need to go -.020 undersize to get the offset. Cross-drill the crank and lightly chamfer the rod oil-holes, chamfer the main oil-holes in a tear-drop shape in the direction of rotation, just a small chamfer will do. Micro polish it, since it is heat-treated it will polish nicely. Run .002 clearance on the mains.

      The reason for using the 350 crank is that it is lighter and has thinner crank throws. You can also use a late 400 crank as it is a similar casting. Avoid very late 400 cranks as they have a different flange. The lighter crank will reduce your rotating weight and rev faster under load. If you anticipate super-high rpm, you may want to “knife-edge” the crank for even less weight and less resistance.

      Before installing the crank clean it just as you did the block, they are covered with powdered metal after grinding.

      ***To use this crank you must also do the following:

      PISTONS:
      This is an area that I will hold back on the tricks slightly. If you *must* know more, private e-mail will do.

      You will have to reduce the weight of the *forged* 400 pistons, you can machine some off the back-side of the dome, or machine or drill holes in the pin boss area from the bottom. Another way is to use thin walled tool steel pins, they are fairly inexpensive. Use moly-filled rings *only* with the Sunnen #625 finish. Ring end-gap is .014 top and 018 2nd.

      RODS:
      You *must* upgrade your rods to at least the ’73-’74 SD or preferably Carrillo or any other reputable racing rod as you will be revving this thing to 7000+ rpm easily. If you use factory rods you will have to remove most of the small-end pad to get it light enough to balance correctly with the 350 crank. Run .002-.0025 clearance. If you can afford it, use racing bearings. Grooved uppers on the crank. Torque rods by stretch to +.005 to .008.

      OIL PUMP:
      Use a Milodon 455 H.O. pump and tack-weld the pickup in place. I suggest removing the cover-plate phillips srews, loctite them and use an impact-driver to re-install them.

      WINDAGE TRAY:
      The stock ’65-’73 Pontiac 4/5 windage tray will work fine, if you can find a full-length one use it.

      Take a cut-off disk and cut 2 square openings in the end troughs and 1 long slot in the bottom-center trough of the tray. Note the position of the end-pairs of rods above the tray, cut your square end-slots exactly below them. The two end slots should measure about 2.5″ x 2.5″ and the center slot 2.5″ x approx. 8″. When you make your end cuts on each slot, continue 1/4″ past the side cuts, this will allow you to bend a flange downward along both sides. You can set the tray on the edge of something and tap the flange down with a hammer, the metal is very soft so it bends easily. Find a piece of course perforated or expanded metal, cut it to size and form the same radius as the tray. Tack weld the 3 pieces in between the flanges and on the ends.

      This modification will allow oil escaping from the crank to be blown directly into the pan and keep oil from splashing up onto the spinning crank, its good for 10-15 hp.

      CAM:
      Call Bob Cook at Competition Cams and go over your proposed setup with him, he is very experienced with Pontiacs and helps many a racer with the proper cam, etc. He is *realistic* so be prepared, he won’t let you over-cam your engine, no matter how nasty you want it. His # is; 800 999-0853.

      HEADS:
      Any big valve, early Pontiac head will work as long as it has 2.11″ int and 1.77″ ex valves and screwed-in rocker studs. Exceptional D-port heads would be 16, 12, 13, 62 and 48. The 62’s and 16’s should be fairly easy to find. These heads have 72cc chambers and should yield a 9.7-10:1 compression ratio, which will allow you to run a fairly radical cam effectively.

      Heads, more than anything are an area that will determine how much hp your engine makes. If your cores are rusty, remove the freeze-plugs and have them acid-dipped. Start by installing new bronze guides and hardened exhaust valve seats for use with unleaded gas. Since the seats will have to be blended into the port, now is a good time to do some porting.

      On a street engine do *not* fully port the heads! You want some turbulence in the port to keep the fuel/air mixture atomized, thus keeping your engine from loading up. The best street port-job that will wake-up your Pontiac is simply to open up the “bowl” area under the valve and blend back into the port-runner. Try and keep each port relatively close in volume, don’t get carried away removing material! Just blend the seat into the bowl/runner and polish. Use some “Dykem” machinist’s dye, or if not available use spray paint around the intake ports, install an intake gasket and snap the plastic locators in place. Scribe a line on the head where the ports are mis-matched and open them up with a *large-diameter* rotary file and blend 3/4″-1″ into the port. Leave the gasket on during this procedure (taped down and numbered) to insure a perfect match.

      Minimum mill the heads if necessary and do a good multi-angle valve job. The spring umbrellas can be discarded, make sure you use spring dampners to reduce friction and heat build-up in them. If possible find a 1 piece intake valve for peace of mind, at present I’m not aware of anyone making a 1 piece exhaust valve for a Pontiac.

      A good valve cover to use is a late baffled cover. You can spot them in the boneyard by the “8” dimpled spot welds on the surface. These covers have “fingers” that channel oil onto the rocker-balls. The next-best would be the bolt-on baffles that came on the 455 H.O. and the like. Poly-Locks would interfere with these however, you would have to use lock-nuts and hardened washers.

      Do not use factory head gaskets, they are too thick and will add several cc’s to your chamber volume. Do use head studs if you can afford them, especially if you are planning to run nitrous.

      INTAKE MANIFOLD:
      Use a torker or preferably, a Doug Nash. I have a friend who has a couple of ’em, and a 750 Holley with what ever thickness carb-spacer your hood will allow. Third choice would be a gasket-matched early stock manifold with the #7 runner opened up to relieve the throttle bracket bolt-boss protruding into the port.

      IGNITION:
      Run an MSD #8563 distributor, 6AL box #6420, Blaster coil #8202 and Soft Touch Rev Control #8738 (or 2 Step Rev Control #8739). Use the biggest plug-wires you can find and stock heat-range AC plugs gapped at .035. Experiment with the plugs in each hole while the heads are off to get the electrode pointing down toward the piston on as many as possible. (or you can mark the plugs for later installation).

      Timing curves vary with each application, a general rule is to keep it at 34-38 degrees total and don’t get wild on the street regardless of what you’ve read in the magazines. Getting it “all in” by 1800 rpm will only rattle and ping. Keep that figure at around 4000 rpm.

      HEADERS:
      If you can find a decent set of 4-tube headers that aren’t a nightmare to install and maintain use them. I recommend 3-tube “Tri-Y” headers because of their ease of installation and room, they will also make lots of torque at a very low rpm. Always use a cross-over tube on the way back to the mufflers and slightly smaller tube at the muffler exit.

      FLYWHEEL and BALANCING:
      If you run a 4-speed use a “neutral” aluminum flywheel and internally balance the engine. That will give you a softer launch without a lot of tire spin and will rev quicker.

      The stock Pontiac dampner works fine, it is a waste of money to replace it, just make *sure* you torque it to 160 ft. lbs.

      NITROUS:
      It is better to build a “hot” engine and add mild nitrous, than to build a mediocre engine and cram it with the “happy juice” trying to make power. The result will surely be a pile of scrap iron, empty wallet and a severely bruised ego.

      ———

      Well, these are the basics as I see it that will give you an 11 second car provided you have the chassis for it. If you run slicks, the right gears (4.33-4.88) and a race-prepared TH350 and have the Chassis extremely dialed in, I would put $$$ on a 10 sec run. 🙂

      All this costs plenty of $$$, but take your time and shop prices, it will be worth it. This info is based on my many years of building Pontiac engines.

      Happy Hunting!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air and 400

      Some History, 400 Specs, and Ram Air Information.

      A: I owned a 1968 convertable, ram air, and campaigned it as pure stock on the drag strips a while.

      I had contacts in Pontiac engineering and was told that when Delorian was approached with the idea of a 160MPH car he said OK, but it has to be “safe”. That was the context of the trouble GM was having over the Corvair and “unsafe as any speed”. So a few specific changes were made that you may know, but didn’t mention. The rear spring shackles have triple welds. That is, they laid down two more over the origional one. The front end wishbones were lengthened longitudinal to the car. I think the rear attach point was 13 inches behind the axle. Gives you an awful lot of strength. None of this was on the Camaro or 350 for that matter. Exclusive to the 400. The Ram Air engine was made to hold together up to 8000 rpm. Special anti-pumpup lifters. But the rev limit was 5100, only because oil would accumulate under the valve covers faster that it could drain down via gravity. I blew a valve cover once, so point proven.

      You may also have a problem with sustain high revs getting enough fuel. The problem is the float valve opening is too small. You could substitute the 1/8d. seat and float from the Buick Roadmaster and pretty much eliminate the problem. I also intalled an electric pump at the fuel tank as a booster. don’t know if it was really necessary, but it couldn’t hurt. No econo car this. At full song, I could actually watch the gas guage move – and high test at that. Four 1/4 mile runs looked something like 5 gallons. Street mileage with the 4.11 rear axle looked like about 8mpg. After I put back the standard rear (3.08) it “Jumped” to about 12. Horsepower is BTUs and BTUs are CCs of gas. I also put in the Corvette logrithmic throttle linkage. That gave you only up to 1/2 throttle until the last 1/8 inch then punched in the rest. That made it more drivable on the street. Before in the rain, it was almost impossible to not break the rear end loose when starting up. In effect, you drove around on the front barrels only, unless you really wanted to turn loose the ponies. With the 3.08, I did take it to 165. It redlined at 150, but the short blast into orbit was safe enough, provided you backed off quickly. The acceleration up convinced me there was plenty left. Turbulence was pretty rough. Made the ride a bit like a speedboat in chop. Needed better aerodynamics. I figure the 98 reprizes probably are better in that regard. Kind of fun picking on “Whale Tails”, but be a bit more respectful of Ferrari’s and HemiCuda’s. The RamAir had a special cam with more overlap and .100 more lift. To control that, they doubled the valve springs. You have to do that because the valve cam ramps are forced into becoming pretty severe. That’s a big part of the reason why just adding the ram air intake to the standard 400 doesn’t give you the hammer. Under standard conditions the RA intake does add about 15 HP though from volumetic efficiency conciderations. Hope some of this is helpful to provide a bit different dimension and understanding.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sport Option

      I have seen the 400 engine refered to as the “400 Sport Option” in a couple references and the 400 front bumper emblem drawing. Was this only for the 400?

      A: Actually, the “sport” reference was not the actual designation for the 400 option. I did this sketch quite awhile ago and probably borrowed “sport” from some reference in a magazine and/or older GM Parts Catalog. I do believe in some factory literature (Parts Books?) there was/is a reference to this option as the “400 Sport Option”. Then again, I could be wrong. Either way, the point here is that the “400” option consisted not only of a 400 engine but appearance items as well…. Chrome Grill Moldings, Frt. Bumper ‘Crest’ Emblem, “400” emblems on the Hood and Deck-Lid, Redline Tires, Chrome Engine Trim, Dual Exhaust, 4Bbl Carb, firmer shocks/springs.

      A: You are correct in the reference to a “400 Sport Option”. It is mentioned throughout the parts catalog and even in the accessory catalog.

      However in the accessory groups is a separate heading of “SPORT OPTIONS” which includes all Tempest Sprints, Firebird Sprints,Firebird 350,Firebird HO(350)and Firebird 400. Since the engine options are also listed in a separate category it excludes all of the Firebird models listed above.The only engine option that is listed for Firebird is the 400 HO. What this would lead one to believe is that all of the 5 specific models of Firebird except the base 1 bbl OHC-6 were considered to be “Sport Options”. I think this was abbreviated to eliminate confusion to include only the “400” option.

      A: The sport option was referenced in the 1968 Pontiac Sales Manual used in each showroom: 1968 Pontiac Sales Manual – Sales Price Index

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - Carburetor (12)

      Q: 350 2bbl Build-up

      I am trying to figure out the best way to get performance out of my 350 2bbl.

      1. Whant is the best Intake
      2. what would ba a good carb.
      3. What would e the Biggest cam I could use with a stock valve train
      4. How much can I mill the heads

      The reason for this is to keep the stock motor and for the Sleeper look with April gold paint and Ivy gold Interior!!

      A: The 350 2 bbl buildup has been discussed at length both here and on www.classicalpontiac.com, I suggest getting a cold one and do some reading. Just go to www.classicalpontiac.com, click on QandA, then try BOTH archive #6 and the current QandA and search the title for “350”.

      Also, I reccomend going to http://www.classicfirebird.com/hand/hand.html and reading the complete series of articles by Jim Hand.

      The best “peformance” from you engine varies depending on your goals for the car, so it would be best to give more detail about what you want to do with it, from a quiet easy to drive and mild mannered street machine to a lumpy idle, no low end torque, race engine.

      Also, I’m always an advocate of following this sequence when building up a car.

      1. Decide on some general goals for the car. Why? Because your car will have the best “performance” when all components are matched up well and working in harmony.

      2. Tune, Tune, Tune. Why? Because you’ll need to learn how to do that well anyway when you’ve built your “ultimate” engine, and you can often squeek a lot more performance out of your current engine, for almost no money.

      3. Start with everything EXCEPT the engine. Why? Because to make the most of your car you will need to do this anyway, and sometimes this may be all you want/need. Start with rear end gears (remember, matched to your goals), tires, and transmission/torque converter.

      4. Now do your engine stuff…….

      Finally, here is the very, very short version of answers to your questions…assuming a “normal” streetable car.

      * 1967-72 Intake
      * Quadrajet
      * Duration wise no physical limitation. Lift around .450 General consensus is no more duration than 214/224 at .050 but I have no personal experience with cams this big in a 350, and some people run bigger ones and are happy.
      * If virgin, .060 is all you can go. This will take 12 cc from the chambers.

      There are caveats to almost all of these answers. Again, a good search of the QandA on classicalpontiac.com will expose all of the details.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Adjusting Idle Fuel Mixture

      The idle fuel mixture seems to be too rich. I have fiddled with the two idle screws on the bottom of the Q-Jet carb but it still runs too fat. Stinks up the neighborhood. Is there a systomatic way of trying to lean out the idle rather than me just turning screws.

      A: The mixture screws are the only control for idle fuel mixture.The carb’s main jets control the mixture the rest off the time.The idle circuit is metered through the main jets,then through some calibrated restrictions which are difficult to modify. Changing the main jets will have no measurable effect on the idle mixture.I have found though,that sometimes people think the mixture is too rich when they smell unburned fuel coming out the exhaust and the problem is actually that it’s too lean causing poor idling/misfiring and the unburned fuel smell is from the misfiring.Obviously you want to check for vacuum leaks,timing,dwell (if you have points) etc.Lastly,a high mileage engine may emit a lot of unburned fuel from lack of cylinder sealing even though it seems to run well.Just some food for thought.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Carburetor – Converting From 2 BBl to 4BBL

      I’m converting my 1968 2 BBL to a 4 BBL EDELBROCK Performer 600. I’m up to the point of making connections to the carb (linkage, fuel line, air cleaner, vacuum lines). I have the following questions (I know several of you have done this).

      Note: Bare in mind that the article in the Jan.99 issue of Car Craft covers a 4bbl Qjet to 4bbl Edelbrock swap. The article is a little lean on details in any case.

      1. The carb didn’t come with any linkage parts or documentation (I bought it used). The original accelerator cable doesn’t reach the throttle points on the carb using the stock bracket. Any suggestions on how to hook this up?

      2. The fuel line originally bolts to the front of the stock carb. Now it “routes” to the right side of the carb. and requires an inline fuel filter. I bought a Specter glass filter. Are there any kits for hooking up to the stock line or do I need to make my own.

      3. I also installed the Edelbrock Performer intake. What’s the best point for connecting the vacuum advanced and PVC valve (do I even need a PVC valve)? On the 2 BBL setup, there was vacuum point on the intake connected to a port below the throttle butterfly. Is it still needed?

      4. The stock air cleaner had an air breather tube connector to the top of the right valve cover. Is this still needed, or can I cap it off.

      5. What do I do with the large ports at the top of the Edelbrock carb. Do I cap them off?

      A: Q1: You will need to get an aftermarket bracket. It will bring the cable closer to the throttle lever on your carb. The Edelbrock catalog shows a number of linkage accessories that might be helpful.

      http://www.edelbrock.com/

      You may need to fabricate something for your kickdown switch. Maybe using parts from your 2bbl carb.

      Q2: Edelbrock has a fuel line kit (#8135) that consists of a rubber hose, some fittings,a filter, and clamps. In addition, you will most likely need a banjo fitting (#8089) to allow clearance for a low profile air cleaner. There are no hard line kits. You will have to make your own hard lines if desired. Tube bending and flairing can be fun! If you use a rubber line, route it away from heat sources to avoid percolating you fuel, or fire danger.

      Q3: If the manifold does not have a vacuum fitting, then there are three provisions on the carb for vacuum. Looking at the carb from the front, there is a large port in the center of the base. This is your PCV port. This is critical to keep crankcase pressure under control so that you don’t get oil blowby at the rings. To the right of this is a smaller fitting. This is a full time vacuum port. To the left (I think) is a ported (part time) vacuum port. Most distributors use this port but you must verify that this is the type of vacuum needed by you. Cap off the unused port so that you won’t have a vacuum leak.

      Q4: 2 options. Get rid of the tube and put a breather on the valve cover opening. Or knock out the plug at the bottom of the aftermarket air cleaner, get a fitting (from any performance section of your parts store) for the hose and route it there. If you use a stock (4bbl) air cleaner, then use the hose as in stock configuration.

      Q5: I can’t recall their function. I’ll check my user manual. You might also contact Edelbrock on this.

      A: Any 4bbl air cleaner will work as long as the carb neck is the same (most are universal). Look for one that the intake neck is on the same side as your current cleaner. Look at a second gen firebird, should be close. be careful the one you pick isn’t too tall. Compare with the original and if taller, close hood SLOWLY to be safe. If you chose well, most people will not have a clue it’s not original. This would get you by until you can find an original.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Carter Carburetor Adjustments

      The carter carb is very similiar if not almost identical to an edelbrock 600 cfm carb. I really need assistance and desperately. One of the questions is about the two screws on the front of the carb at the base. What should these screws be turned to? The carb has an electric choke and how should this be set? And would there be any other adjustments that I could do to it? I seem to be getting much poorer fuel mileage that the stock carter carb that was on the 326. I bought this new carb thinking I would increase mileage but has turned just the opposite!! This could be because I do not have it adjusted right. I really would appreciate any help that someone can give. Thanks.

      A: The two screws on the front are the idle mixture screws turning them out (counter-clockwise) will richen the mixture & vice versa.They have no effect on the mixture at cruise(in otherwards if its too rich at driving speeds adjusting these will not help) as for setting them,the only real “correct way” is with an exhaust gas analyzer.Setting with a vacuum guage may work but likely the smoothest idle will be too rich if your state does emission testing.Having said that try turning the screws in one at a time (with the engine off) & counting the number of turns on each(In a perfect world they should be the same) then back them both out to the smaller number of turns.Now restart the car (which should have been already warmed up).Now try turning both of the screws 1/2 a turn in,if the car starts running rougher you are too lean (& you should back the screws out again & try going out in 1/2 turn increments until you find it makes no further improvement then go back in 1/2 a turn or so),if the idle improves try another 1/2 turn until you find where it starts to run rough then back the screws out 1/2 turn or so.Basically you are trying for the smoothest idle & then (slightly) leaning the mixture.

      As for the choke setting,basically you want the choke valve to just close on a long cool off (sitting overnight or a number of hours) this is assuming that the weather is mild (so when it is really cold it will be closed with more tension).The plate should be open completely after approx 5 minutes running time no more than 10 anyhow. I hope this helps..

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Changing to a 4 Barrel Carb for a 1968

      When changing from a stock 2 barrel setup, to a 4 barrel, what parts are need to be changed, and what donor years are ok. The car is a 1968 350 automatic, and I have a freshly rebuilt Q jet.

      A: It’s not a difficult swap, but there are a few gotchyas to look out for.

      -Spreadbore intake castings are pretty much the same from 1968 thru 1972. In 1973, Pontiac started using an EGR valve, and in 1976 or 1977, the intake was redesigned with more restritive ports. Thes are identified with an odd waffle imprint on the rear of the intake, behind the carb flange. These characteristics make these later intakes less desireable. Some 4bbl. intakes before 1968 were for squarebore carbs (using Carter AFB carbs), and the 1967 Qjet intake has an odd heat passage on the carb flange.

      -Throttle cables and cable brackets differ from 2 bbl. and 4 bbl. applications. You will find that your 2 bbl. cable will not give you a full range of motion and may require some fabrication to get full throttle. Reproduction 4 bbl. cables are now available from Performance Years. You’ll have to hunt the scrap yards for the bracket, or modify yours. (Need link to modify instructions)

      -More on throttle brackets. Pontiac used a rod for 1967 cars, and then went to a cable for the 1968 and later cars. This cable is very different from that used in later Chevy applications. Around 1970 or 1971, the cable and bracket design changed again, eventually evolving to be more like the Chevy design. So, beware of cables or brackets from earlier or later cars (you don’t indicate what year your car is).

      -You’ll need a 4bbl. aircleaner. If you insist on a stock look, try First Generation Firebird’s, ebay’s, Classical Pontiac’s classified pages.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Date Code on a Carburetor

      On 1968 quadrajets, where is your date code stamped? Not on the body next to the Rochester number, but on the base, right? Anyone with a 1969 have it on the base also?

      A: …I’ve seen and have (or had) 1968 Rochester Carbs with the Julian Date Code stamped near the Model Number on the Body and on the Base at the back. I’ve also seen them with no date code at all (RA I 7028277). I suspect that early 1968 Carb’s were most likely to not have the date code or for it to be on the Base.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Firebird Q-Jet ‘Tab’ for 1967 / 1968

      Does anyone have information of the bent tab used to limit the horsepower for the carburetor found on the 400 Firebird.

      A: For many years, it has been widely accepted that the major difference between the 400 Firebird and GTO engine (1967-1968) has been the carburetor. Factory/Dealer specs listed the Firebird 400 at 325hp for 1967 and 330hp for 1968. The GTO was listed as 335hp for 1967 and 350hp for 1968. All 400 HO & Ram Air engines for both models were listed as 360hp for 1968 (1967 Firebird RA was listed at 335hp).

      No where in the factory/dealer literature is there a mention of a different throttle bracket, tab or linkage preventing the Firebird secondaries from opening as far as the GTOs.

      There have been several articles & publications over the years that have refered to such a variation on the Firebird Carb.

      Hot Rod Magazine- 3/68 “…in order to produce the advertised horsepower, there is a small tab on the throttle shaft which actuates the secondaries, but only to two-thirds open at full-throttle. Somehow you don’t feel guilty at bending it rearward.”

      Special Interest Autos- 10/86 “..The 400 was detuned to 335bhp by adding a small metal tab in the throttle linkage which slightly limited travel of the secondaries. Needless to say, very few of these tabs remain today where GM put them.”

      Motor Trend- 12/91 “…GM only agreed to install the 400 engine if it could restrict it’s performance, which meant it placed a stop on the throttle linkage that prevented wide-open throttle. Of course, that could be removed by the owner in about 30 seconds.” (Jim Wangers)

      The Fabulous Firebird- M.Lamm- 1979 “…Yet to stay within GMs horsepower ruling (1hp for every 10lbs), Pontiac not only derated the Firebird 400 V-8 to 325 bhp but also modified it so, in showroom form, it truly wouldn’t produce more than 325 bhp…. by simply changing the link between the primary and secondary barrels of the Rochester Q-Jet carb. This link was arranged with a steel tab that didn’t let the secondaries open more than 90% at full throttle.”

      Firebird Decoding Guide- T. DeMauro- 1997 “A throttle linkage restrictor installed on all Firebird 400s stopped the rear two barrels of the Quadrajet from opening allthe way, thus limiting horsepower and keeping the car within the 10-lbs to 1 hp Gm corporate edict.”

      So, as you can see, there was obviously something different between a GTO carb and a Firebird. Surely all of these articles were not simply created from simple rumors or suspicions but from experience. Many references were based on modifications by Royal Pontiac during prep for an article (to squeeze out more performance). No mention was ever made about the difference in the exhaust system. If anything, the HO and Ram Air Firebirds had a better exhaust system due to to Long Branch Exhaust Manifolds.

      As for defining the actual component on the carb. and how it was different, there needs to be a photo comparision to better explain this. The above excerpts seem to refer to the same thing; a tab on or a part of the throttle linkage.

      I am currently going through my files and pulling up detailed photos and illustrations I have pertaining to this matter. If anyone has an original ’67/’68 Firebird 400 4Bbl Carb. and wouldn’t mine taking a few close-up photos (RH & LH side), I would be glad to follow-up on this and post the final comparison photos.

      A: I seriously doubt that the Rochester plant earmarked certain carbs for Firebirds and bent the tabs. How would you explain the carbs that the GTO and Firebird both share same part #? Same part # means same part. Period….

      The reason for different part #s of certain models of Firebird vs GTO was that the jetting was different. Base plate assemblies which have the throttle linkages attached are the same part #s between GTO and Firebird.

      A: After initially researching this through careful examination of original, unrestored cars, an extensive detailed photo collection and checking the carbs I (and friends) have, I too was convinced that both Firebirds and GTO carbs were assembled using the same Rochester components. The only possible explanation would be that the lower tab on the inner Throttle Link could have been bent to prevent full travel however, I did not find this in my research (all have been corrected ?).

      Then, I received a reply from Paul Spotts who claims to have an unrestored Firebird carb with this modifed (bent) tab in place. He also says this link was a different part number and that he submitted an article to HPP that explains in detail (w/photos) this entire issue. So, I guess we’ll wait and see if it gets published. In the meantime, I’m continuing the search.

      As for the shared part numbers for GTO & Firebird, I’ve noticed that over the years (following production), different Parts Catalogs start combining the usage for carbs (typical service replacement procedure).

      Also on a related note, I recently came across an early ‘take-off’ 7028277 RA I carb and spent a great deal of time comparing it to a 7028267 carb I have. Other than the Rochester I.D. stamp (for specific usage), there was absolutely no other difference with regard to Rochester component numbers. Every stamped or cast number was identical on every piece. Interesting.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gasket between Qjet and intake

      While spraying Gummout carb cleaner down the primaries on my Quadrajet carb on my 1968 400, I noticed that the Gummout was leaking out from between the Qjet and the intake. Not a good sign. I assume that is my problem (or I created the problem with too much Gummout carb cleaner).

      Here are my questions: Should I use gasket sealer on the new gasket or should it go on without and sealer? Do I need a torque wrench for the bolts?

      A: This may or may not be a fix, but ………when I got mine OHC running it was missing out a little. Then it was suggested that there was a thin metal gasket that should go between the bottom of the carb and the intake. I went to a speed shop and got a thin gasket ( it was just a thin piece of sheet metal with the 4 holes in it ) and voila, I have not had any problems since. Apparently it always had one on it and when I took the car apart I either lost it or chunked it. I think it cost about $5 and was in stock hanging on the wall at a performance shop. May be worth a shot.

      A: This same gasket is needed on 1967 Qjet intakes as well. There’s a heat passage along the intake in front of where the carb sits. I know, I learned this one the hard way!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Models of Rochester Quadrajet Carbs for 1967

      I was wondering if my car should have a Q-jet or not. I have a 1967 Firebird 400 convertible I’m trying to get back to original condition. Does anyone know what carb and number was stock?

      A: Here are the five different models of Rochester Quadrajet carbs used on 1967 Firebirds with a 400 cid engine:

      7027272  .................. 400 cu.in. A.T.
      
      7027273  .................. 400 cu.in. M.T.
      
      7037272  ........  400 cu.in. A.T. w-A.I.R.
      
      7037273  ........  400 cu.in. M.T. Ram-Air*
      
      7037276  ........  400 cu.in. A.T. Ram-Air*
      
         * With or Without A.I.R
      

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Quadrajet Carb Problem

      I have a 1968 Firebird 400 with a Quadrajet carb. The engine is idling to high (1000 RPM or so in drive) when warm with the choke open. The idle adjust screw is backed all the way out and the mixture screws are adjusted. No detectable vacuum leaks and the throttle linkage is loose at idle. The only modification is an open element air cleaner.

      Any ideas as to why the car is idling high? If you think I need a rebuild, any suggestions for my daily driver?

      A: Check the SECONDARIES …. these are always overlooked … and should be closed under an idle condition. If this isnt it then check the set screw that adjusts the butterflies.

      A: I’d bet the problem lies in the orientation of your throttle linkage, throttle cable, or throttle cable bracket. Pull the keeper pin that holds the cable to the throttle linkage. Let the linkage relax to the closed position. Pull the cable all the way out with your fingers and hold it next to the point where it hooks to the linkage. My guess is that you will need to shift things around a bit to get the eye hole in the end of the cable to reach the throttle linkage connection point in its closed position.

      A: I just hadthe same problem with mine .. I ended up looking at the petal itself , over the years it has been hit so many times that it was bent …{ my lead foot }… so it stayed about 1200 rpm … I had to rebend the petal to set it right

      A: Did the problem happen all at once?If so is the choke step coming off all the way?This type of setup likes to bind.A little wd 40 or liquid wrench will solve the problem.My Bird stays parked alot so the linkage will bind and a quick shot with the spray and away I go

      A: I’ve had that happen and the secondaries staying open were the problem as pointed out earlier. Another guess….Could it also be that the float needle is not seating, or might be worn out???

      Is it possible that you did something out of the ordinary that might have caused the problem? Perhaps dropped a tool on the carb while working on your car and bent some carb linkage?

      Another thought…. Is there a slow idle solenoid on the carb? Is it stuck?

      My last shot at it…. You may have gotten to close to a Rice Burner and sucked it into the carb. No big deal. Just push it all the way in.. Your bird loves seed!

      A: It’s either a vacuum leak or ignition timing. check your timing and make sure it’s at it’s proper setting. To check for vacuum leaks, unplug one vacuum line (from the carb) at a time and plug the port. If the idle is unchanged reattach the line and move to the next line. After you’ve verified that the lines and their accessories are working properly, take some WD-40 and spray it on the throttle shaft on the bottom plate of the carb. Next move to the carb gasket and spray all around it. Lastly, spray the intake manifold around the intake ports at the heads.

      A: i would bet the front butterflies are not closing properly if so you might have some build up in the bores of your carb. look into the bores with a flashlight and see if you see any build up that sort of looks like water scale where the butterflies touch the bores when closed i hade this problem before you might can clean it but would be better with a rebuild

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Rochester 4bbl Carburator for 1968

      I have a chance to buy a Rochester 4bbl carburator for my 1968 H.O. How much is this worth since it is already up to $200 on eBay?

      A: The 7028269 Rochester 4Bbl Carb was originally used on all 1968 Tempest and Firebird 350, Manual Trans, 4Bbl engines.

      According to the PMD Engine Production Log Records:

      2,658 “WR” code (Tempest) 350 HO 4Bbl, M.T. engines were built. 3,784 “WK” code (Firebird) 350 HO 4Bbl, M.T. engines were built.

      So, there were 6,442 engines built that year using the # 7028269 Carb. Additionally, there were Service Replacement Carbs. mfg. with this same number. (though sometimes found with date codes 1-3yrs. past production.) Not sure where the seller came up with the production number of 1,400 and that all carbs were built on the same day. I’d have to see documented evidence before believing that one. Carbs. were generally built to spec. according to build orders unless the carb was some odd-ball, low production unit such as RAV.

      Speaking of Date Codes, some early production 1968 model Rochester Carbs did not have a date code. Others were stamped on the LH, Rear edge of the Throttle Body (lower section). Most date codes were stamped on the Bowl Assy. near the Rochester Assy Number. Date Codes used the Julian Date System. (day of year- 3 digits followed by last digit of year)… 245 8 (245th day of 1968, ’78).

      If your Firebird is documented as a 350 HO car and you would like to have all the numbers match, you might want to pick this carb up. I wouldn’t get too carried away in the bidding war… this is not a “rare” carb. Considering a good rebuild can cost upwards of $300+, I wouldn’t spend over $200 on the carb as it is. Of course, if you’re a numbers nut like me, money sometimes isn’t the primary issue.

      Best advice: wait and bid just before the end of the auction.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Stock Carburetor Application for 1967

      Can anyone tell me once and for all what carb came stock on a 67 firebird 400? I have a lot of conflicting information on weather a Rochester quadrajet or a Carter AFB.

      A: For 1967 Firebirds…only the 326 H.O. used the Carter Carb. All other applications used the Rochester.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - Cooling System (17)

      Q: Fan Hits Shroud

      I just bought a new Radiator and Shroud from Classic Industries for my 1969 350 TH350. The radiator is an exact fit in the car and matches the one I took out. The shroud fits nicely on the radiator but I didn’t have a shroud before so I don’t have one to match up. When I installed them I could see right away that the fan touches the Shroud at the bottom. The Shroud is 21 1/2″ and the fan is 19″ as they should be but I have 0″ clearance on the bottom and 2 1/2″ clearance on the top. Left to right is good.

      Any ideas why it doesn’t match up good? Only thing I can think is that the water pump is incorrect and has the mount for the fan too low compared to original……any other ideas?

      A: It may be the pulley, possibly your engine is slightly off center?

      A: You Probably need new motor mounts. I had the same thing happen on my 1968. The rubber in the mounts gets squished after many years.

      A: The following things come to mind:
      1) Have the engine mounts ever been replaced?
      2) Are the body bushings between the front sub-frame and the body original? If so, do they need to be replaced? If not, are the replacements the same height as the originals?
      3) Are the body bushings between the front sub-frame and the core support original? If so, do they need to be replaced? If not, are the replacements the same height as the originals?
      4) Same applies to the transmission mount.

      Any or all of these could account for the motor sitting 1″ – 2″ lower than it should which would result in what you are seeing. I don’t think the water pump has anything to do with it.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fan Pulley Diameter for 1967

      Whats the proper diameter of Fan Pulley for a 1967?

      A: Keep in mind that there are 8 different belt and pulley configurations for a 1967 V8 car! I’m assuming you’re asking about the car noted in your tag line. The 1968 and 1969 V8 cars have only 4 possible configurations.

      1967 V8 Pulley and Belt Applications (assume each config. has an alternator)

      1. Standard car (no accessories)
      p/n 544595 8 inch
      2. Power steering only
      p/n 9786819 8 inch (two groove)
      3. Air conditioning only
      p/n 9786909 7 1/8 inches (two grooves)
      4. Air conditioning and power steering
      p/n 9786909 7 1/8 inches (two grooves)
      5. Air injection (A.I.R.) only
      p/n 9786819 8 inch (two groove)
      6. Air injection and power steering
      p/n 9786819 8 inch (two groove)
      7. Air injection and air conditioning
      p/n 9788886 5 11/16 inch (two groove)
      8. Air conditioning, power steering, and air injection
      p/n 9788886 5 11/16 inch (two groove)

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Firebird 400 Radiator Outlet Size for 1968

      I’m trying to figure out if the radiator in my 1968 Firebird 400 is original or not.

      A: For starters, does your radiator have “HARRISON” embossed on the tanks ?

      How about the Production Usage Code Tag ? 400 Codes…. UQ, UP

      My original (UQ…RAI, 4spd) is in storage however, the “UP” tank I have is…
      Upper: 1.5625″ Lower: 1.875″

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Heater Core Replacement (Non-A/C)

      I need to replace my heater core. The service manual is not to much help. How should I go about it? How tough is it:? should I forget it and just drive when its warm?

      A: It’s a tough job. Even tougher if your car has factory A/C. The core is fastened inside the air box behind the glove box. If the car doesn’t have A/C, I think you can get to all the bolts without removing the passenger side fender well. The control cables are easy to remove and replace. While you have the heater box out, it’s a good time to clean it up and freshen it up with a new coat of semi-flat black.

      If your car has factory A/C, drop me a line off-list and I’ll try to help you through the details.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Heater Hose Replacement with A/C

      Does anyone have any suggestions on how to get the heater hoses on the heatercore on a 1969 firebird? Oh yeah, it does have air conditioning……………..

      A: It’s one of the added pleasures of having an air conditioned GM car…..

      Heater hose connections can be accessed from under car. Take a couple of fender skirt (inner fender) bolts loose and shove a piece of 2×4 between it so you can reach up to the hose connections. Take care not to break loose the tube that goes to heater core, otherwise you might as well pull the fender to replace heater core. If you split the old hose with a razor knife it will come off much easier.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: How Hot is Too Hot

      One Question to all – What is hot (in your own opinion) for an engine to run? How hot – is to hot? 190?,195?, 200?,215?, 225?

      A: In my opinion, 215 is when you start looking at the guage more thn the road. 225 is when I shut it down before it gets worst. 235+ and you’re in dangerous territory. 250+ things start warping and cracking.

      Octane doesn’t directly affect your temps, however, if you car pings because of low octane than this can make it run hotter because you’re not running at an optimum condition so the engine has to work harder to produce the same power (and I’m sure that pre-ignition might generate more useless heat).

      Get a desert cooler, a 160 thermostat, a good engine flush, a decent water pump, run a 50/50 mix (Destilled water is preferable. More water than collant is actually better for temps), run a little on the rich side, use the 400/AC car filler pannels, and everything should be ok. Almost forgot, the fan shroud itself is another important item – don’t know how many cars seem to come up short on that one.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Lower Radiator Hose for 1969

      I have a 1969 350ci with TH350 and NO A/C. Just bought a lower radiator hose from Ames and it didn’t fit. It was a 1.5″ I.D. hose with a flare out to 1.75″ at ONE end. It didn’t fit for two reasons. For one, it was too long and didn’t physically fit in the car. For two, both my water pump AND radiator need the 1.75″ I.D. hose.

      Anyone else ever have this problem or is there something wrong with my car?

      Anyone know what size hose they use on their car or where they buy them from and what the Part Number is?

      A: I just bought and installed a lower radiator hose on my 1969 350ci TH350 with A/C. The hose was the same size on both ends. Without measuring it I would assume it is 1.75 inches. The hose was not very long, I would guess 15-18 inches. At any rate, I picked it up at the local NAPA auto parts store. This was about the only store in Austin that stocked the lower hose.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Overheating Engine

      I just recently purchased a 1967 bird with a 400 and an automatic tranny. It needs some work but for the most part is all original. The motor has 670 heads and is a YT.

      It seems to over heat when sitting still. When I am driving it runs about 180 but if I sit still very long it heats up rather quick. I replaced the water pump and put a 165 thermo in it. The radiator seems to be circulating any suggestions?

      A: The overheating could be several things: Poor or no coolant, Improper coolant level/mix, bad fan clutch (check hot w/ engin off. If it spins freely, it’s bad), bad fan (if it has a cheep after market flex fan these blades get weak), missing fan shroud, partially clogged radiator (have flushed), bad water pump (possibly a broken impeller. check last) . If it has A/C it could have a bunch of junk between the condenser and radiator (this happened to me on a Corvette).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Overheating Engine (Part 4)

      Does anyone have any suggestions for an overheating engine? I have an overheating problem with my 1968 400. When idling it’s fine. Sits right about 180-190. As soon as the car starts to move it gets hot quickly. If I stop for a light or a stop sign it immediately drops back to 180 or so. The radiator has been cored. I’ve replaced the thermostat and the fan clutch. Any other suggestions?

      A: The one thing I found out was, although my radiator looked good, it was about 30% clogged. I was using a stock clutch fan and shroud. After my radiator man cleaned it out, it would idle all day long without overheating.

      A: You know I was thinking the same. My 1968 400 didnt overheat during its life here in Orlando,but it was in good mechanical shape. Even with the a/c on it didnt go above 220 if idled all day.

      Heres a check list.

      1. water pump make sure its the proper cast iron impeller

      2. thermostat 180 F is fine 160 will work too,dont leave this out

      3. check timing cover and waterpump baffles these must be in good order without pinholes,if not buy the stainless replacement.

      4. check static timing and advance on distributor must be right on or motor WILL overheat

      5. engine condition, clogged cooling passages will ruin a motor

      6. heater core still intact and flowing good

      7. radiator still flows fine no bent fins and mud inbetween fins,no loose fins

      8. hoses must be fresh and wire installed in lower one

      9. fan pulley and fan,proper one as factory installed,no gimic ones here.

      10. a/c cars (not Brads) had smaller pulleys to speed up the air /water flow

      11. proper fan shroud(OHC-6 didnt use one only a finger guard)

      this check list will if followed lead to a happy and cooler car. The only exception to needing auxiliary fans is large cammed ultra hi compression,ultra low gears,hi stall speed converters.A stock motor if in good condition shouldnt overheat.

      A: Take a look at your lower radiator hose, squeeze it. Does it have a metal spring inside of it? If you can squeeze it flat then chances are you don’t have a spring. The lower radiator hose is the suction side and when you rev the car up with no spring in the bottom hose then alot of times it sucks the hose closed. Like when you put your finger on the end of a straw and suck on the other end it flattens in the middle and that sounds like what could be going on. Also with the car idling put your hand if front of the air breather and feel the flow of air, now have someone in the car rev it up to about 2,500 rpm and see if there is a great big boost in the amount of airflow, sometimes a new clutch doesn’t necessarily mean a good one. With the type problem you have I would say it has something to do with rpms which is generally the fan clutch or the lower radiator hose.

      A: My view is that a great many overheating problems are related to wrong timing or carb set too lean. Many of us are spending big money on fancy water pumps and big radiators when we really need to sort out the basics first.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Overheating Engine (Part 5)

      I have tried everything suggest but I just can not find the problem to my overheating problem. I am about ready to give up and move north. Any ideas?

      A: One guy on the post (forgot name) may have been close when he suggested that over heating in the first gen birds was due to the design of the cars front end. An old time radiator man I often go to said that the firebird radiators are the smallest ones Pontiac has ever put in cars and expected them to do so much ie. cool big V8s.

      This guy also had an excellent tip for a mysterious overheating problem. All you overheaters may be over looking the old head gasket leak.

      A head gasket can develop a small leak near a water jacket. The problem may not effect the performance of the car and often is undetectable until the overheating starts. When the leak in the gasket develops between the combustion chamber and the water jacket, a small amount of compressed air is forced into the coolant while the engine is running. The results are large pockets of air forming where the water should be and turning to steam from the hot spots in the block. The results are overheating followed by blowoff over flow.

      The check the old guy gave me goes like this: Disconnect the fan belts so the water pump will not turn. Disconnect the top radiator hose at the radiator and hold it up vertically while filling the radiator with water until you can see the water in the end of the hose you are holding. While everything is cold (engine, water) start the engine and watch the water in the end of the hose for small bubbles. They will appear before the hose gets to hot to hold and the indecate a bad head gasket.

      This whole deal works. I used it on my 1969 and found the cracked gasket…Old radiator Bill impressed me on another occasion when I plopped down a radiator in his shop and he eyeballed it for a few seconds and proclaimed, ” that’s from a 1967 GTO!

      Good luck with the heat

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I agree with the last comment in regard to blown head gaskets, they do have a strange way of showing up until the gasket completely lets go then you will have coolant spewing from the radiator or over flow tank then you have a culprit. My personal experience in Oz is firstly check timing, have your rad cleaned and checked mine was 40 percent blocked, fitted back to my car still to have it reach close to 200 degrees sitting at lights idling but mostly fine when driving, I replaced the 8 bolt water pump (cast impellor) stainless backing plate, adjusted the plate clearance, replaced the coolant and thermostat still not much difference, ordered new 3 core aluminium rad from USA fitted perfectly, much improvement on the old radiator with normal driving and stopping until I drove it in 40 degrees celcuis still doing the same thing at idling and going up long hills.
      I did some more research after reading what other people had done and come up with the idea that it is still related to the water pump poor efficiency due to the backing plate and water pump not being integral (sealed unit) so I searched for a smaller pump pulley and found a 9788886xt from a GTO also used if you have A/C, pulley went from 8″ to 6 1/2 had to replace the alternator belt, the old one was recycled for the power steering.
      Went for a long drive along highways and up mountains (only reached max of 180) stopping and idling all good, it is early days but it seems to of made a big difference. I hope this has helped so before you rush off and through money at it check the basics first, then move to the next step.

      1968 Firebird 350 2bbl 2speed auto.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Overheating Engine (Revisited 2)

      Been playing with my 1969 with a new 455 (1000 miles) that doesn’t seem to have the correct power it should or maybe I got sold a lousy cam with the rebuild. Here’s part of what’s going on, any ideas out there?

      Ran the car a little on Saturday. with an HEI and timing set at 12degress with vacuum module attached to vacuum source high on quadrajet body it will overheat at idle. Lowest idle I can achieve is 800 RPM. Running at street speeds keeps the temp down.

      I have put new non-flex fan in, new radiator rot out, new water pump and thermostat at rebuild. and have had this problem since the motor was built. (shop has gone out of business, surprise!) Still runs slow, but has decent power, about equal to the 350, 2-bbl that was stock in it before. Could the cam be causing the overheating? or maybe there is something obstructing water flow internally? It still does not seem to run right.

      When I started it up, it ran at high idle for over 5 minutes, choke was off, nothing would bring it down and then all of a sudden it just dropped down to 800RPM, maybe it needed to overheat to plug up some vacuum leak somewhere? Any ideas?

      A: Do you have a fan shroud on it??? If not, then there is your problem since when the car is not in motion, it requires the shroud to assist the fan in sucking the cool air through the radiator.

      One other thing you might try is retarding the timing. 12 degrees might be a little much.With vacuum advance, and mechanical advance, you might be actually running at well beyond 12 degrees at idle causing high heat.

      A: First thing that comes to mind is the timing. If it is too retarded it will cause poor performance and overheating. I’m not sure whether the port that is “high on the quadrajet body” is ported or manifold vacuum, but if there is ANY vacuum advance at idle and you set the timing to 12 degrees, you’re timing is FAR too retarded. Disconnect the vacuum line from the carb and plug it. Just to be sure, also cap the inlet to the vacuum advance. Then set your initial timing to 12 degrees and see what happens. Might just solve both problems.

      A: Did you add a full shroud? And what is the clearance between the fan blades and the shroud? Also, is the fan positioned in the rear of the shroud, inside the shroud, or is it just inside the rear of it? These factors are very important to provide good cooling suction. I ran my 1968 with no shroud, too small a fan for my shroud, and also improperly positioned and they all greatly affected the temperature of my engine at idle. I now have the original fan, with the original shroud, and with the fan spaced just inside the rear opening.

      Take a look-see. If any of the ideas I mentioned are as you currently have it, try correcting it. It made a big difference with mine. Good luck.

      What I mentioned about the timing is that if you have the dist too much advanced or too much retarded, that will also affect the temp. To time it, disconnect and block your vacuum source, and time the car, preferably at idle depending upon what your cam calls for, and yoru compression, I would think you should run at no more than 8 degrees but no less than 4. Remember, an increase in timing before TDC, such as going to 12 from 8, is Advancing it. Too much advance will create more heat, and if you’re really unlucky, detonation.

      A: I’m going to ask a very silly (but obvious) question:

      Are you running with a reasonable compression ratio for the fuel that you are using? I.E., 9-9.5:1 for 93-4 octane? The reason I ask is that it is possible that that 455 was fitted with smaller chambered heads off a 400 or 350. Any shop worth it’s salt would never have done this, but I think it happens. You should not run head chambers less than about 95 cc’s on a 455. Some 400 heads are OK, but the ones off higher compression engines will result in even higher CR on a 455. Higher compression with inadequate octane rating will result in overheating at idle and detonation under load at standard timing settings. (Not to mention broken pistons, rings, etc. Sometimes guys try to “de-tune” the ignition to get rid of the detonation, but end up losing a lot of power. (Been there, done that) Your CR must match the fuel rating or you are going to have problems. Get the head code off the center exhaust ports and make sure they are OK for a 455. Other than this, you been given some pretty good advice from others on the list…….

      If I’m being too presumptuous, I appologize, but I ended up with engine damage and wished someone had told me so that I wouldn’t have to find out the hard (expensive) way.

      A: I was reading the street machine articles written by Jim Hand and I came across something that jogged my memory. He warns about harmonic ballancer outer ring migration, which usually will throw your timing mark off into the retard region. This will result in heating problems and lost power. I had to replace a ballancer a few years ago because it didn’t line up with my timing pointer @ TDC. (I had just finished checking my cam timing with a degree wheel and had slipped the ballancer on @ TDC to check it). I had just never corrolated this to any previous problems. It is certainly worth looking at….. we usually take that little groove on the ballancer for granted when timing the ignition.

      A: I have a ’72 455 in my 1968 and had a similar high heat problem. Apparently the crank pulley was much a much larger diameter than one that would be found on a 400. This was causing the water pump to spin faster than normal. At idle, the coolant was moving through the radiator too fast to be cooled very much. When driving, and with good air-flow through the radiator, the temp would return to normal. I put on a smaller crank pulley and the problem went away. And be aware that not all flex fans are the same. Some really suck.

      A: Once again Ive been reading the FAQs and have come across a problem adressed that I encountered. The problem concerns a 1968 with a 455 and over heating.

      I put a 455 in my 1967 and, of course, it ran hot. A friend did the same in his 1968 with the same results. Heres how we resolved the situation. I assume the waterpump thrustplate is not missing…Ive seen it frequently!!! First we made sure we had both the lower air baffle (below lower valence) and the two filler panels between the core support and the front bumper support. The filler panels were standard on 400s and on A/C equiped cars. The seal up the grill area and force the fan to pull air through the radiator instead of around it. This, for the most part solved the over heating at idle problem.

      Both of use used 400 heads on our 455s and this contributed to the problem. After several broken pistons (we used early small chambered heads) we both switched to late model large chambered 400 heads. This, for the most part solved the problem, but we did end up installing heavy duty 4 row radiators…probably over kill, but then again summer in Florida can get things a bit warm.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Overheating Problem (Revisited 3)

      My Firebirdd is overheating and has low oil pressure. Is the low oil pressure causing my overheating problem.

      A: I had problems with the cooling on my last 1968 after I rebuilt the engine. A few things to check

      1.) Does the clutch fan actually work???? Mount a regular fan in its place to test to see if the engine now cools properly. I’ve never seen the clutch guts, but they can discontinue the correct lock-up and revolve at less than 100% of the correct idling speed. I have had this problem. It looks like the fan is working, but it is actually going much slower than it is supposed to, hense overheating.

      2.) How long has your radiator been out of your car?? One of the oddities I have encountered is that when a radiator is romoved, crud (rust) that has circulated in dirty coolant will sometimes settle and clog the passages. Self flushing doesn’t seem to cure it, because it becomes hardened in the passages, just like a clogged drain in your house. It will need to be replaced, or removed and boiled by a pro radiator shop.

      3.) You are running an anti-freeze/water mix aren’t you? Running 100% of either can be a problem.

      4.) A recent article (either Old cars weekly / or classic auto restorer) discussed this topic in general. One of the often overlooked items is that engine blocks and head castings that sit for long periods of time without use had clogged coolant passages. Did either of yours sit without getting boiled out?

      A: With regard to low oil pressure and overheating, that is a common problem. Here is the deal. Oil pressure is a measurement of resistance to flow (the flow of oil). The thinner the oil, the easier it flows. When your oil gets real hot, it flows very easy, hense the oil pressure drops. At start-up, the oil has a high viscosity (it’s thick), so there is plenty of oil pressure, but relatively low flow.

      All automobile engines have a built in pressure relief valve, either in the pump or somewhere in the oiling system. In theory, you can never go above the max PSI as long as the pressure relief is working. The oil pressure will level off at high RPM because you have hit the limit of the pressure relief valve. At idle, the relief valve would only work when the oil is very thick, such as on a real cold day. It’s kind of weird that way. We often make the mistake of thinking that only oil pressure counts, but flow is just as important. That’s why most engine damage occurs at start up. There is very little or no flow for a few moments, even though the PSI jumps up instantly.

      So, to answer your question. It is possible that your bearings are worn and the resistance to flow has been reduced from bearing clearances that are above the max tolerance. A pressure problem would normally show up first when the oil is hot and thin and at idle speed. It is also possible that your oil pump is worn and has reduced flow and that in turn is creating reduced pressure. When the oil is hot and therefore thin, the problems are likely to show up. But… my bet is simply that your car is running too hot. Get it to cool down and stay cool. Your oil pressure will likely rise to where it is supposed to be. Let the car idle, and watch what the oil pressure at about 195 degrees. Ideally, I would never want an older Pontiac engine to be above that temp. If the oil pressure at that temp is acceptable, then it’s just a matter of getting the engine to cool down to that level or lower. Beyond that simple diagnosis, we are talking removing the oil pan and checking the oil pump, bearings, etc. Not easy….

      One last point. Are you running headers????? They aren’t causing the oil pan (and the whole engine compartment) to get hot are they? That situation will certainly cause thin oil (low PSI) and engine overheating. Headers are a real pain in a Firebird. No room to dissipate heat in the engine compartment! And…..by all means… check the other E-Mails and pay attention to the one on timing problems related to overheating. Solid advice!

      A: First lets assume that the system is full of a coolant at the proper mixture and that a new and correct pressure radiator cap is in place. I also assume that the coolant was topped of after the engine ran and the thermostat opened.

      What type of fan do you have?. If it is a clutch fan, is the clutch part still working? Are you using a radiator shroud? Is the fan set at a proper depth within the shroud? Are the original baffles in place on top of and underneath the core support? Do you have anything blocking the airflow in front of the radiator? Is it the proper radiator for the car(Not intended for a 6 cyl is it?). Have you had the system flushed to remove deposits/corrosion? Is the lower radiator hose collapsing when it gets hot? Do you have one with a spring in it?

      If you are moving too much fluid with a higher volume pump there might not be sufficient time to absorb the heat. Retarded timing could cause it to run hot. Lean carb also. Has the engine been rebuilt recently? A tight engine may run a little hotter. Is there a possibility of air in the system casing cavitation/steam pockets? Is the thermostat working? Is the water pump impeller exactly the same size/shape as an original one? Is it possible that the water pump shaft is slipping and not turning the impeller at the intended speed?

      Red-Line makes a product called water wetter that is supposed to reduce water temperature. I believe that it reduces the surface tension of the water allowing more of it to contact the metal surfaces. I think they claim about a 10 -20 degree F drop (bought mine at a auto part store). I think it helped, but can’t remember how much. It is about $7 US. (clear bottle pinkish-red fluid).

      Have you tried an external oil cooler?

      Has it ever run at the proper temperature? If so what have you done to it since then?

      A: Back to a few basics….. What happens when the temp in your car rises???

      Crap happens:

      Compression maxes because the rings seal really, really tight. Try disconnecting everything (electrically from ignition circuit) and crank your engine over by hand, you’ll see the difference in resistance. Of course, you can also test this with a compression tester. Bottom line, the engine is tough to turn over.

      Okay, we all know the obvious, the starter is at max stress because high temp causes high resistance in the electrical windings / armature, meaning less than ideal starting.

      When the engine turns over (barely) preignition occurs and it says No go! No go!

      So…. What is the answer? Don’t even think of fixing it with a starter solution. There is only one real answer…. Get the temp down…..

      You can diagnose until you are ready to puke, but here are some steps I take to ensure I’m going in the right direction. From the cheapest to most expensive solution.

      1.) You are running 10W40 oil. A grade of 10W30 or less will aid in the rise in engine temp.

      2.) Run a blend of anti-freeze and water per the coolant mfg recommended mix

      3.) Be sure to run a thermostat (don’t run without it or the coolant will not have time to cool properly).

      4.) Your timing is correct isn’t it? To much timing will making it overheat faster than you can say boilermaker. I also include correct point gap in that discussion.

      5.) Your radiator isn’t even slightly plugged is it???? These are 30 year old cars. If your radiator is more than 10 years old, chances are some of the cooling rows are plugged. Have it professionally rodded out. Home mechanic cleaning materials are a joke on a radiator this old. Oh and if the radiator was removed an let to sit long enough for the sludge crud to become hardened in it, you are in for a super plug job.

      6.) Your fan shroud is installed properly isn’t it??? I won’t say any more on this one.

      7.) Get rid of your headers!!! Oh no… the evil of such discussion. Headers in most birds cause a problem with oil temp rise and underhood head (causing coolant temp rise). They are too close to all of the mechanicals and the starter in a bird. I have installed and removed them in several birds. That step alone can solve the problem. Consider using the HI perf manifolds for 68.

      8.) If you must run headers, install an oil cooler and 4 row radiator. That will help. It may or may not solve it.

      9.) Your engine isn’t worn to the point where the bearings are bad, or it has a bad oil pump, is it??? In either case, you will suffer reduced oil pressure and the problem compounds the longer the engine runs. The engine will begin to overhead from additional friction caused by reduced oil pressure. The hotter the engine, the thinner the oil gets, making flow easier and pressure worse. The only solution is to replace the problem components in your engine.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • There are a pair of steel sleeves in the timing cover that direct water out of the pump into the engine. Make sure yours are installed and in good condition. Also the steel plate behind the water pump! It might help to reduce the clearance between the pump impeller and the steel plate.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Radiator Bushings

      How do the radiator bushings fit? It’s a standard two piece rubber bushing, one half of the bushing has a metal sleeve, the other half is just rubber. Does the metal sleeve half fit in between the frame and support? Does this bushing use a large metal ‘washer’ like the body mount bushings do?

      A: You’ve got the right idea. The bushing w/the metal sleeve fits between the frame and radiator support, with the sleeve protruding upward. The other rubber piece sits on top of the support, over the sleeve. This half of the bushing has a large hole on one side, and a smaller hole on the other. Place it with the large hole fac- ing downward. Two large washers are used, one on top, and another on the underside of the frame. In addition, you should have a med- ium sized washer, a lock washer, and nut. Push the bolt in from above with one of the large washers. Use the remaining washers on the bottom.

      Some repro bushings are a little large for the radiator support hole (at least it was on mine), so some triming and filing may be required. In addition, the bolt was short. The GM bushings are correctly sized, and with the correct length bolts.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: RPM and Temp

      I’ve got a 1968 Firebird, built 350, 3:73 rear end and a 3 speed AT. When I’m on the interstate, what is a reasonable rpm to be at (ie., what is too high). Also, I think my thermostat is blown, the engine is a 73 Pontiac, what is a good temp?

      A: The higher RMP your engine runs, the greater the wear, especially for sustained periods. Not to mention the penalty in fuel economy. I’d try to keep the RPMs below 3300 or 3500 for highway cruising speeds. Depend- ing on tire size, that might be 55 or 60 MPH?

      You can try a taller tire, change the rear ratio, or get an overdrivetransmission.

      Regarding the temp question, I feel that 180 to 205 is within a normal range, depending on load, speed, and air temp. Even 210 is OK if climbing a steep grade on a hot day, or sitting in traffic in August. Modern cars are designed to keep pretty close to 200 for max. efficiency. A frozen thermostat in the open position will not allow the car to warm up, or be slow to warm up, and will result in premature wear in the cylinders. Heat is required for good operation, but not too much heat. Frozen shut will cause overheating pretty quick. I run a 160 or 180 degree thermostat in the summer, and a 190 in winter.

      If you are relying on the factory temperature gauge to determine operat- ing temps, be warned that they were never too accurate when new, and with age, they are completely suspect. Add an aftermarket guage, even if only temporary, to determine how hot you’re engine is getting. Mech- anical guages are more accurate than electrical.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Shroud Fit

      Since buying the car, my wife’s 1969 bird has had a mismatch between the fan and the shroud. For some reason the fan sits too low in the shroud and rubs against the bottom. In fact, I had to clip the bottom of the shround to avoid the rubbing. The fan is 2 inches smaller in diameter than the shroud, so it should have 1 inch gap on the top and bottom, but instead it has 2 inches at top and zero on bottom.

      A: Take a look at your front subframe bushings, for the radiator brace. What you are reporting sounds like these bushings are compressed and have caused the front sheet metal to droop.

      A: I’ve thought of that too, but wouldn’t that cause the radiator support to drop, which would make the shroud too low? My problem is the shroud is too high.

      A: Actually, it’s probably just the opposite. The fan is rubbing on the bottom so the bushings would have to be too tall.

      Something simple to check is to verify that the clips holding the bottom of the shroud against the radiator and fully seated and that the shroud is sitting all the way into the clips. I have also found that the shroud will sometimes hit the lower radiator hose or the pit-cock and will keep the shroud from staying in it’s proper location.

      I had a similar problem when I put my 1969 back together. I rubbed on the right side near the battery before I took it apart. After I put it all back together, using the existing bushings, I gained 1/2 of clearance. I think it was just due to a combination of moving things around.

      You may also want to check that you have the correct transmission mount or that the transmission cross member isn’t bent.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sprint Radiator

      What is the correct radiator for a Sprint engine? I am worried I do not have the correct one since I keep over heating plus someone mentioned my Sprint is missing “Filler Panels.”

      A: Single core is correct for a 1968 Sprint, unless it had the HD cooling. Radiator should have a metal tag with the letters “ZA”. Code for the HD unit is “UF”. A 3 core from a 350 V-8 will fit right in the same location.However the finger guard may not. OHC-6s dont use a fan shroud. I think the radiator you have is clogged or in poor condition. I’ve never had an overheating problem with any OHC-6s.

      A: The Filler Panels are the panels that go between the core support and the front bumper support.

      They were installed in 400 cars and A/C equipped cars. The idea was to force as much air as possible through the radiator, instead of having it “leak” out around the bumper. They can be bought as repros, if you’re interested in using them.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Water Pump for 1969

      Were there two variations of the 1969 Water Pumps?

      A: There are two pumps for a 1969 Firebird. I seen them listed as earl and late 1969 (The early pump was the short one).

      3 31/32″ Hub Part#9797581 Cast number 9796351

      There is also

      4 15/32″ hub

      You can also tell just buy looking at the water pump pulley. I’ve observed that the a/c equipped cars had the longer pump also.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - Decals (1)

      Q: Emissions Decal Placement

      I am looking for the proper place to put the black emissions decal. I think it goes on the bumber filler panel, althought not sure if it is the passengers side or drivers side.

      A: I measured mine. It is on the passenger-side filler panel. It is positioned 4 1/2″ from the outside edge and 1 1/2″ up from the bottom edge.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Decals
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Hi, I just checked back and saw my picture never upload. Here it is, it’s from my very original 67 400.

      Attachment

    • Hi, my ’67 400 had it on the pass side radiator support, near where it attaches to the fender. I’m attaching a pic, if it works.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - General Info (57)

      Q: 350 Motor Mounts for 1969

      A: Earlier I was asking about the Motor Mounts for a 1969 350, and I told you when I found out FOR SURE I’d give you an update.

      The Anchor book is WRONG. The 1969 350 does NOT use two different mounts. They use the same mount on both sides and it is the SAME mount used for 400s. I believe it is Anchor PN 2254.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: 455 Swap

      I have an opportunity to buy a 455 out of a bonneville. Anybody know what (if any) modifications I will need to do to get it to fit?

      A: This is a very simple swap. Since 1967, all Pontiac V8s have the same external dimensions, and will readily swap parts like intake manifolds, timing chains, and oil pans. The exception is the much maligned 301.

      As another list member mentioned, the Feb. 2001 issue of Car Craft has a brief article on swapping a 326 for a 455. It contains some good photos of the differences between the 1969 and earlier motor mount bosses/holes and the 1970 and later version. There is also a good description of water pump and pulley issues that need to be addressed. The article would apply to those of you with 350s and 400s as well.

      But, essentially, the easiest way to do the swap is to take the timing cover, water pump, pulleys, and accessory brackets off your present engine, and transfer these to the 455. The same applies to your exhaust manifolds. Now the 455 will just bolt into place like it grew there.

      Some other issues not mentioned, or only lightly covered in the article are:

      -Flywheel/flex plate. While the majority of Pontiacs in the late 60s and early 70s used the same sized crank shaft flange, the late 50s and later 70s car are different. In fact, there are up to 5 different diameters in the Pontiac engine family. So, measure the rear flange on your 455 and check to make sure that your original flywheel/flex plate will bolt on, or use the one that came with the 455 if possible.

      – Manifold sealing. Intake ports on Pontiac heads changed roughly about 1972, so if this engine is later than that, you’ll need to get the correct gaskets to seal your intake manifold. In the Car Craft article, they used some thin metal to block off the heat passage crossover, which is the area that will most likely leak. This is assuming you will be using a 1972 or earlier intake manifold.

      – Engine weight. While we don’t have any exact figures on engine weights, it is logical to assume that a 455 weighs more than a 326, perhaps. You may have to get new front springs for your car if once the bigger engine is in and your front suspension bottoms out.

      – Water pump/pulleys/ accessory brackets/timing covers. Pontiac in it’s infinite wisdom, changed the design of these front engine dress parts several times, and mixing these parts leads to poor pulley alignment, thrown belts, and premature baldness. But to give them credit, the blocks themselves are pretty universal.

      Whatever you do, use all the parts from either the donor Bonneville, or your present engine.

      The 1967 and 1968 Pontiacs (as well as the earlier engines) used an 8 bolt timing cover and pump. In 1969, they went to an 11 bolt cover and pump, but had two different pump designs, each a different height. This means that the pulleys and brackets are different for each pump type. The 1967 and 1968 items have different part numbers also, and they may be incompatible as well. But I don’t know for certain. That’s why you’ll stay sane longer if you source these parts from just one car.

      – Engine mount bosses. The 1969 and earlier engine blocks were cast with two drilled and tapped bosses or holes for the engine mounts, along the oil pan mounting flange. In 1970, because many of the new cars had undergone chassis redesigns, the new blocks were cast with 5 bosses to allow the engines to be mounted in either earlier (pre 1969) or later chassis.

      Some of the blocks cast in the ’70s don’t have all of these holes either drilled or tapped. Others do. If your 455 doesn’t, it shouldn’t be too hard a job to drill and tap the required holes. Use a correct engine bracket for a guide.

      The other recourse is to use engine change brackets available from Year One, Performance Years, and AMES.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: 670 Heads

      Should I use my 670 heads or switch to something else. I have heard the 670 are closed chamber heads and the valves are shrouded. You would do better with some 62,16,12,13, or 48’s.

      A: While you are right about the shrouded valves, I find it interesting that Pete McCarthy writes the following in his “Pontiac Racer’s & High Performance Handbook”:

      “The 670 heads are unique in a number of ways:

      1. I was and is the only late closed chamber design.

      2. The intake port is the best flowing of any production head including the Ram-Air IV.

      3. It is the only big valve head with exhaust port air injection holes, although a number if Eastern cars didn’t have them.

      4. It was the first in a long line of high performance Pontiac heads with screw-in studs and stamped steel pushrod guide plates.

      If one obtains these 670 heads, and opens the chambers ala the 1968 and later 400-428 heads, and adds the good valve prings, you will have as good a high compression head as is possible to find. The 670 head is one of the great junkyard buys available.

      That’s pretty impressive. I imagine that the removal of the material shrouding the valves, plus enlarging the chamber to match the better quench area of the 1968 and later heads, one would also shave a couple 10ths off the compression ratio, ending up somewhere in the are of 9.75 or 9.5 to 1. Remember that Pontiac overestimated compression, so a rated 10.5 to 1 was closer to 10 to 1.

      If you were looking for a decent head to use without modifications, and found the 670s at a good price, they are worth buying. If you were interested in making the above modifications, you would end up with dynamite heads.

      By chance, the 1968 YS block (GTO/big car) in my car came with these heads. After reading McCarthy’s comments, I decided to hang on to them.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: A/C Reserve Vacuum Tank

      I have a small coffee can shaped vacuum canister that I found underneath the drivers side fender mounted to the firewall on my 1968 400 convertable. Any ideas what it is used for? Appears to have never been hooked up. The manual doesnt help.

      A: It’s the A/C reserve vacuum tank.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Accessing the #2 Plug

      I need to know if I do, in fact, have to move the a/c compressor to get to the #2 plug.

      A: I move the compressor to get to the plug. I don’t know about the other guys, but I prefer using up the time to save me frustration!

      A: #2 plug is easily accessed by going thru the inner fender seal (mud flap). You may want to jack up the front end and remove the tire for real easy access.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Adjusting Valves on a 350

      My son and I are having trouble adjusting the valves on our 350 small block. We just ported the heads (edelbrock) and tried to adjust them with a steatho scope… they have hydrolic lifters and new push rods… can’t get any power out of the engine and when we crank down on the valve the noise still is there…. any ideas on how to adjust them?

      A: I can’t imagine of what use a stethoscope is while adjusting valves, but I’ll tell you how I do it. I usually performed this with the engine running, and the valve covers off – do this one at a time since it can get a little messy. You may want to lay a piece of cardboard or small piece of scrap sheet metal across the head to contain some of the oil. Set it inside the lower lip that the gasket sits on, and do one side at a time if you want to. Back off each rocker nut until that valve ticks, tighten until the ticking stops, then tighten some more. How much more? That depends on if the lifters are new or not. If new, turn one complete turn, if old, go a half turn, if not too old, go 3/4 turn. Reinstall valve covers and clean up oil splashes with CRC Brakleen.

      Some people prefer the static (engine not running) method, it also works well, but takes more time.

      A: Here is a simpler method. It still works for non poly-locks. This is from Rock and Roll engineering web site.

      Poly lock nut adjustment for hydraulic cams

      1. Install poly-lock with hex end up. Thread in set screws a few turns with hollow hex end up.

      2. Make sure lifter in on the heel of the cam.

      3. In order to get a “feel” for the pressure of pushrod against lifter cup, push the pushrod into the lifter by hand so you can feel it’s spring tension. Tighten poly lock slowly while moving the pushrod up and down, being careful to stop turning the poly-lock just as the pushrod touches the lifter cup, and the up and down free play is taken up.

      4. Now turn the poly lock one more “flat”, or a sixth of a turn. Hold the poly lock in that location with a box end wrench. Turn the inside allen set screws down until it contacts the rocker stud. Snug it with the palm of your hand. Do not tighten!

      5. With the box end wrench in one hand and the allen wrench, turn both together until they tighten, or approximately 25 to 30 ft. Lbs. They must be tight, but you don’t want to be an ape either. Use common sense.

      Warning! You cannot properly tighten poly locks by just turning the allen set screw.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Backfiring Problem

      I have a 1968 Firebird with a built 73 Pontiac 350 and an electric choke. The last two mornings on the first start it has backfired. I’m a pretty weak mechanic…as you can tell. What should I do.

      A: I’d start with the choke. See if the is sticking and flooding. Also, check the timing. When was your last tune-up?

      A: Your problem could still be in your choke. Is it backfiring through the carb or exhaust? If through the carb, most likely you have a lean situation that could be caused by your choke not closing fully. This would explain why it goes away when it warms up. If it is your exhaust, that’s another story and most likely would involve timing or a sticky exhaust valve.

      The first thing I would do is check the position of the choke when cold. Before you start your car, remove the breather and open the throttle to allow the choke to close. If it doesn’t snap closed fully, there’s your problem. Check to see if you can close the choke all the way (there should be a slight opening about 1/8th to 1/4 inch when fully closed) by pressing it closed. If this is the case, buy a can of spray carb cleaner and hose the linkage. If the problems persist, you’ll probably have to grab a buddy (or mechanic) who know a little more about old cars and get him to help.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: California AIR System

      I have a 1967 firebird with a 326ci with a 4 bbl carter carb and it had factory air. the car has a smog pump which i tried removing but the heads had holes in them that had hoses coming out and joining to some sort of object in the middle then in turn connected to the smog pump which had a hose connecting to the air filter. i tried plugging the holes in the heads but the engine would just starve for air when i tried turning the car on, and it would make a weird popping noise when i kept them unplugged could anybody help me with these problems?

      A: Concerning your AIR pump. First off, let me start out by saying that the AIR system you are refering to came on California Firebirds only, and is somewhat rare. If you plan to remove it, keep it intact, and that includes the vent tube from the right rocker to the air cleaner, and the air cleaner as well. (If you are just going to toss it, let me know and I’ll purchase it from you at a fair price.) You can remove the AIR system from your car and run without it. All Pontiac heads from 1967 have the holes in the heads that you are refering to. Non-AIR equiped cars have ‘plugs” which are screwed into the heads. Remove the AIR pump and associated plumbing. Screw in the plugs into both heads, and plug the the inlet on the underside of the air cleaner. That’s it. If the engine was starving for air, it wasn’t because you plugged the AIR ports in the heads. Look for another problem. The AIR system is masking it.

      Key Words: AIR, A.I.R., emissions, CARB, Air Injector Reactor

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Cam for a 1968 400

      I’m trying to track down the stock spec’s for the cam in my 1968 Firebird 400 conv. It has no performance upgrades that I am aware of, any help? Lift, duration, lobe sep, etc.

      A: Actually the stock cam options for the standard 400 on 1968 birds was the 067(400 std AT and manual), 068(RA-I AT; 400HO manual), 744 (RAI-4speed) and 041 (RA II AT and manual)

      Side Notes: 066 was only used on standard 1967 auto 400 firebirds. 400 std autos were ‘upgraded’ to the 067 cam in 1968. Interestingly, the 400 HO auto cars did not receive the cam upgrade (to 068) that the 400 HO manual cars received. Instead the auto 400 HO cars used the stock 067 cam in 1968. Also of interest, the RA I auto cars were ‘downgraded’ to use the 068 cam (vs the hotter 744 cam used on RA I auto birds in 1967).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Chevrolet Engine into a Firebird

      I have recently bought a 1967 Firebird that rotted outside my bedroom window since I was 13. Now I am all grown up and own that car but there is no engine. It has the origional 400 transmission and I have a 1969 327 from a Vette but I am not sure it will bolt in as is. Can anyone advise?

      A: It won’t be a direct bolt in as Chevrolet uses a different bellhousing bolt pattern that the rest of it’s corporate sisters (Buick Olds Pontiac). However, there are some relatively cheap adapters orderable from Summit, Jegs, PAW, etc, that will allow you to mate these two together.

      In addition, you will need to get the motor mounts and frame brackets from a Camaro to seat the engine in the car. The matching holes should already exist in the subframe. You will also need Chevrolet accessory brackets for the power steering, alternator, smog pump, etc.

      A: You’ll need to get an adaptor from Summit. It’s not in their catalog, you have to ask for it. It’s about $65. It will allow you to connect a Chevy engine to a Pontiac trans. Then, you will have to reroute the fuel line to the passenger side instead of the driver’s side. And lastly, you’ll need engine mounts to fit a Camaro (most parts stores). Most anything else you run into can be easily remidied. This will get most of it. If you can get a Pontiac engine, you’ll have a lot more low end torque though. Do what I’m doing, I put the chevy engine in just till I find and can afford what I really want, a 455!

      A: Why not just sell the Corvette motor to a Corvette guy and buy a 400 or 455 for the bird. With the extra money you save on motor mounts,adapters,exhaust,carb linkage etc. you could even find a nice running Pontiac motor.

      You dont say how mechanically inclined you are but I have a feeling that if you had to ask this question then you are already over your head as far as an engine swap. Besides your restoration will be worth more if its close to correct. If the car was a true 400 car(the only one that used a 400 trans) then I would suggest looking for a correct replacement.All of this also hinges on the condition of the car in its present state. If it is totally rotted you may want to consider another project.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • WOW. I was searching for a 68 Firebird with a 327 engine, hoping to find my brother’s car of his youth. When he was about 19 or 20 he had a 1968 green Firebird. After about 1 year or so of ownership, he found a perfectly good Corvette 327 engine in a junk yard and decided to install it when it looked like the motor mounts/other were similar. He was successful and even raced the car at Delmar Raceway in DE. The car was quick, but he never won a race as he was placed in Modified Stock competing with some very heavy hitters. If you still want to pursue you installation and would like to know more, contact me and I’ll try to hook you up with my brother. Good luck!

    • Are you referring to only 67 Firebirds when you say “true 400 cars (the only one that used a 400 trans)”? I have a 69 convertible with a 350 HO, 325 HP, RAM Air III and a Turbo 400 trans.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dipstick Problem after Rebuild for 1967

      I just rebuilt a 326 Pontiac motor to put onto a 1967 firebird. Before I had it rebuilt the dipstick was fine like it should be. But when I got the finally put in the car and fired it up the dipstick shoot right out of the the motor. I got out of the car with it still running and started to put it back in the motor but it keeps hitting on the cam. CLICK CLICK CLICK I even order a new tube and dipstick together and put it in. I still have the same problem. I was wondering if you knew what could be the mess up? Thanks

      A: I posted a similar problem on one of the performance years pontiac boards. When you replaced the tube, do you mean the external tube, accessable from the outside of the engine? Sounds to me like your inner tube is bad. You have to pull the oil pan to replace it. To do this you may have to pull the engine or if you’re lucky you can just remove the distributor and jack up the engine to get it off. The lower tube inserts into the block from below. That’s as much as I know since I haven’t actually done this yet, I still have the click click problem unless I put in the dipstick just right.

      A: Your dipstick is hitting the crankshaft and sorry to say I think that the lower portion is bent or missing. You may have to PULL the oil pan to see what is going on down there. You didnt mention if the car has A/C or not. A/C cars use a different dipstick and dipstick tube perhaps you have a short tube and a long dipstick. You can check this by putting the car on level ground and check the oil level on the dip stick. With 5 qts. in the pan you should read about 1/2 qt low on stick.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Distributor Vacuum Advance Valve Assy

      Was the Vacuum Advance Valve (control) only on Firebird’s, or was this also on GTO’s ? Was it installed on any `68 Pontiac with any manual trany ?

      A: The Distributor Vacuum Advance Valve Assy was used on all 1968/1969 Pontiac’s with Manual Trans and the 1967 M.T. A.I.R. engines. # 9773623. It was attached to the RH Rear of the Intake Manifold. The Plastic Cover on the end should be Black. On the RAII engines, this cover was Green (#9794257).

      This should not be confused with the Distributor Vacuum Control which attached to the Distributor itself. Both are available NOS now & then.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dual Diaphragm Distributor

      I am having a problem with a slight backfire and someone told me to disconect one of the two hoses to the distributor. Is this correct?

      A: 68 was the only year for a dual diaphragm (advance /retard) distributor. It was to retard the distributor under certain conditions for emission lowering. A service bulletin was issued for dealers that got complaints to disconnect the retard side. A lot complaints of a slight backfire on coasting downhill and deceleration . Such a tech service bulletin wouldnt be issued today as theres a stiff fine for modifying or removing any emission device Chances are the retard side has been disconnected on yours. Look for a separate vacuum hose nipple on the distributor advance/retard control “thingy”.If its been removed,hope that the vacuum source has been plugged off.

      From the Pontiac Service Information Bulletin:

      [pdfjs-viewer url=/dtb/docs/68-T-2.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/dtb/docs/68-T-2A.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/dtb/docs/68-I-45.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dual Port Advance for 1968

      My 1968 is missing the dual port advance. Is this part necessary?

      A: The purpose for the dual port advance was for early emissons and with the redesign of the 1968 heads that are supposed to sacvange the fuel and air to burn cleaner.

      A: Dual port advance mechanism was actually a retard and advance unit in one can. Tech bulletin I have states that some owners complained of popping in the exhaust due to the retard. Most dealers disconnected the retard and sent the customer on their merry way

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Engine Rebuild

      My new 1968 firebird 400 is burning oil on start up. I think I’ve got some time left before she’s real bad. So I’m starting my research now on rebuilding my motor. There’s several issues that have come up and I would like some clarification…If you can…

      1) I have been told that a chevy engine will not fit the bell mountings and that the motor I most likely have…the original…is an oldsmobile engine…is that true?

      2) I’d like to rebuild myself…I found pistons, valve rods in the yearone catologe…but no gaskets, rings. Is there a better engine rebuild source out there? Will a chevy rebuild kit work?

      3) If I have cylinders reamed, will I need new pistons?

      4) My chilton manual say there are oversized valves available for use in bored out valve guides. Is that true…where do I get em?

      5) If I add high performance cam will I need different valves and valve rods and lifters?

      6) If I change pistons to lightweight, and add a high performance cam is that still stock…you can’t see those items.

      A: In short answer form:

      1) True. Chevy uses a different bolt pattern for bell house mounting. The Pontiac uses what is called the BOP (Buick-Oldsmobile-Pontiace) bolt pattern, Cheby is …well, Chevy. The Pontiac 400 is Pontiac specific. Not the same as any other 400 by anyone. Only Pontiac parts fit.

      2) See answer 1) Check PAW Atuparts Catalogue, Summitt Auto Parts.. Check into any hot rod type magazine to locate rebuild parts. Very common stuff..

      3) If you “ream” The cylindes, I assume you mean reaming the ridge at the top of the cylinder. No new pistons are required. If, however, you mean to HONE or OVERBORE the cylinders, then new pistons are needed.

      4) Maybe. It depends on the cam. Each cam manufacturer has recommendations. If you stay streetable, then stockers willprobably work fine. If you want something special,……. You have to pay to play.

      5) Usually, stock means stock, from the factory. If you are referring to STOCK class at the dragstrip, the sponsoring raceing organization has a set of rules that define exactly what stock is. In NHRA stock class, some aftermarket cams are still considered stock. Lightweight pistons are usually not stock. If you are referring to street or bracket racing… Well what ever is under the hood is whatever you say is under the hood. Caveat Emptor! Let the Racer beware! *smiles*

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Engine Rebuild (Revisited)

      I’m looking for feedback/suggestions on rebuilding my 326 HO. I am restoring the car to as close to original as I can, but would like to get a few more horse power. I will be keeping the stock (points) ignition, headers are not an option, stock carter AFB 4bbl, stock intake. Given this, are there any suggestions on bore,cams, heads(port/polish), lifters ect… or should I stick with stock rebuild? would like part #’s and specs to give to machine shop. Is the extra $200 they want to balance it necessary? The shop says they will use a cadillac rear seal, will this work with no leaks? open to any ideas/critisizm.

      A: As I’m sure most expert motor builders will tell you, the key to making good horsepower is to make the engine breath. Having said this and knowing your limitations on the stock exhaust and intake, there are still a couple of this you can do to give the car a little more zip…

      1) Camshaft. This will be the least expensive purchase you’ll make. Mainly because your going to replace it anyway. I would look for a good grind that make most of it’s power at the lower rpms… say, idle to 4000. Since your motor will stat to choke down at the higher RPM due to your restrictions, a cam designed for higher RPMS will most likely reduce your engines performance. Also, consider matching the grind with the head characteristic (see #2)

      2) Heads: here is where the power comes from. A mild pocket porting job on the intake bowls will help reduce the restrictions and help to obtain more flow or at least as much as the exhaust manifolds can handle.

      Have the heads plained to obtain a 9.5 to 10:1 compression ratio (you may already be here since they are the original heads). This is kind of on the high side for cast heads and today’s pump gas but you will be OK with premium fuel as long as you don’t advance the timing too far (see 3).

      Install hardened exhaust valve seats to reliably run unleaded gas.

      3) Pistons: 0.030 over bore with flat tops. You’ll need to calculate the total volume of the cylinder and head chamber to obtain the proper compression ratio. Too much compression means you’ll have to use an av-gas or racing fuel blend to prevent detonation.

      4) Block: decking the block is another way to increase the compression but may not be advisable with your current heads. I would figure out what the current compression ratio is and discuss this with a local motor builder (preferably one who builds racing motors) and then decide which way to go (decking the block vs plaining the heads).

      5) Balancing: This is very gray area when considering your limitations. Balancing the components will help the motor to run smoother but at the lower RPMS the benefit are small. I would ask the mechanists to weight match the pistons and rods (use the heaviest piston on the lightest rod and vice-a-versa to get the best “overall” balance and let it go at that.

      6) Cadillac Main Seal: I’ve never done it but it sounds like a great idea. There was a god article in the December 98 High Performance Pontiac magazine about this topic and I will try it on my next rebuild.

      7) Engine Tuning: Once the motor is together, try experimenting with different jetting. You may be able to increase the jet size by a couple of notches because of the larger camshaft and better breathing heads.

      8) Other stuff: There is literally no limit to what you can do to squeak out a few more horses: Hotter coil, performance points, low resistance spark plug wires, K&N air filter, high flow mufflers and exhaust, etc. Pick up a Summit or Jegs catalog and let your fingers do the walking.

      If you want max HP and still have the stock look, consider having the intake and exhaust manifolds extrude honed. This is a process where they forcibly push an abrasive compound through the ports to open them up and remove restrictions. Kind of radicle but some of the limited late model racers use it to improve the flow on mandatary stock components.

      Well enough from me. How about some additional tips (or rebuttals) from the rest of you guys???

      A: Regarding tips for more horsepower, if youve got some money:

      We went with a set of those aftermarket edelbrock heads for several reasons:

      1. from what I understand, a well ported set of stock pontiac heads will flow about 240 cfm, while the edelbrocks flowed close to 300 right out of the box. Ported, they flowed way over 300 cfm.

      2. Many pontiac heads flow well only to a certain level of lift, after which a larger lift cam does not help flow. The edelbrocks continued to see increases after .600 inches of lift, allowing a large roller cam.

      With those things said, we had some problems all you considering this upgrade might want to hear:

      1. Our eldelbrock torkers ports did not match with the heads, and so the manifold had to be milled. (Strange since both were new and the heads were not shaved, and the parts were made by the same company.) Although the intake would have bolted on, we would have lost some power.

      2. since the edlebrock has the round port configuration on the exhaust, youll have to locate some factory style Ram Air IV manifolds or try to find some hedders (which is very hard) We had to settle for some hedders that were incompatible with air conditioning and power steering. We also had to cut a hole in the fender well to get one of the primaries that went outside of the frame to fit, as well as a little banging on the primaries.

      3. if you want to run more agressive than stock ratio rockers, the heads have to be modified for valvetrain clearance.

      Although all this might sound daunting, the heads were well worth it, as we made 570 dynoed hp @ 5800 rpm, with lots of good old low end pontiac torque. (576 under 5000 rpm)

      Finally, DO NOT run copper head gaskets with these heads, as they may leak. Our motor had to be torn down because it had water in the oil the first time we ran it on the dyno.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Engine That Sat for 5 Years

      What is the precedure for an engine that was rebuilt and then left sitting five years with no break in period?? It was only started at the rebuilders shop and i need to know what steps I should take to get it loosened up and ready to run. I know that the fuel system needs to be cleaned and carberator rebuilt.

      A: My procedure is as follows:

      – Remove all the spark plugs
      – Using a piece of tubing on the end of a oil pump can, get 2-3 squirts of HD 30 motor oil into each cylinder -With the spark plugs out, crank the motor and watch the oil pressure gauge. It should start to register SOME oil pressure. Do this 2-3 times, not cranking for more than a minute and allowing at least five minutes between each sequence to allow the starter to cool. If you don’t have a pressure gauge, remove the valve cover and make sure oil starts to flow out of the rocker arms.
      – Once you are sure that oil is flowing, re-install your plugs and wires.
      – If your distributor was installed correctly and your points are good, the motor should fire and run.
      – While running, listen for any lifter noise. The rocker arm clacking should begin to quiet down as the motor comes up to temperature and the lifters pump up.
      – If everything goes well, all your should have to do is the final timing and dwell settings.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Filler Panels

      What models received the filler panels in the engine compartment?

      A: As the others have said, the panels came on A/C cars and 400’s. Last time I visited Fabulous Firebirds, a used parts dealer in Missouri,they had some on the shelf that just needed a little paint. (Real GM sheet metal, not fiberglass). Call Charlie at Fabulous Firebirds…..573-783-5702. Hope that helps.

      Only Sprints with A/C, which was the 3.8 Litre cars in the 1967 model year. The base 68-69 OHC6 4.1 Litre engines with one-barrels and A/C would also have the panels, as my 1969 OHC6 coupe with factory A/C has.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Firebird Throttle Cables 1968 / 1969

      I need help finding a throttle cable for a 1968 400. What one is correct?

      A: Well, it seems there are some out there selling NOS cables as something they are not.

      INFO I’VE DISCOVERED (*thanks to all who’ve shared*)

      ORIG. GM PART NUMBERS:

      9792222 1968/1969 F-6 1Bbl, F-8 2Bbl
      ***YELLOW TAG***
      Total Length End-to-End:    19.5"
      Case Length:                13.5"
      (((This one is apparently still avail. from GM for approx. $25)))
      
      9792223 1968/1969 F-6 4Bbl
      ***BLUE TAG***
      
      9792224 1968/1969 F-8 4Bbl
      ***WHITE TAG***
      Total Length End-to-End:    18.0"
      Case Length:                12.5"
      

      Now, in order to confirm all of this, it would be nice if any owner’s could measure their cables/cases. This includes all of the above… 4Bbl V-8, 2Bbl, 1Bbl I have a few pictures that I’m trying to get on the Generation-1 WebSite for comparison but AOL has been a real annoyance lately in updating info. Anyhow, if the updates come through, they’ll be at the following site:

      http://members.aol.com/Framair/TechTips.html

      Thanks again to all who’ve helped out on this one. Sharing this sorta information will help to educate all of us (me included) on ‘Bird Parts.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Firewall Difference Between AC and Non AC for 1968

      I’ve been working on my 1968 Firebird. The car originally had AC, but most of the components were not reinstalled when someone swapped the 6cyl for a V8. I’m not concerned with the car being original so I’m not going to try to put AC back on it. The heater blower motor case for my car also housed the evaporator core (I think that is what it is called). I was hoping to use the much smaller heater blower motor case off of a non-AC car, but according to the Ames catalog it “won’t work on any car which was originally equipped with AC”. Can someone tell me what is different about the firewall between cars with and w/o AC…. or can I make the non-AC case fit on my car?

      A: The holes in the firewall are different for A/C cars. The hole for the A/C is about 6″ wide and 11″ tall. The heater only firewall is about 14″ long and 5″ tall (all dimensions are very approximate). Narrow tall vs short long… so to speak.

      I had a 1969 400 that someone removed the A/C box and replaced it with a standard heater. He simply took a piece of sheet metal and covered the original hole (using silicone and pop rivets and cut a new hole the shape he needed. The heater cover will bolt right up after drilling a couple of new mounting holes. He painted the firewall all the same color and overall, it didn’t look too bad.

      If you decide you want to do this and need the heater box and controls (different on non-A/C cars) let me know. I got a couple I’ll let go CHEAP.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Heads (061’s) for 1967

      Anyone know what kind of compression bone stock 1967 061 400 heads will give me?? iam getting conflicting information about them, some say they are open chamberd and other are saying there not.

      A: The 1967 061’s are indeed an open chamber head, they are the original put out as sort of a prototype, and they are unlike any before or since. The chamber is very open, but the chamber measures out to about 72 cc’s… It also has 2.11 int and 1.77 ex valves…. The down side is that it has press in studs which aren’t as reliable, but you can convert them cheap, relatively. These are probably the cleanest chambered head… I asked George Hanks about this set of heads, who has personally worked with these… he said

      ” the #061, used on grocery getter 400s in 1967. I’m convinced that this head was the prototype for the later production open chamber heads, but the Pontiac engineers learned something on this head that they incorporated into all of the round port performance heads of the RA-II, IV, HO, and SD-455 heads. While the 061 still has the A.I.R. bosses in the exhaust ports, the chamber is the most open of any of the production heads. There is almost no ridge across the chamber, as two separate cuts were used during the machining process, and the spark plug hole is located in the highest possible portion of the chamber. In addition, the rear or squish wall of the chamber is laid back to a 60 degree angle, producing a true polyspherical chamber, with an absolute minimum of squish area. These heads have been ignored for years, primarily because they did not fit into any of the NHRA performance engines, and they had pressed in rocker studs. The A.I.R. bosses clog up the exhaust ports, and within the old non-porting rules of NHRA, nobody cared, but with some porting and screw-in studs, this head will knock your socks off. It doesn’t flow any better than any other D-port head, but the conversion of fuel to cylinder pressure is just as good as the RA-IV heads.”

      If you get a copy of Pontiac Musclecar Performance 1955-1979 by McCarthy, it will tell you about these heads, good reference for part numbers, heads blocks, etc… 061’s are also mentioned in the H.O. specialties book, “Pontiac High performance Engine design and Blueprint assembly”… That head should give you compression in the realm of 9.8-10.1 with stock pistons… I’d love to have a set of them…. I’ve been looking for those for about a year now..

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Are you still looking for a set of 061 heads? I don’t know how old this post is but I have a set I’ll sell you.

      Attachment

    • I have a set in excellent condition and ready to install. If you are still looking, let me know and i’ll send you pictures and more info

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Heads for 350 2-bbl converted to 4-bbl

      A: With regard to the original post about cam selection for a 350 2-bbl converted to 4-bbl, I would suggest the Pontiac 067 or Summit 204/214 cam which was offered by someone on the list. I would go NO HIGHER than the 204/214 for your application, since you specifically wanted low end torque and gas milage. In fact I think the Summit 204/214 is probably a great bet for your needs.

      A: Well put. Pontiac engines like a wide lobe center, in the region of 110 to 114 degrees. This will give you better idle characteristics compared to a cam with simular lift and duration, but with a tighter lobe center.

      In addition, the port design in Pontiac heads favor low lift figures, which is why you see the factory cams with lift figures of .406″ (the exceptions are the “44” cam with .410″ and “041′ with .518”). Adding more lift is waste of time since the port design doesn’t flow any better at higher lifts.

      It is said that Malcolm McKellar, an engineer at Pontiac in the 50s and 60s believed that higher lifts reduced the reliability of the engines with higher stresses on the valve train. He felt that lower lifts, along with port designs that favored efficiency at low speeds woul still make good power, but not at the price of valve train failure.

      That, and the restricive exhaust ports demanded a balance between the intake and exhaust side.

      As Steve suggests, either go with a Pontiac high performance grind, or an aftermarket cam that is very close. And read the Jim Hand information. He is the guru of Pontiacs, and he’s done all of the testing and experimentation for us.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Kick Down Switch

      Where did you get this switch? I’ll have to double check, but I’m almost positive that mine is missing… and will need that with my 455! Just wondering where I can find it?

      A: The part is by BandM, Summit part no. BMM-20297. It’s listed on page 159 of Summit’s catalog that was good through June 30, but you’ll have to check the web for a picture. Just search with that part number at http://www.summitracing.com.

      The kit is intended to be used with an existing TH350 bracket when you swap in a TH400. I already had a TH400 and no bracket at all, so I had to fab a mounting bracket and a small piece to attach it to the throttle. Not tough if you’re handy with tools. The linkage is adjustable and very forgiving for differences in mounting methods.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Low Oil Light on New Engine

      Just started the new motor in my 1968 bird. I am running a grind cam, hydraulic lifters, and a summit cheapy oil gauge. I have two problems. 1 there are 2 collapsed lifters that never pump up, and low oil pressure at idle (if the gauge is good).

      1. Would a bad lifter cause low oil pressure? or vice versa? 2. What else could I have done wrong on the assembly? are there any oil plugs that I don’t know about?

      A: I don’t know if this is your problem but it is one thing to look for from my experience. I put a new cam in my 350. After this I had verrrrry low oil pressure (5 PSI at idle) for about 300 miles. I talked a guy at my local speed shop and he said that I probably scratched a cam bearing when I installed it (which I probably did because I did not use an installation tool like one should). He also said that after break in the oil pressure should come back. He was right. The car is now running good oil pressure.

      I’m by far not an expert but I don’t think a collapsed lifter would cause low oil pressure but I’d think that low oil pressure could cause a collapsed lifter.

      I can’t think of any oil plugs or anything else that could cause low pressure. My guess is that you have a scratched cam bearing.

      A: Your lifters may not be bad. They may not have been properly primed before you installed them. Before you disassemble your motor try this:

      1) Completely loosen your non-oiling rockers
      2) Use the push rods like a straw and with a pump style oil can, fill the push rod with oil.
      3) Oil the rocker and reassemble then adjust your lash (do not torque them down at this point).
      4) Start your motor and allow it to run.
      5) If the lifters are OK it should start to pump oil (if the rockers clatter, adjust until quiet).
      6) As the motor warms the rocker will start to clatter, adjust until the clatter stops.
      7) repeat step (6) until the stud nut bottoms out.
      8) Re-torque to 20 ft-lbs.

      This worked for me when I had a couple of non-oiling lifters on a stored motor. Good luck.

      A: I had the same problem and discovered that the oil gallery plugs had been removed when the block was cleaned. There are two behind the timing chain cover at the end of the lifter galleries and one in the at the back of the block. The rear plug is a screw in type located behind an expansion plug. The condition described exactly matches the problem I had once I had discovered/installed the front plugs, but not the rear. The engine would run, but the last two lifters just would not pump up.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Motor Mounts Left vs. Right

      There is a difference between left and right motor mounts. I don’t think that Ponchos used different mount for small or big block, but I know that Chevy does use different mounts for small and big block in the 1st gen. Cramo.

      A: Whats a small block Pontiac??? An Iron Duke 2.5??? Sorry but it makes my skin crawl when i hear “small block Pontiac” All V-8 blocks were the same size from 55-79 there were a couple of variations like short deck 303,or low deck 301 but they all have the same basic block configration. Therefore there are no small block Pontiacs.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: New Engine Break-in

      I just got my Firebird back out after rebuilding it. It’s awesome when it idles you can hear the cam. If I’m cruizin at 30mph and I put my foot all the way on it – the tire spins. If I get on it from a stand still it spins all the way from first into 3rd. It dont let up till I do.

      A: Thats not the way I would breakin a fresh motor. Have you changed your oil & filter yet?

      Heres what i do:
      – Run engine for 30 minutes high steady idle to breakin cam
      – Drain oil and change filter, run 500 miles using new car breakin rules.
      – Change oil and filter again.
      – First few miles should be a light throttle then coast light throttle then coast.

      This process will help in seating rings. NO full throttle blasts…. I know its tempting but its proven that the infancy of a fresh engine will pretty much determine its life. Have fun and make it last.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Oil Dipstick Tubes For the 1968 400

      What is the correct tube for a 400?

      A: After some research into the question of oil dip stick tubes for the 400 firebird I found that it has three tubes.

      The first is in the oil pan, the block to baffle tube, a short curved piece about five inches long and copper in color. The second is about nine inches long and ever so slightly curved, which extends from the outside of the block to the third and final section. Lastly, the third tube runs up from the end second tube to where it itself ends, just above the rocker cover. The dip stick itself is inserted and held into the third tube, which has a small bracket that attaches to the front outside rocker cover bolt. The GM numbers for these are as follows: block to baffle #546281 9″ curved (GM calls it straight) #9795830 upper #480843

      I was able to purchase all but the upper of these at my local pontiac dealer. That one they stocked, but were temporarily out of.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Oil Filter Replacement

      The part catalogs do not go back far enough anymore and I did not write down the number I needed. Does anyone know what is the correct replacement for our oil filters?

      A: Use A/C filters PF-24.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Oil Pressure is Low

      I just rebuilt my engine and installed a new mechanical oil pressure gauge. It shows I am running with very low oil pressure. Can I still drive it to break it in and hopefully solve the oil pressure problem on its own?

      A: First off… this is your motor and your money so you need to do what’s best. Running a motor with low or no oil pressure is VERY damaging. This is only a suggestion for something to check. ..

      You mentioned it’s a new mechanical gauge. Is there a lot of air in the line? If so, lower pressures may not register until you sufficently compess the air… i.e., “Pressure about 60 lbs at 3500 rpm estimated”. Try bleeding the line to remove the air.

      Once you have established you have oil pressure at idle the next suggestion applies… It’s not uncommon for new motors to have problems getting oil to the rockers. If the lifters were not primed properly they will not pump. Here is something that worked for me. Loosen the rockers and slid them to the side. Use a pump can with oil and fill the pushrod. Slid the rocker back and tighten until you cannot twist it between your fingers. Do not torque them.

      Once all the pre-oiling is completed, start the motor and see it they start pumping. Thighten until they stop clattering — one at a time in 1/4 turn increments. If they are still pumping, keep tightening. Once you bottom out, you can torque the nut. Be aware that this is VERY messy. I used cardboard to fill the gap between the head and fender and fender covers to keep it off my car as much as possible.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Oil Recommendation

      What oil is recommended for my 1968 engine.

      A: My 1968 owner’s manual says that non detergent oils are specifically not recommended. It recommends the following SAE Viscosity Numbers:

      Above Freezing (32deg.F.)………………… 20W or 10W-30
      Below Freezing (32deg.F. and above 0deg.F.) …10W or 10W-30
      Below 0deg.F……………………………..5W or 5W-20

      All high output (H.O.) engines require the use of SAE #30 oil in the summer (above 32deg.F.) and SAE 5W-20 oil in the winter (below32deg. F.)

      SAE 5W and 5W-20 oils are not recommended for sustained high speed driving.
      SAE 30 and SAE 20W-40 oils may be used at temperatures above 90deg.F.
      SAE 5W-30 oils may be used at temperatures below 32deg.F.
      SAE 10W-40 oils may be used at temperatures between 0 and 90deg.F

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Oil Spraying Out of Dipstick

      I just recently purchased a 1967 bird with a 400 and an automatic tranny. It needs some work but for the most part is all original. The motor has 670 heads and is a YT.

      The engine seems to have a lot of power but when I rev it very high I get oil thrown out of the dipstick tube onto my exhaust manifolds. I suspect the bottom end of the tube is missing or the windage? tray is not installed. I am the third owner of the car. The second owner told me that the engine had been rebuilt. Bored .40 and bigger cam installed, heads have been redone.

      A: Oil spray out of the dipstick tube could mean excessive blow-by (i.e., the rings are gone or broken ring). Run a compression check before you break the motor down.

      A: I had the same problem when I installed after market valve covers. I was waiting delivery on a oil breather, and since I had just installed headers and a RPM performer manifold I didnt want to wait for it, so I just blocked the cover off and took it out for a run. Guess what, oil shot out the dipstick due to back pressure. Suggestion to original question. Make sure there is a clean unblocked breather on one of the valve covers.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Original Oil Filter

      Wanted to know if anyone knew anything about PF23 AC oil filters. I ran across a NOS one that is white with blue stripes and red AC logo on it. On the box the only application listed is 1967 Pontiac V-8. I am sure it was superceded by the PF24. The 1967 Firebird parts manual supplement that is dated effective February 1967 lists only the PF24, the 72 Pontiac master parts catalog lists all PF24, no PF23 for anything. What would be correct for a 1967 bird built third week in May if it just rolled off the assembly line????

      A: Just curious as to why you want an original oil filter, be it a PF-23 or PF-24. To be 100% correct as it was at the showroom fresh off the assembly line it would be painted PMD metallic blue. The AC identity would be obscured. There are lots of reproduction AC filters out there. Go to K Mart buy the latest AC filter and paint it PMD metallic blue. I wouldnt run an 30 year old design filter on a $20K restored car anyway. No more than using 30 year old oil. Just trying to save an engine an some money.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: PCV Purpose

      Is the PCV valve required for crankcase ventilation if I have a breather in my valve cover?

      A: The purpose of the PCV is to ventilate the crankcase of by-pass gases and while helping to prevent any positive pressure buildup which will blow oil past seals and out your dip-stick tube. These gases contribute to oil breakdown and internal varnishing. Using your intake vacuum as a source, the gases are “pulled” from the crankcase. Just having a vented breather is not enough to properly ventilate the crankcase.

      Q: Ok so I have to have the PCV valve (I was hoping you would say I didn’t!) Does it have to be located in the valley pan or can it be in the valve cover? I bought a replacement valley pan made out of rolled aluminum and it doesn’t have a hole for the pcv valve. Also. isnt the PCV valve a piece of smog equipment? What did early cars say from the 50’s have for crankcase ventilation?

      A: Installing one in the valve cover will work fine. Before PCV valves, most motors had an open vent tube coming from the lifter galley. Typical on early SBC was a vent pipe the attached behind the distributor to the block. The other end had a “baffle” at the back of the lifter galley. On a weak motor, you could see the blue smoke coming out of the vent tube under the car. Imagine the smell! And by the way… another reason the have a PCV valve is to help reduce engine blow-by odors and fumes inside the car.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Removing Engine

      I now have a question. Am I going to be able to pull the motor without also removing the trans or should I remove the motor and the trans toghether? Or, better yet, what is the easiest way to get the motor out? Now please remember, I am a rookie at this. This will be my first engine removal.

      A: In my opinion it’s easier to remove the motor with the trans all at once. Just remove the trans cross member, radiator and the distributor and you’ll be ok. The fan makes it kinda tight but it should come out without taking it off.

      NOTE: Make sure that you mark the position of the rotor when removing the distributor and make sure that you don’t turn the engine after you’ve removed it. If you do turn it then you will have to find TDC on cyl. #1 and set the distributor to that. Just put the distributor back in after removing the engine if possible.

      I used one of those plates that bolts up to the intake manifold and used the rear lifting hole with the cherry picker. You may want to use one of those lifting bars that has a handle and allows you to shift the center of the lift. The only issue is that you need to use chains bolted to the front and rear of the engine for that (no biggie but ….).

      Put blankets or other things on your fenders to protect them from getting scratched or bangged up.

      A: I pulled mine in one piece – engine and tranny. But I did have the front end off of mine. I would recommend removing it anyway, if you’re doing compartment detailing. It comes off in about an hour. Unplug the lights, remove the radiator-to-fender gussets, unbolt the hood latch-to-radiator, four bumper support bolts and it comes off in one big piece. The core support is held in by four bolts.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Runs Great then Quits

      My problem is my 1968 – 350 runs great in the garage but stops on me under power or extended road work. It can go for days without shutting down and then when I think the problems solved, wham! The motor will sometimes start right back up (sometimes rolling in neutral) or I may have to wait five to twenty minutes. This has been happening for six weeks. I have tested or replaced the following.

      1. Fuel pump, flex lines, Carb. Note: No residue in carb fuel line filter

      2. Complete tune-up with points, condenser, rotor, cap, wires & coil.

      Note: Dwell & timing stay perfect. Anyone out there with an idea.

      A: It sounds like you’ve been guessing instead of diagnosing. The next time it quits and stays dead, check for fuel and ignition. If fuel, it may be vapor locking in the steel line, or a fuel pump that’s weak. Could also be a problem with the tank, maybe there’s not enough venting, causing the tank to have a vacuum in it preventing the fuel pressure from being maintained. Ignition is likely to be a bit easier to troubleshoot, unless it’s something weird like a loose wire in the ignition circuit or such.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Severe Miss When Cold

      I’m trying to track down a miss during warm up on my bird. In the past, I could start the car when cold and drive away, it would run fine. I’ve noticed a miss that has progressively gotten worse after each day, spanning over the past months. I’ve replaced the distributor cap, rotor, plugs and points but no change. The car starts fine, but it randomly misses, getting better when it warms up. Once at operating temp, it seems to run fine but you can hear it miss a little randomly. Under heavy acceleration there is no stalling of performance, hot or cold. I doubt it’s the carburetor (Edlebrock 650) because the car seems to run fine after warm-up, just a random miss.

      One thing. The timing is set really advanced, about 14 degrees BTC. I’ve been running it that way for a number of years. If I set it to 9 degrees there is no power. Also, the manifold vacuum is 18 and steady when hot.

      Any tips on what to look for would be helpful.

      A: check for vacuum leaks check or replace plug wires replace fuel filter

      A: I suspect you don’t have enough choke action. Either insufficient spring tension, sticky linkage, or too much choke pull-off. Generally lean when cold. If you set the timing back it would probably pop back through the carb with all else the same indicating it’s lean.

      A: Change the plug wires. The wires are more than likey breaking down when cold since more current is needed then. A good set of Delco wires should do the trick.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sluggish Motor

      I am experiencing a problem with my motor running sluggish. While accelerating it runs fine but when you ease off to a cruising or constant speed, it seems as if it is missing and surging. I have replaced plugs, wires, points and condensor, and even taken the carb off and made sure there is no vaccum leak to the manifold. I am stuck! The only thing that I remotely have left is the distributor. Could this be the problem? Has anyone experienced anything like this? I appreciate any help.

      A: Two things come to mind.First if there is excessive ignition advance it can cause the problem you describe.To find out,try disconnecting the vauum advance hose and plugging it then test drive the car.If it is now O.K. check the initial timing, amount of centrifugal advance and amount of vacuum advance.It is unusual but I have seen the internal limit “stop” in the vacuum advance can break allowing the rod to move way too far.You will need a vacuum pump and a “dial-back” timing light to do this check.The other thing is if it is running too lean a fuel mixture at cruise it will cause a surging condition (it would be better under acceleration due to the power system) This is a little trickier to test for.The easiest way would be with a gas analyzer which the average person doesn’t have access.A crude way of finding out is remove the air cleaner and plug and vacuum hoses removed then run the engine at 2000-2500 rpm (engine must be warmed up and choke fully off) Now partially resrict the air horn either with your hand or by partly closing the choke valve and see if the rpm increases.If the rpm picks up sharply and the motor sounds smoother you likely have too lean a mixture.The reason may be a number of things which I could only guess at with out more info.This test is admittedly a bit crude and requires a bit of experience to interpret the results of.

      A: If your car has a Quadrajet, your throttle slide (the little brass cylinder that pulls your metering rods up and down) may be sticking. This happened on a 350 I had. Try pulling the top off of the carb and us a Scotchbrite pad to buff it up and see if that helps.

      A: I found the problem with the motor surging on my bird. I pulled the distributor and found a wire to be dangling off of the vaccuum advance module. I dont know what purpose this wire served but one end had a screw which held it onto the module itself and the other end was bare just laying in the bottom of the distributor. I went to a local salvage yard and picked up an HEI distributor for 20 bucks and installed that in the car. (Much better than points system). Didn’t even have to beat the firewall in, went right in. I am soooo relieved. I was starting to think it was something mechanical. I thank everyone for the help you have given me.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Small Block Chevy in a 1968

      I’ve just been offered a hard to refuse buy on a almost new custom built Chevy 350, 350 HP street engine (trust me – for the price you would consider it too). My ’68s 2 bbl is tired and needs a rebuild. The engine currently in the car is correct Pontiac but not numbers matching, nor is the transmission (I don’t have either of the originals). So I’m thinking about putting in the Chevy. I know some of you have done this, so what’s you’re experience? What do I have to do to make it work?

      A: Given that the Firebird chassis shares so much with the Camaro, an SBC goes in quite easily. You need the following:

      – Camaro engine frame mounts. Easily found at any source that sells Camaro stuff. Classic Industries, National Parts Depot, Year One, etc. Plus the rubber/steel engine mounts.

      – Accessory mounts. You need Chevy brackets for the power steering, alternator, and A/C if so equipped (can’t remember if your car is so equipped).

      – Accelerator stuff. This gets a bit tricky. The 1967-1969 Camaros used a rod linkage for the throttle, as did the 1967 Firebirds. The 1968 and 1969 Firebirds and other Pontiacs were ahead of the pace by using cable linkages. You need to change your linkage to the Camaro variety, which should utilize the existing holes in your firewall. You may need a Camaro or 1967 Firebird gas pedal assembly. I know where you’re likely to find one if needed. You also need whatever throttle/kickdown brackets are appropriate for the linkage and carb you will be using.

      – Fuel line. The Firebird hard line comes up along the subframe from the the tank on the right (passenger) side of the car, then crosses over to the left side along the main front crossmember. The Camaro unit ends just past the crossmember on the right side. You will need to either cut your line, or replace it with the Camaro piece. Cutting the line will of course, make it more difficult to go back to a Pontiac engine.

      That should do it.

      Now, with some searching, I can imagine you should be able to find a recently rebuild or at least good running Pontiac 400, 428, or even 455 for fairly cheap. Probably not as cheap as the Chevy engine you found, but reasonable. Heck, you might even consider a reman. engine from one of the discount parts houses in the area. Pepboys, Kragens, etc.

      Of course, you know I had to add this option. While I’m not a purist, I still dig Pontiacs with Pontiac engines. And your car is too cool to wear a bowtie. And I even own a bowtie car!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Spark Plugs on 1968 – #8 Plug Inaccessible

      I have a 1968 400 with A/C and have never been able to contort my arm just right to get the number 8 plug out because of the close quarters to the A/C. I’ve had to take it to a shop to put it on a lift to get at it from below and even then, the mechanics bitch about it. A couple have said they didn’t think it should be that tough and my engine mounts may be off kilter, but they don’t know enough about Firebirds to know for sure. Anyone else have this problem? Anyone have the measurements I need to verify if my engine is sitting in the right place in the bay? Anyone have any tricks to getting at that #8 plug, I’ve tried everything (from top, from below, through the wheel well) and always end up cursing the thing out.

      A: I have had the same problem on my 1968/350 with air. I have been able to get it out using a spark plug socket and turning the socket with an open end wrench. I have to do it by laying under the car. My arms usually go numb three of four times during this operation from the cramped quarters and working over my head. It is a major pain to get out.

      A: The best plan of attack is to remove the rf wheel and go in through the wheel well.Snap On tools makes a 3/8 drive ratchet in a 1/4 body that works great for stuff like this.I have worn mine out 3 different times from using it so much on the new cars of today. Break the plug loose with a wrench on a short plug socket (they are all not the same) and then use the ratchet to take it out until you can turn the plug with your fingers.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Speedo Cable

      Anyone knew how to disassemble the 1968 AT cable from the casing. I’ve tried pulling the cable out from the speedometer head side but no luck. Does it come out from the transmission side?

      A: My Speedo cable broke a couple of years ago and I pulled it out from the top behind the cluster. I didn’t move the casing of course, just the cable. I also reinstalled a new replacement cable thru the cluster top down to the trans. (Also make sure you oil or grease the cable for smooth gage readings.)

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Speedo Cable Lubrication

      Does anyone of you guys know how to fix my nervous speedo dial? Driving slow or fast doesn’t matter I can’t get a steady reading.

      A: Many times nervous needle is caused by a dry speedometer cable. Try pulling and lubing the inner cable with quality speedo lube and reinstalling. This has fixed my needle problems on 3 different cars. Just looking at a part of a restoration that is sometimes overlooked, and a cable breaking because it is dry is no fun either.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Thermostatic Vacuum Switch (TVS)

      My 1968 400 Firebird has what I believe to be a vacuum switch on the intake manifold and there is at present nothing connected to it. Should there be? One would think there should. I have no idea what to hook up to it as all of my vacuum lines seem to be accounted for. Any helpful suggestions would be greatly appreciated.

      A: Yes, it should be there. Should it be hooked up? If you want it totally stock yes. Is it necessary? Probably not, especially if someone has replaced the vacuum advance unit (regulating vacuum to the distributor) on your distributor and you don’t have a dual port unit anymore.

      If you did want to hook it up, there should be five ports and they go something like this, I think:

      Inputs: Carb Advance, Carb Retard, Manifold Vacuum
      Outputs: Distributor Advance, Distributor Retard

      If you want to hook it up and be sure, get the vacuum line kit from AMES and ask them for directions (if they don’t come with it).

      A: It is what’s known as a thermovacuum switch.When the engine coolant temp is below the temperature rating of the switch certain ports are open to each other allowing vacuum to flow between them.Once the temp rating is exceeded the thermal pellet raises a rod inside & switches the vacuum to different port(s).This switch works very much like a thermostat.They are used for many different purposes on cars,in some cases they delay operation of some device (an EGR valve for example) until operating temperature is reached (to avoid stumbling & “sag”),other times they are used to operate a device only until operating temperature is reached (example- a vacuum operated heat-riser valve).

      A: Here is the text of an article that AME’s FAX’d me. Looks like it was from Pontiac Enthusiast magazine (Vol. 1 No. 2) and was written by Peter Serio:

      Back when emissions systems first appeared on cars, it was almost an instant reaction to open the hood and say, “Who needs this stuff to slow my car down? Let’s rip it out, plug the holes, and go faster!” Years later, it may become mandatory for vehicles manufactured in the early days of emissions systems to have fully functional systems in place. In addition, in concours competition, a deciding factor can be a detailed engine compartment with a correct and operational set of emissions parts. In addition, your car’s drivability could depend on an understanding of how the emissions gear works. In the previous issue of Pontiac Enthusiast, we looked at the 1968-69 manual transmission vacuum advance valve. In the next issue, I will cover the transmission-controlled spark systems used from 1970-72. For now, it’s time to turn to the TVS, or thermostatic vacuum switch.

      The TVS-GM#3016754 is used on all 1968 V8’s and on 1969 V8’s with automatic transmissions. Also, several early production 1969 Ram Air III cars with manual transmissions were built using the TVS and the vacuum advance valve. The 1971 455 HO engine also used the TVS with either transmission.

      In all applications, the TVS serves as a safety device to help prevent overheating. The switch is located at the front of the intake manifold, threaded into the coolant passage. There positions inside the TVS related to coolant temperature. Standard vacuum flow is ported vacuum from the carburetor to the distributor vacuum advance. Whenever the engine coolant temperature rises above 230 degrees F, the TVS switches the distributor advance from ported to full manifold vacuum. This advances the timing about 20 degrees at idle, allowing the engine to cool down to normal operating temperature. After the engine cools, the system returns to ported vacuum.

      If your car does not have the system hooked up properly, it could overheat on a hot day when you’re stuck in traffic, which could reduce the life of your engine. In 1968 the fan shroud become standard for the GTO, whereas in earlier years it was an option on non-air cars. With the idle retarded in 1968 to reduce idle speed emissions, the switch’s purpose was to advance the timing when necessary to allow the motor to cool down, to prevent pinging.

      A manifold connector in the vacuum hose harness to the TVS is used to prevent the hoses from being installed improperly. Note that some of the vacuum hoses in the harness have color-coded stripes running on the supply lines to the TVS. The red-striped hose is manifold vacuum, and the ported vacuum is routed through a small steel pipe forward of the carburetor. The yellow hose (used in 1968 only) is the retard-at-idle-speed vacuum supply.

      There were two different hose harness assemblies used, depending on the year of the car. In 1968 only, with the dual-port vacuum-advance unit attached to the distributor, the idle speed timing is retarded 10 degrees to reduce emissions. After the 1968 models, all distributor-advance units were the standard single-hose-connection style. All the ’68s use the 5-hose vacuum harness, while the 1969 V8’s and ’71 455 HO make use of the 3-hose type. The two extra hoses on the ’68-only harness are the idle-speed retard feature.

      Apparently it did not take long for dealers to receive complaints that some of the 1968 cars idled poorly, and Service Bulletins 68-T-2 (dated 10/16/67) and 68-T-2A (dated 1/4/68) were released. Models affected were the 1968 Firebird, full-size, and Tempest/LeMans/GTO with the 2-barrel carb and automatic trans, plus full-size automatics with the 4-barrel. The complaint was that the second-to-first downshift could clunk badly due to the retarded timing. Manual-transmission cars were unaffected, since the idle speed was higher and you shift your own gears. The procedure outlined in the bulletins basically involves removing the two vacuum hoses that retard the timing at idle; shortening one and connecting it to the two switch holes in a U to keep dirt out of the holes; and readjusting the idle speed. If you have a 1968 2-barrel automatic or full-size 4-barrel automatic, these Service Bulletins would be a nice item to search for.

      A:

        ________
       /        \
      |  (1)     \
      |           \
      |        (4) |
      |            |
      | (2)        |
      |            |
      |        (5) |
      |            /
      | (3)       /
      \_________ /
      

      1. (1) To vacuum port on front of carb (steel routed line)

      2. (2) To “Tee” at rear of carb

      3. (3) To distributor advance

      4. (4 and 5) are looped together at switch.

      A:
      From the 1968 Diagnostic Manual:
      Fig 6D-9 Components of Controlled Combustion System
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/files/FAQ/docs/6D-9.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]
      Fig 6D-10 Distributor Vacuum Layout V-8 2 Bbl.
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/files/FAQ/docs/6D-10.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]
      Fig 6D-11 Distributor Vacuum Layout V-8 4 Bbl.
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/files/FAQ/docs/6D-11.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]
      Fig 6D-12 Vacuum Routing Chart
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/files/FAQ/docs/6D-12.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]
      Fig 6D-13 Vacuum Routing Chart
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/files/FAQ/docs/6D-13.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]
      Fig 6D-14 Vacuum Routing Chart
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/files/FAQ/docs/6D-14.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]

      A: Jim, a list member from the First Generation Firebird-L Mailing List, did research on this compairing all the documents available and put together his findings:
      [pdfjs-viewer url=/files/FAQ/docs/TVS/68VacuumDialog.pdf viewer_height=800px fullscreen=true download=false print=true]

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I have a 69 Firebird with 350 2bbI 350turbo auto granny. It has the TVS with the 5 ports plus the plugged port but it has a rubber adapter that changes the 5 ports to 3 ports. It appears to plug the DR and CR ports and leaves the other 3 ports open. There are only 3 vacuum hoses which attach to the TVS. Any idea why the two regard ports would be plugged off?

      Attachment

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Throttle and Kickdown Hookup for 1969

      Anyone happen to have a picture of how the throttle and kickdown cables hookup to the bracket and the Carb Lever for a 1969 4bbl with TH350? How about a good description? I’m pretty sure I have the throttle cable right but I’m not quite sure how the TH350 kickdown cable hooks up.

      A: The kickdown cable snaps into a square hole on the carburetor side of the throttle bracket. If you don’t have the exact bracket you will have to improvise. A 2bbl one will not work, the cable will be 3/4″ short of the carburetor bracket. The reproduced ones for $80+ are for 1968 and don’t have the necessary square hole for a TH350. If you find a source for a four barrel cable mounted throttle bracket with the TH350 kickdown hole, let me know.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Throttle Cable Bracket Codes for 1969

      I just bought that bracket off eBay and think it may be the wrong one. It appears to have an F2 on it and someone told me he thinks the 1969 firebird 4 bbls have an F4 on em. Is there a difference for automatic or sticks?

      A: The Throttle Cable Bracket fromE-Bay Auction is for a 1969 Firebird 2Bbl application. The “F2” designates 2bbl. The correct Bracket for a 1969 Firebird 4Bbl is 9797415 which is stamped with “F4” (for 4Bbl).

      Since we’re on the subject, sometime in May of 1968, a new Intake Manifold and Throttle Cable Bracket for the 4Bbl Firebird came into production.

      Intake manifold: 9794234
      Throttle Cable Bracket: 9797415 (F4)

      This Manifold was used on late model 1968 Firebirds, GTOs, Full Size models with 4bbl Carbs. Also used on all 1969 models with 4Bbl.

      This set-up superseded the previous manifold/bracket… 1968 Firebird (1st Type up until May of 1968)

      Intake Manifold: 9790140
      Throttle Cable Bracket: 9792242

      I believe that the Throttle Cable Bracket you’re looking for has been reproduced.

      There is no difference in Throttle Cable Brackets for Automatic/Manual Trans.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Throttle Cable Bracket Replacement

      I am changing out the intake manifold and the carb on my 1968 bird and it seems that the throttle bracket would have to be replaced. The intake is an Edlebrock Performer and the carb is an Edlebrock 600 cfm non egr carb… the stock carb is a 2bbl. i wanted to know if anyone has fit one of these carbs on their bird, and what kind of throttle bracket they used. The stock bracket seems to short.

      A: I just did the exact same thing. I installed the Edelbrock Pontiac Performer and the Edelbrock 600cfm carb. I did not have the old original throttle bracket to begin with; just some old homemade bracket that was used on the Holley carb previously on there. The Holley throttle linkage sat much lower and I could not reuse the “homemade” bracket with the new Edelbrock carb.

      What Edelbrock tech support says to do (after I was on hold for 15 minutes) is not quite the right thing to do. They say you need to purchase their Throttle Bracket–Pontiac (’68-’71) P/N #8015 . When you order this and get this, it has instructions telling you how to modify your old original throttle bracket!! Drill here, bend here….NONSENSE! It looks funny AND I did not have one. Besides, the original throttle bracket goes for $75 at Ames! I could NOT BELIEVE that they did not have a universal throttle bracket solution to their own manifold/carb combination!!!

      The answer is to order a Lokar (brand) steel braided 24″ throttle cable and throttle cable bracket (sold seperately). It goes in nice and easy and looks ever so sweet! The Lokar throttle bracket comes with dual throttle return springs. All of it is stainless steel. I found it locally but I believe that Summit Racing sells the same thing.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Throttle Kickdown Switch for 1968

      Can someone provide me with the GM part number for the kickdown switch for a 1968 coupe 400/TH400?

      A: the part number for the kickdown switch is:

      #9785545 (same…. 65-66 P/8 M-40, 1967, 1968, and 1969 F/8 M-40)

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Throttle Problem

      I recently purchased a 1968 Firebird 400. The car seemed to be a dog compared to the other 1968 Firebirds and GTOs I have owned in the past. After doing all the usual tune up tricks I noticed that my accelerator pedal only throws the throttle open half way before hitting the carpet!

      I looked for an adjustment to compensate for the restricted pedal movement or a way to remove the carpet but neither seemed to have an obvious answer. Has anyone else experienced this?

      A: If the carb has ever had really strong spring installed, it very well could have bent the inside linkage. My GTO had this happen. I bent it back and welded on a brace so it wouldn’t happen again. Also, didn’t the Firebirds 400’s have some sort of throttle stop to keep from getting full throttle in order to “lower” the horsepower. That might be when the linkage got bent originally. Someone tried to stomp the pedal to the floor, it hit up against the throttle stop and bent the inside linkage. Just a theory.

      A: After a closer look I discovered that the reason my accelerator pedal was only throwing the carb half open was that the mounting bracket for the pedal was cracked in two.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Timing Adjustment to Fix Overheating Problems

      What are the steps in adjusting my timing to fix the overheating problem.

      A: Here’s the deal on timing, back to basics.

      First, disconnect and block off your vacuum source to the vacuum advance. Its ONLY purpose is to increase gas milage. Next, if you keep your engine at or below 800 RPM you will have no mechanical advance. So now the only timing is due to INITIAL timing. Let’s say you set the spark right at TDC, the flame takes so time to form at “explode” so the force of the explosion happens AFTER TDC, piston is already on its way down, you don’t get much power. So you ADVANCE the timing to whatever gives you the best performance, which is usually between 7-12 degrees BTDC. If you have too much timing and the spark happens too far before the piston reaches TDC, then the force is pushing against the direction the piston is moving and you get detonation or knock. This is BAAAAAD.

      As your engine RPM’s increase, the amount of TIME it takes for the engine to turn say 30 degrees is much faster than at idle, but the TIME is take the flame to burst hasn’t changed. So the timing is increased further by the MECHANICAL advance. Usually adding up to 20-25 degrees of advance to the INTIAL timing, for a TOTAL timing of 32-38 degrees.

      Finally, vacuum advance was added for the purpose of further increasing timing at cruise. Most times it is connected to a ported vacuum sorce. This source has NO vacuum at idle, the most slightly off idle and then decreases to zero again at Wide Open Trottle (WOT). When cruising you can add an additional 15 degrees or more of vacuum advance, bringing your timing up to 55-60 degrees BTDC. This is the one to be careful of, too much and you can get detonation. Always stick to the low side to avoid detonation. Remember, it’s just for gas milage.

      One more thing to touch on. Manifold vacuum is maximum AT IDLE. All other times it acts just like Ported. If you hook your vacuum advance to manifold vacuum you will have 8-12 intial plus 15 or so vacuum for 23-27 degrees BTDC of timing AT IDLE. This will affect temp, though I’m not sure which way. I DO know, that most 1st gen birds came with a TEMP activated switch which actually switched the vacuum advance soure depending on the engine temp in order to keep it cool! The was specifically for long periods at idle.

      Now, lets say your car is set up this way but you SET the timing to 12 degrees WITH the vacuum advance hooked up to manifold vacuum. That vacuum advance can is giving you 15 degrees or more of advance. That would mean your REAL INTIAL timing (without the vacuum advance) would be 3 degrees AFTER TDC, which is way to far retarded.

      Bottom line, turn off the vacuum advance until you figure out the heating problem. Its ONLY purpose is to improve gas milage. Set the INITIAL timing to 8-14 degrees. See if that helps.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Timing Adjustments

      I am having a problem setting my timing on my car to the indicated specifications. What do I need to do to fix the knocking on my HO engine?

      A: I’ve never had that much of a problem with the timing on my 400. But I don’t pay that close attention to the timing at idle. For mechanical advance (with the vacuum advance hose to the distributer removed and plugged), I set the timing at 32 degrees BTDC at about 2600 RPM (you’ll need some timing tape for this). Once you set the mechanical advance, disconnect the vacuum advance hose at the carburator end and hook up a vacuum gauge to the carb that you can put inside the car. Then go out for a little run and write down the maximum vacuum when running at a constant speed with the engine at 2500, 3000, 3500, and 4000 RPM (make sure the road is somewhat flat). Go back and hook up your timing light again, set the engine speed at about 2600 RPM, connect a vacuum pump to the vacuum advance and pump it up to the your max vacuum reading you read in the car. Your total advance should be 50 degrees at this point (that’s what I set mine too, I know people that go higher, but not much). If you have a distributor with adjustable vacuum advance you can adjust it until you get 50 degrees. If your motor is spark knocking you’ll have to back off on the timing until it doesn’t. But that ussually means there is something else wrong, like your vacuum advance is advancing your timing too much, you’re running too lean a fuel mixture at max advance, or you’re running to high of a compression ratio for the fuel you’re using. I think most people run to high compression for street gas. I don’t think you should run more than 9.5:1 on plain old 93 octane. And most people with older cars have compression ratios over 10:1………………………………….spark knock city……………… If the production timing marks weren’t cast right into the timing chain cover, I would have taken them off a long time ago. Timing tape is pretty cheap and alot more accurate. That’s my 2 cents worth anyway.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Timing Adjustments (Revisited)

      A while ago there were a few of you who said that after they set their timing, that a timing light showed it to be WAY advanced, like 20-30 degrees. I think I asked once before but I’ll try again. If you’re not setting it with a timing light in the first place, what are you setting it with?

      A: I originally asked this timing question. I set the timing by ear and feel. I loosen the distributor and advance it until the engine starts to miss, then back the timing off a little. Then I rev the engine and see to see if it pings. If it does ping, I retarding the timing a little rev the engine again. I keep doing this until the pinging is gone or very, very minimal.

      All the mechanics I know never use a timing light and use this method.

      A: The only problem I have ever had with using that method is that with the timing set to run it’s best at 700 or 800 RPM, often it will have too much initial timing to start easily. What I try to do is set the initial by what will start easily (as much as it will take w/out trouble) then adjust the weights and springs to get the total advance I need, and have it start coming in fairly early, like 700 or 800 RPM. It’s a lot of trial and error work, but it has always worked well for me. Then once I have it right I check it with a light and write it down so that I can put it back next time I have the distributor out.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Timing Chain Cover Replacement

      I found the timing chain cover to be crack and a waterpump with bad bearings. My car is a early 1968 with a cast iron waterpump. I understand the timing chain covers and waterpump on 1969 and later are different. Does anyone know if these are interchangable?

      A: 1968 and earlier engines used an 8 bolt water pump and matching timing cover. The 1969 and later use 2 flavors of an 11 bolt pump, and basically 1 flavor of 11 bolt timing cover, part number 482893 or 9796345.

      So, to answer your question, you can convert to the later 11 bolt timing cover as long as you use an 11 bolt water pump, and the matching pulleys. You have to be careful to get the pulleys that match the water pump. There were 2 variants offered in 1969. Basically, get a 1970 or later pump, and get the pulleys and brackets for a 1970 and later V8 and you’ll be OK. All Pontiac V8 timing covers will fit all Pontiac V8 engines.

      Otherwise, look for a 1968 timing cover, part number 9790346. The 1967 V8 has a different part number, 978129, but I don’t know how it differs. 1966 and earlier also have a different number. I believe they differ in the location or appearance of the timing marker. This could also be true with the unique 1967 and 1968 covers as well.

      Some used parts vendors such as Frank’s Pontiac Parts in Ramona, CA, Steve Hanson in northern CA, or even Firebird (Camaro) Specialties have clean used covers for sale. It may be easier to locate a 1968 cover than find a later cover, and get the right pulleys and brackets so that all of your belts line up correctly.

      A: The timing chain cover averages 125.00 or more and mine was pitted also from age and you cant file them down because the pullys will no longer match up so I shopped around and found Jim Butler Pontiac has the best price. That was hard to beat. His web site it http://www.jbp-pontiac.com

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: V-8 Into a 6-Cylinder Compartment

      I have a 400 block built and plan on putting it in the 1967 326. I was wondering what special bracketry I mich need to accomplish this.

      A: If you use all of the bracketry from the 326 motor, you don’t need anything extra. About the only possible hang up is if your block is a 75 or older. After 1970, all Pontiac V8s were cast with 5 holes on each side to allow installation in either early or late chassis. Some 75 and later engines either don’t have all of the necesary holes tapped, or they aren’t present at all. New motor mounts are usually a good thing since after 33 years, the originals are a bit tired. In general, 326, 389, 400, 428, and 455 all interchange.

      Other than that, this should be a simple bolt in. Just don’t try to interchange your 1967 accessories or brackets with any later stuff. You will risk pulley alignment problems.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Vacume Hose Diagram for 1968

      I am in need of the vac hose diagram for my 1968 350 ho with the dual vac advance. No a/c or air pump. The advance has been replaced with a single port which is WRONG so I want to put it back right along with the plumbing. Thanks in advance.

      A: I don’t have a complete answer but maybe this will help.

      There should be a themostatic control switch which mounts on the passenger side of the intake. It will have 5 ports on it. One (DA) goes to distributor advance. One (DR) goes to distributor retard. One (CA) goes to carb advance – I don’t know which this is but I think (??) it is ported vacuum. One (CR) goes to carb retard – I don’t know where this is. The last one goes to to manifold vacuum (at the bottom rear of the carb). If you have an Automatic, the vacuum modulator also goes to manifold vacuum.

      Also, the AMES catalog sells both the control switch ($35) AND correct color vacuum hose kits ($54 – ouch). They also have a pretty good diagram of a 1968 4bbl in their catalog and I’m guessing they send directions with the kit.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Vacuum Hose Diagrams for 1968

      Hello all! I am in the midst of rebuilding my 1968 firebird 400 conv. (little by little). I am working on the engine for now, while I am waiting for my Year One parts to arrive… I read the message a little earlier about overheating. Which unfortunately, my poor car is doing! It mentioned the vacuum advance hose being on ‘manifold’ rather than ‘ported’ vacuum. I was wondering if anyone might be able to point me in the right direction for a Diagram of CORRECT vacuum hose routing (or some dang good pictures), for a 1968 400. It seems the owner before me, decided to just cap off almost every vacuum port available… so this could be one cause of the overheating… ?

      A: Pictures of the diagrams:

      vacuum1

      6869VacuumDiagram

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Valve Adjustment

      I am about ready to put my engine back together but I can not find any information how much to tighten the valves.

      A: The valve adjustment on a STOCK Pontiac is straight forward.Tighten the lock nuts to 20 foot pounds and your are done.Pontiac made it nice and easy.Even with the aftermarket cam I had in my 1967 400 I used this spec and had no problem for the 10 years I drove the car after a rebuild.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Voltage Regulator Mounting on a 1967

      Could somebody please look at their 1967 and tell me how the voltage regulator mounts? I took mine off of project bird over a year ago and am having troubles figuring exactly how it goes back on. The regulator has 3 mounting holes but I can’t seem to get 3 holes on the rad. support that match up. There seem to be lots of holes in the vicinity and one hole has a rubber grommit in it.

      A: The regulator mounts to the hole with the rubber grommet, plus two others that used to have grommets, way up near the top of the support. One of them is actually under the lip when viewed from the front of the car. Holes are about 1/2″ diameter. BTW the rubber grommets have a built in threaded insert that the regulator screws go into, and compress them, sort of like a pop rivet does when you install one.

      A: thanks for your response on the voltage regulator mounting. I found the three holes and even found new rubber bushings with nuts (called well nuts I found out) at Kragens Auto Parts.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • My so and I changed out the 350 to a 454 in my 68 Firebird but we didn’t get to finish connecting everything before he passed from heart problems. Does anyone out there have a picture or pictures from different angles of the location of the external voltage regulator and wires coming from it? My oldest son is gonna help me finish it!

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - H.O. Specific (4)

      Q: 350 H.O. Components

      What components were used on a 350 HO that made it special from a regular 350?

      A:


      TH400 –

      Definitely used on 350HO but TH350 on std 350 engines (if ordered with Turbo Hydramatic)

      Carb –

      7029268 is correct. I bought the same one when I needed a carb.

      Suspension –

      It sounds like you have air shocks. And I don’t think they were used, even in the heavy duty suspension. I looked at the AMA spec (https://FirstGenFirebird.org/firebird/1969/ama/ama_page9.html) and it never mentions air shocks. Probably a previous owner put them on???

      Manifolds –

      I e-mailed Paul Spotts (formerly of Performance Years) and asked him and he too says they used STD manifolds. The casting number I gave you was from the ones on my wife’s car. I was told that they were from 1969-1972 full size car manifolds, based on a “Foundry Parts List”. Sounds like, from your casting dates, that they are correct. Good for you! Oh, one last check might be to see you if you the oil filter adapter that would have to be used if you had the long branch, since they interfere with the normal oil filter location.

      Heads –

      I also asked Paul about this, and he said that they were in fact different for the 350, but that some 400’s (like Judges other Hi-Po cars) may have gotten the 350 #48 heads for even more compression, because of the low demand for the 350HO, and thus having extra parts around the factory.

      Valve Reliefs –

      The 350 HO cars must have had the valve reliefs since the size of the valves, even if they were right next to each other (2.11+1.77=3.88) is larger than the bore of 3.875 (.) But recently I heard it suggested that maybe all 350’s got the valve reliefs so they didn’t have to cast and stock two different type of blocks. Plus I know of people who have put the Large Valve heads on their 1969 350 2-bbl blocks and did not crash the valves, so the must have had the valve reliefs.

      Power Steering Loop –

      Asked Paul about this too. His recollection was that is was used on cars with high numeric gear ratios, like 3.73 or higher, or 3.90 or higher, since they would typically be revving higher, thus spinning the pump faster. What is the rear end gear ratio on your car?

      Cam –

      I’ve only heard lately the story that they used the 744 cam in 350HO cars, but that’s not what the AMA spec says or any other literature I have. 067 cam for Auto, 068 for std trans.

      “Hood Scoop” –

      I noticed this passenger side “hood scoop” that looks like a hood tach on some factory literature too, which also shows it on a lemans. Was supposed to be used for cold air induction. Maybe this falls in with the long branch manifolds….planned but never put into production????

      Side Notes –

      From the picture you sent, I noticed that you still have thermostatic vacumm switch on the intake. That’s good news, I almost never see a car that still has this, the manifold is usually plugged. Also noticed that you are missing the second alternator bracket that seems to duplicate the one from the water pump, but attaches to the front bolt on the thermostat housing.

      If you want some info on my wife’s car, go to:

      http://www.angelfire.com/on/geebjen/jensbird.html

      There is only one picture of the engine compartment there, and it was taken by the previous owner. Since then, I’ve gone to std black plug wires, painted the intake, valley pan, valve covers, brackets, water pump etc, and will be replacing the chrome air cleaner with a factory single snorkel with black lid and pcv vent tube etc. I’m hoping to get some newer pictures of the updated engine compartment soon. When I do, I’ll post them on the site.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: 350 HO Codes for 1968

      What were the possible options and codes on my:
      1968 Firebird 350 H.O.
      L-76 H.O. Engine, 4Bbl Carb, Dual Exhaust, “H.O.” Side Stripes

      A:
      Engine:
      350 H.O. Man. Trans. “WK” 320 H.P. 10.5:1 Compr.
      350 H.O. Auto. Trans. “YM” 320 H.P. 10.5:1 Compr.

      Trans:
      3-Spd. Standard (C/S) Saginaw “RJ”
      3-Spd. Standard (F/S) Dearborn “DB”
      4-Spd Optional Muncie “FX”
      2-Spd Auto ST-300 “MB”
      2-Spd Auto (w/A/C) ST-300 “MC”

      Cylinder Heads: “18”
      Carburetor: M.T. 7028269 A.T. 7028266
      Intake manifold: (same as all 4Bbl) 9790140
      Exhaust Manifolds: (same as Std. & 400) 9794320RH/9777755LH)
      Distributor: M.T. 1111447 A.T. 1111282

      *There were 2,087 400 H.O. Firebirds made in 1968. I’d guess that there were close to that for the 350, perhaps less.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Difference Between a 400 H.O. and Ram Air Firebird

      Whats the difference between a 400 H.O. Firebird vs an identically equipped Ram Air Firebird?

      A: Functional (cold air) ram air induction came on the 1969 RA III. 1968-1969 400HO cars did not have this. Besides this, they are 100% identical (ie ra III did NOT have a different carb settings, cam, heads, exhaust manifolds etc)

      As I recently mentioned, if you wanted all the hardware and performance upgrades that the “Ram Air Performance Package” truely offered (i.e. cold air induction PLUS better flowing heads/stiffer valve springs, 3.90/4.33 rear, radical cam, stronger valvetrain, etc) you HAD to get the RA IV (not the RA III/400HO ) in 1969. In 1968, the RA I or RA II (and not the 400HO) had to be ordered.

      Think of it this way…. RA III Firebirds (and Trans Ams for that matter) came with *Ram Air Induction* while RA I, RA II and RA IV ‘Birds and TAs came with a *Complete Ram Air Performance Package*

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Verify a 350 H.O.

      Up until about 5 minutes ago I thought my bird was originally an inline 6. Well I now know it was a V-8 after checking the VIN. Is there anyway to tell if it could have been a H.O. through the vin and trim or would I have to go through PHS?

      Could I tell from strips, engine code, hood holes, tires, or other distinct H.O. markings?

      A: As far as I can tell, the only 350HO info on the car would have been atttached to the engine – such as code WK (manual trans) with cam 067, carb 7028269 and distributor 1111447 or YM (automatic) with cam 066, carb 7028266 and distributor 1111282, both with casting number 18 heads.

      Checking for other options is a more questionable. Since the 2 barrel 350 could have optional dual exhausts, evidence of that option is not a guide either. Both the 350HO and the 2 barrel had the same hood emblems and related holes, so this is useless info. The stripes could have been a option deleted.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - Ignition System (8)

      Q: Determining Correct Plug Gap

      For those of you who made the conversion from the stock heads to a set of 6x’s – What plug gap do you use now?? Since GM went to the HEI when these heads were used, I would guess that the plug gap should be .055 – .060″[?].

      A: You gap the plugs to correspond with the ignition you are using, not the head castings. If were running a points distributor, you gap the plugs according to the typical points gap of .040. If HEI, use the HEI .055 gap.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Electronic Ignition (HEI)

      I’m open for advice on this one. I’m considering changing over my 69 Firebird 350 to Electronic Ignition. The car is used mostly for crusin with no strip action. Think this is a good idea? Where is a good place to get the parts needed for conversion?

      A: The cheapest by far is to convert it to HEI. You can pick one of these up at a salvage yard for about $10. If you decide to do this, you’ll need to run a 12 volt wire to the distributer (the existing wire is a resistor type and will only supply about 6-8 volts).

      One trick I did so I could change it back later (for show purposes) is I traced the wire back to the firewall connecting block and soldered a #16 wire to the same terminal (This parallel the two wires. I then taped the new wire to the harness and taped up the old wire there it comes out of the harness. Looks clean and there’s no hacking involved.

      Another would be to buy a kit to convert your points to electronic breakerless ignition. Check the ads in the back of Car Craft, Kit Car, etc. or contact you local speed shop.

      A: I got mine of a 400 firebird in the junk yard. It bolted right on. Make sure you get the little wire clip that connects to the distributor or you will be going back. Also check to make sure you do not have a resistor wire going to it. The + side of the distributor should connect to +12 volts that goes on and off with the ignition key.

      A: The fit of the HEI is close but it worked on both my 350 and 400 (same block). You may have to rotate the oil pump keyway (stick a long common screwdriver into the distributor hole) to get the HEI in the approximate location as you’ll only have about 20 degrees of rotation. If it still doesn’t fit, check to make sure the transmission and motor mounts are in the correct location. The other problem could be position of the sub-frame relative to the body. If everything is pushed back for tight body seams you could run into clearance problems.

      A: The GM HEI will NOT fit. The firewall is too close. You can install the distributer, but the cap will not go on. Another option is the Mallory Unilite. I installed this on my 69. So far I like it. The cap is red, other than that it looks stock, and you have a choice of vacuum or mechanical advance. Most of the Performance catalogs list them. Good luck!

      A: The HEIs are virtually maintenance free. Stock and performance parts are cheep and easy to find. They outperform stock breaker point distributors in all areas. Unless you are running some serious compression ratios or are going to be drag racing and consistently revving your motor above 7500 RPM, the HEI will serve all your spark needs.

      A: The guy that rebuilt the 400 in my 1967 replaced the stock distributor with an HEI unit. No modification to the firewall was necessary, but there certainly isn’t the room around the distributor like there was with the original unit. I’m into originality and as a rule don’t think that aftermarket parts are up to the engineering standards or quality of genuine GM parts. (Please no flames!) So the HEI distributor is a nice compromise.

      I’ve been driving 1967 400 firebirds since 1979 and I have to tell you the performance with the HEI is much better than the breaker/points unit. The advantages of using the HEI unit that I’ve seen are: the spark plugs don’t foul out anymore, the car cold starts much easier, and I’m not forever messing with dwell settings. My ignition system used to always be a concern, but it is not anymore.

      The only disadvantage I see is for us purists. Like I said before, it’s hard to get use to seeing that big distributor in the back of the engine where a little on used to be. If you plan on driving the car a lot, do it. If you plan on showing the car, don’t.

      A: I’ve been very happy with the HEI system in my 1968 Firebird 400. The maintenence can’t be easier, just replace the cap and distributor every once in a while, and do a recurve every once in a while. No need to have to deal with gapping the points every other month, or having to adjust the dwell. You can also run a gap of .060.

      I can’t be happier with the HEI setup in my ‘bird. The only disadvantage is that GM HEI distributors are known to drop a lot of current above 4600 rpm so if you’re running at high revs, you may want to get an aftermarket HEI style distributor.

      A: put in an acell electronic. they are trouble free. mine is 5 years old and never been touched!! it fits the firewall and 14″ air cleaner great.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Electronic Ignition (HEI): Revisited

      i have a 1967 firebird with a 326ci it has a 4 bbl carter carb and it had factory air but i took it out cause it didn’t work at all and had no hope off fixing. anyway i called a couple of places cause i wanted to drop an electronic distributor in it, but a couple of places said it couldn’t be done, that i would have to put an ignitor in my old distributor to convert it, is this true if not what other stock gm electric distributors would work in it (off what other cars?)

      A: Concerning the electonic distributor issue, you have many options to choose from. First, just about any Pontiac late model HEI distrubotor will work in your engine. My 400 currently has an HEI distrubtor from a 1977 TA. Works great. The second option is a points replacement kit. This replaces the only points and condensor in your current distributor with and electonic unit. Both Mallory and Accel offer these units. Your third option is to replace the entire distributor with an after market electronic distributor unit. Once again, Mallory and Accel have excellent units for the Pontiac motors.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: HEI Distributor (Revisited Again)

      I’m thinking of getting a HEI-distributor for my 1968 bird. But I wonder, will the larger distributor require body modification? I’ve heard so much good about the HEI so I’d like to give it a try in order to save some gas. (Could you imagine living in a country where you have to pay almost 4 dollars/gallon??) And if body mods will be needed and before I go crazy with my big sturdy hammer, whats behind the firewall? …anything fragile?

      A: I swapped to HEI on both my 1967 and 1969 Firebirds. On the 1969 I had to pound the firewall in about 1/4″ to 1/2″ to make room for the Accel Supercoil I added to the HEI. On the 1967 no modifications were required. The best way to modify the firewall is to use a big splitting mall or big hammer when the engine is out of the car. If you’re careful how you do this it’s hardly noticable after you have installed the HEI. Good Luck,

      A: If your body bushings and subframe position is all good there should be just enough room for the HEI. Before you go pounding on the firewall, check the bushings.

      A: I have a 1968 400 and HEI fit with no modification…

      A: I installed an HEI in my Bonneville. I just bought a new unit from a local shop that had a distributor machine. They set it up and I installed it. Simple.

      My Firebird was missing the original dist. and had an Accel dual point completely worn out POS. But, there was not enough room for the cap to clear the firewall on my bird. Before you invest in an HEI, make sure you have the room! Some birds do some don’t (borrow one, drop it in, then install the cap). You can take a block of wood and a hammer to make room on the firewall too. I didn’t like this idea.

      If the HEI fits, it’s pretty straight forward to install. You will need to re-gap the plugs (.045 ?), and new thicker wires are a good idea too. In fact, I think you will need them to attach to the new style cap.

      Grease: yeah you need to grease ’em up. A new unit comes with it. If you go the used route, just get some di-electric grease. The HEI units have a coil built into them.

      Also, and I don’t remember why, but stay away from the Accel clone (anyone know why I’m saying this?) Get the genuine article. It was worth a few extra bucks to me to buy the new unit from GM. By the time you rebuild a used unit with the usual components they need, you have a lot of your resources invested. New stuff is so clean too.

      For my Firebird I settled for the Mallory Uni-light with mechanical advance for added simplicity ( I have a 4 speed). I think you have more options to trick these out than the HEI. Besides, that red cap is prettier (here come the flames).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: HEI Fit

      I am about to throw the engine back into my 1969 bird and thought I’d go ahead and replace the distributor with an HEI unit. As the clearance is so tight to the firewall will any poncho distributor fit or do I have to get the “small cap” one?

      A: I’m not aware of any small cap versions that fit a Pontiac block. Installing an HEI in a Firebird is a little of a crap-shoot. Some owners report that they had to “clearance” there firewall with a BFH before the HEI would fit. Others, including myself (in a previous coupe), didn’t have any problems.

      The difference may be in the condition of the bushings and sub-frame. When I pulled the sub-frame out of my convertible, the mounting pads that are welded to the sub-frame (which bolts to the base of the firewall), had a hole about as big as the bushing itself. I have serious reservations that an HEI on this car without extensive repair or modifications.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: HEI Upgrade

      Thanks for all the input. What I’ve read is that the increased efficiency of electronic ignition will enable the end gases to burn normally, rather than contribute to knock. It seems to me that to reduce knock, I’d have to replace the coil and wires, and regap the plugs, along with replacing the points and/or the whole distributor. Can anyone confirm that knock was reduced/eliminated by installing HEI, or am I setting myself up for disappointment?

      A: Installing an HEI is unlikely to reduce/eliminate a knock problem other than by coincedence.The advance curve(s) are what will make the difference.If the HEI you install happens to have a minimal amount of centrifugal advance and/or a vacuum advance unit with a stiffer spring than the original unit then knocking will be reduced. Also the vacuum advance units have differing amounts (in degrees) of advance.

      If your only complaint with your points distributor is the knocking problem then you may want to check its advance operation and correct/modify as required.It is not difficult to do but requires some amount of know-how and a few tools such as a accurate tachometer and a timing light (dial-back type) and a dwell meter.For starters make sure the dwell is set correctly and the initial timing is set to spec.Then with the engine warm increase the engine speed while watching the timing mark,when it stops moving as the engine speed increases further dial back the timing light (obviously you will find it easier if a friend works the throttle while you watch and manipulate the timing light) until the mark lines up with the TDC mark on the timing cover.Now read the dial (or display if you are using a digital) on the timing light,this is your TOTAL mechanical (or centrifugal) advance.It should be around 30-36 degrees.

      At this point (if the numbers are O.K.) you might try disconnecting (and plugging) the vacuum advance hose,then drive the car and see if the pinging is gone.Be sure and try both hard full blast runs as well as light throttle/lower rpm/higher load situations.If the car works O.K. then you may concentrate your efforts on the vacuum advance.There are a number of ways to go about this including:replace with different unit with less advance and/or stiffer spring,replace with adjustable aftermarket unit or modify your existing unit.By the way,most units have the amount (in degrees) of advance stamped on them (usually 10,15, or 20).You could of course,leave it disconnected but fuel economy and throttle response will suffer.Sorry I’ve been so long-winded about this, of course there are other things to consider like engine temp,combustion chamber deposits,fuel/air mixture.I hope this helps,feel free to email me privately if you have any questions.I don’t have all the answers but I may be able to help.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Starting Problem

      What could cause a car to not start when turning the key results in absolutely nothing. No clicks, nothing. Charging system works, battery has juice ( at least to operate lights, etc.). I went out over the weekend and it started fine. Drove it, stopped, and when I tried to start it again, nothing. Got a jump and it started. Since then, it started every time just fine.

      A: I had a starting problem that was really intermittent at one time. Turns out the nuetral safety switch (term?) on the transmission (67 400 w/ TH400) was not hooked up correctly or loose, and I would have to shift into park, then re-shift into park to get it to start. Same as you, no clicks or anything, but the rest of the electricals worked fine.

      A: For that kind of no-start, it may be a “dead” spot on the starter, usually caused by a dirty commutator/brush contact. Next time, give the starter housing a tap with a hammer while somebody turns the key – if it starts then, replace the starter. Another case may be a loose cable connection at battery or starter, even though it feels tight, it may need to be a bit more secure. If a dead spot, you just got lucky while the jumper cables were connected.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Starting Problem (Bypass Solenoid)

      Tip for bypassing the solenoid if will not start but still have power.

      A: I was stranded last night for 3 hours because my car wouldn’t start. I had power so I figured its the solenoid. Finally a good old boy stopped and showed me how to bypass the solenoid with a screwdriver. All he did was lay it across the positive battery cable post on the solenoid terminal post and the closest terminal (drivers side)and I cranked it at the same time and it started right up! This takes 2 people as one is under the car and the other inside. I drove home no problem and right away jacked the car up and dropped the starter.

      A: You don’t need 2 people, just turn the ignition to the run position and get under there with your screwdriver it will start.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - OHC Specific (5)

      Q: More OHC6 Rebuild Questions

      OK, I think I have an idea of what to check, but still have some questions:

      1.) The valve height should be from the top of the head to the tip? I would think that this is done without the valve springs. Is that the best way to measure?

      2.) What is the oil restrictor? Where is it located? How can you tell if it is bad? I lost two camshafts (worn lobes) due to low oil pressure, so I want to make sure that my 230 HP Sprint cam will survive.

      3.) Where is the 30 vs. 45 mentioned earlier? Valve angle doesn’t sound right, since they are perpendicular to the head. I have one ’66 head, two ’67’s, and one ’68; are they all the same in terms of performance and oil flow? Numbers don’t matter much, since very few people even know what the numbers are to be.

      4.) What type of work do the cam followers require?

      5.) What type of prep work should be done to the lifters? I know they can be disassembled and cleaned, and was planning on doing that, but is there an easy way to check the leak-down rate?

      6.) Are rings and pistons still available? I know that one of the three engines that I have needs new rings. I was going to use the best parts of the three to make this new engine. What is a safe overbore? Does this cause any overheating problems like the V8’s?

      7.) I am converting from an automatic to a four-speed. I have found the correct transmission (3.11:1 first) and all of the clutch parts. Someone asked about the Z-bar being a different length, that is correct, to compensate for the different width of the engine. Will the driveshaft have to be shortened? The manual for 1967 shows that they have the same “stripe”, so I would think they are the same. How about the yoke. Is there anything I have to worry about here? The transmission I have doesn’t have the yoke, so any ideas on where to find one?

      A: Okay, I’m now back to the top of your letter after answering all your questions, and one theme runs through all those answers: INFORMATION!! Our experiences are always mixed with good documentation from Service Manuals and other forms of the printed word and number! We would not likely have learned so much without finding way more info than we could just looking at parts, so EQUIP yourselvles with a small personal LIBRARY regarding your car and automotive knowledge in general!

      Albert Einstein said something like “Why bother remembering that which you can alway look up?”

      1) Yes, from the top machined surface that the cam cover gasket sits on to the tip of the valve, but WITH the valve springs installed at the completion of the valve job. This info MUST go to the machinist who does this work!! If he is not willing to listen to your input regarding this stuff due to pride (“I’m not having some stupid customer tell me how to do MY job!”), FIND ANOTHER MACHINIST!

      2) This is where the 1967 Service Manual becomes valuable! It describes, in words and pictures, how this system works. There’s a passage through the head with the restrictor, it’s between cylinders 2 and 3, and it is a piece of tubing about 2 inches long with an hourglass-shaped crimp in the middle of it that is about 1/8″ internal diameter. It then has an .080″ hole drilled in the side of the crimp, and the sizing of both the drilled hole and the hourglass crimp are critical to the flow volume and the pressure of the oil being fed to both the camshaft AND to the lash adjusters (lifters). Sometimes when poking around the holes and passages of a head being cleaned, these are damaged. They are also a bit fragile to try to remove from a head that hasn’t been hot-tanked enough to let it come loose.

      3) Numbers MATTER ABSOLUTELY! The cylinder head numbers (to I.D. heads) are listed in Pete McCarthy’s first book, written for drag racers around 1981, including the NHRA minumum cc’s for racing, gives a good idea of which heads are which for mix-n-match engine building! I’m sure they’re in the parts books as well, send me your numbers, I’ll help you choose a head. The 30 degrees and 45 degrees refers to the valve face and the valve seat; when the machinist actually grinds on your head and valves, he’s cutting a surface that is angled. The only heads that are 45 degrees are the second design for 1969. All previous heads used the 30 degree valves. If there’s any doubt, give me your head casting dates as well. PS Ever heard of a 3-angle or 5-angle valve job? That helps shape the valve seat area for a smoother flow from the port through the valve. You cannot see the angle with head assembled, the valve need to be removed!

      4) The current replacement followers have a rough and uneven surface that rides against the camshaft, and need to be machined smooth. I did mine on a veryfine knife sharpening stone, one-by-one, by hand. That takes a lot of cutting oil and from 1/2 hour to 45 minutes per follower. Jerry Woodlad describes this in more detail in his literature.

      5) I use new lifters, they are a slightly different design, meaning they don’t have that little pin in the top hole, and you can’t mix-n-match with these.

      6) Pistons for a 230 I believe are still available, but for 250’s have been difficult to find for some time. Safe overbore depends on the casting quality of your block, this applies to ANY engine! Usually try to stay at .030″, if you can find them, you might be able to do .040″, and I have done .060″. The rings are standard sixes to the industry, even the 6-cylinder Chevy used the same ring size, and even the same rod and main bearings! In my 250 inch engines I have also used modified pistons from a 307 Chevy V8, and there’s a piston in the 4.0Liter modern Jeep engine that may be usable. Its standard size is .005″ larger than our stock piston, 3.88″ instead of 3.875″. I haven’t got one in my hands for comparison yet.

      7) Your driveshaft and crossmember should be the same. The only different crossmember was for the THM400, all others used one member, that covers all 3 years, 67-69.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: OHC Conversion to V-8

      OK gang I really need some help here. I’ve been looking for a 1968 convertible 400 car for about a year now, however I’ve not been satisfied with the condition/options of the cars for the $. Consequently I’ve entertained the idea of just building my own. I am somewhat of a purist so I don’t want to screw up a nice/clean original example. So I found a reasonably clean six cylinder convertible, non matching #’s OHC six. It does have a four barrel, but its not a SPRINT option, 3 speed manual on the floor. No PS, PB, manual top. I’m planning on building the car and keeping it forever, so I will not try to pass it off on anyone else. Here’s what I want to do/ am consiereing. 400 or 455, streetable that will run mid to low 13’s. Engine cam intake carb ect I’m fine with questions I have are: Will the existing 3speed work with either engine?(I am not a total idiot but just figured I’d ask) if not which manual trans, should I use? Where to find and how much? I haven’t ruled out going to a 4speed auto( like the one in HPP 1967 Goat) opinions on this welcome if anyone has tired it. IT has manual drum brakes(recently rebuilt/lines cylinder ect works great) are they sufficient or will I need to upgrade to account for extra weight of V8 trannie ect. Suspension: new front/rear springs? I know some guys like 6 cylinder springs for weight transfer. Suggestions? Or other issues I have not considered any and all advice is greatly appreciated.

      A: You asked earlier about converting to a V-8 and stick. There are differences in the clutch setup between the OHC-6 and a V-8. The z-bar is longer on the OHC-6 since the block is narrower. Also a OHC-6 runs much better with the correct 4-speed, which will not last long with a V-8. They originally came with a Saginaw with a 3.11:1 first gear ratio. Most Muncies used a 2.55:1 first ratio. Going to a steeper rear will work well with both engines. The OHC-6 will rev higher, but it stops making real power around 4500 RPM.

      A: I can tell you the transmission behind a six is a Saginaw 3-speed, very light-duty, not likely to hold up behind ANY V8! Also, the OHC6 has a different bell housing and probably different Z-bar than the V8 applications, so to do a 4-speed, you will need a Muncie to be period correct, or a Borg-Warner T-10 (I think the T-10 may be a little stronger), and most of the rest of a 4-speed change-over. The 700R4 Automatic is a good transmission, but only comes in a Chevy bellhousing pattern. The 200-4R is run behind VERY hot V6 Buicks in drag racing, but you’ll have to do some research to see how they do that, it does come with a dual-pattern bell housing. The 200-4R also fits better, Gary installed one in his 1967 Tempest Sprint with no chassis mods, just moved the crossmember back to an existing set of holes in the frame. There are no additional holes in the ‘bird, but it is still likely to be easier to make a 200-4R fit than a 700R4. The driveshaft even stayed the same in the Tempest!

      Also, although drum brakes are, shall we say, adequate, there may come a time when you need MORE than adequate! You will NEVER regret changing to disc brakes! Especially after going through a puddle and having NOTHING! You’d have to be a bit of a daredevil to have drum brakes in a car capable of turning low 13’s!

      By the way, I would probably be interested in aquiring the bell housing and Z-bar from your OHC6 after you remove them, as well as the flywheel, and any other six-specific related clutch parts.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: OHC Meaning

      I keep reading OHC for engine descriptions. What does this mean?

      A: OHC – Over Head Cam which correlated with the 6-cylinder.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: OHC-6 Buildup

      I am starting to get ready to rebuild my “rebuilt” (so said the previous owner) OHC-6. I know some of the problems these engines have with oil and wiping out camshafts, but I was wondering while I have the block torn apart, are there any special machining operations I should have done? I am concerned about the cam bearings, since I have already lost a few 1-bbl cams (or actually have housings from wiped out cams).

      The combination that I am planning on running is:
      – 1968 1-bbl head (9.5:1 Compression ratio) fully machined with new valves and springs (single)
      – 196? Block (I plan on putting in new bearings and rings, pistons if needed)
      – 1968 Sprint Cam (found NOS from Internet… long story)

      I plan on getting new oil pump gears and a new timing belt as well. With a lot of money involved in this engine, I would like to make sure it will last. I am planning on pulling the engine out in the next few weeks, and would like to be finished for next spring. I have put 25 miles on the car this year, due to moving and other projects (1968 Catalina).

      I also have two other questions:

      Where did you get your exhaust made? Do they have a pattern for it? I have asked several “custom” exhaust shops about doing this and they have all said it cannot be done. I saw it done on the Fitchbird, and personally I want the splitter exhaust tips.

      AC was not available on the Sprint? Why was this? My car is originally a 1-bbl, but came with AC. I am making this into my dream Sprint (does this answer your question on options?), and will keep my AC. I am just curious about not having it available and the why.

      A: I ll try and answer a few questions on the OHC rebuild. A properly built motor will not wipe out cams. Especially with todays super lubricants. The cam housing is made of aluminum and has no replaceable bearings.

      It is important to pay close attention to the upper oiling system as this is what I see screwed up the most. Next is to pay attention to the valve setup. DO NOT tip the valves. You will get interference between the follower and valve spring retainer. Lash adjusters will compensate for the change in stem height. I will say this again… get a factory service manual… In the case of the OHC-6 get a 67 manual as well as the year of car you have. The 1967 manual has more OHC-6 info than any other year.You will need the year of manual for your car because they made some changes over the 4 yrs of producing this engine.

      If your year is 1967 (you didnt state) then you save money on manuals.67 Firebird Sprints were avaliable with factory a/c as was the Tempest /LeMans Sprint for 66-7. However in 68-9 it wasnt avaliable as an option for any Sprints. Reasons are not clear but I suspect the following: compressors were dying right and left on these engines (try and engage a a/c compressor clutch at 6500 rpm and see what it does.) sales of the a/c equipted Sprints were very low (i know of only a handful and 2 are here), Like the R/As Sprints were built for the hot rodder who didnt neccessarily want extra baggage.

      You can successfully convert a 1bbl car to a Sprint and retain the a/c but there are some parts that are peculiar to the a/c equipted Sprints. As for the duals on a Sprint Glenn took a little different approach than i did. I personally think that his is too loud the way its done and he uses tailpipe extensions that protrude beyond the bumper to help with the cabin noise level. The approach I used for a dual conversion is this. Buy over the counter dual exhaust for the V-8. get the crossover muffler and the front resonators dont buy the front pipes for the V-8.

      Use V-8 tailpipes(here comes the dual splitters you wanted) install all of this on the car with proper dual exhaust hangers drive it to a muffler shop that can custom bend pipe and have them make the front two pipes (maximum size of 1-7/8 in dia) to make up to the front resonators.this system is large enough for the Sprint but isnt terribly loud.

      We have experimented with just resonators or just the cross flow muffler, and they are both too loud. You can subsitute small mufflers in place of the resonators if you want to further quiet down the system. If you are going to run single valve springs make sure they are to the same specs as the DUAL springs that the Sprint had. With the 1bbl head and valves you are pushing it as far as lift and coil bind on a 4bbl cam.

      You didnt say what combo block ,crank and pistons you will use but its good to keep the CR just under 10:1 for the street. However if you increase the CR to 11:1 or higher it really wakes this motor up. I have tried about every combo of head ,cam,crank,pistons and find that the 68-9 4bbl head is best on the 230 If overbored.But a killer combo is the other way around and use a 66-7 4bbl head on a 68-9 short block. Hope this helps

      A: Reagarding the exhaust, I had a friend who worked in a shop with a bender, and he still had the pattern cards for 1967, 1968, and 1969 Firebirds, we copied the factory axle tubes, but with 2-1/4″ pipe. We used resonators with 2-1/4″ inlets and outlets, same for the muffler and for the tailpipes. (Remember my muffler went away with the rear suspension mods.) We made 2 engine pipes from 2″ stock, the manifold outlet for cylinders 1-2-3 went to the left resonator, with most bends resembling the factory 1-barrel pipe, then the manifold outlet for 4-5-6 had the pipe make an S-turn under the transmission crossmember to connect to the right resonator. Both pipes needed to be enlarged at that point to fit into the 2-1/4″ resonator. It is not difficult for a pipe man with a BRAIN!

      On the engine, there are NO cam bearings! The cam rides right on the surface of the housing, and I’ve never seen a housing wear out, even after 200,000 miles or more! You need to make sure the oil restrictor in the head is not damaged, so you get the right amount of oil pressure and volume to the top of the engine. Also, the height of the valve stems is critical on this engine, I think Gary has a spec on that. Many machinists grind off some valve stem after grinding the valve face and seat, and do this to compensate, but most never measure it, they just guess how much, Also, there are differing valve lengths depending on the chamber size, so you can’t mix and match from different heads unless they are same application. The block is the simplest one on the planet, it holds crank and pistons, and the oil pick-up tube, everything else was on the accessory drive housing or on the head!

      Let me know what your plans are regarding cam followers, there’s some stuff to beware of.

      A: is right on the valves. I had two heads done and both times the supposed machinist ( owner’s brother ) ground the tops down by eye. You could look down the row of valves and see that they all were different lengths. According to a good source the following are the lengths:

      	66 1bbl    4.9
      	67 1 bbl  4.9
      	67 4 bbl  4.99
      	68 1 bbl  4.8
      	68 4 bbl  4.9
      	69 1 bbl  4.8
      	69 4 bbl  4.9
      

      I am sure someone will correct me if these are wrong. If you have someone do your head, make sure they know that the clearance is critical. I guess the SOB that ruined both of my heads thought he was working on a tractor. The valves were so far off that the cam cover would push up during preliminary testing.

      A: the weird pipe is the Y-pipe from the dual outlet manifold that the factory used on all Sprints.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Rebirth of OHC-6

      I have a 1968 Firebird with a 250 O/H cam 1bbl carb. And am having some serious running problems, so am considering dropping the 400 pontiac engine I have (from a newer Firebird) into it. Will a 400 bolt up to 250’s stock tranny which I believe to be Pontiac’s 2-speed (automatic, no a/c) or maybe powerglide.(Did Pontiac put Powerglide’s in, in 68?

      A: Tom Can I ask why you want to change the motor if the OHC-6 is repairable? You have alot of other things to consider when doing this swap such as,motor mounts,tranny cooler,larger radiator,rewire the engine section of harness, cooling baffles around the radiator. An a/c equipted car is easier to change as it comes with these baffles regardless of the orginal power train. Not enough of the OHC-6s left… This motor basicly revolutionized the industry as it is the basis of most OHC-6s(4 and 6cyl) today.

      A: Fixing of Problem
      ————————
      I would suggest first looking at the carb. The carb setup sometimes causes a vacuum leak towards the cam cover, due to the stud being difficult to reach. The idea of a steel gasket would solve this problem. The second area that I would look at would be the vacuum advance on the distributor. If it gets gummed up, it won’t release correctly. Just some ideas.

      I don’t have the carb numbers with me, but I will try and get them for you. There were I believe four different carbs used: automatic, automatic with air, manual, and manual with air. The air condition carbs used a solenoid to adjust the idle while the air was on. If you need a carb, myself and several others on this list have a bunch laying around.

      History of Engine
      ———————–
      The OHC-6 engine is often misunderstood. The belt was the part that worried most new car buyers between 1966 and 1969. Unfortunately, the belt holds up very well, it is the oiling system that needs work. Oil starvation of the top end (i.e. camshaft) causes many camshafts to be wiped out. The engine came in two versions, a 1-bbl base engine with a 9.5:1 compression ratio and a 4-bbl “Sprint” version. The Sprint version included a 10.5:1 compression ratio (determined by the cylinder head), dual valve springs, a 4-bbl Quadrajet (the first production use of this carb), a high-lift camshaft, and dual exhaust manifolds. The Sprint version was rated at 215-230 HP depending on the year. The engine was 3.8 litres (230 CID) in 66-67, and 4.1 litres (250 CID) in 68-69. The best engines to build up are the 1968 blocks.

      Hot-Rodding
      —————–
      Most OHC-6’s that are still around are 1-bbl automatics. I believe this is due to the fact that these cars were not beat on as much as the 4-bbl/manual transmission versions. With an advertised redline of 6500 RPM, the manual versions tended to be abused and have the oil problem noted above. The ideal engine to build with today’s gas is a 1968 block with a 9.5:1 cylinder head. A Sprint intake and exhaust complete the package. Finding the correct carb can be a “challenge”. It seems that most of them have disappeared, with the exception of a few expensive NOS pieces. A standard Pontiac (fuel inlet on the front, not side like Chevy) Q-jet can be modified to work with the OHC-6, I will be doing this soon, and will let you know the details.

      If you plan on converting to a manual transmission, the four-speed, the z-bar and the transmission are different then the V-8 version. The z-bar is longer to accommodate the difference in engine width, and the transmission uses a 3.10:1 first gear. This is very important in getting good performance from a standing start with a Sprint. The automatic that is used with the OHC-6 is a Super Turbine 300, which is closer in relation to a THM350 then a PowerGlide (from what I have been told). There are two versions of this transmission, an air-cooled used on the OHC-6, and a water-cooled used with the V-8’s. The transmission was also used in various Buicks and Oldsmobiles, and it is getting a little difficult to find anyone knowledgeable about these transmissions, or to get parts.

      There are a few companies that offer speed parts for the OHC-6. The most notable is Clifford that produces camshafts, headers, and Weber carb kits. Although the engine will rev to 6500-7000 RPM, the usable power of the stock setup is closer to 3000-4500 RPM, as it runs out of breath any higher (although neat noises will happen !!!).

      I hope this information has been helpful. I don’t want to get a reputation for ranting (although this one is a little better organized!), but a healthy OHC-6 is a beautiful thing. The folks on this list will have tons of information about this engine, as well as anything else you will need for your car.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - Paint (7)

      Q: Correct Engine Paint for a Fanatic

      I have tried several different engine paints but none look correct or last for more than a year. Has anyone had success with any engine paint?

      A: Well after much searching, I found an engine restoration Co. on the East Coast Bill Hirsch Automotive that specializes in these products. They have it in pints or aerosol cans.

      They have tons of other restoration products, but I was hot to get the correct engine paint, so I just got that and some 1,800 degree exhaust paint for the headers.

      So I answered my own question! But here is the link just in case anyone else is looking for this type of product in the future or for reference in the Q & A section! This is just one place to find it, I’m sure there are more, but I jumped at the first one!

      http://www.hirschauto.com/

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Paint
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Engine Compartment Detailing

      I am detailing my engine compartment and am wondering what were the original colors.

      A: – What color is the transmission dip-stick handle?

      ….The Handle should be painted Engine Color.

      – I have stock exhaust manifolds and a heat shield. The shield appears to have been painted black. Is this original or should it be left its natural silver color?

      ….I’ve seen restored cars with this part painted Black and I’ve seen unrestored cars with it left natural (Silver Zinc Finish). Also, early magazine road test photos show it to be Black. I’ll do some more digging thru photos and get back to you.

      – Is the fuel line supposed to be painted like the motor? If so, how far up?

      ….Fuel Pump and Line would have been installed after Engine Assy was painted.

      A: Dip stick tube should be natural heat shield should be black leave the fuel line natural filler cap should be painted if valve covers are Fan should be aluminum in color Cast aluminum brackets should be left natural. I have mine polished it looks pretty sharp.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Paint
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Engine Painting

      I have a 1968 Pontiac 350 engine that needs repainting. How was this engine originally painted. Was all of the engine painted Pontiac Blue or just certain parts and were there any other colors involved. Any info appreciated.

      A: The block, heads, balancer, water pump, timing cover, intake manifold, oil filter bracket, and tin (except chrome of course) are painted blue. Black goes on pulleys, power steering pump, accessory brackets, motor mounts, heater hose bracket and coil mount bracket. Hope I did’nt forget anything.

      A: When using this engine paint be SURE you use engine temperature primer first. It is made for very high temperatures. If you don’t use it first you can be sure your engine paint will peel off in sheets after you’ve run the engine a while. Any automotive store that sells the correct PMD engine paint should carry the primer too.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Paint
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Heater Hose Bracket Color

      My 1968 350 2-BBL was missing the bracket which attaches to the front of the engine and helps keep the heater hose away from the exhaust manifold (NOT the bracket which sits on the right fender well). I purchased a new bracket from Ames Performance. The part came in the same satin black color as many other parts in the engine compartment are colored. I can’t recall, is this bracket supposed to be the same color as the engine or should I leave it black?

      A: Sounds like the bracket that bolts the pass. side head with the tang. This bracket is black and if seen it mounted in different hole(s) with the tang in different places. Think the far outside hole under the freeze plug is correct with the tang in the hole directly under it. In lower left corner of the head.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Paint
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Paint for Engine Compartment Parts

      I just picked up my upper and lower control arms that were sandblasted and getting ready to paint them with Rustoleum. What color should they be, Flat, Semigloss, or Gloss black?

      Also, once I degrease the center link and sway bar, should they be painted a certain color or left unpainted?

      A: Use the following color formulas:

      1. Firewall, inner radiator support, and othr engine compartment sheet metal:

      PPG paints
      – two qts “mixing black” #386
      – one qrt “universal flattening agent”
      – one qrt “mixing clear” #310
      – use PPG #DDL-16 quick dry thinner or DuPont #3608S.

      2. Undercarrage, frame and suspension: (Egg shell black enamel)

      – three qrts mixing black #386
      – One qrt flattening agent
      – use PPG DTR601 quick dry reducer

      3. The center link, swaybar, tie rods, idler arm, and spindles are natural (unpainted). Some restores use a “non” gloss clear, or use a paint such as Eastwoods Natural Steel for these to avoid rust.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Paint
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Pontiac Engine Paint in Brush Form

      I should be repainting my 1968 Firebird’s 400 in the next two weeks. I was wondering if you folks know of any place (chain or mail order) that sells the Pontiac Blue paint. The catch is that I don’t want spray paint. I plan on using a brush, as sprays don’t seem to get into cracks well. I haven’t asked at any of the local stores, but I only remember seeing bright spray paint colors.

      A: POR 15 by restomotive laboratories should have the brush on type. I bought some years ago and it has more shine to it that standard engine paint. Also, you could try Bill Hirsch. Both are reputable. Look them up on the net, or in Hemmings.

      A: I too have used the POR-15 engine paint. My experiences were that it does seem to have a higher gloss than some others. It goes on rather thick (outside temps were in the 80s when applied), and would show the brush marks on any very flat surface such as the oilpan, valve covers, or valley pan. On rough surfaces such as the engine block or heads, the brush marks cannot be seen.

      The sales person indicated that it was more heat resistant than other paints, but I managed to burn the paint off the exhaust ports during the cam break-in period. My carb was running lean at the time, so that added to the heat output.

      If the block isn’t cleaned of dirt and grease and hasn’t been scuffed, don’t expect paint to flow and adhere properly. It’s sometimes a little like welding or soldering. The work must be free of contaminants for the best results. Those brush marks will only get more noticable with age, as the paint solvents out-gas and the paint tightens and shrinks slightly.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Paint
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Repaint Engine Block

      I want to repaint my engine block but it appears greenish blue. I thought it was suppose to be Pontiac Blue.

      A: The greenish blue is the color the original blue metallic goes after the motor has been hot and cold for 30 years. I have seen people attempt to reproduce this “aged” color, but I think that if you want to paint the motor – do it as advised on this list – the bright metallic blue looks sensational – people who are ignorant think that its not original its such a pretty color.

      A: I was reading through some of my old Firebird-L emails, and ran across the thread about engine colors. This reminded me about a conversation I had with an original owner with a 1967 326 Convertible this past summer. He had restored his car a few years ago, and it is now an AACA senior car.

      Anyway, the engine is painted Buick Green. I asked him about this, since it was a very nicely restored car. He said that he gets in trouble for that all the time at shows. The story is that early in the production of 326 engines, there was a fire at a plant somewhere in the supply chain. Pontiac Blue (Plasticote #227, that we are all familiar with by now) was not available, so they painted the engines in a metallic green that was for Buicks. I don’t know the dates, but maybe some people with original cars could try and determine a range. His car was purchased in March of 1967, so it probably occurred in cars that were built in February.

      I would guess that this only applies to 326 engines, as the OHC6 and 400 were probably built in different plants/assembly lines. Does anybody know where these engines were built?

      Just adding a little fuel to the fire, and maybe helping those that thought their engines were green gain some sanity.

      A: I was able to buy the correct 1969 Pontiac Engine paint at Parts America, which is now Advance Auto Parts. The brand they carry is Plasticote and it is called Pontiac Blue Metallic. This is the same paint that Performance Years sells and may be the same as the others too, I don’t know. When you paint with it, it will look just like the factory brochures show the engines. However, as noted in the Ames catalog, after exposure to heat it begins to pickup a green hue, as the original factory paint did.

      A: PEP Boys in California has a high temperature primer. Plasti-kote engine enamel, good to 500 degrees F. I have found Plasti-kote to be very good paint. Probably as good as Krylon. That is a big deal for me because Krylon harbors so many good characteristics, not the least of which is fast dry time and recoat any time. I think the number is #8334 for gray, but might be a lot number. They make the good Pontiac (metallic) blue/green engine paint, #228?

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Engine - Paint
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - Ram Air Specific (11)

      Q: Difference Between a 400 H.O. and Ram Air Firebird

      Whats the difference between a 400 H.O. Firebird vs an identically equipped Ram Air Firebird?

      A: Functional (cold air) ram air induction came on the 1969 RA III. 1968-1969 400HO cars did not have this. Besides this, they are 100% identical (ie ra III did NOT have a different carb settings, cam, heads, exhaust manifolds etc)

      As I recently mentioned, if you wanted all the hardware and performance upgrades that the “Ram Air Performance Package” truely offered (i.e. cold air induction PLUS better flowing heads/stiffer valve springs, 3.90/4.33 rear, radical cam, stronger valvetrain, etc) you HAD to get the RA IV (not the RA III/400HO ) in 1969. In 1968, the RA I or RA II (and not the 400HO) had to be ordered.

      Think of it this way…. RA III Firebirds (and Trans Ams for that matter) came with *Ram Air Induction* while RA I, RA II and RA IV ‘Birds and TAs came with a *Complete Ram Air Performance Package*

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Identifying a Ram Air

      Hello Everyone! I am new to the list. I am trying to restore a 1968 Firebird just for run, and I was wondering how do I know if it is Ram Air I, II or neither? What exactly is Ram Air?

      A: The engine block would have codes:

      WI – Firebird 400 Ram Air I (Manual)
      XN – Firebird 400 Ram Air I (Auto)
      WU – Firebird 400 Ram Air II (Manual)
      XT – Firebird 400 Ram Air II (Auto)

      More information at: https://FirstGenFirebird.org/1968-info/1968-technical-information/68_id_numbers/

      Also look for the Ram System: Upper Hood Baffle, Lower Carb Shroud, Hood Seal, Shroud Seal, Air Cleaner Lid and open scoops.

      More information at: https://FirstGenFirebird.org/f-a-q/category/ram-air-specific/

      A: Ram Air is an additional performance option on Sport Option 400 Firebirds. It has an induction system that has open scoops on a 400 hood, a big pan bolted to the underside of the hood, and an air cleaner that has a raised rubber ring to seal the housing to the pan. The engine has some internal differences, and RA I is different than RA II in such areas as heads, exhaust manifolds, cam, etc.

      You need to check the numbers: 2 letter engine code (on block under right head), 9 digit partial VIN (right side of block next to timing cover, just above oil pan) and heads (large numbers on center exhaust port boss), plus date codes of block, heads, manifolds, firewall data plate. You may also want to look for codes on the transmission and rear axle. You can find a couple books that have these codes, and most are pretty accurate, but not perfect. Isn’t that info somewhere here on Geoff’s site? Report back to the list, we’ll help you decode. Date codes are cast onto the part, are a letter followed by 3 digits. Firewall data plate code is different, it’s 2 digits followed by a number.

      You may also want to get the Pontiac Historical Services package on your car to see how the factory built and equipped it http://www.phs-online.com I believe the cost is $35.00. Chances are very good that your car is not exactly the same as it was 32 years ago, so this will tell you what your car was when new. Information is the key to knowledge!

      Many Firebirds have 400 hoods and engines added, this does not make it a Firebird 400, it becomes a modified 6 cylinder or 350 car to most judges and prospective purchasers. The fact that we can document our cars is part of the fun of owning Pontiacs over all other brands of American 60’s and 70’s special interest automobiles.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Rain and the Ram Air Scoops

      All this talk about ram air hoods got me thinking and since i’ve never had the pleasure of viewing a real ram air in the flesh I ask. What do you do when it rains? How do you keep the water out. I can’t imagine people in the sixties buying cars you drive in the rain.

      A: To answer this we must rewind to 1965 and look at the GTO. It had an over the counter option of a Ram Air pan that bolted on to the 3x2s (triPower). It had a seal that moulded itself to the contour of the underside of the hood. It didnt have a seperate hood pan as in the later years. In 66 Pontiac continued this over the counter option and later that year had a factory option of RA GTO. This was the first time you could get a purpose built factory Ram Air Pontiac. There were previous cars built in the early 60s but werent avaliable to the general public. There were around 200 of the 66 GTO RA cars made. Rare indeed.

      The tradition of RA carried into the 1967 GTO but tripower was replace by single 4 bbl(Q-Jet). When Firebird was intoduced the 400 option had a newly designed scooped hood that also offered the RA setup except it had a seperate under hood pan to help seal and direct the incoming “rammed” air. These were true Factory Hot Rods avaliable to the general public.

      Tradition carried on to the 1968 GTO and Bird with basicly the same setup. This was the first year GTO used a seperate hood pan. Complaints of this fair weather only system promted enginners to design a 1969 driver controlled system that closed the RA inlets off to under hood inlets. This allowed the driver to choose if weather was not favorable. 70 Trans Ams improved the design and had a flapper that faced backwards on the shaker scoop. This was carried on thru the 72 model. After that it was basicly a design feature. It was big hoopla that GM introduced the Trans AM with factory RA in the last 3 yrs. History does repeat itself.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air and 400

      Some History, 400 Specs, and Ram Air Information.

      A: I owned a 1968 convertable, ram air, and campaigned it as pure stock on the drag strips a while.

      I had contacts in Pontiac engineering and was told that when Delorian was approached with the idea of a 160MPH car he said OK, but it has to be “safe”. That was the context of the trouble GM was having over the Corvair and “unsafe as any speed”. So a few specific changes were made that you may know, but didn’t mention. The rear spring shackles have triple welds. That is, they laid down two more over the origional one. The front end wishbones were lengthened longitudinal to the car. I think the rear attach point was 13 inches behind the axle. Gives you an awful lot of strength. None of this was on the Camaro or 350 for that matter. Exclusive to the 400. The Ram Air engine was made to hold together up to 8000 rpm. Special anti-pumpup lifters. But the rev limit was 5100, only because oil would accumulate under the valve covers faster that it could drain down via gravity. I blew a valve cover once, so point proven.

      You may also have a problem with sustain high revs getting enough fuel. The problem is the float valve opening is too small. You could substitute the 1/8d. seat and float from the Buick Roadmaster and pretty much eliminate the problem. I also intalled an electric pump at the fuel tank as a booster. don’t know if it was really necessary, but it couldn’t hurt. No econo car this. At full song, I could actually watch the gas guage move – and high test at that. Four 1/4 mile runs looked something like 5 gallons. Street mileage with the 4.11 rear axle looked like about 8mpg. After I put back the standard rear (3.08) it “Jumped” to about 12. Horsepower is BTUs and BTUs are CCs of gas. I also put in the Corvette logrithmic throttle linkage. That gave you only up to 1/2 throttle until the last 1/8 inch then punched in the rest. That made it more drivable on the street. Before in the rain, it was almost impossible to not break the rear end loose when starting up. In effect, you drove around on the front barrels only, unless you really wanted to turn loose the ponies. With the 3.08, I did take it to 165. It redlined at 150, but the short blast into orbit was safe enough, provided you backed off quickly. The acceleration up convinced me there was plenty left. Turbulence was pretty rough. Made the ride a bit like a speedboat in chop. Needed better aerodynamics. I figure the 98 reprizes probably are better in that regard. Kind of fun picking on “Whale Tails”, but be a bit more respectful of Ferrari’s and HemiCuda’s. The RamAir had a special cam with more overlap and .100 more lift. To control that, they doubled the valve springs. You have to do that because the valve cam ramps are forced into becoming pretty severe. That’s a big part of the reason why just adding the ram air intake to the standard 400 doesn’t give you the hammer. Under standard conditions the RA intake does add about 15 HP though from volumetic efficiency conciderations. Hope some of this is helpful to provide a bit different dimension and understanding.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air Differneces Between the Years

      I was thinking about reproducing the Ram Air equipment. What are the differences for the different years.

      A: ….The Ram Air Hood Baffle will physically fit all 1967-1969 Firebird 400 Hoods.

      The Ram Air Carburetor Shroud will physically work on all 1967-1969 Firebird 400s and 1968-1970 GTOs. There were apparently (2) types of Shrouds; (1) with the provision for the Heat Riser and (1) without. Those with are not very common. As for the Hood Baffle, some say that 1967 Firebirds had a ‘tab’ on the bottom of it (to hold the Seal ?)

      Though, I’ve never seen this on any original 1968 Ram Air Firebirds. I’d say with such a large range of applications, both the Hood Baffle and Carb. Shroud would be excellent candidates for reproducing provided the retail price wasn’t too high. Many would ‘add’ Ram Air to a “400” Hood if they could get the Hood Baffle and Carb. Shroud for a reasonable amount. Of course, being able to sell them cheap depends on quantity. If you have connections into the Die-Making World, you could have tooling made for not too much. If you’re a full time, major restoration parts business, you’re likely going to mark these up quite a bit to make a nice profit.

      A: As for the “tab” on the upper hood pan, the orginal 1968 I had that I sent you a pic of had one. Also the setup that was sold on e bay was a 1968 and had the same. I made an impression of the tab before I sold mine a few months ago.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air Features for 1968

      *Please review and advise on any discrepancies. If you have corrections, please provide references for verification (Pt.No’s., etc.) Thanks !

      1968 Firebird Ram Air Features…

      ENGINE BLOCK
      Casting Number… 9792506
      Codes… WI (RAI-MT), XN (RAI-AT), WU (RAII-MT), XT (RAII-AT) {4-Bolt Main}

      CYLINDER HEADS
      Casting Number… 31 (RAI ‘D’ Port) 96 (RAII Round Port)…’stamped’
      * Not all “96” Cyl.Heads were stamped

      EXHAUST MANIFOLDS
      Ram Air I & H.O….. Cast Iron Long Branch (‘D’ Port) 9779424-R…9779495-L
      Ram Air II….. Cast Iron Long Branch (round-port) 9794036-R…9794038-L
      * w/Thermostatic Heat Control Valve in RH manifold

      AXLE
      3.90… “ZP” (4-Pinion)
      *No Ram Air Firebirds came from the factory w/4.33axle although it was available. Safe-T-Track was mandatory.

      TRANS
      Manual Trans… M-21 Close-Ratio Muncie (“FX”)
      Auto-Trans… T.H.M (“PQ”)
      * ALL 1967-1968 Ram Air Firebirds came with two-piece speedo cables and gear reducers. ((( ? PART NUMBER ?)))

      INTAKE MANIFOLD
      Casting # 9790140 (1st Type…. all 4Bbl’s incl. the RA I… exc. RA II)
      Casting # 9794234 (2nd Type….all 4Bbl’s incl. the RA II … after May’68)

      CARBURETOR
      RAI…. (MT) 7028277 (AT) 7028276
      RAII… (MT) 7028273 (AT) 7028270

      CARB. VAC. BREAK CONTROL
      Pt. # 7038237 (Ram Air I) …Black plastic Cover
      Pt. # 7038239 (Ram Air II) …Green Plastic Cover

      THROTTLE CABLE BRACKET
      Pt. # 9792242 was used on the 1st Type Intake Manifold (9790140)
      Pt. # 9797415 was used on the 2nd Type Intake Manifold (9794234)
      * 2nd Type stamped “F-4”

      OIL FILTER ADAPTOR
      (Alum.- filter to block) *Used on all RA & H.O. engines Pt.# 9794111

      DISTRIBUTOR
      Pt. # 1111449 (exc. RA II)
      The Ram Air I cars used the same Distributor as found on 400 M.T. and H.O. cars
      *Only the RAII had a unique Distributor, Pt. # 1111941. (MT or AT)

      RADIATOR
      All Ram Air cars used the H.D. Harrison Radiator.
      Manual Trans: “UQ”
      Auto Trans: “UP”

      RAM AIR HOOD BAFFLE
      (pentagon shaped stamped sheet-metal pan, screwed to hood)
      Pt. # 9793161

      RAM AIR HOOD BAFFLE SEAL
      Pt. # 9789883

      RAM AIR CARB. SHROUD (Air Inlet)
      (round stamped sheet-metal ‘tub’, set on carb.)
      Pt. # 9792987

      RAM AIR CARB. SHROUD SEAL
      Pt. # 9793163

      RAM AIR AIR FILTER ELEMENT COVER (black)
      Pt. # 6424398

      RAM AIR AIR FILTER ELEMENT
      Pt. # 6421746 (A212CW & A-274C- paper wetted)

      RAM AIR HOOD SCOOPS
      (Cast-Metal Scoops “open”)
      Pt. #9794283/84

      NOTES:
      * All Ram Air cars were shipped to the dealer with the Ram Air Baffle, Shroud, Air-Filter, Seals and Open Hood Scoops shipped in the trunk. From ’67 until early 1968, the parts were removed from the trunks and returned to the parts-crib by guards/inspectors while preparing to ship as they suspected theft. This discrepancy was corrected and it is assumed that parts were forwarded to the dealership for installation.

      * All Ram Air cars came with a standard 4-Blade Rad’t. Cooling Fan unless optioned with the ‘Flex-Fan’.

      * Ram Air Firebird’s ordered with the Ram Air Option and Underhood Lamp were modified at the Dealership in order for the Lamp Assy to clear the Hood Baffle. The Lamp was moved slightly outboard to clear the Baffle.

      * The Underhood Structure req’d. a modification to the RH side near the Scoop in order to allow proper fit/sealing of the Ram Air Baffle & Seal. This was performed at the dealership while the Ram Air parts were being installed. A small section of the Underhood Metal was snipped away. In most all case’s, this was a crude alteration and is usually quite noticeable.

      * The Code used on the Broadcast Sheet for Ram Air Engines was “Y”.

      * No identifying codes were noted on the Firewall Trim Tag and/or VIN to indicate the Ram Air option.

      * Less than 50 Ram Air Firebird’s have been accounted for to date.

      * The Ram Air I production was from Aug 1967 until May 1968.

      * Ram Air II production started May 20th 1968. The option code was still “347” however, the package price was increased. (sometimes found noted on the Billing History).

      * Earliest known RA I was built in Oct. 1967 (Verdoro Green)

      * The last 1968 RA II ‘Bird produced was invoiced Aug. 6 1968 (4spd coupe)

      *For more information…please contact John Schuh FRamair@aol.com

      “GENERATION-1 Firebird Registry” http://members.aol.com/Framair/Gen1.html

      A: If you were surprised about the “standard” block for the 1967 Ram Air cars, how about learning that most of the blocks for the 1968 Ram Air II engines were “standard” 400 cid blocks (9790071) that were fitted with four-bolt caps!!! Some had the last four digits ground off and were re-stamped with —“2506”, but most were left with the 9790071.

      Also your 1967 and 1968 lists show that the cylinder heads had their numbers stamped on them. Not so! All of the ’67 Ram Air “997” heads and the 1968 Ram Air I and II (“31” and “96”) heads were cast!!! Any heads with the numbers stamped on them were done by racers to satisfy the folks at the NHRA, for drag racing.

      Find that information on a build sheet or trim tag!!!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air Info Sheets for 1968

      I found a document in the glove compartment of the 1968 RA II ‘Bird I recently purchased. One shows upper pan installation and second the lower pan. The detective work done by Generation-1 Registry about mods to hood ARE RIGHT ON AND DOCUMENTED HERE!….amazing piece of pontiac hi-performance history thats for sure… this is fantastic!! ive NEVER seen anything like it, have you ??

      A: Thanks for the information and what a find!! Lots of gems out there waiting to be found.

      1968 Ram Air Information Sheet One

      68RA_InfoSheet1

      1968 Ram Air Information Sheet Two

      68RA_InfoSheet2

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air Kit for 1967-1968

      Where can I found a Ram Air kit to put in my 1968 Firebird 400.

      A: There is no kit that I’m aware of for the 1967-1968 Firebird Ram Air System. A kit would consist of the Upper Hood Baffle, Lower Carb Shroud, Hood Seal, Shroud Seal, Air Cleaner Lid and open scoops.

      A few years ago, Barry Martin (Sonic Motors) had the Hood Baffle reproduced. He only had around 5075 pieces stamped out (kirksite die) and vendors were selling these for $350-$425 ea. Not sure if any are still out there. The Carb Shroud is the same as 1968 GTO. Used ones go for $500 or so. I understand that someone has or is doing a Carb shroud. Figure this to be in the area of $300 or more. The foam seals are available thru most repro companies. The Carb lid is also available repro. Scoops would have to be cut out; repro’s are available. If you bought all the pieces used or repro, figure around $1500 for such a ‘kit’.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I purchased a complete ram air kit in 2012 at Performance Years. I paid around $450 for the kit.
      It was all metal also, not fiberglass. Works great!

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air Shroud from 1968 fit a 1967

      Will a Ram Air Shroud (air cleaner) from a 1968 Firebird would fit a 1967?

      A: All 1967-1968 Firebird and 1968 GTOs that came with Ram Air used the same Carb. Shroud (Air Cleaner Housing) and Lid. There were no Carter carbs. used on any 1967 400 Firebirds. The RA Hood Baffle was also the same 1967/1968 Firebird but different on the 1968 GTO (though, they initially look the same).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air V

      I have heard Pontiac made some Ram Air V in 1969 but were available in a crate only. If they were crate motors could you not have put it into a Firebird?

      A: … the factory didnt put these race motors in any production cars. A little over 200 were sold in the crate and some more were pieced together. There was 2 versions. the low deck 303 cu in version made just for Trans Am racing ( 5 litre restriction),and the 400 version . The factory tried a few experimental versions,366 and 455 but the RAV program was aimed at the drags and T/A series. They also experimented with various carb(s) and manifolds. the closest production motor to this was the 73-4 455 SD.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • GM made available the V motors as early as 1968. They also experimented with 428 configurations.

      Attachment

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Speedo Cable Mystery for 1968

      During the course of researching codes for the 1968 Firebird Body Broadcast Sheet, I’ve discovered some mysteries one of which has to do with the Speedo- Cable. I have heard it said that the 1968 Ram Air Firebird used a special, unique Speedo-Cable (per Jim Mattison) but so far, no one (incl. him) has been able to produce and factory documentation proving this. The only proof has been in the Parts Book and that only says the Automatic cars used a special Speedo-Cable.

      The other issue is the Two-Piece Speedo Cable and the use of a Speedo-Gear Adaptor. What I’d like to know is which Firebirds used the Two-Piece Speedo Cable and what exactly was a Speedo-Gear Adaptor ? I know it was optional and it even had a sales code (#591) but what required it ?? So, if you have anything to add to this issue, please jump in. I’ll post another message with part numbers for those interested in further details of this mystery.

      A: Know the answer? Send the answer to me on this issue.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Engine - Sprint Specific (6)

      Q: Differnece between Sprint and Regular OHC-6

      What was the difference betwen a regular OHC-6 and the Sprint. I know the Sprint came with a 4BBL and a hotter cam

      A: The Sprint package included these items you mentioned, also a higher compression head, larger balancer,low restriction exhaust with split exhaust manifold, dual valve springs, different distributor,different engine bearings and a few other things. You can add any of these items to fit your budget. I do have a complete running(still in the car) 1967 Sprint motor with new cam and followers for sale. email if interested.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sprint Build-Up

      I want to make a Sprint out of my OHC-6. I realize this decision also involves a number of different changes – interior as well as exterior.

      Anyone have the list of options the Sprint came with? I know a 3speed was standard, but was there and automatic? From the Master List from Pontic Historical it seems only the 400 got the Hydromatic, everything else got the 2-speed automatic, but did Sprints come with them? I’d think surely so, but you don’t know til you ask.

      So far, this is what I’ve gathered that needs to be changed\added:

      From Standard to Custom interior
      Sprint Hood Emblems
      Rocker Panel Sprint emblem
      Sprint cam

      Things I have no way of knowing: Other engine and engine compartment changes – oil pump, water pump, alternator, battery, etc.

      A: in fact you could get a Sprint with the 2-speed automatic, even mounted on the column! The Sprint option on the ‘bird was basically the engine, so if you’re going to add options, why not just create the car the way you want? Maybe stick with the neat triple teal color scheme plus the Sprint engine, plus whatever trans you’d like. A 4-speed with a tilt, hood tachometer and gauges, and a modern stereo. Some suspension mods, just enough for it to handle better, and a single piston front disc brake system from a 1969 bird or 1969-72 A-body.

      A: There were TWO Sprint camshafts, the “E” cam and the “H” cam. The great unknown right now is whether you have a Sprint cylinder head, and you won’t know it until the cam cover comes off. The casting and date numbers are inside. The cam is marked on the end like a V8 cam. “A”, “B”, “C” and “D” cams are from one-barrel base engines. The “E” grind is what Jerry Woodland made a run of several years ago, but I don’t think he has any left. Gary had a local machine shop make an “H” pattern some time back to do regrinds, but you’ll have to discuss that with him. The “H” Sprint cam was used ONLY on 1969 manual trans cars, while the “E” cam was used on all 66-68 Sprints, and the 1969 THM350 Sprints (they quit the 2-speed option for Sprints only in 69).

      There were no obvious changes under the hood except the engine – higher compression head, the 4-barrel and the dual-outlet exhaust that went to a Y-pipe. Outside the only difference was the rocker emblems, as all the OHC6 Firebirds had the “4.1 Litre OVERHEAD CAM” emblems. The manual trans cars came with the 3.55 ratio axle only. The automatics in 68 came with 3.23 as Standard release, and the 2.78 Economy or 3.55 Performance release axle ratios as options.

      While the Custom interior is nice (and a favorite of mine, especially the Teal), it is a separate option from the Sprint package. Also separate were the posi rear, console w/floorshift on automatics, and anything else you might think was a performance option. The standard trans for the Sprint option DID come only in the Hurst floorshift however. One-barrel manuals were supposed to be on the column, but I have never seen a manual column shift in a 1967, 1968, and 1969 ‘bird.

      A: The stripes were just like the HO stripe, but with no lettereing on the Firebird, and WITH the word “SPRINT” on the A-body cars. My Dad’s 69 LeMans Sprint convertible had them. They were available on Tempest/LeMans cars for all 4 years 66-69. The Firebird’s plain stripe was actually available on any 1967 and 1968, but the H.O. came standard with the lettered version. There were no stripes in 1969 on the Firebird until the Trans Am.

      A: You mention the one that I didnt… the rocker panel emblems. However the hood emblems are the same as base OHC-6. Have fun adding whatever you want to the car…. if done properly and tastefully it will add to the value of the car. I would also (space permitting) save any orginal parts you have from the change over. I disagree that the Sprint option was an engine option. It was aimed at being a total package of ride and handling and performance. The idea of this was the first T/A type “tuner”that Herb Adams built, called PFST(short for PontiacFirebird SprintTurismo).It was based on a 1967 Sprint hardtop with triple webers, shaker scoop thru the hood, very large tire and wheel combo,upgraded suspension and brakes. This 300 hp Sprint would handle better than the V-8 counterparts and eat their lunch on all but the longest straightaways. Its too bad that tire melting muscle cars pushed the better balanced Sprints into extinction.

      A: Sprints came with heavier springs,shocks,4 bbl with dual valve springs, different duration and lift on cam(same diameter valves)larger harmonic balancer, smaller chambered head to raise compression,split exhaust manifold with y pipe,larger clutch & Hurst floor shifter(manual trans). Different fuel pump,distributor,rear end ratio,larger tail pipe,and engine bearings. Im sure Ive left out something…

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sprint Coil

      Have a question about coils. Started having ignition problems on the 1968 droptop Sprint I’ve been restoring, so I went to replace the coil as well as condenser/rotor/etc. Went down to Napa and discovered the coil listed in all the catalogs is a typical oil-filled can style. What I have on my car (and judging by the rust and Delco Remey logo on it it’s original) is a much shorter air cooled coil. Looks more like something off a newer electronic ignition vehicle if it weren’t for the tower on top. Has a round coil in the middle, a square frame around the middle, and a bracket that bolts it to the block just aft of the distributor. Threw the Napa guy and all his contacts for a loop. I went ahead and bought an internal resistor coil and bracket and am looking for ideas on where to mount it, because it won’t fit where the original coil was. Questions:

      1) Ever seen a replacement coil that matches the original?

      2) If you converted at some point to a can style coil, where did you mount it? Firewall, fender, ???

      A: The shorter air cooled coil is correct for the 1968-1969 OHC-6.

      1966-1967 used a conventional oil filled coil. They had 2 different ignition systems for 66 and 1967 Sprints. The 66 used the infamous TI or Transistor Ignition. 1967 was improved (or so they say) to the newer CD or Capacitive Discharge ignition.

      I have one of the TI ignitions for a 1966 Sprint and have been told there were only about 200 made. I also have most parts for the 1967 CD set up. Of course this wont help your situation but if its not a points judged car chances are 99.9% wont know the difference anyway. I say put a pointless conversion and conventional coil in and cruise on.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sprint Identification for 1968

      Looking at 1968 6 cyl. firebird, 4 barrel, single exhaust. Supposed to be all original. Is this right or is it supposed to be dual exhaust? What do I need to check next?

      A: IF its a Sprint It would have single exhaust but have a dual outlet exhaust manifold. A “Y”-pipe would join the two outlets into one header pipe. There are several Sprint only identifying features/parts, all of which a 1 bbl could be upgraded to. If the engine code is ZD and the VIN matches the engine VIN# then its a correct block for a Sprint.

      Heres a list of some of the other features of a Sprint 1968:

      • larger crankshaft harmonic balancer

      • 4 bbl Q-jet #7028261 (M/T) 1968

      • Chrome lid 4 bbl air cleaner

      • 4 bbl intake manifold

      • Special dual outlet exhaust manifold

      • 4bbl only cylinder head with dual valve springs,smaller combustion chamber for higher compression ratio

      • Larger lift and longer duration camshaft

      • distributor is recurved for more advance

      • Sprint badges on the rocker panel mouldings

      • 3.55 rear end ratio

      • Rod bearings were also the heavy duty ones but thats not apparent without engine disassembly

      So as you can see all of the parts except the engine block could be added to a base 1bbl car. If you are really serious about this get the history on this car from PHS. They can fax it to you if you are in a hurry.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sprint Option

      I currently own: 1968 Firebird, Straight 6, 4.1 Litre overhead cam, 2-speed powerglide with 72,000 miles – unrebuilt.

      I have heard the following things:

      1) a 4.1 litre was more rare than the common 3.8 litre overhead cam – Question: Is this true?

      2) that the basic configuration that my car currently has is almost impossible to find nowadays. – Question: Is this also true?

      I am trying to figure out what my car is actually worth, but I do not know enough about the cars to figure it out. I am also trying to figure out if my model of car is actually as rare as people say it is. Everything on the car is original – it still has the original floormats. It is about 15% off of “mint” condition (does that statement make sense)? It burns a trace amount of oil – I believe it needs a ring job / rebuild I would like to know if dual exhaust came with the standard 2 barrel 326 convertible, or if this was an option that had to be ordered.

      A: 1) Yes, the ‘Sprint’ option is hard to find and it is worth more. Also harder to find parts. The most popular Firebirds are the 400s and Ram Airs. I consider the Sprint to be in the same class as Ram Airs, cherished rare cars. I have yet to see both of them in person.

      2) Same as above, only 7459 Sprint cars (including Tempest) were built. According to a couple of sources, the Sprint came standard with OHC 6, 4 bbl, at 215 hp at 5200 rpm. There were 1850 Sprint equiped powerglide cars.

      3) It is desirable to have all the original equipment and accessories and new “mint” condition. I wish my car did so I did not have to scavenger around for parts. I still can not find some accessories. From the above information, I would be surprised if you could not get over $10,000 for it, more if it is a convertible. I have a hard time putting a definitive value since I can not see the car, market differences, and if you can find someone willing to pay top dollar.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Sprint Radiator

      What is the correct radiator for a Sprint engine? I am worried I do not have the correct one since I keep over heating plus someone mentioned my Sprint is missing “Filler Panels.”

      A: Single core is correct for a 1968 Sprint, unless it had the HD cooling. Radiator should have a metal tag with the letters “ZA”. Code for the HD unit is “UF”. A 3 core from a 350 V-8 will fit right in the same location.However the finger guard may not. OHC-6s dont use a fan shroud. I think the radiator you have is clogged or in poor condition. I’ve never had an overheating problem with any OHC-6s.

      A: The Filler Panels are the panels that go between the core support and the front bumper support.

      They were installed in 400 cars and A/C equipped cars. The idea was to force as much air as possible through the radiator, instead of having it “leak” out around the bumper. They can be bought as repros, if you’re interested in using them.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Exhaust (11)

      Q: Aftermarket Headers

      I will be redoing my exhaust this winter as part of my refurbishment on my 1968, 350 convertible. I presently have headers on the the vehical. I don’t have a clue as to what kind. They are long over due for replacement.

      I have read the recent posts concerning aftermarket headers. The consenus seems to be the at most are running Hedman headers but, that they can be a problem installing them and later and with oil filter changes.

      For these reasons I am considering going back to the stock exhaust manifolds? I have checked locally and can’t find any.

      Questions:

      1. Are the stock headers hard to find?

      2. Will only 1967 and 1968 fit?

      3. What type of performance loss can I expect to see if I go back to the stock exhaust vs. the headers?

      4. Does the exhaust kit that Summit and Jegs sells fit up fairly well to headers or is it made for stock manifolds and requires modifcation?

      5. When using the above exhaust kit do the headers and exhaust fit up under the body nicely or do they hang down? The headers & exhasut I presently have constantly drags on drive ways and such. ( One of the reasons it is all beat up.)

      I know, always too many questions.

      A: I wish I had answers to all your questions. I don’t, but I think I can help with a few of them.

      If by “stock headers” you mean the Long Branch manifolds, the originals are pretty hard to find, and pretty expensive. There are aftermarket repros, which are better quality, and can be ordered from Ames, etc or even direct from the mfg, Ram Air Restorations. They run $369 I think, and require the oil filter adapter. They fit 1967, 1968, and 1969 Birds.

      If you use these, I don’t think you’ll see ANY difference from headers in your 350.

      However, if you go back to factory “log” manifolds, which are much cheaper and easier to find, then you will probably see somewhat of a performance loss, but it’s hard to tell how much. Remember, the 1969 Grand Prix 400 used the same “log” manifolds and was factory rated at 350HP….

      I don’t have any experience (yet) with the Flowmaster exhaust sold at Jegs and Summit, but I think that they all say they wont fit in a convertible.

      I, myself am researching a good exhaust system for a 350 bird convertible (69) and I’m trying to find one that is 2 1/4 inch, because I want to get respectible performance and may someday upgrade to a mild 400. So far here’s all I’ve found trying to piece it together:

      Flowmaster American Thunder Complete exhaust(2 1/2 inch) PN 17139 $321.95 (17129 for 1967-1968 $261.95) – for use with headers. Uses 2 mufflers under the rear floor area. Includes Crossover setup.

      Flowmaster Force II (2 1/2 inch) Complete exhaust PN 17104 $314.95 – for use with headers. Uses single Transverse muffler. Includes Crossover setup.

      (I think flowmaster says neither of these fits convertibles)

      Flowmaster exhaust pipes only (2 1/2 inch) PN 15801 $99.95

      Flowmaster 80 series Transverse muffler, 2 ins/2 outs both 2 1/2 inch, PN 42582 $99.95

      Dynomax Transverse Muffler #17725, 2 ins/2 outs both 2 1/4 inch, $76.69

      Dynomax Super Turbo Mufflers #17731, 2 1/4 in/out, #17733 (2 1/2 inch) $31.99 each.

      Flowmaster 50 seris Muffler #42451, 2 1/4 in/out, #42551 (2 1/2 inch) $64.95

      Flowmaster Balance Tube Kit #15919, 2 1/4 inch, #15920 (2 1/2 inch) $37.99

      Prices as of Sept 1999 – Probably Subject to Change

      So where does that leave me. Well, I’d like to use the 2 1/4 Super Tubos and 2 1/4 balance kit, but haven’t yet found 2 1/2 (or even 2 inch) tail pipes for use WITHOUT the transverse muffler, nor have I found 2 1/4 inch head pipes for use with stock manifolds.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dual Exhaust on 1967 326

      I would like to know if dual exhaust came with the standard 2 barrel 326 convertible, or if this was an option that had to be ordered.

      A: Dual Exhaust was Standard on the H.O., 400 and Ram Air Firebird’s in 1967 and was optional on others.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Exhaust Manifolds

      The exhaust manifolds on my 1968 Firebird 350 are cracked (both sides). I’ve been having a hard time finding a pair as most yards I’ve called either don’t have them or don’t know whether they have the right ones. One question i have is whether the manifolds from the “400” engine will be the same. Any insight will be very helpfull, summer is here and I desperately want to get on the road.

      A: You can get the repro Long Branch Cast Iron Exhaust manifolds for around $325 pr. These are nice copies of the one’s originally used on HO & Ram Air 1st Gen. Firebirds… and cast using Ductile Iron..much better than originals. One other note.. be careful of buying used manifolds…. after 30yrs and countless temperature changes, many are bound to have stress fractures and/or cracks. I’ve had several pairs over the years (various styles) and those that needed repairs were usually much worse than first glance….many times unrepairable. Only the Ram Air & H.O. Exhaust Manifolds are considered difficult to find…all others can be found for around $100 pair. As far as usage…. The Following ‘D’-Port Exhaust manifolds will fit 1969 Firebird V-8’s

      pt. # 9779325(RH)...63 T/4, 63-66 T/8-P/8, 1967-1968 F/8-T/8-P/8 (exc HO/RA)
      pt. # 9777755(LH)...67- 1968 F/8, 
      pt. # 9791607(RH)...67- 1969 F/8 Ram Air, H.O., 1968 P/8 428 H.O.
      pt. # 9779493(RH)...67- 1969 F/8 Ram Air, H.O., 1968 P/8 428 H.O.
      pt. # 9779495(LH)...67- 1969 F/8 Ram Air, H.O., 1968 P/8 428 H.O.
      pt. # 9777641(RH)...67 GTO Ram Air, H.O.
      pt. # 9777646(LH)...67 GTO Ram Air, H.O.
      pt. # 490802(RH)....68 GTO Ram Air, H.O.
      pt. # 478141(LH)....68 GTO Ram Air, H.O.
      pt. # 9796992(RH)...69 - 72 F/8-T/8-P/8 exc.H.O./RA, 307
      pt. # 9796155(LH)...69 F/8 exc H.O./RA
      pt. # 9797073(RH)...69 F/8-P/8 RAIII, H.O.
      

      *Basically…65-70 Pontiac Manifolds/Headers interchange with 1967, 1968, 1969 Firebird’s.
      *The separate flange may vary btwn Full-Size Pontiac’s and Firebird’s.
      *Also, the Ram Air, H.O. Manifolds used a special aluminum oil filter adaptor.

      A: I have a 1968 350 and I just got exhaust manifolds for it from a junk yard, they were fron a 73 350 pontiac, and fit just fine

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Exhaust Pipe Size on Convertible

      What is a good diameter exhaust for a convert WITH crossmember installed. Will have a shop work 400HP out of original 350 later on. Would like 2.5 Alluyminized. Will this help HP allowances, or will I have to get bigger to get that HP?

      A: The real problem is getting anything bigger than 2.25″ past the convertible pan brace. Perhaps that’s what you meant rather than the crossmember. The exhaust has to share this tight space with the transmission tailshaft and the driveshaft. Some list members have reported getting 2.5″ to fit, and I’m sure it took some very creative pipe bending to do so. Or maybe ovalizing would be a better term.

      400HP out of a 350? Is that flywheel HP, or rear wheel HP? Either is quite a bit to ask of that small displacement. But I’m sure it can be done. But how driveable will it be? 2.5″ probably won’t be too much of a plug for that HP.

      It’s pretty important to keep the brace, by the way. Even if you get subframe connectors, the race car chassis builders like to keep the brace if the car isn’t given a tube frame.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Exhaust Updates

      There was a thread a little while ago that referred to a great article about muffler testing. I printed the article, but I can’t recall the website.

      I plan to install the headers I bought and need the rest of the exhaust from headers back. Is there place to call to order these parts already pre-bent for a 68? I don’t want to have to take the car in would rather order and then install in the garage. I can get a welder if needed. Anyway if anyone knows a place let me know. I want to go to the duel exhaust from my now single.

      Also what do you all think of walker mufflers? I keep hearing flowmasters but was told by a reliable sorce and trusted car buff that walker was much better. Anyone have input?

      A: You’re probably refering to the Jim Hand article on exhaust…

      Sorry, I had to remove URL AS REQUESTED. gm  

      Titled “The Strong Silent Type”. Jim did extensive testing of different brands of mufflers, measuring backpressure, sound level, 1/4 mile performance. He also tested the use of different diameter tail pipes, “H” pipes versus “X” pipes, etc. He’s done more testing than most of us could ever afford.

      Walker/Dynomax makes complete dual exhaust systems for headers as well as stock manifolds, as well as mufflers. Try calling Jegs or Summit and see if they can come up with a system for your car. So does Flowmaster, which is designed for headers. But Hugo manager to get one of their systems to work with his stock manifolded ragtop. The Walker is more likely to look stock than will the Flowmaster.

      And of course, their is Gardner Exhaust Systems (http://www.gardnerexhaust.com/).

      They make replicas of factory systems, which I think is offered in both mild and stainless steel. This is probably the way for Erich Wagner to go for that stock look, and still be able to install it himself. Expect to pay well for this product.

      See the above link on some very good independent testing of various brands. While each mfgr. claims the best flow/power output, it’s interesting to see real world, on car testing like this.

      On top of all this, an important factor is sound. Some folks like their cars loud (Bob raises his hand), others like them quiet. I like the sound of Flowmasters, while I know a few die hards who think that a set of glasspacks are the living end of great sound. Judging from the testing Jim did, if it’s quiet with superior performance that you are looking for, Walker/Dynomax is probably the way to go.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Headrest Availability

      Did some 1968 firebirds come with high back seats and headrests?

      A: Head rests were available as an option on 1967 and 1968 Firebirds

      code for 1967 is AS2 code for 1968 is 571

      69 headrests were government mandated and had two different styles: straight (early and same as 67-8) and bent or curved later in 69. The upper seat frame on 69s are the same as 67-8 so its the easiest way to add headrests to a 67-8. Just remember to use the padding and cover for your model of car.

      A: And don’t forget the headrests were actually listed as an option on 1969 Firebirds built before 1/1/69 – just like my Sprint. They all got them, but were charged as optional. The 1/1/69 price sheet changed to reflect them becoming standard, because of Federal safety regs. BTW, mine was built 12/17/68, and had the later curved headrest arms, as well as the second design 45 deg cylinder head (ZH engine).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Long Branch Exhaust Manifolds

      Were the 400 Ram Air cars only F-Bodies that have ever had the Long Branch Cast Iron header-style Exhaust Manifolds?

      A: NOT TRUE…. 400 H.O.s came with the long branch manifolds and oil filter adapter. Definitive word is still not out on the 350 H.O. M/T cars in 1969 receiving these. Anyone got a 1975 NHRA rule book? This would answer it.

      A: Oops ! My mistake. What I meant to say was….

      Long Branch Exhaust Manifolds only came on the 400 Ram Air & H.O. engines. (not on 350 H.O.).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Long Branch RA III Headers Bolt to 350 Block

      Will long branch RA3 headers bolt up to a 350 block? Mess with performance good/bad?

      A: Compared to the stock log manifolds, the Longbranch units are a big win. About the only negative would be dealing with the oil filter location, and there are good solutions to that, and of course, the cost. At nearly $400 new, these aren’t exactly cheap compared to headers. Plus I’d prefer a ceramic coating to preserve them and that would add, what $150 – $200 to the overall cost? On the plus side, better flow on any Pontiac V8 over log manifolds, better ground clearance than headers, and also a more reliable seal. Not that you can’t get headers to seal well as long as the flanges are straight and you use high quality gasket (Felpro metal core, or copper seal).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Manifold Repair 101

      I welded it up but the weld makes it not seat properly (I tried to grind it but I went through 2 grinding stones on my drmmel tool and barely made a dent) so it’s leaking pretty bad.

      A: You’re a brave soul welding a cast iron manifold while still on the car. Its quite tricky welding cast iron so as not to have it crack again. Ive successfully welded quite a few exhaust manifolds never to have one crack (even 25yrs later) but its a real science. I had an old timer show me(guess Im qualified to be in that category myself now)

      First is to drill on the extreme ends of crack to stop it from continuing. next grind a good size V into crack but not all the way thru. Preheat the cast iron in repair area until cherry red with a rosebud tip. Keep the torch moving or youll blow out a hole in the cast iron. while still red then use a high nickel rod and use less heat (amperage) than you normally would(remember youve already got it hot).

      After welding is done work very quickly before it cools and peen it with the pointed end of a welder hammer all over the weld. Next place in a bucket of clean dry sand and completely cover with at least 6 inches of sand .Leave there overnight as you want it to cool very slowly. You can preheat in an oven and cool down in an oven gradually bringing down the temp over a 24 hr or longer period as the pros do.But just remember to take it out before the pizza goes in. Now as Tim Allen says I think Ill go break something so I can fix it.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ram Air III Long Branch Manifolds

      Instead of dealing with the problems associated with headers (leaks, etc.) and to just be different, I am considering a set of 1969 Ram Air III “long branch” exhaust manifolds for my 455 with ported 6X heads. Has anyone out there taken a grinder to or otherwise modified a set of these? I am plan to open up the inlets to match the head work as closely as possible and I am also considering having them extrude honed. Does anyone know of a good place to get extrude honing done? While we’re at it, does anyone know if there was an exhaust manifold produced that had better flow characteristics than the Ram Air III long branch?

      A: I have the the RA III long branch manifolds installed on my car, (1967). Mine are unmodified, so I can’t speak to modifications you mentioned. However, there is one thing about using these manifolds which is rather annoying and you should be made aware of, (if you aren’t already). In order to use these manifolds, you have to use the oil filter mount which angles the oil filter back towards the rear of the car instead of the standard one which points the oil filter directly down towards the ground.

      Even with this angled oil filter mount, you still end up have to drop the exhaust pipe to get the filter off! A royal pain in the backside, especially if you install a cross-over tube, because then you have to drop BOTH sides. I’ve met a few guys which get around this problem by installing a remote oil filter mount.

      I think you are making a wise decision by going with the long branch manifolds over headers. I have had all three types of exhaust manifolds on my ‘birds, the stock manifolds, headers, and now the long branches, and I definitely ling the long branches the best. The headers were too noisey and added way too much heat under the hood, especially around the starter. (Kept cooking starter solenoids). The long branches perform as well as the headers, are quieter and don’t through out as much heat.

      As long as we are on the subject, does anyone know if there exists a “shorter” version of the PF24 oil filter? If so, it could be used to bypass this clearance problem.

      A: I too will be using the LB manifolds and will be using ported 6X heads on a 455 in my 1968 Bird. I enlarged the manifold ports to match the ports on the heads. I had to remove about .060.090 from the top of the openings on each port. The castings I have are reproduction. They look pretty nice and have 2-1/2″ I.D. outlets. I got them from Year One. I didnt get the flanges though. I will need to get those from somewhere. I am going to get the manifolds hi-temp coated too.

      I will use the Dr.Gas “X” crossover and mandrel bent tailpipes. All 2-1/2″ system. I will rig up some type of remote filter.

      Forget the extrude honing. It is very expensive. I think the price for cast iron manifolds is around $500. It would be wiser to just get some custom made headers and have them coated.

      A: I have a 1969 convertible A/C bird with a .030 over 455, 6X heads and LBram air III manifolds. The oil filter issue does not require the remote solution. Point out this concern when getting your exhaust installed, it can easily be worked. I do have to bring the filter down the frame about six inches until the gap between the frame and the exhaust pipe is wide enough but it does not require unbolting the exhaust. Remember these are stock issue manifolds and GM would have never designed them so that it required exhaust unbolting for an oil change. Also, my LB areactually 2.25″ ID and the 2.5″ exhaust slips right over. The onlynegative I’ve seen from these manifolds (if you ignore cost) is that youwill need to install a heat shield for your starter and solenoid. But then GM also chose to use a shield with the stock issue of these cast iron manifolds. Oh and one last thing if anyone can find an exhaust guy that can install a 2.5″ cross over (X or H) with the convertible body pan in place and with more than 3.5″ of ground clearance let us know.

      A: I had a crossover installed on my 68. The installer put a bend (about 30 degrees) in the pipe to rout it around the transmission tailshaft. It hangs no futher down than the transmission pan.

      A: What about the GM Oil Filter adaptor used w/the Long Branch manifolds ?

      A: Soke the header gasket in warn water for about 1/2hr. before installing it will swell up and seal better. Headers are know to warp. This worked on all the headers i have ever ran before.. I put the long branch manifolds on my 1967 not running yet but thay look good. Don’t for get you have to buy the $75 oil filter adapter also..

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Replacement Dual Exhaust on 1968 Convertible

      I need to replace my exhaust on my 1968 convertible. I would like to replace with duals. Any sugestions on where I can purchase a complete exhaust?

      A: I have just installed the Flowmaster 2.5″ dual exhaust kit with crossover available through Summit (probably through other catalogs too) and didn’t have any problems with it (other than forcing me to replace my saggy rear springs which I was going to do any way), however, my car is missing the crossbrace underneath so that obstacle wasn’t there for me.

      The 40 series mufflers fit just fine and the kit includes all of the clamps and new mounts which bolt righ up to stock locations. You will, however, have to go to a muffler shop to have them weld up the pipes from the exhaust manifolds to the kit since it comes with the flanges to bolt up to a set of headers. I bought a set of reducers from Pep Boys to temporarily install in there to get me to the muffler shop (they’re cheap enough).

      This may actually be a good time to install headers if you ever thought of doing so.

      The sound is great and not too loud (for me anyway). I run my Borla exhaust fully open on my 98 TA so I guess I’m used to it 😉

      A: I have Flowmasters on my 1968 convert, and it sounds great. Not too loud at idle, but when you get on it, it sounds like all hell breaking loose. Just got all my leaks fixed after a couple of months. New expensive gaskets for the headers, and two copper ones for the collectors. Very happy to have no leaks, but was not easy.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Exhaust
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Fuel System - General Info (15)

      Q: Aviation Gas

      I have an HO engine which requires premium gasoline. Now that gasoline has lower octane rating and no lead, I want to possabley use Aviation Gas. Doesn’t AVGas burn pistons over time? What about Cam 2 or 3? I’ve heard Sunoco has a higher octane fuel for this application.

      A: You may have wanted a simple ‘yes’ or ‘no’ answer, if so: ‘no’. But since I have done a fair amount of research/experimenting with gasoline and find it a very interesting topic, here goes!

      AV gas itself will not burn pistons. But this is not to say you cannot burn a piston with AV gas. AV gas is higher octane than typical pump gas but it is typically formulated to burn at higher elevations. Also, the vast majority of aviation gas is unleaded or “low lead” (nearly unleaded). As with any fuel, you need to jet your carburetor (or fuel delivery system) to correspond with the specific gravity and other characteristics of the particular fuel. Simply adding higher octane fuel to a properly tuned car will rarely increase performance, any usually degrade it. The reason you can make more horsepower or go faster with higher octane fuel is that you can tune your motor to take advantage of the particular fuel. That is, you can run higher compression and more advance with higher octane and, thereby, make more power.

      If you’ve even seen Chevron’s commercial where they say something like you can make more power with their Supreme gas, you will note A LOT of disclaimers at the bottom of the ad. Basically, this only applies to cars with fairly sophisticated engine management systems. That is, ones that increase ignition advance until the sense knock and then slightly back off. With this sort of engine management system, a higher octane fuel will actually more the car go faster. While is seems counter intuitive, a typical engine will make more power using the lowest octane possible fuel (lowest so as to prevent detonation, that is). Once you exceed this level, performance will actually drop off. Many people will argue this, and may even produce time sheets showing better ET’s, but when driving on the street, there are far to many other variables. You will not see an improvement on a dyno, only a decrease.

      Another concern is that AV gas is not taxed for use on the street and thus using it on the street is illegal. No FBO will pump AV gas in your car. While they will pump it in drums and you can transfer them to you car, it will still be illegal to use it on a public road. Should be o.k. on a race track but you will be far better off buying a race fuel specifically formulated for your application.

      AV gas used to be a more viable alternative, but still not the best choice, when it was leaded. This is because it got most of its increased octane due to the addition of tetraethyl lead (“lead”). When mixed with pump gas or even real race gas, a significant increase in octane would occur, thereby allowing the use of higher CR’s and more spark advance.

      Contrary to someone’s earlier post, there is no magical compression ratio cut off for running on pump gas. Your engine’s octane requirements are dependant on far more variables that just CR. Squish band, combustion chamber shape and layout, timing as well as even the material of your head (cast iron vs. aluminum) all make a significant difference. There is no reason you cannot set up an engine to run 10:1 on pump gas (I believe Jim Hand has done this with his wagon but an not 100% confident on this and too lazy to check right now!!). Obviously there WILL be an upper limit but it is unique to each combination. I probably would not encourage someone building an “average” street motor to go much higher than 9.25:! but this is based on the complexity, care and expense necessary to set up an maintain a motor running a higher CR on low octane fuel. Also, there is not that much power that will be gained going from a 9.25:1 to a 10:1 CR.

      Sunoco does sell their GT100 fuel in some areas (check out www.racegas.com). This site also lists specifics details on their race fuels as well. VP also makes a variety of high quality fuels. If you are looking for high end race fuel (gasoline, not nitro methane) you can also try Elf or Nutec.

      Fuel technology is incredibly complex and very interesting (at least to me)! If you go to a GP (car or bike) you will notice that the top team have fuel technicians that ‘brew’ fuels for not only each track but to correspond to the environmental conditions change through out the weekend.

      A: As a Petroleum Engineer I can only say, “very informative and well said.”

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fuel Guage Sending Unit Sock

      A few weeks back I was looking for information on how to replace the sock on the fuel gauge sending unit. Anyone ever done it? Is it hard to do? Got advice????

      A: This weekend, I took a look at my sending unit. The sock was missing, so there was little filtration going on in that fuel system. But the retaining ring that held the sock in place was still there. There were traces of the sock mesh on the edges of the ring, so it looks like it had been torn off. No sign of the sock in the gas tank. Judging by the ring I saw, and pictures of the sock in various catalogs, it would appear that the sock simply slips over the end of the pick-up tube. The sock has a built in ring at the open end. I was able to remove the sock ring with no difficulty at all. Installation should be a simple slip fit.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fuel Line Replacement

      Where do I find replacement fuel line for my Firebird?

      A: If you can’t find a used/new line, consider the mandrel tubing bender in the Sears Automotive catalog. It costs about $60. then just by fuel/brake line at the parts store and build your own. I bent the fuel lines for my Firebird and Bonneville with this (fuel pump to quadrajet). Looks exactly like the factory line. By bending one for each car, I figure the tool paid for itself.

      Warning!: If you’re like me, you’ll probably need several pieces of this line just to get the hang of how the tool works. You know the old saying, “measure twice, cut once.” Holds very true with this. It may be your only source for a correct type fuel line. Besides, it’s a lot of fun, really!

      A: Fuel lines are available for 67-9 repro or you can do as Greg says and make your own. You can buy the steel line in 25′ roll at auto parts store(look around someone will have it ) Roll the required length out before starting, add a couple of feet extra and cut off the roll. I get my line straight by rolling out on the garage floor using a friend to hold end for the first couple feet, push down while rolling and you wont get any humps. Just curious but how did you barb the ends where the rubber lines are attached? This is necessary to insure that rubber line doesnt slide off and seals properly. I’ve been looking for the swedging tool to do this. Also if you buy repro line make sure it has this feature.

      A: To barb the end of the tubing, use a double flare kit. Insert the reverse flaring die into the end and tighten just enough to create a bulge. Hose will not slip off.

      A: The barb on the ends is easily made if you have a flaring tool with the adapter for double flares for brake lines (you must use double flares for brake lines!) Just do the first step of the double flare and you have a barb. As for the shape, just follow the existing brake line on the cross member, and get within 3 inches of the Camaro line so the rubber hose isn’t too long. Have fun!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fuel Line Routing for 1967

      Can any one tell me how fuel gets from the right side of the eng compartment where me fuel line stops to the left side where the fuel pump is..thanks it’s a 67

      A: The fuel lines on a 1967 run along the inside of the right sub frames from the rear of the car and cross over to the left side of the car along the crossmember of the front subframe. Unfortunately, the Firebird service manual does not have a fuel line routing diagram in it which shows the exact placement.

      A: There is another fuel line that follows the crossmember under the engine. It joins the “camaro” fuel line with a short rubber hose, and there is the usual hose to the fuel pump. This fuel line is held by the same clips as the brake line for the right front wheel. Mine’s a 1968, but they’re probably the same.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Can you install a new fuel line (replacement) with the body on the “frame?” I have worked on other model cars (thing GTO/Lemans) and you need to lift the body to get at the fuel lines. Since the firebird/camaro don’t have a full body frame, like the A-bodies, can I get the fuel line replaced from underneath?

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fuel Sending Unit

      I’m in need of a two tube fuel sending unit for my 1968 Firebird 400. Does anyone have a used unit for rebuild ? Suggestions for locating a unit ? What was the original part number ?

      A: The original part number for the 400 Firebird Fuel Sending Unit was…

      6427857 Gauge, Fuel Tank Unit (Sending Unit)

      1967-1968 F/8 w/A.C. and 1967-1968 F/8 “400”

      This is from a 1969 Pontiac Parts Book.

      Big diff. between this and those being sold as replacement units is the Vapor Return tube.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fuel Sending Unit (2-Line) for 1968 400

      I’m getting conflicting stories about a sending unit for my 1968 / 400 / TH400 / air car. Some say only 350 is available, some say only no a/c available, some say it don’t matter. Anyone had to replace one? What can I use for this combination?

      A: The difference is the ones with 400 engines and all a/c Birds used a 2 line sending unit, a 3/8 fuel line and a 1/4 return line. The only one available is a single line which they used on 326,350. Someone on the list said they where being reproduced, but I have not seen the name or any information on the vender.

      A: I am the one who said they are being reproduced and I have not had time to post all the info but here it is:

      Early Birds
      Toronto, Ontario
      p: 1.800.463.0546
      w: www.early-birds.com
      e: service@early-birds.com

      Catalog page 65 part number 6428846 1967, 1968, and 1969 dual line sending unit price is $175.00 plus our tax of 15% this price is Canadian. They do their shipping through UPS but expect it to take an extra day for a border crossing. Also the exchange rate right now is about 50 cents on the dollar so an American dollar is worth about $1.50 here so you can figure out about what it would cost.

      also just a note we had ours rebuilt by a gas tank repair shop for $181.00 they sandblasted our tank , flushed it, painted it and rebuilt our sending unit. So maybe you would want to check that out also

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gas Tank Paint

      I have the gas tank out of a 1969 Firebird which I’m replacing the rear end on. I want to clean it up nice before putting it back in. Question is, how is the gas tank supposed to be finished? Body color paint? Black paint? Undercoating?

      A: Original color was silver (galvanized). Eastwood company sells a close duplicate color.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gas Tank Sending Unit

      I’m replacing the gas tank on my 1968 Firebird 400 and have located a sending unit. However, I’m being asked to select between a one or two tube unit. Can anyone help me with this selection without first removing the gas tank ??? I’d like to have all my parts before I remove the tank.

      A: Look under your car near the front of the gas tank. If there are two lines coming from the take you need the two tube unit… If one line, the one tube.

      A: There is multiple ways you can tell which sending unit you have in the car right now. The fuel lines connect to the sending unit on the right side of the tank new the front of the tank. Now, look there and see if you one or two lines coming back from the engine compartment. Cars with two lines require the two line sending unit, (one line is fuel, the other is a vapor return. If you don’t want to crawl under the car, look under the hood a the fuel punp. If you see THREE connections on the pump, you need the two line sending unit. (Connection 1 to the carb, connection 2 is the fuel line from the tank, and connection 3 is the vapor return line to the tank). If you see two lines connected to the fuel pump, you need the one ine sending unit, (Connection 1 to the carb, connection 2 is the fuel line from the tank.)

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gas Tank Strap and Finish

      I dropped the tank off to get clear coated. I read they came un-painted. As well as straps. True?

      A: According to the “Camaro Restoration Guide, 1967-1969” by Jason Scott, the gas tank should be natural galvanized steel, while the straps ought to be either natural steel finish or gloss black. Given that the Camaro and Firebird share so many common parts, the fuel tanks and straps among those, it would be safe to assume the finish is the same. To cross reference, I checked my GTO restoration guide by Paul Zazarine, but it is silent on the subject of 68-72 fuel tanks.

      You can get some spray can galvanized coatings for the tank, or Eastwood’s own tank coating. Watch out for some of those galvanized look paints. One type I bought at the hardware store went on very dry and looked terrible. I ended up recoating with something else. For the straps, try base coating with POR15, then top coat with Eastwoods “Fresh Steel” paint, or a gloss black.

      It was my experience when reinstalling the fuel tank, that the new rubber strap insulators didn’t want to cooperate in staying in place while raising the tank and bolting it in. Try using an adhesive such a the 3M weatherstip cement (Gorilla Snot) to keep them in place.

      A: The reason the rubber on the straps doesnt work,is because is not the way the factory did it. The factory used a tar impregnated material just like thick tar paper. It would stay in place when the straps were tightened where as the rubber tends to shift around. Also the rubber may be a source of squeaks whereas the tar paper stops squeaks.

      The correct finish is bare steel straps and galvanized tank.However clear coat would be a way to keep lookin fresh. I removed my original 1968 tank for a clean up, and it was coated with a paraffin based under coating when new. It wiped clean with mineral spirits and looks like new. I also found some green crayon markings that the factory used for assembly identification.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gas Tank Venting for 1968

      Does anyone know how the gas tank vents on a 1968 convertible with a 350/auto??

      A: It used a vented cap.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gas Tank Venting for 1969

      I just picked up a 1969 Firebird w/ a 350 2bbl, 350 turbo Trans, PDB, PS, & A/C. This is the third 1969 I’ve owned but the first 350. I was removing the gas tank to replace the trunk and noticed that this tank doesn’t have the little vent tube that the 400s had just below the cap. Is the vent tube unique to the 400s or the H.O.s?

      A: I have an original 350 2-barrel car (convertible) and I just checked it today. There is a small tube which connects to the filler tube just below the cap. The tube is about 6-8 inches long, it turns around in a “U” and then connects to a fitting just above the filler tube on the body. Hope this helps.

      A: I have had a few 69s with and wthout the tank vent, checked my friends OHC-6, A/C car and it has one. So not just 400 cars got this I think its a production change early in the year but I believe that a/c cars got it (never say ALL) regardless of motor.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Lead Substitute

      On my 1968 Firebird 350, is lead substitute added to gas recommended?

      A: I add it to my 350 and use octane 92 gas. I do both to increase the octane levels the engine was originally designed to run on. This recommendation started when I started having acceleration and knocking problems when I finally had to switch to unleaded back in the mid 80s.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Octane Level

      What octane rating should I use in my Firebird? I’ve always been told to use the lowest octane fuel available – seems to work for me.

      A: The thing to do is to use the lowest octane possible that does not cause detonation (pinging). There are too many factors that control this some being distributor advance, compression ration, carbon build up in the combustion chamber, carburetor adjustment, plus a bunch more. Each car is different so you have to either start at the bottom and work your way up or start at the top and work your way down.

      Today’s cars have microphones attached to the blocks that listen for detonation and adjust retard accordingly via the computer. Our cars don’t so you need to use your ears.

      You certainly won’t hurt it by using 92 (or higher if available).

      A: You are on the right track, but it would make more sense to use the lowest octane fuel that doesn’t make your engine ping or knock. You will eventually break something if you used a lower octane fuel just because it was available.

      There is no hard and fast rule saying that you must run a certain octane fuel in your 1st gen car. You must experiment and see how it runs with what’s available. If it knocks with 85 octane, then try 87. If it then runs fine, stay with that grade fuel. Using a higher octane than necessary will not benefit you car, and will even raise it’s pollution output.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Premium Gas Usage

      I got to thinking about octane while I stood and watched the $$$ go by on the gas pump today. What determines the need for a higher octane? Is it the compression ratio? The HP? Torque?

      I was wondering if using premium fuel is necessary. Maybe someone has some knowledge on the subject. BTW, I have a 350 with a 4-bbl, and I have been running 92 octane in it ever since I’ve has the car. In its original 2-bbl configuration, it is billed as a “regular gas” engine.

      A: Compression ratio determines the need for octane

      John Sawruk spoke on this at the POCI nationals. He qualified all the Pontiac V-8’s as a Pontiac engineer. He said the pre 71 (10:1 compression range) engines were qualified on 100 research octane. Sunoco Ultra 94 (pump rating) is about 98 research. He felt 94 plus a can of booster was about right. He said to be careful about preignition that you can’t even hear. He also strongly recommend changing all hoses that come in contact with todays gas and/or vapors.

      A: The engines that required Premium fuel in 1968 must have the hights octane put in plus an octane booster. These engines included the HO, Sprint, and Ram Air engines.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Removing Fuel Sending Unit

      I have a leak around where the fuel lines come out from the fuel tank. How do I remove the fuel tank sending unit? Do I need a special tool?

      A: You don’t really need a special tool to remove the sending unit lock-ring. First clean off the area around the unit, (I like to use a shop vac and a brush). The ring should have 3 or 4 tabs; using a small brass drift, tap the ring around to the un-lock position. I try to use the tabs evenly so as not to distort any 1 tab. When removing the s/u, do so carefully, the filter element is usually fragile with age. Under the sending unit flange is an o-ring. Make sure this isn’t damaged and clean prior to installation. In my case I had a gauge problem and decided to repair and replace the s/u. I couldn’t find a new or rebuilt anywhere. So, disassebled it and carefully cleaned it and it has worked fine ever since.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Not sure if my previous posted (don’t see it; thought it sent) so apologize if it a redundancy; The Manual shows that the installation process of a new sending unit will require solder. Just wanted to see if that was an actual need process? I am not familiar with soldering so if I can avoid it, I will. Thanks for your reply and assistance on this.

    • In the Service Manual I received from the Gentlemen I purchased my ’68 350 Coupe 2bbl it states that one of the connectors (looks like upper fuel tank filler neck to the filler neck retainer?) has to be soldered as well as requiring tool J 22554 for removal/ install of the sending unit. I looked online and You Tube to see if I could find this process being done to no avail. I am not familiar at all with soldering at all so if this is not a “requirement” for proper install of the new sending unit I’d like to avoid it. As far as that part goes, I see that it is a sending unit removal tool but it seems like that can be carefully done with a couple of “taps” evenly around the tabs. Anyone done this or as a group, feel soldering and “finding” the tool is a requirement for proper install. Thanks for your feedback.
      *Attached is the diagram from the manual.

      Attachment  SolderTankInstall.docx

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Interior - Clocks (7)

      Q: Clock Mechanism Cleaning (Do-it-yourself)

      How did you disassemble it? Mine is from a 69. The contacts are black and no current can get through…. Can’t get the time adjustment out of the front. Was just about to send mine out to be converted but would LOVE to have the original tick-tick back. Where did you actually lube the mechanism?

      A: I just took mine apart and yes there are points in there! I was able to take the adjustment knob off by just unscrewing it CCW. The clock mechanism comes off by taking the nut that holds the +12 tab in place. This is all done after removing the two side screws that hold the “cup” in place, of course.

      Now I need to get something small enough to clean the points. Maybe I can cut an emery board thin enough to fit through the little access hole.

      Not sure where to actually lube the mechanism. I know that normally clocks don’t like oils and goop since dirt and stuff will build up quicker and muck them up.

      A: I dressed the points on mine by removing the works from the “can” and physically taking the back of the clockworks off. There are three screws that hold it on to three stanchions. Be careful, the winder mechanism (a white-colored spring that has half of the points on it) is spring-loaded, and came unwound on me.

      The “Plus 12V” side of the coil was broken off. I unwrapped one wrap of the coil to get enough to solder to.

      I dressed the points with a points file; an emery board will work, too.

      I lubed all the bearing points (wherever a gear shaft touched a plate). I used the straw from a WD40 can and dipped it in a little pool of WD40. Just enough wicked up into the straw that I could place a dot of it right where I wanted it.

      I rewound the spring (took three wraps) and put the back on again.

      Since my last post, I sanded and painted the inside of the “can” that holds the works. I used VW baby blue from Plastikote. I sprayed the housing with black eggshell finish lacquer. All I need now is the base — I’m working on it.

      Checked on it this morning before work — it’s still ticking!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Interior - Clocks
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Clock Repairing

      Does anyone know of somone who repairs these clocks? Mine lights up but the hands don’t turn.

      A: I have the original clock in my 1969, I just took it out and opened it up. I redressed the contact points and oiled the gears. I powered it up and it worked. It wasn’t that complicated.

      A: There are a few companies listed in Vintage Parts 411, Year One, and Hemmings Motor News catalogs that repair these.

      A: Go to the electronics store and get a product called ‘Blast Off’ to clean the clock mechanism. Then use a tiny bit of very light oil, run the thing hooked to the battery for several days before reinstalling. If this doesn’t work consider having it converted to a quartz.

      A: I sent mine out to a company to have rebuild it using a quarz movement. It’s kept perfect time now for 3 years and you can’t tell any difference. Junk the mechcanical movement – they’re not worth the money. I spent about $100.

      A: ISI, Instrument Services, Inc. 11765 Main Street Rosco, Illinois 61073

      “We do them all, all makes and Models – 1920’s to 1980’s”

      Instruments also, speedometer, tachometers, gauges, clusters…

      1-800-558-2674

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Interior - Clocks
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Clock Wiring

      I have a clock i bought off of EBAY a while back and it seems to be in great shape. I wanted to hook it up to a battery, but didnt know the best way to do this. It has the complete wire harness 3 wires —

      1. black
      2. grey – two connectors on the end
      3. reddish orange – two connectors on the end

      How did you hook yours up?? This is a very solid clock and I do not want to hook it up wrong and break it.

      A: Orange wire is +12V. Black wire (has a clip on the end) is ground. Gray wire is for the light. At the clock end, the gray wire is attached to a quick-disconnnect.The other half of the disconnect is attached to a blue wire, which is attached to the bulb socket.

      A: Black is ground, Orange is constant +12V, and Grey is connected to the light on your console shifter.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Interior - Clocks
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Clocks for 1967 and 1968

      Anyone have information about original clocks, how they were mounted and correct colors.

      A: I’m trying to sort out some particulars regarding the Clock option for 1967 and 1968 Firebird. Here’s what I know (or suspect) so far…

      1967 Firebird Gauges, Tach & Clock had a ‘black’ face; 1968 Firebird Gauges, Tach & Clock had a ‘steel blue’ face

      1967, 1968 Clocks mounted to the console used a special adaptor base and a mounting bracket for under the console.

      1967,1968 Clocks mounted to the floor used only a bracket which was mounted under the carpet.

      The 1968 Service Manual does not show the adaptor base for console mount.

      I’ve had an NOS Clock w/black face and orange hr/min hands with a white sec. hand.

      I’ve had an NOS Clock w/steel blue face and white hr/min hands with an orange sec. hand.

      Can anyone with documented factory original equipment verify the above information?

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Interior - Clocks
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Clocks for 1969

      My PHS documentation shows the Electric Clock option ordered (Sales code 474), but I have no clock. BTW the car is a 1969 Firebird Conv. with a 350. Is the code 474 clock the one that went in the rectangle shaped pod to the right of the two main pods or was it the one in the left main pod? For reference, no gauge package was ordered except for the hood mounted tach, which is still there.

      A: For 1969 Firebirds, the clock went into the upper right rectangular pod.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Interior - Clocks
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Console Clock Color

      What color were teh console clock case?

      A: The consol clocks were all black.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Interior - Clocks
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Console Clock Mounting

      I just bought a console clock for my Firebird but do not know where to mount it. Does anyone have the dimensions where to mount it?

      A: If you turn over your console you will see the plastic already has holes in it where the screws go.

      A: By George there are some nice holes cast on the bottom side of the console with some nice re-enforcement where the clock goes. Those engeeneers think of everything.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Category: Interior - Clocks
      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Interior - Consoles and Components (18)

      Q: Console Differences

      What were the differences between the consoles for the first generation Firebird.

      A: Hey folks, the 1967 console had a top with a finish called “camera-case grain”, and was satin black in finish. In 1968 and 1969, they added a metal applique with the burled walnut finish, matching door and rear cover, and eliminated the rear ashtray and light. The main console structure and the chrome rails were the same for all 3 years of Firebirds and also for the 1967 camaros. If you unbolt the walnut applique from a 68-69 console, you’ll be looking at a 1967 console with holes drilled for the studs on the applique. The appliques were different for standard and automatic equipped cars.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Console Removal

      Hey all, my 68’s carpet is trashed and I am going to replace it. Can anyone offer a step by step removal of the console for me?? I can’t find anything in my manuals other than “Remove the console.” How do you take the “T” Handle off? How does the plate that covers the gear indicator “P R N D L” come off? Where are the bolts that fasten it to the hump? Any and all help would be greatly appreciated!!

      A: I just went through the same process. Here are the steps I followed:

      1. Remove the black plastic button by pulling up. It just snaps in.

      2. Inside the T-handle there is a set screw on the right side that holds it to the vertical shaft. Loosen the screw and remove the T-handle.

      3. The plate that holds the selector indicator snaps onto the console. Use a thin blade screwdriver to pop it off.

      4. The console is secured by small screws on each side of the front of the console and by two larger screws that secure it to the floor. One of these larger screws is inside of the console bin on the bottom and the other is located under the rear cover of the console. Remove the sheet metal screws of the cover and remove it and you will see the larger screw.

      A: You’ll need to remove the shift plate (the thing that has PRNDL) so the console can slide over. Depending on which one you have, the shift plate is held in place by either 4 chrome screws or hidden clips. The screws will be obvious (4 through the top). If you don’t see any screws, then it is held in place by clips that are cast into the plate and snap into the shifter base. To remove just gently pry up the shift plate until the clips release.

      The console attaches to the floor with two small screws (one on each side) on the sides at the front , with a bolt in the glove box, and a bolt under the rear trim (the corner piece behind the glove box.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Console Usage Firebird vs. Camaro

      I know this is a pretty wide question but can any one give me the rundown on consoles (particularly manual trans) usage in the 1967, 1968, and 1969 firebirds (particularly 69’s). Are they the same as a Camaro ? Can you use a Camaro one ? I ask because I’m sure a Camaro one is easier/cheaper to find.A friend told me they are the same exept for the Pontiac has the woodgrain overlay.I know, I know, how can I suggest such blasphemy!

      A: Only the 1967 Camaro console is the same as the “Standard” console in the 67-69 Firebird. The shift plate insert can be changed to install either an automatic or standard transmission.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Custom Walnut Knobs for 1968

      Do you know if the walnut shift knob was an option installed at the factory, or the dealer. There is a lady I work with, who owns a 1968 OHC 6, 4spd, that she has owned since 72, and it has the walnut shift knob. One thing I noticed though, is it has what looks like the GTO “crest” on it. Were all the walnut knobs like this?

      A: The Walnut Shifter Knob was a Factory (or Dealer) option in 1968. Only the GTO had the unique ‘GTO CREST” Walnut Knob. All others including Firebird used the “PONTIAC MOTOR DIVISION” w/shift Pattern Design. I’ve heard from several who claim their car originally came (from the Dealer) with the GTO Knob. I guess anything is possible. Could be, the dealer had only those in stock and stuck them on a few cars to dress them up to attract customers (as was done with wheels, stripes, chrome exhaust extensions, etc.). By the way, only the GTO Walnut Knob has been ‘correctly’ reproduced. The repro for the “PMD” Knob is a cheap version that has an incorrect adhesive lucite medallion (no detail) and an incorrectly formed knob. Figure around $75 and up for a correct original used/NOS “PMD” knob.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Custom Walnut Shift Knob for 1968 / 1969

      Does your shift knob have a crest on it? I am having a hard time finding a reproduction one that looks correct.

      A: For those who are interested, I’ve posted (2) pictures on the “Generation-1” WebSite that show the difference between the Original and Repro Shifter Knob (984700….’68 F, P 4-Spd Custom Walnut Shifter Knob) (9794300..1969 All 4-Spd Custom Walnut Shifter Knob) *** http://members.aol.com/Framair/TechTips.html ***

      A: The below Web Site address shows (2) Pictures of the 1968-1969 Custom Walnut Shifter Knob.. (1) is an original, the other a repro. (Note the difference in size, detail). This was the original Factory/Dealer Option for all Pontiacs however, there WAS a unique one for the GTO (used from ’65 – ’68) that had a ‘GTO’ Crest in the back ground and was a somewhat smaller profile knob.

      http://members.aol.com/Framair/TechTips.html

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dual-Gate Shifter Installation for Automatic

      I want to put a Dual-Gate Shifter in my Firebird. Does anyone have any tips or recommendations?

      A: I recently did a dual-gate installation on my 68. I talked with someone several times about the details of making this installation work who installed a GTO console and shifter, and I looked for a long time at other ways to get the GTO shifter into the Bird. I finally used a Hurst dual-gate shifter out of a 442. It is the exact same size and form as the shifter out of the Firebirds — even the mounting holes matched. The console fits smoothly over the shifter. Its not quite as “beefy” as the GTO model shifter, but I don’t think I will ever break it. The 442 model has a “bent” stick, where the GTO model is straight. The bent stick puts the stick a little closer to the driver, plus I like the looks better. The 442 shifter also has a little more positive locking system when using the manual side.

      Since the GTO shifter plate was smaller than the Bird’s, it didn’t cover the hole in the console. I cut out the middle of the Firebird shifter bezel and “transplanted” the GTO shifter plate into the hole using JB weld. I made a custom woodgrain insert out of a piece of walnut veneer to fit the new piece; it’s sexy!

      If you’ve never used a dual-gate, it has two slots for the shifter — a “hers” side, which works like a normal shifter, and a “his” side, which shifts the gears manually. It gives you the ability to manually work up through the gears and back down on an automatic without worrying about missing a gear or hitting reverse.

      BTW, a 1968 Bird that won best of show at last year’s T/A Nationals had a 442 dual-gate installed.

      A: know a couple guys were interested in pics of my dual gate shifter installation using a 442 shifter. I borrowed a digital camera, so here they are. There’s also some pics of the GTO dual gate shifter I have, as well as a pic of GTOKens dual gate install of a GTO shifter.

      GTO Dual Gate and Bracket:

      Description

      442 Dual Gate and Plate

      Description

      Standard and Dual Gate Plates:

      Description

      Modified Dual Gate Plate – Front:

      Description

      Modified Dual Gate Plate – Back:

      Description

      Dual Gate in Console – Top:

      Description

      Dual Gate in Console – Side:

      Description

      A: that looks great how did you modify the shifter plate.

      A: The pic of the back of the plate shows how I fit the smaller GTO bezel into the larger Firebird one. I marked the ‘Bird plate with the GTO outline,

      took a Dremel with a cutting wheel and cut a hole to fit. Then I ground the lip off the GTO plate and used JB Weld to hold it in the Firebird shell. I added a couple of gussets to beef it up.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Firebird Walnut Shifter Knob for 1968

      What is the correct Walnut Shift Knob for a 1968?

      A: Thanks for your insight on the Walnut Shift Knobs. In addition to the numbers your shared, I found others….

      984700 4spd- all 1968 (per 1968 Accsry Book)
      984848 3spd- all ’66-1969
      984989 M.T. 1967 Firebird
      9794300 4spd- all 1969

      I’ve seen photos & cars showing the 1969 Style on a 4spd ‘Bird and I’ve also known of one individual who has the ‘GTO’ Crest Knob on a 1968 4spd that he claims is how he got it from original owner. What I’d like to verify are part numbers from other year Part Books against the above numbers.

      From the 1968 Full-Line Accessory Booklet:

      Custom Gearshift Knob (524)
      Walnut appearing…for 3 or 4 spd…
      Has shift position indicated on 4 spd knob.
      Has Pontiac “Vee” Crest on 3 spd knob.
      Available all models… (factory/dealer)

      I find it difficult to believe that the Factory and/or Marketing would have designated the “GTO” Knob for a Firebird. Certainly the Dealer would have/could have installed anything the owner wanted or, whatever they happened to have in-stock at the time. Problem is, finding actual evidence (photos) from 1968 showing the 1969 Style 4spd knob on a Firebird. Personally, I think this knob (“Pontiac Motor Division” w/pattern) is what the factory would have installed on the 4spd Firebird. But then, nothing is certain especially without sufficient evidence. I have no doubt that variations in usage occurred during 1967-1969. Perhaps the 1969 Style Knob was factory only and/or it only came out later in the 1968 model year.

      Anyhow, thanks for the info and if you find other evidence, please let me know.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hurst Shifter for 1969

      How do I identify a Hurst shifter on my 1969?

      A: Here are some clues. The original 1969 was a Hurst Competition Plus, and said so on the body of the shifter. The chrome handle is rounded except for a flat spot on either side where the name Hurst is stamped, and the handle slips into the top of the shifter arm. It’s held in place by a couple spring clips, removed by slipping two feeler blades down the sides to release the springs and pulling the handle upwards. Under the car, the shifter has molded rubber where each of the rods connects to the levers. Aftermarket Hurst shifter do not have the molded rubber, just a thin separate bushing of nylon or steel, and the handles (usually flat) bolt onto the shifter assembly.

      The only numbers here on the 2 shifters in my hand are date codes and a patent number.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hurst Shifter Problem

      And I thought that I was the only one having problems getting a Hurst shifter to fit. I had 3 similar problems putting a Hurst Competition Plus in my 1968 4 speed with console

      A: If you use an original Competition Plus shifter you wont have any problems with console. The only functional difference between the aftermarket Competition Plus and PMD model was the linkage rods used rubber bushings and were smaller diameter than the over counter ones. An upgrade kit is available from Hurst to change the linkage to the later style and steel bushings. You will get more vibrations thru the shifter than with stock linkage but its a trade off for tighter shifter feel and control. Every magazine test of that era raved about the Pontiacs choice to use Hurst as standard equipment, which is one reason they sold so many performance models compared to other GM lines. I used to love to pick on the early Chevelle SS396s as they were guaranteed to hang up between 2nd and 3rd with the POS Muncie shifter.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hurst Shifters

      I was wondering if anyone out there has replaced their click-clack console in a 1967 with something else. I am converting my car from a ST300 to a four-speed, and will be using a Hurst shifter. I was thinking of trying to find a shift boot that will fit in the opening, but wanted to see if anyone else has any ideas.

      A: 1968 and later Firebirds came standard with Hurst shifters. This would be more correct in apperance that the aftermarket Hurst shifters. The factory shifter came with a round stick that was locked into the shifter body Replacement Hurst shifters have a flat, bolt-on stick. You can convert the 1967 automatic console very easily, just take out the auto. shift plate and replace with the 1967 4 speed shifter plate, which is avaliable repro. DO NOT use the orginal 1967 4 speed shifter. Bad news is the 1968-1969 shifter hits the front of 1967 console with this combo. I used a 1967 4 speed console in my 1968 with correct 1968 shifter and found this out. easy fix was to leave the console loose and live with it. You might consider using a 1968-1969 4 speed console. I saw one that the burled elm was shot so the owner removed the veneer and painted it semi gloss black. To tell you the truth it didnt look too bad that way. Then you wouldnt have a mismatch or wood trim 1967 vs 1968-1969.

      A: I did this conversion many years ago, using stock parts. The 67 console is the same, in either manual or automatic applications. They use a seperate bezel which is specific to the transmission type. Replace your auto trans. bezel with a stick shift unit, and get the stock boot and retainer plate. The transmission I used had a Hurst Competition Plus shifter, useable with or without a console. There were no fit issues regarding the console.

      Hurst makes another shifter, the “Street Super Shifter”, which uses straight rods and does not fit any console. And of course, there is the Indy shifter. I don’t know if that shifter will fit a console, but may prefer to use a stock shifter instead. Maybe.

      As for boots… You can use any boot you like, since they are nearly entirely covered by the shifter plate. And the boot size isn’t hindered by the console or plate either. If you happen to have a badly butchered trans tunnel, as many of our veteran cars do, get any aftermarket boot that will cover the hole. Otherwise, the stock boot will work with the Hurst shifter.

      I hope that this helps.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Optional Instrument Cluster Console

      Besides the 1967 article I ran across, I have not seen an optional instrument console cluster. Was this only offered in 1967 or in the other years? If this was offered as an option for Firebirds, what sales code did it have in each year? I have seen the dash Rally Gauge Cluster and have the sales codes for it but do not have the information for the console style.

      A: What you are seeing is an early production photo. The Firebirds never could be ordered with the console gauge package. However, their cousin the camero could. The console gauges were necessary on the cameros because the factory tachometer on a camero was in the dash cluster next to the speedo. As we all know, Pontiac choose to put the tach on the hood to allow plenty of space in the right speedo cluster pod for the other gauges.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: PMD Walnut Shifter Knobs

      What is the correct Pontiac Motor Division walnut shifter knob style?

      A: Use the following link for a photo of an Installation Drawing for the Walnut Shifter Knobs for 3 and 4 spd M/T Pontiac’s:

      Description

      These are the “PMD” style knobs:

      • 3spd – “PONTIAC MOTOR DIVISION” w/Red Crest (pt. # 9794301)

      • 4spd – “PONTIAC MOTOR DIVISION” w/shft.ptrn. (pt. # 9794300)

      Note the application (“1968 w/M/T Floor Shift”) Also note the date on the drawing (1-23-67)

      There have been reports of the earlier (’66-’67) “GTO CREST” Knob being used on the ’67/’68 Firebirds. This may have happened as the result of Dealer Stock but I doubt that any 1968 Firebirds came from the factory with a “GTO CREST” 4spd Knob.

      Also note, the 1968 Accsry. Book notes that the Custom GearShift Knob (code 524) was used in (2) different styles (3 and 4 spd). 3spd used the “Pontiac Vee Crest” 4spd used the “Shift Position” (pattern).

      In 1967 this knob was described as having (2) applications: 3 and 4 spd with “Ebony appearing Pontiac Crest and shift pattern”

      In ’66 this knob was described as being available for only the GTO with the 4spd trans.

      If you have any comments or corrections, please forward them.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • The 1967 – 1968 Shifter Knob Ball, Black 4 Speed, has the smaller 5/16 Inch Thread size (attached picture). White was used for light colored seats. Black used for dark colored seats.

      Attachment

    • Assuming manual 4-speed ball shifter knob.

      Were you able to decipher the build sheets? It is very unlikely ordered from the factory. The broadcast sheets may/may not shed some light on it. Pictures?

      The 1967 – 1968 Shifter Knob Ball, White 4 Speed, has the smaller 5/16 Inch Thread size (attached picture). White was used for light colored seats. Black used for dark colored seats.

      I believe the 1968 GTO used a 3/8 thread size.

      Additional info:
      https://firstgenfirebird.org/forums/ubbthreads.php?ubb=showflat&Number=321829&Searchpage=2&Main=39188&Words=Shifter+knob&Search=true#Post321829

      Attachment

    • I bought a 68 Firebird in 2002. The car was never restored and it’s a true numbers matching car with 2 build sheets found and registration cards from the original owner.

      The car had the GTO shifter knob on top of the Hurst shifter. I thought it was a mistake but read somewhere the knobs may have been used in Firebirds.

      Is there any information to back this up?

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Removing the Shift Knob on a 1969 3-Speed

      How do you remove the shift knob on a 1969 3 speed?

      I need to pull the console pannel so that I can do some refurbishing and I can’t figure out how to pull the knob off. I tried to spin it but it won’t budge and I don’t want to bust it. It has the push button with the bird in the middle.

      A: To remove the shifter knob, first remove the push button (use a rag to protect it and and plyers to pull it); under the knob, around the shaft is a small snap ring, use expanding snap ring plyers. After you remove the snap ring, the knob should come off.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Shift Knobs for 1968

      Do you know why some 68’s got a black shift knob, and others white?

      A: I’m not aware of any ’68’s that had the white 4spd knob installed from the factory unless this was an early production ‘carry-over’ situation (using 1967 stock). I’ve seen some pretty early ’68’s with the Black Knob; never a white one though.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Shifter for 1969

      What is the correct shifter for a 69′ 350/350 with console? If it is the type with the push button,is the black center knob supposed to stick up past the brown outside? if so how much? Any help is appreciated

      A: Yes, brown wood grain knob with a black push button. The button has the bird emblem on the end. Yes, the button is supposed to stick up above the knob when released, about 1/4 inch.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Shifter Hole Template for 4-speed for 1968

      I want to convert my column shift 4-speed to a floor shift. Does anyone have a template where I need to locate this?

      A: For those of you that are interested, I’ve completed the template for 4 speed shifter mounting hole:

      Actual Size Template:

      Description

      Instructions:

      1.) You will need to remove the seam sealer along the top of the tranny tunnel, (just underneath the dashboard). The sheetmetal edge is used as a reference point. All “Y” coordinates are located from that line. There is also a second line drawn on the template that aligns with the edge of a rolled crease in the tranny tunnel. Due to the soft radius of that crease, it would be a less accurate point of reference. CAUTION: I would check both reference lines to make sure that they line up within reason. GM may have not cared about the edge of the sheetmetal that I used as a reference point. I have no way of knowing. If the edge and crease look to be in alignment, then there is a higher likelihood that the reference points are good to use as standards.

      2.) You will need to draw a centerline down the middle of your tunnel. All “X” coordinates are referenced from there. The centerline is not easy to determine due to the soft radius of the tunnel sides. I found it best to locate the center of the tunnel in about 10 different locations and then draw a straight line down the center of the dots. I found that all of the dots I made were within 1/16″” of the line I drew, so I felt that accuracy was pretty good.

      3.) When drawing and cutting the hole, keep in mind that GM did a very very sloppy job of cutting the hole. It looked like it was cut with a torch. My template provides a nice smooth hole pattern. If you cut it and it looks sloppy, you are still probably better than GM. If you want to duplicate the GM factory look, cut the hole about 3/16″ smaller all the way around and then melt the edges slightly with a torch in a bunch of spots at random. It will look like melted candle wax on the edges.

      4.) After you have cut the hole, then align the bezel for the rubber shifting boot with the shifter hole. I would use the bezel to locate the screw holes for the bezel and boot, not the template (although the template is very close to being right on).

      5.) For those of you who will wonder if the template is correct, the shifter hole is not in the center of the tunnel. It is in fact offset to the left. It makes sense when you remember that the shifter is mounted on the side of the tranny.

      6.) Last but not least, please keep in mind that I’ve done the best I can to produce an accurate template. Still, I’m certain that it has some error to it. Judging from the hole that GM cut in my car, I don’t think the error is worth worrying about.

      Good luck and may the Sawzall gods be with you!!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: T-Handle Shifters

      Did TH400 trannies ever come with T-handle shifters in any Firebirds?

      A: Yes, the 1967 400/400 has a T handle for the automatic. As far as I know the handles were the same for all 1967 automatics ( T handle with the “button” above/inside the T).

      In 1968 they went to a T handle with the “button” that sort-off wraps around the top and sides for the automatic.

      In 1969 the THM-equipped went to the new simulated walnut knob round knob with the button on top (Knob shaped like the new real walnut knob available in the manual floor shift) and a T-handle ONLY for the 2-speed automatic. Keep in mind this was a new shifter for the automatics, with the ability to speed-shift without skipping up past the next gear. Sort of a poor-man’s Dual-Gate. Just lean the knob to your right, and when you push it to the next gear, it stops in a detent at the next position.

      The differences were in the linkage mechanism and not in the handles (for the different types of automatics). All years had the early “bird” emblem in the pushbutton style.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Woodgrain Console Covering for 1968 and 1969

      Is there any company reproducing the correct style woodgrain material for the 1968 and 1969 consoles? All I have seen so far is a cheap rip off; can’t anyone realize that people are willing to pay for an exact reproduction.

      A: Regarding the recent discussion on the Woodgrain Material used on the ’68/1969 Firebird Console, Dash Trim, Radio Face, AshTray…..

      The ‘hobby’ is definitely in need of some correct reproductions here. Yes, there are repro’s out there in the form of ‘contact paper’ to actual die-cut pieces. The obvious problem is the attention to detail. Correct graining/texture is important (I say.. if you’re going to do it, do it right). The forming around edges and within recessed areas is important. The integrity and longevity of the adhesive is very important. In the case of the Console and Dash Trim, the ‘contact paper’ was bonded to thin sheets of metal. This metal backing is also a good candidate for correct reproduction since it too does not wear too well after 30+ years. Based on some of the repro pieces I’ve seen out there, it seems to me that many companies have offered the cheapest form of a ‘quick-fix’ which may be ‘ok’ to some who just want an ‘ok’ appearance. If someone goes to the trouble of preparing Die-Cutting Tools, obtaining correct material and using some sort of forming process, why would they not pay attention to detail and avoid obvious mistakes ? Because not everyone is that picky (they think) and why put alot into something when you can keep costs down and still make a tidy profit for these ‘Best We Can Do Parts’ ? The big difference between 1968 and 1999 is technology. Yes, things are basically more costly today than they were then but thanks to advances in technology, we now have the capability to duplicate an old process much more accurately (and many times even cheaper). I’d agree with Gary here; the key element here is obtaining the correct ’embossed’ material for appearance, grain, texture and wear. Once this source is found, the next steps are relatively easy. Dies must be formed and a process defined for fitting the woodgrain onto the thin metal parts. If someone comes up with a source for the material, I can approach several shops I work with regularly about the die work and forming process. If all we wanted here was a new looking woodgrain, we could simply go down to the local Home Depot and buy a roll of contact paper; so why spend money on cheap repro parts ? Do it right and the price will be justified.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Interior - Dash and Instruments (41)

      Q: 350 with Hood Tach for 1969

      What were the restrictions on ordering the hood tach in 69. I can’t find any reference to this at all in any of my literature. So, were they offered on the entire line of Firebirds, or could you only get them on 400s and 350 HOs. Were they included in a package or were they an orderable line item. Any info will help.

      A: According to my order sheet:

      UPC Code = U85
      COL = 471
      “Tachometer, Hood Mounted – N.A. w/322”
      322 = Trans Am Pkg.

      Looks like it could be had with anything but that Trans Am….seems odd.

      A: After I got your reply I looked in Thomas DeMauro’s “Firebird Decoding Guide 1967 – 1981” and found it immediately. He has it listed as UPC code UB5. Perhaps a misprint in either of the documents. Also he has no mention of the T/A restriction, but it makes sense considering the hood design.

      A: The above answer says the option was N/A for the T/A. Thats usually because that particular equipment was included the T/A package, in other words, when you ordered the T/A option, you got that equipment and didnt have to order it separately.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ashtray Replacement

      I am looking for a replacement ashtray for my 1968. Will the ones sold in the Ames Performance Engineering or Year One catalog be an exact replacement?

      A: One more thing – I checked the Year One catalog. Their ashtray has a note, ” Note: 1967-68 models were equipped with rear ashtrays with ribbed covers. The new part will fit correctly but does not have the ridges on the covers.”

      A: Just one more note – these ashtrays changed size in 68. The 1967 ones are noticeably larger than the 1968/1969 ones. I know this cuz the 1967 set I found in a junkyard don’t fit in my 1968 and 1969 bird.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Bird Emblem on Glove Box

      What determined if a 1968 got the bird on the glove box door? Mine has the bird glass, but not the glove box door.

      A: Good question. According to the option packages, the ‘Bird’ on the Glovebox was included with the Custom Trim option and ‘available’ ? on all Firebird models. I’m assuming that ‘available’ meant as part of the Custom Trim Option since there was no specific UPC Sales Code for ‘just’ the Glovebox Emblem. All 1967 Firebirds had this emblem and I’ve seen many Standard Trim 1968 Firebirds with this emblem (early builds). Could be that a few early ’68’s had this emblem installed. So far, no definite ‘rule’ on why some Standard Trim cars got it though. As for the ‘Bird’ Glass, this one is still a mystery since no factory documentation has surfaced explaining the criteria for the ‘Bird’ Glass. We have proven that it was not directly linked to Custom Trim, Conv, “400’s”, Power Windows, Tinted Glass, A/C, etc. It does seem to only apply to early build ’68s though the cut-off date has not yet been established.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Burlwood Dash for 1969

      Question on dash and console burlwood: Would the console be burlwood and dash not, or would they both be the same i.e both burl or both black.

      A: OK guys, the Burlwood trim is used on all consoles in 1968 and 1969, and all 68 dash center plates, and on the 1969 Custom trimmed dash ONLY. That means if your 1969 car came with Standard trim and a console, the console is burlwood, but the dash is not. The 1969 sales brochure referred to the dash as “camera-case grain”, and is black within the chromed finish border, and matches the interior color outside the border. The consoles you may have seen with a black grained finish are from 1967 Firebirds or Camaros, and if you take the burlwood applique off you console, you will see what that looks like. In 1967, the dash center plate had a straight grained wood-like finish, no wood on the console.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Cigarette Lighter Removal

      For a 1968 ‘Bird, how do you remove the cigar(ette) lighter? I can get my hand up there (barely) but can’t figure out how to get it out. Is it clipped in or does it screw in? The wire won’t come off either. Something so simple and it has to give me a hard time.

      A: Remove the wire (it just snaps on) and unscrew the housing from the backside.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I have a 69 Firebird and need to replace the cigarette lighter, you cannot just simply remove the wire and unscrew it, there is another small cylinder?r attached to it that does not allow you to unscrew the housing. Any tips short of removing the dashboard to get to it?

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Clearing a Foggy Lense

      What do you reccommend using to clear up the plastic lens to the gauges? I took mine off and what a difference. I’m almost tempted to leave it off because it looks so much better.

      A: Since they are available you could replace them… OR… I had really foggy gauges on my ’63 Grand Prix,so here’s what I did:

      Get some very fine grit sandpaper – like 1500-2000 grit, the higher the better. Use some warm soapy water on the paper and sand the lenses lightly. They will look really bad, but here’s the catch. You’ll also need some plastic polish or lense polish – Mother’s makes some I believe- I got it at Auto Zone. Once you’ve sanded them lightly, use the polish. It will make them clear like new again. It worked REALLY well on my grand prix, and since I could not find replacements anywhere I was grateful!! I repeated this procedure a few times on each lens and they turned out great.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Convertible Top Switch for 1968

      Was the original switch all black or was the switch chrome. I’ve seen both types.

      68_TopSwitchChrome
      68_TopSwitchBlack

      A: Mines original and chrome as I have had the car since it was new.

      A: While your working on it, did the factory do a real sloppy job cutting out the hole for it on yours?

      68_TopSwitchSideView

      A: Yes, mine is sort of sloppy. Is their suppose to be a bezel of some sort on the outside? Mine does not have one and the looking at the diagram I do not see one.

      A: No bezel, just looks like the one above.

      A: I’ve burned through 4-5 switches through the years. I used to put the top up and down a lot when it was a daily driver. There are threads here where owners have put relays in the circuit to dampen the high current that burns the switch points.

      A: I’ve only seen the black switch being reproduced. Is there a source for the chrome switch? I’ve seen a few Nos on ebay . I currently have a black switch.

      A: Performance Years part number RFI242

      A: Mine is black (early 68) and it is original. I have also had mine since it was new and know I have never replaced switch. Purchased new January 1968. Never a problem with the top motor or switch.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Does anyone have a photo of where the convertible top switch is located on a 1968 Firebird. My car came to me with a aftermarket switch that is held with Velcro. I also have an aftermarket gauge cluster on the dash.

      Thanks
      Ray

    • Mine is also black and the original. Maybe it depended on which factory your car was built out of? Mine was Van Nuys, CA

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dash Paint for 1968

      Hi folks – In the process of rebuilding my 1968 dash w/ new wiring and prepping for paint. I have two questions, hopefully someone can answer.

      The metal dash is currently black, though the interior is brown. This car has been repainted by the original owner. Was the dash painted to match the interior, or was it painted the color of the car, such as the old Mercedes and Jaguars were done?

      A: The instrument panel was painted according to the interior color for 1968 Firebirds. You will want to look on your body tag for the appropriate color from the information below.

      Upper Instrument Panel – (0 degrees Gloss)
      __________________________________
      Velvet Black: 253-272-259-269-260-275-262-273
      Aleutian Blue: 250-255
      Laguna Turquoise: 261-256
      Burgundy: 252-258
      (Note: 251-257 are missing from chart above along with the April Gold row. I am assuming it should be April Gold since every number in the color bracket is missing from the chart.)

      Interior – (30 degrees Gloss):
      _______________________
      Starlight Black: 253-272-259-269-260-275-262-273
      Aleutian Blue: 250-255
      Laguna Turquoise: 261-256
      April Gold: 251-257
      Regimental Red: 252-258

      Source: Pontiac Service Craftsman News, No. 1 – 1968, pg. 8.

      I have the company paint codes on this chart if you need them for mixing. One of these days I will get it up on the web so the whole chart is available instead of small portions.

      I finally have these codes availabe as an Acrobat PDF file at:


      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
      • Any good paint shop using codes above and knowldege about automotive paint. Obviously not a big box store.

        If stuck where to go, a trusted local body shop will also be able to direct you to a source.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dash Panel Replacement

      How hard is it to replace the dashboard? Does it involve welding and if so how hard is it? How much would the labor probably cost? Is it Possible to remove the rust and repaint the section while still on the car? I plan on doing this when I replace the windshield glass(soon) and any tips are appreciated.

      A: I’ve done this a couple of times and as far as panel replacement goes, it’s about as easy as it gets (none of the seams show)…. if the windshield AND front clip are off. I just replaced the dash panel on my 69. I already had the windshield out but not the front clip. What I did there was to pull the steering column, remove the subframe bolts, unbolt the fenders at the top and bottom, and loosen the exhaust pipes (either front or back will work), unbolt the brake lines from the subframe (not the master cylinder), and loosen the rubber fuel and return line. This allowed me to slide the front clip away from the body about 3-4 inches while leaving all the heater hoses, A/C hoses, and brake lines in place and expose the dash panel seams.

      On the inside, you have to remove the dash pad and cut the dash panel loose from the dash at the top edge, under the pad. On the firewall side, drill out the spot and tack welds. You also have a tack weld on the front columns.

      The old dash panel will come right off now. Now is the time to assess the damage that was under to dash panel and repair as needed. Be sure to transfer you VIN number plate to the new panel

      To re-install, I used some caulk where the original foam seal was and sheet metal screws to fasten it down. Once the caulk drys, I went back and tack welded the panel into place. Calk all the exposed seams and prime and paint. Re-assemble as required.

      A: Regarding rust repair under the windshield:

      I had a body shop weld a patch into one corner under my windshield. At the time I did not have access to a welder, but I removed the nearby fender to make room for the welding head. They did a nice job, but they thought that the region forward of the angled bend (where the windshield seals, near the VIN in my case) would be invisible and did not do as nice a finish in that region. I was in a hurry and did not ask them to repaint it, but if you look hard at the right angle you can tell there was a repair done in that tiny spot (nobody but a concourse judge would likely notice this). Nevertheless, I suggest you make sure they know that about one inch forward of that angle needs to be a clean finish as well.

      A: I’m on my third dash panel replacement so maybe I can help. Of all the panel replacements, this is one of the most simple if there isn’t too much underlying damage. To remove the old panel, you first have to either remove the front fenders or remove the bolts from the chassis, the four subframe bolts, remove the clamps holding the fuel and brake lines and remove the steering column. This will allow you to gently move the front clip approximately four inches forward and allow complete access to the dash panel.

      Next, drill out all the spot welds across the cowl and upper dash (or you can just cut it off above the dash), grind out the welds in the corner and cut the tab that are welded to the windshield pillar posts (cut them flush to the panel and leave them attached to the pillars to use later). Once completed, you can asses the damage and get back to use if you need more advice.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • New 68 owner and dash has a gallon of glass and bondo. Ground it out and looking for a replacement part. I see them from $45 – $130, but not very good photos and descriptions are all but non-existent. It’s a fair amount of work, I don’t want cheapo stamped tin, but I am not about to buy the more expensive one hoping it actually is better. What am I looking for in a good one? 20 gauge? Any suggestions where to buy?

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dash Panel Replacement

      My dash panel is rusted out where it meets the windshield. How do I replace this section of sheet metal.

      A: The dash panel replacement isn’t too bad if there isn’t too much rust. The old panel is spot welded under the dash pad and along the front under cowl. It’s also welded at the front corners and with a small weld on the “A” pillar.

      I usually start with a wire wheel or sand blaster under the cowl area to remove the excess rust. This will show you how much metal you’ll have to replace besides the dash panel.

      Assuming there is minimal rust through into the vent area below the dash pad, it’s pretty simple to install a new unit. If you haven’t already done so, you’ll need to either: remove the fenders or separate the front subframe and front clip to expose the area under the back of the fenders and, of course, remove the windshield. Once you do this you’ll see it’s pretty straight forward.

      After you’ve wire brushed the excess rust away: drill out the remaining spot welds in the cowl area, Grind out the brazed welds in the corners, Cut the welds loose from the “A” pillars, Drill out the spot welds under the dash pad (as an option, you can just cut along the top of the overlapped seam). Remember to remove your VIN number plate since it has to stay with the car.

      To install: Repair any hole under the dash panel in the cowl area, Prime and paint the new panel (optional) Pre-drill your spot weld holes, Reinstall your VIN plate, Use self tapping screws to temporarily secure the new panel and weld. Touch-up the burnt paint areas and caulk the cowl seam.

      You’ll have to drill new holes when you reinstall your bottom chrome and remember to caulk the hole to prevent them from leaking.

      As far as the order, I always do the areas that don’t show first like the floorboards, trunk, cowl, etc., then start work on the outside. This way I don’t cry too bad if I drop something and scratch the paint.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q:
      Dash Printed Circuit Board

      Does anyone know where I can get shematics for the Dash Printed Circuit Board for a 1969 ?

      A: You can order a wiring diagram from Classic Industries, or from most of the other resto catalogs. They run about $7.00 and are about 20 pages in length.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Dashpad Removal

      Hi folks – In the process of rebuilding my 1968 dash w/ new wiring and prepping for paint. I have two questions, hopefully someone can answer.

      The dash pad appears to be fixed with something other than the 8 screws I removed. I have take off the pillar molds but cant find anything holding it in place. Is there a fastener that I have overlooked?

      A: There is several nuts in the middle of the dash pad you have to remove too they are under the dash pad get to them by going in thur your radio hole and on the outside runners the are 2 push in studs one on each side that just push in with a spring clip sort of like the christmas tree fasteners we have today hope this helps

      A: When replacing the dashboard on a 1968 bird most suppliers will tell you that all you need to do to remove the old one is simply remove the screws attached around the dashboard. That is a bull answer. There are nuts attached on studs molded into the origial dashboard that need to be removed under the dash. You will need to take some assesories of before doing so.

      A: The attachment for dash pad at the lower ears is a spring steel clip and a peg that is attached to the pad.These are tough as hell to remove and not destroy the pad.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Fuel Gauge Problem

      I am having a Fuel guage problem. It always reads empty.

      A: You can test the guage by grounding the brown wire, it should go to empty. Do this by grounding the female portion of the connector located in your trunk.. (its the dark brown wire) You may also test the sending unit with a multimeter (Ohms) from the connector in the trunk… The connector, I believe, has a dark brown wire, and a tan wire. The tan being your license plate light, and the dark brown being the sending unit. Place the red on your multimeter to the brow wire (male connector) leading to your sending unit (not the female back to the guage) and the black wire of your multimeter to a good ground on the body. Bump the car a few times to see the Ohms go up and down. If the tank is full there should be around 90 Ohms. If it is empty it should only be around 1 if I remember (somebody correct me if I’m wrong)

      The sending unit float over time turns to “rock” but I don’t think it will effect its function. What I had seen on my sending unit, was that the coils inside were broken causing the unit to fail most of the time. (Many years of service eats up these coils which look like a bic pen spring around a thin piece of cardboard)

      The sending unit turns out to be an expensive item. I had spent 70 + on my replacement, though it was for a 350 without the vapor return. This was a good deal, but the alternative would be to have Year One rebuild the faulty unit for over $100. The ohms should range around 90-100 when the tank is full. So with your sending unit acting as a “Variable Resistor”, and the guage acts as an Ohms meter (the higher the Ohms the fuller the tank.)

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I’m having problems with my 68,The fuel gauge never went above a half a tank when full of gas, I replaced the sending unit making sure the ground was attached with the tank empty I checked the gauge and it was reading 1/2 below the empty mark?? I then poured in about 6 gallons of gas and checked the gauge again it was now reading 1/4 below empty, Any thoughts?
      Thanks

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gas Gauge Problem

      ok guys I have one I can’t figure out my gas gauge reads empty when I still have about 8 gallons left in the tank but my main gripe is when I turn on my lights the gas gauge swings over to empty even with a full tank but when I turn the lights off it will swing back to where it is suppose to be at can anyone help me on this thanks

      A: Check the ground wire and connection. One end is connected at the sender(on tank) which you will have to drop tank to see it. The other is near the filler neck attached to the trunk floor pan with a large sheetmetal screw. Bad ground will give the sender all kinda different readings. You can test it to see if the sender or wire or gauge is the problem. Use a VOM to check for voltage and disconnect the sender(positive) wire and ground it. You should see it move the gauge full scale. When that circuit is open it will swing the gauge the other way. Set the VOM on to Ohm scale to read the sender. GM used 0-99 Ohm for the sender values. Half way should mean 1/2 tank.

      A: The sending unit is comprised of rheostat and wiper arm. The rheostat is a resistive wire wound along a shaft in a progressive spacing. The wiper arm, which is attached to the float, moves along the windings and changes the resistance value of the rheostat. What tends to happen over the years is the windings become worn, then thin and begin to move on the shaft. This effect turns into dead spots along the rheostat where the wiper should make contact. These dead spots will result in a no reading on the fuel gauge or a non uniform reading. Eventually, the windings break and no fuel gauge operation is the result.

      Recommendation. You’re going to have to pull the sending unit anyway to inspect it. Replace it with a new unit. Not worth trying to fix the old one.

      A: Sounds like a bad dash ground. Save some time and just rig a jumper from a good ground then, reach under the dash and touch the metal housing of your gauge cluster. If the ground was bad, you’ll notice your problems will go away. Once you’ve confirmed that the ground IS t

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Need some help, I replaced my sending unit the gauge only should a half of a tank before I replaced the sending unit when it was full, So I replaced the sending unit after draining the tank and installed the new unit I had checked the gauge knowing that the tank was empty The gauge was reading a half below the empty mark, I then poured in 6 gallons and it now reads a 1/4 below empty, I have checked and the ground is hooked up, Any thoughts?
      THanks

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gauge Conversion 1967 to 1968

      Did the 1967 firebird ever come with a 160 speedo gauge cluster like the 1968? I know that the 1968’s have two chrome rings on the bezels, while the 67’s had only one. I would appreciate any leads.

      A: No, the 1967 Firebirds only came with 120 MPH speedos. Even the optional Rally Gauge Cluster was 120 MPH.

      A: The 1967 used 120 speedo 68-9 used 160. The 1967 and 1968 bezels were identical, both had 2 chrome rings. The bezel lens was different, 1967 was deeper than 1968 on the cone height. Currently only 1967 is avaliable in reproduction. In answer to other 68 gauge setup comversion I am currently restoring the speedo and gauge sets to look like new for 68-9. As for the conversion I do have the parts and heres what it takes. Dash harness with fuse box, gauge setup with speedo (speedo is different than idiot lights),engine harness, forward lamp harness, both of these are unique to V-8 or OHC-6. Alot of work but worth it. You cannot cut corners on this conversion and get everything to work.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Gauge Conversion for 1967-1968

      I’m getting ready to convert from idiot lights to a gauge cluster on my 1968 conv. I’ve been to the FAQs and there’s a lot of good related stuff, but I do not see a wiring diagram for the gauges. Did I miss it?

      A: Chip as you can see theres lots of discusion on gauge conversions. 1967 and 8 pose a big problem in that the pinout is different on the dash connector. However regardless of what you hear,its not as simple as changing a few pins around. Sure you can get the oil and water to read, but to get the ammeter to work you will have to rework the harnesses all the way to the voltage regulator. This will mean a new forward lamp harness as well as a dash harness. There are extra wires in the rally gauge setup that the idiot light ones dont have. You could redo the lamp harness and add wiring to the bulkhead connector , change the pinout and add wiring to the dash harness. OR buy the correct harness(s). Any way you go its not as easy as changing speedo /dash assembly. 69s are a different story… bout time they wised up.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Glove Box Door

      Any idea if the 1967/1968 Glove Box Door is the same as the 1969

      A: Well, externally they are the same but on the inside they are different. The latch is different as well. The 1967 (probably 1968 also) uses a little hook for the latch and the 1969 uses a cylinder with a small latch that pops in and out. Also the 1969 has 3 circles (like cup bases) on the inside where the 1967 has 2.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Glovebox Door Problem

      I can not get my glovebox door open. It appears the lock is jammed but I can not pry it open and do not want to scrape or break it. Anyone have a suggestion?

      A: Forget metal objects use ID cards, anything laminated or flexible plastic (look in your wallet). My glove box does this all the time.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hood Tach Accuracy

      I think the hood tachs look great, but are they very factional? Can you read them clearly. Could you very a shift point from 5200 rpm to 5000 rpm? Can you read them that accurately?

      A: I’m going to create some more waves and say that I never liked the hood tach for “function ability”. It is not that accurate, hard to read(at least for my poor eyes) and doesn’t have dampener circuitry that most good tachs have.

      I have always used the Sun Super tach which I upgraded to a Sun Super tach II in mid 70s when they came out with that. I mount it on the steering column with a band clamp wrapped with rubber tubing to prevent scratching of the steering column. For those of you that are worried about originality the tach has a plug at back to disconnect the wiring harness, which can be tucked up under the dash,while showing the car.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hood Tach Information

      What is the story on the hood tach.

      A: Just a little background….

      The Hood Tach was not exclusively a Dealer Installed Option; Most were factory installed though, I’m sure many dealers did install them as have many enthusiasts over the years. The factory would not have cut a hole just anywhere; there was likely a punch operation for factory hood tachs (an assembly line does not allow for a cutting operation). Sure, you can install one wherever it looks good but if you want it to be correct; get the dim’s from a factory hood with the tach. Also, the factory and dealers used rivets in addition to the nuts (for security).

      A: The repor Hood Tach has gone through many revisions since it first came out in the mid-80’s. The most significant thing about the one you can buy today is it’s functionality. It is much better than the original GM Hood Tach (better circuits, lighting) however, as good as it works and looks, it has one obvious thing that distiniguishes it from an original GM tach; the face is plastic and has a sort of ‘fuzzy’ look to it. Not really a big deal unless you’re picky (like me). Those who must have ‘perfection’ can send theirs off (or buy one) from a number of Tach Restorers around the country who offer silk-screening in addition to rebuilding. I’m sure others on the list can elaborate more on the repro tach since all I’ve ever used is original, used, rebuilt or NOS Tachs.

      A: The Hood Tach first became available sometime in Feb/Mar of 1967 on all Pontiac Models. The first style was the “TALL” style which refers to the height of the case. Also, the first style used only a single light bulb and there were variations with the face colors and redlines depending on carline and engine.

      1967 Firebird (and very early 1968 Firebirds) used the Tall Style. Face background was Black with Green characters while the GTO and Full-Size had Steel Blue Backgrounds with White characters. After supplies of the ‘Tall’ Style Hood Tach were exhausted, the 2nd style came into production. This was a ‘shorter’ case (by an inch or so) and now had (2) bulbs instead of the previous (1). This new style was released into production on April 20th 1967 (even though early 1968 Firebirds continued using the Tall Style). The face on this first ‘short’ style was of a circular pattern. On June 29th 1967, this face was changed to an ‘oval’ pattern.

      Face background was steel blue with white characters. The final major design change came with the 1969 model. The face background was changed to black with white characters. The Hood Tach lasted through ’72 production. From 1967 – ’72, there were many Redline variations for different engines/models including the OHC-6 cars and Ram Air engines. The 1967 OHC-6 Firebird had a 6500 redline. This was later changed to 5500. RA II used the OHC-6 5500 redline. All other applications used a 5100 redline. The rarest would be the ‘supposed’ Hood Tach released for the RAV engine. Back in the 80’s, “Purely PMD” from NM built a 1969 Judge with a complete RAV engine and found what was described as the only known RAV Hood Tach that had a lights for ‘shifting’ built into the face.

      Anyhow, there’s my ‘long-winded’ reply on Hood Tachs. As with any information, there will always be exceptions to the rule and other variations. I welcome any constructive criticism provided there is some inkling of supporting evidence. What I’ve shared is from various PMD Parts Books, GTO/Firebird restoration guides, articles, and Service Bulletins.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • anyone know of a place to purchase just the guts of the 1968 hood tach? Mine is corroded and not functioning, and would rather use the existing shell as I would rather not try to match existing paint. Thanks for any info

    • did automatic cars opt for hood tachs or were these simply accepted for manual transmission cars. I have a 1967 Firebird 400 Convertible Automatic, build in the 3rd week of May, 67. Thoughts?

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hood Tach Placement

      I just bought an aftermarket hood tach for my Firebird. Now, where to I put it?

      A: I’ll give it a try… here goes….All references are as though you are sitting in the drivers seat; therefore “right” means closest to the center of the hood, “front” means closest to the bumper, etc. Aussies, you’re on your own!

      1. From the left rear corner of the tach to the left edge of the hood is 4.75″

      2. From the left rear corner of the tach to the rear edge of the hood is 3.75″

      3. From the right rear corner of the tach to the rear edge of the hood is 2 13/16″ (two and thirteen sixteenths inches)

      Ulitmately, I would fudge these numbers a little bit in order to get the tach face square to the axis of the car.

      Hole size required in the hood is 3.75″. It is not drilled directly in the middle of the tach space, but is offset in one direction to accommodate the tach housing and wires below. I had a paper detailing this hole as well, but I’ve misplaced it. You’re on your own with that. If I find it, I’ll let the group know…

      A: Some good videos:

      Firebird 400 hood-tach install

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hood Tach Placement Variation

      Did the hood tachs get place in the same spot over the years.

      A: There is a difference between the hole size, mounting holes and location between 1967 (tall style) and ’68-1969 (short style).

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Hood Tach Servicing

      Does anyone know a good place I can send my hood tach to be rebuilt?

      A: Randy Watson
      The Tach Shop
      2201 Surry Rd
      Jeffersonville, IN 47130
      812-284-2555
      ….Rebuilds, Restores Hood Tachs.
      *Not sure if he uses silk screening or decals for the Face.

      “The Tach Man”
      (South Carolina)
      www.tachman.com
      *Aprox. $175 to rebuild/restore including silk screening
      800-327-8716

      NOTE: The repro Hood Tach that is currently on the market has been ‘refined’ over the years but still differs (slightly) in appearance to an original. This difference is in the face (plastic, fuzzy) and the Face Trim. The functionality and lighting is superior to an original Tach. Both Randy Watson and “The Tach Man” can rebuild/restore to appear original but use updated components/circuitry.

      A: I agree, Randy is very good at what he does and very knowledgeable about Tach Restoration techniques. I had a price schedule of his services somewhere but I can’t seem to locate it at the moment. From what I remember, these are the basic elements to a restoration……

      – CASE… (repair or replace case, face trim, base)

      – FACE… (restore, silkscreen, replace faded, rusted faces)
      *NOTE: there were some repro ‘adhesive’ faces being sold awhile back. Certainly a cheap alternative to silk screening though, not as ‘concours’.

      – CIRCUITS… (repair or replace Printed Circuit and/or components of it)
      *By the way, for all you elect. types, these pieces can be purchased cheap at most Electronic supply shops.

      – HEAD (or movement)… This is the where the ‘needle’ resides and may require repair or recalibration.

      – WIRING… The correct ‘rubber’ Bulb Sockets were also used on certain year tailights. Duplicating a correct harness is not that difficult and much cheaper than buying a repro harness (if you have the correct sockets, connectors which are all easy to find in a junk yard).

      Now, if all you want is a Hood Tach and you don’t want to spend over $200, you might be better off with a repro Hood Tach. Internals, Lighting is better than originals and the only major difference is that repro’s have a somewhat ‘translucent’ Plastic Face (letters/numbers seem ‘fuzzy’). Those who must have 100% original/correct appreance.. contact Randy.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • I have a 67 firebird 400 car, and I have found the latch, but 2 of the springs are broke. I am need of these springs and not sure where to locate them or if I can even find them.

    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Identifying the Correct Dash Cluster

      I am at a loss as to what is the proper gauge cluster for my bird. The build sheet for my car calls for a clock (which is nonexsisteant) and gauges. I have a console and an automatic TH400, what could be the configuration. The build sheet is for my car, I checked the numbers.There is a large hole in the front of the console, I am guessing that this was for the clock. any information would be greatly appreciated.

      A: The only “hole” should be some what oblong with two mounting holes, a large hole indicates butchering by previous owner. The rally guages are available at major parts shows [67/68 differ] not cheap! The wire harness would show additional connectors designating that car had ralleys. The under dash 3 guage was available at that time, but is even more rare.

      A: The optional clock was mounted on the console, ahead of the shifter. If you’ve got a hole, that’s it. I’d start looking around for one! They aren’t too hard to find, but they can be pricey if you want one that actually works. You might try checking out Hemmings, or the Ames Performance website. Good luck!

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ignition Lock Cylinder Removal

      I have a 1967 convertable and I am having a hard time removing the ignition switch. I have the cover unscrewed, but it doesn’t fit over the face of the key insert… is there a special way to get it off???

      A: It is really easy to get out if you have a key. All you have to do is put in the old key put a needle into the pinhole and turn counter clockwise after you are in the aux position.

      I did not have this luxery since the previous owner lost the keys in the 7+ years the car was out of service.

      There is a very easy way of removing the cylinder without the key, but it can cost you up to $25 to replace the tumbler. I am always a paranoid skitz on this one, but here goes….

      (Everyone has my permission to mame or kill anyone who tries to steal a bird or any classic GM with this information:)

      Take a “TiN” coated drill bit (Titanium Nitrate) about 3/8″ diameter in your trusty hand drill. Coat the tip of it with lard, I used crisco shortening. You can use regular or butter flavored, which ever you prefer. Solid bacon grease works too, but I don’t need the colesterol. The crisco will keep the bit cool as it cuts through the steel face plate on the tumbler, it acts as a cooling/cutting oil.

      Next I will tell you where you have to drill. On the face of the tumbler with the key slot vertical you want to place the bit around the outer perimeter. You should drill at (10 “O”Clock) not in the morning or night you see < --- art art art, but if you were to look at the cylinder as if it were the face of a clock you would put that bit right through 9:48.

      Do not let the bit walk even a 1/16th of an inch out of the edge in fact stay in a 16th from the edge. Try your best. It might even be beneficial to measure offset an use a pilot bit to start the hole before you use the 3/8″ bit. Now make sure you stay straight!!! Make sure that you are drilling purpendicular with the face of the tumbler!!! Other wise you get to buy a new ignition switch.. Got it..?

      Only go in about 3/4 inch, and that might even be too much. I would keep looking into your bore with a pen light moving only an 1/8″ at a time till you see a spring popping out. Only the face of the switch is steel. The rest of it is soft aluminum, so watch you feed rate when your drilling.

      Now there’s more. Tap the tumbler with a screw driver handle to nock out the locking mechanism. What you have just done, is removed the back of the locking block and the spring behind it. The switch will now operate as if it had a key in it. Put a standard tip screw driver into the slot and turn it to the left till it is in aux position. This is easy cause it will go no further to the left. Insert a paper clip into the little hole. You are now going to push a spring loaded button inside the hole with the paperclip while you turn the tumbler to the left with your standard tip screwdriver till it popps out like magic.

      The replacement tumbler will go back in with the key inserted into it, and the top of the briggs and stratton facing 7:00 or so. Then you just turn it to the right and it clicks into place. Make sure you clean any runaway lard off though before you put it back in.

      Mine only took me all of 15 min to remove and replace. Not really, I am lying because I drilled through the tumbler into the switch. Had I not done that though I would have had the new tumbler back in, in 15 min, and that’s no lie.

      Good luck, and don’t forget to have your door lock tumblers brought into the locksmith to match your ignition key. Other wise you will be carying 3,4, or maybe even 5 keys to your Firebird. 2 is enough in my opinion. Costed me 18 bucks to have the glovebox, and trunk keys matched, as well as the door tumblers matched to the ignition key.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Ignition Switch Removal 1967 / 1968

      Somebody know how to get the switch and lock cylinder apart without to much trouble? I guess the small hole close to the key slot is involved in some way.

      A: Can’t remember the exact way but I have done it.straighten out a paper clip and stick it in the hole,insert the key,turn it and pull.play around with this and you will get it out.with any luck somebody else on the list will have the exact way to do it,good luck.

      A: He has it right. Insert the paper clip or simular stiff wire into the hole. This will align a series of keys or pins that will allow you to then seperate rotate and unscrew the bezel which holds the switch to the dash. You may have to jiggle this around a bit to get full enagement, but it does indeed work.

      This applies only to 1967-1968 cars, as the 1969 has the switch in the steering column.

      A: Turn it counterclockwise to “accessory”. Insert something in the hole (I use my torch tip cleaners). Turn farther counterclockwise and presto!

      A: Hey you guys are forgetting the most important thing… turn the switch to the accessory position before you push the paper clip in and use the key to pull the cylinder out. Re insert the cylinder without the paper clip in the same accessory position using key to then turn to off position. Gary

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Inaccurate Rallye Gauges

      I have recently added a set of temp/volt/oil gauges to my 1969 350 and am now curious as to what normal operating temperatures I should be shooting for (now that I can actually see a numerical reading rather than just an idiot light). I keep getting readings that are all over the place. Is this indicating something is wrong with my cooling system or my new gauges?

      A: Good luck on your gauge conversion, hope you changed the sending units to the GM ones. 69 are easier than 1967 or 1968 no need to redo your complete wiring harness like the earlier years,they finally wised up. Given the inaccuracies of stock senders, youll be lucky to tell what the temp is. I recently took about 6 GM oil pressure senders and pressurized all to the same. None were even close to each other. Static pressure readings are even way off. This was pretty much the norm for factory gauges. If you want to accurately read temp then use a good mechanical gauge along with your factory one and compare. If the two are close then remove the mechanical one. If not then note the differences and use the true readings of the mechanical one . You can test the operation of your thermostat by heating in a pan of water along with an accurate thermometer it should fully open within a few degrees of advertised or spec ed. Your car should run a few degrees within the thermostat with everything in proper order. Check past posts for cooling tips

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Key Replacement

      I have lost the keys to my Firebird. Is there anyway to replace these or do I need to replace all my locks?

      A: If you have the billing history for your car from PHS it lists the four digit ignition key and trunk key codes. Take this to a GM dealer and they can look up the code in the key code book and get the 6 cuts and punch a key with the curtis keycutter they all have.

      If you don’t have the codes the four digit codes are stamped on the original door lock and trunk lock cylinders also. The door matches the ignition (unless someone changed something) and the trunk matches the glove box.

      Their are six cuts on the keys with 5 possibilties for each. Example, my 1967 bird ignition and doors are 7W05, in key cuts this is 532242. The trunk and glove box was 2X52, which is 431132. The cuts are from the head to tip holding the head to the right. The dealers use a punch or knotching tool which you set the dials to those numbers in that order. They did not use the grinders you see in hardware stores, it is a simple hand tool.

      The correct key blanks for 1967 are A blank for door and ignition and B blank for trunk and glove box, the ignition has a octagon head with the Briggs and Stratton logo and the trunk is more of a rounded scallopped head with the logo. Dealers also have the tumblers to code any of the cylinders also.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 1
      Thumbs Down Icon 0
    • Ron Newhook says:
      Your comment is awaiting moderation. This is a preview; your comment will be visible after it has been approved.
      I have an after market ignition key for my 69 Firebird. How can I determine the correct key blank code? Thanks for your help.
    • Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Nervous Speedo Needle

      Does anyone of you guys know how to fix my nervous speedo dial? Driving slow or fast doesn’t matter I can’t get a steady reading.

      A: When I was into Corvairs, they would sometimes have the nervous speedo problem too. On the ‘vair the cable went to the front left wheel. If it would jam or stick in any way, the cable would “load up” and then release. On them, the best thing to do was lube with the cable with graphite. We found you could pull the cable out of the casing by disconnecting it at one end. Then we would coat the cable and sleeve with graphite and reinstall it. The sleeve would guide you, so it wasn’t that bad of a job. I don’t know if that will work on the birds, but the cause is probably the same. You could just replace it, but it might be worth the .99 of graphite and a little time to give it a try.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Printed Circuit Boards Repair

      Is there a way to repair the printed circuit board? I don’t think it would hold up to any type of heat and it is just a small break in one of the circuits causing the malfunction….

      A: I have successfully repaired several printed circuit boards by soldering a small piece of bare stranded copper wire across the break. Use very small rosin core solder and a small tip on a low wattage iron. Remember to clean and tin the wire ends and foil before mating together.

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Rallye Gauge Conversion

      I was able to acquire a rallye guage package recently. I would like to install it, but am unaware to the mods to the connector that will be necesary. Any help with the new/old pinout on the connector would be great!

      A: There are several posts on the 67-8 gauge conversions and one thing keeps coming up. You cannot just change the pin out and get these to work. At best youll have is water temp and oil pressure( see my latest post regarding gauge inaccuracies)but nothing for the ammeter. This circuit is completely different from the beginning to end.To successfully change out the idiot lights you need the following. Main wiring harness under the dash with bulkhead connector forward lamp harness that mates to main harness at bulkhead sending units for oil and water specific for gauges of that era

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Replace an Original Dash Cluster

      Does anyone know if it is possible to replace an original Dash cluster with telltale lamps with a Ralley Gauge cluster without big changes in the wiring of the dash. I hope somebody has some info on this.

      A: Information can be found in the Interior F.A.Q.s – Dash: https://FirstGenFirebird.org/f-a-q/interior/dash/

      Any proposed updates, changes, pictures, and/or corrections, please use our comment section below (may need to click on permalink to access comments feature). Information is subject to change and offered as is without any warranties or guarantees. Please review our Term's Of Use for more information.

      [php function=1]

      Did you find this FAQ helpful
      Thumbs Up Icon 0
      Thumbs Down Icon 0

      Leave a Reply

      Your email address will not be published. Required fields are marked *

      Q: Safequard Speedo (442) with Rally Gauges (444)

      I have a line on a speed warning set up for my Bird. Mine was missing when I got the car, and PHS listed it as being installed on my Bird. Needless to say, I’d like to have it back. I just recently installed rally gauge’s in my car, and the speed warning is standard style. I called a speedo shop ( in Hemmings ) and asked if I could “combine” the two unit’s into one. The gentleman said no problem, $65, an hour labor. It seems to me I only need to change the face of the speedo from non rally to rally style. Do you all agree ? Can this be done ? If not, then I’ll keep holding out for what I want. I remember asking about changing a `67 to a `68 face, and I was told no way. But these are both `68 speedo’s.

      A: If I recall correctly (memory check needed), in the years of o